UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
SPQUAERIS PENINSULAM AMOENAS
32
VERITAS
LIBRARY
PLURIBUS UNUM
ΤΟΥΣ Ε ΟΕ
CIRCUMSPICE
ARTES
SCIENTIA
OF THE
L
Museum
QL
4
.528
r

ca
WHALING SCENE IN THE CALIFORNIA LAGOONS.
4
VARIN
Nirre "1.211
I lik,
THE AVEN
CILINLI
.
11,
1
“๑๒ ๒
MARINE MAMMALS
OF THE
CHARLES Melville
THE
87282
NORTH-WESTERN COAST OF NORTH AMERICA,
THE AMERICAN WHALE -FISHERY.
SCAMMON,
DESCRIBED AND ILLUSTRATED:
TOGETHER WITH AN ACCOUNT OF
BY
i, ilili II
CAPTAIN U. S. REVENUE MARINE.
SAN FRANCISCO:
JOHN H. CARMANY AND COMPANY.
NEW YORK: G. P. PUTNAM'S SONS.
1 8 7 4:
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year eighteen hundred and seventy-two,
By CHARLES M. SCAMMON,
In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington, D. C.
JOHN H. CARMANY & CO., PRINTERS,
409 Washington Street, San Francisco,
—
lich
THIS VOLUME
IS DEDICATED TO THE MEMORY OF
LOUIS AGASSIZ.
AS A HUMBLE TRIBUTE FROM THE AUTHOR.
CONTENTS.
PREFACE ..
PAGE
11
PART 1.-CETACEA.
INTRODUCTION.
CHAPTER I. THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE
II. THE FINBACK WHALE..
III. THE HUMPBACK WHALE.
IV. THE SHARP-HEADED FINNER WHALE.
V. THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
VI. THE RIGHT WHALE OF THE NORTH - WESTERN COAST.
VII. THE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE...
VIII. THE SPERM WHALE.
IX. THE DOLPHINS
Section 1. The Blackfish
II. The Orca, or Killer..
III. The Whitefish, or White Whale.
IV. The Bay Porpoise..
V. The Striped or Common Porpoise.
VI. Baird's Dolphin ....
VII. The Right Whale Porpoise
VIII. The Cowfish
IX. The Whiteheaded or Mottled Grampus
X. The Bottlenosed Grampus.
XI. The Panama Grampus..
XII. The Puget Sound Grampus.
XIII. The San Diego Bay Grampus.
XIV. The Squareheaded Grampus
XV. The Brownsided Dolphin of Santa Barbara Channel
XVI. The Narwhal..
17
20
34
38
49
52
66
70
74
85
85
88
93
95
98
99
101
101
103
103
104
105
105
106
106
107
PART II.-PINNIPEDIA.
INTRODUCTION
CHAPTER I. THE SEA ELEPHANT.
II. THE SEA LION.
III. THE BANDED SEAL.
IV. FUR SEALS
V. THE LEOPARD SEAL.
VI. THE SEA OTTER..
VII. THE WALRUS.
113
115
124
140
141
164
168
176
(71
8
CONTENTS.
PART III.—THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
CHAPTER I. ORIGIN AND ANCIENT MODE OF WHALE - FISHING
II. THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
III. SHIPS, OUTFITS, AND MANNER OF TAKING THE WHALE
IV. AMERICAN WHALING COMMERCE.
V. CALIFORNIA SHORE - WHALING..
VI. LIFE AND CHARACTERISTICS OF AMERICAN WHALEMEN
LAGOON - WHALING..
LAGOON - WHALING INCIDENTS
AGAIN TO THE NORTH, AND HOME
PAGE
185
202
216
240
247
252
259
265
272
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA OF THE NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN. By W. H. DALL....
DESCRIPTION OF A SKELETON OF THE Right WHALE.
GLOSSARY OF WORDS AND PHRASES USED BY WHALEMEN
LIST OF STORES AND OUTFITS
281
308
309
313
ILLUSTRATIONS.
47
48
48
PLATE I. FRONTISPIECE. - Whaling Scene in the California Lagoons.
II. The California Gray Whale, and the Finback Whale... between pages 24-25
III. Embryos of a California Gray Whale..
.. facing page
20
IV. Indian Whaling Implements...
facing page
28
V. California Grays among the Ice...
facing page
32
VI. Esquimaux Whaling Canoe and Whaling Implements
facing page
37
Outlines of a Northern Finback ....
37
VII. Humpback and Sharpheaded Finner Whales
between pages 40-41
VIII. Humpbacks Lobtailing, Bolting, Breaching, and Finning.
facing page
44
Outlines of a Humpback Whale..
47
Aleutian Islanders' Whale Harpoon.
Outlines of a Humpback, from above.
IX. Appearance of a Female Humpback Suckling her Young
facing page
X. Eye and Parasites of Baleen Whales....
facing page
56
Outline of Roys' "Bunchback".
56
XI. The Bowhead or Great Polar Whale.
between pages 52-53
Full-grown Baleen of Seven Species of Whales..
55
XII. Right Whale of the North-western Coast..
between pages 68-69
XIII. Sulphurbottom Whale
between pages 72–73
XIV. Sperm Whale.....
between pages 76–77
XV. Sperm Whale in Search of Food..
.. facing page
80
XVI. The Blackfish..
facing page
84
XVII. Orcas or Killers .
facing page
88
XVIII. White Whale, or Whitefish of the Whalers..
facing page
96
XIX. Baird's Dolphin, Common Porpoise, and Right Whale Porpoise.... facing page 100
Approximate Outlines of Cowfish, White - headed or Mottled Grampus, Bottle-
nosed Grampus, and Panama Grampus.
102
XX. Sea Elephant, and Sea Lion....
facing page
117
Club and Lance used in the capture of the Sea Elephant.
118
Male Sea Lion Sleeping, and Male Sea Lion Waking..
126
Appearance of a Male Sea Lion when Roaring, and Female Sea Lions, of St.
Paul's Island. ....
127
XXI. Banded Seal, and Fur Seal...
facing page 140
Full-aged Male Fur Seal, St. Paul's Island ..
143
Head of Female Fur Seal, from below, two-thirds natural size.
145
Head of Female Fur Seal, side view, two-thirds natural size...
147
Side view of Female Fur Seal, view of Female Fur Seal from below, and
attitudes of Fur Seals...
149
Seal Spear of the Makah Indians, Nee-ah Bay, W. T., 1866, and Spear Head,
full size, with line attached..
159
Moving attitude of a Leopard Seal, on shore.
164
MARINE MAMMALS.-2.
(9)
10
ILLUSTRATIONS.
164
175
177
205
225
PLATE XXII. Leopard Seal, and Sea Otter..
.. facing page
Aleutian Islanders' Sea Otter Canoe, or Baidarka, with Hunters engaged in
the chase ; Aleutian Islanders' Sea Otter Spear; and Spear Head, full size.
Walruses....
XXIII. A Whaling Scene of 1763...
.. facing page
facing page
XXIV. Implements belonging to a Whale-boat.
Pierce's Harpoon Bomb-lance Gun; Bomb-lance; and Diagram showing in-
side of Bomb-lance...
Mast - head Waif.....
Diagram showing the manner of Cutting-in the Bowhead and Right Whale...
Blubber-hook, and Fin-chain..
XXV. Implements used in Cutting-in a Whale.
Head-strap; Toggle; and Throat-chain Toggle.
Cutting-tackle toggled to the Blanket- piece .
Outline of a Sperm Whale, showing the manner of Cutting-in..
Mincing Knife
Blubber-fork; Stirring-pole; Skimmer; Bailer; and Fire-pike.
XXVI. A Northern Whaling Scene..
facing page
Whale-boat with Greener's Gun Mounted...
“ XXVII. Whaling Station at Carmel Bay,....
facing page
Skeleton of a Balæna mysticetus...
227
230
231
232
233
234
235
237
238
239
241
249
257
308
PREFACE.
Being on the coast of California in 1852, when the "gold-fever” raged, the
force of circumstances compelled me to take command of a brig, bound on a seal-
ing, sea - elephant, and whaling voyage, or abandon sea - life, at least temporarily.
The objects of our pursuit were found in great numbers, and the opportunities
for studying their habits were so good, that I became greatly interested in col-
lecting facts bearing upon the natural history of these animals. Reference to the
few books devoted to the subject soon convinced me that I was at work in a
department in which but little definite knowledge existed. This was true even of
the whales, the best known of this class; and I was soon led to believe that, by
diligent observation, I should be able to add materially to the scanty stock of infor-
mation existing in regard to the marine mammals of the Pacific Coast. I was the
more encouraged to pursue these investigations, because, among the great number
of intelligent men in command of whaling-ships, there was no one who had contrib-
uted anything of importance to the natural history of the Cetaceans; while it was
obvious that the opportunities offered for the study of their habits, to those prac-
tically engaged in the business of whaling, were greater than could possibly be
enjoyed by persons not thus employed.
The chief object in this work is to give as correct figures of the different
species of marine mammals, found on the Pacific Coast of North America, as could
be obtained from a careful study of them from life, and numerous measurements
after death, made whenever practicable. It is also my aim to give as full an
account of the habits of these animals as practicable, together with such facts in
reference to their geographical distribution as have come to my knowledge.
It is hardly necessary to say, that any person taking up the study of marine
mammals, and especially the Cetaceans, enters a difficult field of research, since the
( 11 )
12
PREFACE.
opportunities for observing the habits of these animals under favorable conditions
are but rare and brief. My own experience has proved that close observation for
months, and even years, may be required before a single new fact in regard to
their habits can be obtained. This has been particularly the case with the dol-
phins, while many of the characteristic actions of whales are so secretly performed
that years of ordinary observation may be insufficient for their discovery.
There is little difficulty in making satisfactory drawings of such smaller species
of marine mammals as can be taken upon the deck of a vessel, but it is extremely
difficult to delineate accurately the forms of the larger Cetaceans. When one of
these animals is first captured, but a small part of its colossal form can be seen,
as, usually, only a small portion of the middle section of the body is above the
water; and when the process of decomposition has caused the animal to rise, so
that the whole form is visible, it is swollen and quite distorted in shape. Again :
these animals change their appearance in the most remarkable manner with every
change of position, so that it is only from repeated measurements and sketches,
and as the result of many comparisons, that I have been able to produce satisfac-
tory illustrations of these monsters of the deep.
I take occasion here to acknowledge my indebtedness to Mr. Rey, of the firm
of Britton & Rey, lithographers, who laid aside his own business, as far as possible,
in order that he might give his personal attention to the execution of nearly all
the plates representing whales and seals. The remaining work of that description
was put into the hands of Mr. Steinegger, the junior partner of the firm; his
excellent sea and landscape backgrounds speak for themselves.
Plain and simple language has been used in description. Where whaling terms
have been employed, their definitions are indicated by reference marks, or may be
found in the glossary contained in the Appendix.
I desire to tender my sincere thanks to many personal friends and others, not
only for literary, but also for financial aid ; for, without the generous contributions
of gentlemen of the Pacific Coast, and San Francisco especially, this work could
not have made its appearance in its present form.
To Professor J. D. Whitney, State Geologist of California, I wish particularly
to acknowledge my indebtedness for his encouragement and untiring assistance in
preparing this volume for the press. My thanks are also due to Professor S. F.
--
PREFACE.
13
.
Baird, of the Smithsonian Institution ; Professor George Davidson, of the United
States Coast Survey ; Doctor W. 0. Ayres, of San Francisco ; Doctor Theodore Gill,
of Washington ; Mr. J. A. Allen, of Cambridge ; Mr. R. E. C. Stearns, of San Fran-
cisco; Mr. Albert Bierstadt, of Irvington, N. Y.; Mr. W. H. Dall, of the Smith-
sonian Institution ; and to Doctor George Hewston, of San Francisco, for special
assistance. Also, to Mr. F. C. Sanford, of Nantucket, Mass.; Messrs. Williams and
Chapel, of the firm of Williams, Havens & Co., New London, Conn.; and Dennis
Wood, Esq., of New Bedford, for valuable statistics relative to the whale-fishery.
It is with pleasure that I also mention the assistance I have received from
officers of the United States Revenue Marine, in making scientific collections for the
study of whales and seals, and in furnishing specimens for the National Museum at
Washington. I would particularly mention Lieutenants George W. Bailey, W. C.
Coulson, G. E. McConnell, and Engineers J. A. Doyle and H. Hassel.
The account of the American Whale-fishery has been compiled from the most
reliable sources within reach, and from the experience of many whalemen with
whom I was associated for several years, while in active service on the principal
whaling-grounds then frequented. I have also attempted to give a chronological
account of the rise, progress, and decline of our great national maritime enterprise,
the whale- fishery; and to make the picture complete, a few pages have been
devoted to a description of the every-day life of a whaleman, his characteristic
traits, and the incidents that make up the routine of a whaling - voyage.
Catalogue of the Cetacea” appended to this work has been drawn up
with great care by Mr. W. H. Dall, who has taken pains to do the work as thor-
oughly as circumstances would permit; and as I have assisted him with my per-
sonal knowledge of those species which are of rare occurrence on this coast, and
placed in his hands all my notes and collections, I trust that his paper will be
found of great assistance to the professional naturalist. As Mr. Dall remarks,
however, “Completeness is not claimed for this list. In fact, it can hardly be
attained for a considerable period, when the difficulties and expense connected with
these researches are appreciated.” Only two species of Cetaceans have been added
to the list of those mentioned as not being represented by "material sufficient to
indicate their zoological position;" and these were not known to Mr. Dall at the
time he was preparing his list.
The 56
14
PRE FACE.
The volume now presented to the public has been put together from materials
which have accumulated during many years. At sea, when not occupied with
official duties, amid calms and storms, I have devoted myself to its preparation ;
and it is hoped that the public may find in these results of prolonged labor some-
thing of the profit and pleasure with which the author has been rewarded while
occupied in their collection and elaboration.
CHARLES M. SCAMMON.
SAN FRANCISCO, May, 1874.
ᏢᎪᎡᎢ 1.
Ꮯ Ꭼ Ꭲ Ꭺ Ꮯ Ꭼ Ꭺ .
PART I.–CETACEA.
INTRODUCTION.
The order of Cetacea, as established by naturalists, includes all species of
mammalia which have been created for inhabiting the water only; and although
their forms bear a strong resemblance to those of the ordinary piscatory tribe, still
they are animals having warm blood, breathing by means of lungs, and frequently
coming to the surface of the water to respire. In nearly all Cetaceans, the nostrils
– termed spiracles or spout-holes—are situated on the top of the head. Through
these the thick vaporous breath is ejected into the atmosphere to various altitudes,
according to the nature of the animal in this particular respect; and through the
same orifices a fresh supply of air is received into its breathing system. Although
the Cetaceans are strictly regarded as mammals, they have no true feet; their pec-
torals being in the form of heavy, bony, and sinewy fins, while the posterior
extremity of the body terminates in a broad cartilaginous limb of semi-lunar shape,
frequently termed the caudal fin or tail, but known among whalemen as the
“flukes," the lobes of which extend horizontally.
The different species of Cetaceans are numerous; hence they have been divided
into groups, the most prominent of which are the Whalebone Whales, the Cachalots
or Sperm Whales, and the Dolphins. The group of Balenidæ, or Whalebone Whales,
embraces all those which are destitute of teeth when adult, and whose palate is
lined on each side with rows of horny plates, called whalebone or baleen, which
are fringed on their inner edges. This part of the animal's organization is pecul-
iarly adapted to the nature of its food, which consists of zoophytes, mollusks, crus-
taceans, and small fish. The group of Sperm Whales comprises those with inordi-
nately massive heads, whose upper jaw has only rudimentary teeth, or none at
all; whose lower jaw is narrow, rounded toward its anterior extremity, elongated
and filling the furrow in the upper one, and furnished on each side with a row
of heavy conical teeth, with which to procure and devour the enormous cuttle-fish
MARINE MAMMALS. - 3.
18
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
or squid upon which they prey. The group of Dolphins is made up of those com-
prised in the Linnæan genus Delphinus, and others, whose heads preserve the usual
proportion to the body, and whose upper and lower jaws are set with sharp and
usually conical teeth. They are the most active and rapacious of the whole order
of Cetaceans.
All Cetaceans produce their young in nearly the same manner as other mam-
mals. The male is commonly called a bull; the female a cow. The attitude of
the two sexes when having intercourse with each other has been differently repre-
sented by numerous observers. Some maintain that the male covers the female ;
while others are positive of their lying on their sides breast to breast, or assuming
a perpendicular position. From personal observation, however, we are justified in
stating that all are correct. In fact, it may readily be seen that, with their united
efforts, it is easy for the animals to sustain any desired position in their native
element, during the period of coition. The time of gestation is not known ; but
from our observations we believe it is never less than nine months, and that in ·
some species it extends to one year. The offspring of the female is called her
calf; she nourishes it with rich milk drawn from two teats which lie on each side
of her abdomen.
All Cetaceans are destitute of the hair or fur which protects the surface of
other marine mammals, and instead thereof the dermis is covered by a smooth and
transparent scarf-skin. Under the dermis is the thick layer of fat, or “blubber,"
which infolds the whole creature, whose flesh is dark and sinewy, resembling coarse
beef. The natural term of life in Cetaceans can only be approximately determined ;
it is probably from thirty to a hundred years. The new-born young are clothed
in fatless blubber with a thick dermis, and over all is a delicate cuticle. The calf,
or "cub,” follows the dam for several months—perhaps a year with some species —
and during that time draws its chief sustenance from the mother. As her charge
matures, its blubber thickens and becomes fat, the dermis becomes thinner but more
compact, and the cuticle strengthens and presents a lively glossiness.
Among the Balãnide, the baleen with its fringes grows rapidly, and hardens as
it matures. As old age comes on, the fringes to these horny plates become de-
cayed and broken, and in some instances the baleen falls out. The thick blubber,
once filled with oil, becomes thin and watery, and, for want of proper sustenance,
the animal yields to the course of Nature and dies. Among the Physeteridce, the
teeth of the young are sharp and perfect when first developed ; but they become
more or less broken and worn with age: as years advance, they either fall out or
are reduced to a level with the gums, and, like the Balænido, being deprived of the
INTRODUCTION.
19
natural means of obtaining food, the animals become emaciated, and at last expire.
The same may be said of the Delphinidæ or Dolphins.
All the Cetaceans propel themselves through the water by the action of their
pectorals and caudal fin, and the individual motions of the various species are simi-
lar. Usually a small portion of the animal is seen rippling along as it makes its
respiration, then, after a few moments, settling below the surface, it again appears
in the same manner. When descending to the depths below, it rises a little, as in
::
figure 1; then pitching headlong, "rounds out," as in figure 2; then "turning
flukes,” as in figure 3, disappears. Thus these animals wander through the track-
3
less waters in their migrations ; or, when roving about at leisure on their feeding or
breeding grounds, they are sometimes seen in various attitudes, which will be
mentioned hereafter.
CHAPTER 1.
THE
CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
RHACHIANECTES GLAUCU8, Cope.
(Plate ii, fig. 1.)
The California Gray is unlike other species of baleen whales in color, being
of a mottled gray, very light in some individuals, while others, both male and
female, are nearly black. The head and jaws are curved downward from near the
spiracles to the “nib-end,” or extremity of the snout, and the lateral form tapers
to a ponderous beak. Under the throat are two longitudinal folds, which are about
fifteen inches apart and six feet in length. The eye, the ball of which is at least
four inches in diameter, is situated about five inches above and six inches behind
the angle of the mouth. The ear, which appears externally like a mere slit in the
skin, two and one-half inches in length, is about eighteen inches behind the eye,
and a little above it. The length of the female is from forty to forty-four fect, *
the fully grown varying but little in size; its greatest circumference, twenty-eight
to thirty feet; its flukes, thirty inches in depth, and ten to twelve feet broad. It
has no dorsal fin. Its pectorals are about six and one-half feet in length, and three
feet in width, tapering from near the middle toward the ends, which are quite
pointed. Usually the limbs of the animal vary but little in proportion to its size.
The following measurements give the correct proportions of several males taken
in the Bay of Monterey, California, since 1865 :
SEX, MALE.
Ft. In.
42 00
21 00
6 06
Length..
Circumference at point of pectoral.
Length of pectorals..
Width of pectorals...
Nib-end to pectorals.
Pectorals to top of back...
Nib-end to corner of mouth...
2.10
11 00
4 06
7 00
Forty-four feet, however, would be regard-
ed as large, although some individuals have been
taken that were much larger, and yielding sixty
or seventy barrels of oil.


il
.rs
(!t
least
hehin!
it in the
sth. i
pot inn i
+
.
2,5 feet
Disse
- from t
ty-it tur foct,
!: , Weliyeishi
i:
Ich, I three
..; "., a? quite
vion to its size.
"iberal Nuis takea
3
i PSI(11.'
1. terey, Cali
1. To,
of a news of pecin.
21 00
premi's...
to of ack..
i tu Prof Dr ....
IP, wc-
i kenti
iad y ?
boerer, vould o
surge inl.vid Bar
1
Plate III.
1
--
2
3
v
-
C. Commun, de.
Fig. 1-2 EMBRYOS OF A CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE. Fig. 3 OUTLINE OF HEAD SHOWING SPOUTHOLE.


THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
21
Ft. In.
2 06
7 06
6 00
08
10 00
3 05
09
Corner of mouth to top of head.
Nib-end to eye.....
Spout-holes to nib-end....
Length of opening of spout-holes
Length of Aukes or tail....
Breadth of flukes or tail....
Thickness of each lobe of Aukes ...
From fork of Aukes to vent.....
From fork of flukes to genital slit
Length of longest baleen...
Width of longest baleen..
(Number of layers of baleen on each side of the mouth, 182.)
Longest fibres to fringe of baleen....
Average thickness of blubber....
Depth of small at junction of flukes....
Length of the fissure between the eyelids..
12 00
16 08
18
09
05
07
18
04
Four other individuals, ranging from thirty-five to forty feet, were measured,
the result of which showed corresponding proportions, or nearly so.
The animal has a succession of ridges, crosswise along the back, from opposite
the vent to the flukes. The coating of fat, or blubber, which possesses great solid-
ity and is exceedingly sinewy and tough, varies from six to ten inches in thickness,
and is of a reddish cast. The average yield of oil is twenty barrels. The baleen,
of which the longest portion is fourteen to sixteen inches, is of a light brown or
nearly white, the grain very coarse, and the hair or fringe on the bone is much
heavier and not so even as that of the Right Whale or Humpback. The male may
average thirty-five feet in length, but varies more in size than the female, and the
usual quantity of oil it produces may be reckoned at twenty-five barrels. Both
sexes are infested with parasitical crustaceans (Cyamus Scammoni), and a species of
barnacle (Cryptolepas rhachianecti), which collect chiefly upon the head and fins.*
* Following is W. H. Dall's description of furnished with a branchia at each side. This,
the Cyamus Scammoni, and of the Cryptolepas near its base, divides into two cylindrical fila-
At
rhachianecti (Proceedings Cal. Acad. Sci., Nov.
ments, spirally coiled from right to left.
the base of each branchia are two slender acces-
9th, 1872). Illustrations, figs. 1, 5, plate x.
sory filaments, not coiled, quite short, and situ-
Genus CYAMUS, Lam.
ated, one before and the other behind the base
Cyamus, Lam. Syst. An. 8. Vert., p. 166. of the main branchia. Second pair of hands,
Bate & Westwood, ii, p. 80.
kidney-shaped, with the carpal articulation half-
Larunda and Panope. Leach.
way between the distal and proximal ends, and
Cyamus Scammoni, n. sp. ☆ Body moder having two pointed tubercles on the inferior
ately depressed, of an egg-ovate form; segments edge, before the carpal joint. Third and fourth
slightly separated. Third and fourth segments segments somewhat punctate above; all the oth-
22
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
The California Gray Whale is only found in north latitudes, and its migrations
have never been known to extend lower than 20° north. It frequents the coast of
California from November to May. During these months the cows enter the lagoons
on the lower coast to bring forth their young,* while the males remain outside
ers smooth; the sixth and seventh slightly ser diameter of large specimen, 1.62 inch ; ditto of
rate on the upper anterior edge, and without orifice, 0.63 inch; transverse diameter of orifice,
ventral spines. Color, yellowish white. Lon. 0.58 inch ; lon. scuta, 0.17 inch ; lat. ditto, 0.08
0.70, lat. 0.39 in., of largest specimen.
inch; lon. terga, 0.07 inch; lat. ditto, 0.07 inch.
& Similar to the $ in all respects, excepting Color of membranes, when living, sulphur yel-
in being a little more slender, and in wanting low; hood, extremely protrusile.
the accessory appendages to the branchiæ; the This species is found sessile on the California
ovigerous sacs are four in number, overlapping Gray Whale (Rhachianectes glaucus, Cope). I
each other.
have observed them on specimens of that species
Habitat, on the California Gray Whale (Rha hauled up on the beach at Monterey for cutting
chianectes glaucus of Cope), upon the coast of off the blubber, in the bay - whaling of that
California ; very numerous. I may remark here locality. The superior surface of the lateral
that these species are all so distinct from those laminæ, being covered by the black skin of the
figured by Milne - Edwards, Gosse, and Bate & whale, is not visible; and the animal, removed
Westwood, that a comparative description has from its native element-protruding its bright
seemed unnecessary; also, that the species ob yellow hood in every direction, to a surprising
tained on different species of Cetaceans have so distance, as if gasping for breath-presented a
far been found invariably distinct. The infer truly singular appearance.
ence is, of course, that each Cetacean has its
* The question is often raised, as to whether
peculiar parasites—a supposition which agrees the cetaceous animals have more than one young
with our knowledge of the facts in many groups
one at a birth? but it seems evident to us that
of terrestrial animals.
Cryptolepas rhachianecti, Dall, n. s. Valves
they never have more than two, for Nature has
subequal, rostrum radiate, not alate. Lateral made no provision whereby more than that num-
valves anteriorly alate, posteriorly radiate; ca ber could draw sustenance at the same time from
rina alate, not radiate. Each valve internally the parent animal; and even where provision is
transversely deeply grooved, and furnished ex-
made for two among the marine mammalia, par-
ternally with six radiating laminæ, vertically
ticularly in the case of the seal tribe, it is rare-
sharply grooved; the adjacent terminal lamina
of each two valves coalescing to form one lami-
ly if ever that the female produces twins. It is
na of extra thickness; all the laminæ bifurcated true that instances have occurred where two,
and thickened toward the outer edges, with two three, or more cubs have been seen with one
or more short spurs on each side, irregularly California Gray Whale; but this has only hap-
placed between the shell- wall and the bifurca-
pened in the lagoons where there had been
tion. Superior terminations of the valves (blunt-
ly pointed?) usually abraded, transversely striate.
great slaughter among the cows, leaving their
Scuta subquadrate, adjacent anteriorly, and very
young ones motherless, so that these straggle
slightly beaked in the middle of the occludent about, sometimes following other whales, some-
margin; terga subquadrate, small, separated from
times clustering by themselves a half-dozen to-
the scuta by intervening membrane; both very
gether. We know of one instance where a whale
small in proportion to the orifice. Membranes
which had a calf perhaps a month old was killed
very thin and delicate, raised into small lamella
between the opercular valves. All the calcareous
close to a ship. When the mother was taken
matter pulverulent, and showing a strong tend-
to the ship to be cut in, the young one followed,
ency to split up into laminæ. Antero - posterior and remained playing about for two weeks; but
THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
23
*
along the sea-shore. The time of gestation is about one year. Occasionally a
male is seen in the lagoons with the cows at the last of the season, and soon after
both male and female, with their young, will be seen working their way northward,
following the shore so near that they often pass through the kelp near the beach.
It is seldom they are seen far out at sea. This habit of resorting to shoal bays
is one in which they differ strikingly from other whales. In summer they congre-
gate in the Arctic Ocean and Okhotsk Sea. It has been said that this species of
whale has been found on the coast of China and about the shores of the island
of Formosa, but the report needs confirmation.
In October and November the California Grays appear off the coast of Oregon
and Upper California, on their way back to their tropical haunts, making a quick,
low spout at long intervals ; showing themselves but very little until they reach the
smooth lagoons of the lower coast, where, if not disturbed, they gather in large
numbers, † passing and repassing into and out of the estuaries, or slowly raising
their colossal forms midway above the surface, falling over on their sides as if by
whether it lived to come to maturity is a matter
of conjecture.
* This statement is maintained upon the fol-
lowing observations: We have known of five
embryos being taken from females between the
latitudes of 31° and 37° north, on the California
coast, when the animals were returning from
their warm winter haunts to their cool summer
resorts, and in every instance they were exceed-
ingly fat, which is quite opposite to the cows
which have produced and nurtured a calf while
in the lagoons; hence we conclude that the an-
imals propagate only once in two years.
+ It has been estimated, approximately, by
observing men among the shore-whaling parties,
that a thousand whales passed southward dai-
ly, from the 15th of December to the 1st of
February, for several successive seasons after
shore-whaling was established, which occurred
in 1851. Captain Packard, who has been en-
gaged in the business for over twenty years,
thinks this a low estimate. Accepting this num-
ber without allowing for those which passed off
shore out of sight from the land, or for those
which passed before the 15th of December and
after the 1st of February, the aggregate would
be increased to 47,000. Captain Packard also
states, that at the present time the average num-
ver seen from the stations passing daily would
not exceed forty. From our
From our own observation
upon the coast, we are inclined to believe that
the numbers resorting annually to the coast of
California, from 1853 to 1856, did not exceed
40,000-probably not over 30,000; and at the
present time there are many which pass off shore
at so great a distance as to be invisible from
the lookout stations : there are probably between
100 and 200 whales going southward daily, from
the beginning to the end of the "down season”
(from December 15th to February 1st).
This estimate of the annual herd visiting the
coast is probably not large, as there is no
allowance made for those that migrate earlier
and later in the season.
From what data we
have been able to obtain, the whole number of
California Gray Whales which have been capt-
ured or destroyed since the bay-whaling com-
menced, in 1846, would not exceed 10,800, and
the number which now periodically visit the
coast does not exceed 8,000 or 10,000.
24
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
accident, and dashing the water into foam and spray about them. At times, in
calm weather, they are seen lying on the water quite motionless, keeping one posi-
tion for an hour or more. At such times the sea - gulls and cormorants frequently
alight upon the huge beasts. The first season in Scammon's Lagoon, coast of Lower
California, the boats were lowered several times for them, we thinking that the
animals when in that position were dead or sleeping, but before the boats arrived
within even shooting distance they were on the move again.
About the shoals at the mouth of one of the lagoons, in 1860, we saw large
numbers of the monsters. It was at the low stage of the tide, and the shoal places
were plainly marked by the constantly foaming breakers. To our surprise we saw
many of the whales going through the surf where the depth of water was barely
sufficient to float them. We could discern in many places, by the white sand
that came to the surface, that they must be near or touching the bottom. One
in particular, lay for a half-hour in the breakers, playing, as seals often do in a
heavy surf; turning from side to side with half - extended fins, and moved appar-
ently by the heavy ground - swell which was breaking; at times making a playful
spring with its bending flukes, throwing its body clear of the water, coming down
with a heavy splash, then making two or three spouts, and again settling under
water ; perhaps the next moment its head would appear, and with the heavy swell
the animal would roll over in a listless manner, to all appearance enjoying the sport
intensely. We passed close to this sportive animal, and had only thirteen feet of
water.
The habits of the Gray have brought upon it many significant names, among
which the most prominent are, “Hard - head," "Mussel - digger," "Devil - fish,”
“Gray - back," and "Rip - sack.” The first - mentioned misnomer arose from the
fact of the animals having a great propensity to root the boats when coming in
contact with them, in the same manner that hogs upset their empty troughs. More-
over, they are known to descend to soft bottoms in search of food, or for other
purposes; and, when returning to the surface, they have been seen with head and
lips besmeared with the dark ooze from the depths below ; * hence the name of
* To our personal knowledge, but little or no
food has been found in the animal's stomach.
We have examined several taken in the lagoons,
and in them we found what the whalers called
“sedge” or “sea-moss” (a sort of sea-cabbage),
which at certain seasons darkens the waters in
extensive patches both in and about the mouths
of the estuaries. Whether this was taken into
the stomach as food some naturalists doubt, giv-
ing as a reason that the whale, passing through
the water mixed with this vegetable matter, on
opening its mouth would of necessity receive
more or less of it, which would be swallowed,
there being no other way in which it could be
.
2


2
C. M. Scam on, del.
FIG.1. THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE. (RHACHIANECTES CLAUCU
Plate I.


Britton & Rey, Lith.
Cope.) FIG. 2. THE FINBACK (BALENOPTERA VELIFERA, Cope.)
THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
25
“Mussel - digger." "Devil - fish” is significant of the danger incurred in the pursuit
of the animal. "Gray - back” is indicative of its color, and "Rip - sack" originated
with the manner of flensing.
As the season approaches for the whales to bring forth their young, which is
from December to March, they formerly collected at the most remote extremities of
the lagoons, and huddled together so thickly that it was difficult for a boat to cross
the waters without coming in contact with them. Repeated instances have been
known of their getting aground and lying for several hours in but two or three
feet of water, without apparent injury from resting heavily on the sandy bottom,
until the rising tide floated them. In the Bay of Monterey they have been seen
rolling, with apparent delight, in the breakers along the beach.
In February, 1856, we found two whales aground in Magdalena Bay. Each
had a calf playing about, there being sufficient depth for the young ones, while the
mothers were lying hard on the bottom. When attacked, the smaller of the two
old whales lay motionless, and the boat approached near enough to "set" the
hand - lance into her "life," dispatching the animal at a single dart.
The other,
when approached, would raise her head and flukes above the water, supporting her-
self on a small portion of the belly, turning easily, and heading toward the boat,
which made it very difficult to capture her. It appears to be their habit to get
into the shallowest inland waters when their cubs are young. For this reason the
whaling-ships anchor at a considerable distance from where the crews go to hunt
the animals, and several vessels are often in the same lagoon.
The first streak of dawn is the signal for lowering the boats, all pulling for
the head - waters, where the whales are expected to be found. As soon as one is
seen, the officer who first discovers it sets a "waif” (a small flag) in his boat, and
gives chase. Boats belonging to other vessels do not interfere, but go in search of
other whales. When pursuing, great care is taken to keep behind, and a short
distance from the animal, until it is driven to the extremity of the lagoon, or into
shoal water; then the men in the nearest boats spring to their oars in the exciting
race, and the animal, swimming so near the bottom, has its progress impeded,
thereby giving its pursuers a decided advantage : although occasionally it will sud-
denly change its course, or "dodge,” which frequently prolongs the chase for hours,
disposed of.
The quantity found in any one we are convinced that mussels have been found
individual would not exceed a barrelful.
in the maws of the California Grays; but as
From the testimony of several whaling-men yet, from our own observations, we have not
whom we regard as interested and careful ob been able to establish the fact of what their
servers, together with our own investigations, principal sustenance consists.
MABINE MAMMALS. - 4.
26
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
the boats cutting through the water at their utmost speed. At other times, when
the cub is young and weak, the movements of the mother are sympathetically
suited to the necessities of her dependent offspring. It is rare that the dam will
forsake her young one, when molested. When within “darting distance” (sixteen
or eighteen feet), the boat-steerer darts the harpoons, and if the whale is struck
it dashes about, lashing the water into foam, oftentimes staving the boats. As
soon as the boat is fast, the officer goes into the head,* and watches a favorable
opportunity to shoot a bomb - lance. Should this enter a vital part and explode, it
kills instantly, but it is not often this good luck occurs; more frequently two or
three bombs are shot, which paralyze the animal to some extent, when the boat is
hauled near enough to use the hand - lance. After repeated thrusts, the whale
becomes sluggish in its motions; then, going “close to," the hand - lance is set into
its "life,” which completes the capture. The animal rolls over on its side, with fins
extended, and dies without a struggle. Sometimes it will circle around within a
small compass, or take a zigzag course, heaving its head and flukes above the water,
and will either roll over, "fin out,” or die under water and sink to the bottom.
Thus far we have spoken principally of the females, as they are found in the
lagoons. Mention has been made, however, of that general habit, common to both
male and female, of keeping near the shore in making the passage between their
northern and southern feeding-grounds. This fact becoming known, and the bomb-
gunt coming into use, the mode of capture along the outer coast was changed.
The whaling parties first stationed themselves in their boats at the most favorable
points, where the thickest beds of kelp were found, and there lay in wait watching
for a good chance to shoot the whales as they passed. This was called “kelp
whaling."
The first year or two that this pursuit was practiced, many of the animals
* Whalemen call the forward part of a whale is twenty-three inches in length; diameter of
boat the head, differing from merchantmen, who bore, one and one-eighth of an inch; weight,
term it the bow; still, the oar next to the for twenty-four pounds. It shoots a bomb-lance
ward one in a whale-boat is named the bow twenty-one and a half inches long, and of a
oar. And, likewise, when the boat is hauled size to fit the bore. It is pointed at the end,
close up to the whale by heaving the line out with sharpened edges, in order to cut its way
of the “bow-chocks,” and taking it to one side through the fibrous fat and flesh, and is guided
against & cleat which is placed a few feet by three elastic feathers, which are attached
akaft of the extreme bow, it is called “bowing along the fuse tube, folding around it when in
the barrel. The gun is fired from the shoulder,
+ The bomb-gun is made of iron, stock and in the same way as a musket. For illustration,
all. It is three feet long, the barrel of which see plate xxiii.
on.”
THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
27
passed through or along the edge of the kelp, where the gunners chose their own
distance for a shot. This method, however, soon excited the suspicions of these
sagacious creatures. At first, the ordinary whale- boat was used, but the keen-
eyed “Devil- fish” soon found what would be the consequence of getting too near
the long, dark-looking object, as it lay nearly motionless, only rising and falling
with the rolling swell. A very small boat- with one man to scull and another
to shoot - was then used, instead of the whale- boat. This proved successful for a
time, but, after a few successive seasons, the animals passed farther seaward, and at
the present time the boats usually anchor outside the kelp. The mottled fish being
scen approaching far enough off for the experienced gunner to judge nearly where
the animal will “break water," the boat is sculled to that place, to await the
"rising.” If the whale “shows a good chance,” it is frequently killed instantly,
and sinks to the bottom, or receives its death-wound by the bursting of the bomb-
lance. Consequently, the stationary position or slow movement of the animal
enables the whaler to get a harpoon into it before sinking. To the harpoon a line
is attached, with a buoy, which indicates the place where the dead creature lies,
should it go to the bottom. Then, in the course of twenty-four hours, or in less
time, it rises to the surface, and is towed to the shore, the blubber taken off and
tried out in pots set for that purpose upon the beach.
Another mode of capture is by ships cruising off the land and sending their
boats inshore toward the line of kelp; and, as the whales work to the southward,
the boats, being provided with extra large sails, the whalemen take advantage of
the strong northerly winds, and, running before the breeze, sail near enough to be
able to dart the hand - harpoon into the fish. “Getting fast” in this way, it is
killed in deep water, and, if inclined to sink, it can be held up by the boats till
the ship comes up, when a large “fluke-rope" is made fast, or the "fin-chain" is
secured to one fin, the "cutting-tackle” hooked, and the whale “cut in” immedi-
ately. This mode is called "sailing them down.” Still another way of catching
them is with “Greener's Harpoon Gun,” which is similar to a small swivel-gun.
It is of one and a half inch bore, three feet long in the barrel, and, when stocked,
weighs seventy-five pounds. The harpoon, four feet and a half long, is projected
with considerable accuracy to any distance under eighty-four yards. The gun is
mounted on the bow of the boat. A variety of manoeuvres are practiced when
using the weapon: at times the boat lying at anchor, and, again, drifting about for
a chance-shot. When the animal is judged to be ten fathoms off, the gun is
pointed eighteen inches below the back; if fifteen fathoms, eight or ten inches
below; if eighteen or twenty fathoms distant, the gun is sighted at the top of its
back.
28
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Still another strategic plan has been practiced with successful results, called
"whaling along the breakers.” Mention has been already made of the habit which
these whales have of playing about the breakers at the mouths of the lagoons.
This, the watchful eye of the whaler was quick to see, could be turned to his
advantage.
After years of pursuit by waylaying them around the beds of kelp, the wary
animals learned to shun these fatal regions, making a wide deviation in their course
to enjoy their sports among the rollers at the lagoons' mouths, as they passed
them either way.
But the civilized whaler anchors his boats as near the roaring
surf as safety will permit, and the unwary “Mussel-digger” that comes in reach
of the deadly harpoon, or bomb- lance, is sure to pay the penalty with its life. If
it come within darting distance, it is harpooned ; and, as the stricken animal makes
for the open sea, it is soon in deep water, where the pursuer makes his capture
with comparative ease; or if passing within range of the bomb-gun, one of the
explosive missiles is planted in its side, which so paralyzes the whale that the
fresh boat's- crew, who have been resting at anchor, taking to their oars, soon
overtake and dispatch it.
The casualties from coast and kelp whaling are nothing to be compared with
the accidents that have been experienced by those engaged in taking the females
in the lagoons. Hardly a day passes but there is upsetting or staving of boats,
the crews receiving bruises, cuts, and, in many instances, having limbs broken ;
and repeated accidents have happened in which men have been instantly killed, or
received mortal injury. The reasons of the increased dangers are these : the quick
and deviating movements of the animal, its unusual sagacity, and the fact of the
sandy bottom being continually stirred by the strong currents, making it difficult to
see an object at any considerable depth. When a whale is "struck" at sea, there
is generally but little difficulty in keeping clear. When first irritated by the har-
poon, it attempts to escape by "running," or descending to the depths below, taking
out more or less line, the direction of which, and the movements of the boat,
indicate the animal's whereabouts. But in a lagoon, the object of pursuit is in
narrow passages, where frequently there is a swift tide, and the turbid water pre-
vents the whaler from seeing far beneath the boat. Should the chase be made
with the current, the fugitive sometimes stops suddenly, and the speed of the boat,
together with the influence of the running water, shoots it upon the worried animal
when it is dashing its flukes in every direction. The whales that are chased have
with them their young cubs, and the mother, in her efforts to avoid the pursuit of
herself and offspring, may momentarily lose sight of her little one. Instantly she
---

Tui
mitat i
01'.1'LL
1:59
pt
oluri
sticla
ܬܝ } }
in ih
+
1
premise
1
ri
+
7,0?; 8:1;. it is
r, viet 1 : 1 ! Lik
y of its !!, 01.:
w tals
izna idetur
to
in
$
Tie
و4
?
ܙ ܀ 1
0 0 1,??
M. led ly :)
11:1, a terbes
uw ?;011 the
La la', 1.
Bin
od tiny na
U? crorem esse di u.73 ..! : ; tie's
ili In of t1.
...il
by this! I
which istilutta
(
Vistina
3:15 a site are
is dili Lindoring
1. ” ! i'r ial: 1 ljet? hu'.
* "
ripth bebos, t. ki
10 All of th
thc ()?tursnit ji
3": uile, and it tu, writes
ili bor: howl thi ha h.
wote na wiliniy, and the goes it ri tha boa
17.vots in
Loja
itly rinse inne
Th. ili ibut ; chaid)
the lih, her its ir tre pun
:
Diy .. it is of her little whí
10.
Plate IV
Lith. Brition & Rey.S.F.
1.
2.
4.
3.
5.
6.
7.
C.M.Scammon,uel.
NORTH WEST INDIANS WHALING CANOE AND WHALING IMPLEMENTS.
1. HARPOON HEAD WITH LINE ATTACHED. 2.SIDE AND EDGE VIEW OF LANCE 3.ED GE VIEW OF HARPOON. 4.BUOY. 5 HARPOON ATTACHED TO STAFF
6. LANCE ATTACHED TO STAFF. 7. CANOE.

THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
29
will stop and "sweep” around in search, and if the boat comes in contact with her,
it is quite sure to be staved. Another danger is, that in darting the lance at the
mother, the young one, in its gambols, will get in the way of the weapon, and
receive the wound, instead of the intended victim. In such instances, the parent
animal, in her frenzy, will chase the boats, and, overtaking them, will overturn
them with her head, or dash them in pieces with a stroke of her ponderous flukes.
Sometimes the calf is fastened to instead of the cow. In such instances the
mother may have been an old frequenter of the ground, and been before chased,
and perhaps have suffered from a previous attack, so that she is far more difficult
to capture, staving the boats and escaping after receiving repeated wounds. One
instance occurred in Magdalena Lagoon, in 1857, where, after several boats had
been staved, they being near the beach, the men in those remaining afloat managed
to pick up their swimming comrades, and, in the meantime, to run the line to the
shore, hauling the calf into as shallow water as would float the dam, she keeping
near her troubled young one, giving the gunner a good chance for a shot with his
bomb-gun from the beach. À similar instance occurred in Scammon's Lagoon, in
1859.
The testimony of many whaling-masters furnishes abundant proof that these
whales are possessed of unusual sagacity. Numerous contests with them have
proved that, after the loss of their cherished offspring, the enraged animals have
given chase to the boats, which only found security by escaping to shoal water or
to shore.
After evading the civilized whaler and his instruments of destruction, and per-
haps while they are suffering from wounds received in their southern haunts, these
migratory animals begin their northern journey. The mother, with her young
grown to half the size of maturity, but wanting in strength, makes the best of her
way along the shores, avoiding the rough sea by passing between or near the rocks
and islets that stud the points and capes. But scarcely have the poor creatures
quitted their southern homes before they are surprised by the Indians about the
Strait of Juan de Fuca, Vancouver and Queen Charlotte's Islands. Like enemies
in ambush, these glide in canoes from island, bluff, or bay, rushing upon their prey
with whoop and yell, launching their instruments of torture, and like hounds worry-
ing the last life-blood from their vitals. The capture having been effected, trains
of canoes tow the prize to shore in triumph. The whalemen
among
the Indians of
the North-West Coast are those who delight in the height of adventure, and who
are ambitious of acquiring the greatest reputation among their fellows. Those among
them who could boast of killing a whale, formerly had the most exalted mark of
30
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
strand rope.
honor conferred upon them by a cut across the nose ; but this custom is no longer
observed.
The Indian whaling-canoe is thirty-five feet in length. Eight men make the
crew, each wielding a paddle five and a half feet long. The whaling-gear consists
of harpoons, lines, lances, and seal-skin buoys, all of their own workmanship. The
cutting material of both lance and spear was formerly the thick part of a mussel-
shell, or of the "abelone;" the line made from cedar withes, twisted into a three-
The buoys are fancifully painted, but those belonging to each boat
have a distinguishing mark. The lance-pole, or harpoon-staff, made of the heavy
wood of the yew - tree, is eighteen feet long, weighing as many pounds, and with
the lance attached is truly a formidable weapon.
Their whaling-grounds are limited, as the Indians rarely venture seaward far
out of sight of the smoke from their cabins by day, or beyond view of their bon-
fires at night. The number of canoes engaged in one of these expeditions is from
two to five, the crews being taken from among the chosen men of the tribe, who,
with silent stroke, can paddle the symmetrical canim close to the rippling water
beside the animal; the bowman then, with sure aim, thrusts the harpoon into it,
and heaves the line and buoys clear of the canoe. The worried creature may dive
deeply, but very little time elapses before the inflated seal-skins are visible again.
The instant these are seen, a buoy is elevated on a pole from the nearest canoe,
by way of signal; then all dash, with shout and grunt, toward the object of pur-
suit. Now the chase attains the highest pitch of excitement, for each boat being
provided with implements alike, in order to entitle it to a full share of the prize
its crew must lodge their harpoon in the animal, with buoys attached ; so that,
after the first attack is made, the strife that ensues to be next to throw the spear
creates a scene of brawl and agility peculiar to these savage adventurers. At length
the victim, becoming weakened by loss of blood, yields to a system of torture
characteristic of its eager pursuers, and eventually, spouting its last blood from a
lacerated heart, it writhes in convulsions and expires. Then the whole fleet of
canoes assists in towing it to the shore, where a division is made, and all the
inhabitants of the village greedily feed upon the fat and flesh till their appetites
are satisfied.
After the feast, what oil may be extracted from the remains is put
into skins or bladders, and is an article of traffic with neighboring tribes or the
white traders who occasionally visit them.
These "whales of passage,” when arrived in the Arctic Ocean and Okhotsk
Sea, are seen emerging between the scattered floes, and even forcing themselves
through the field of ice, rising midway above the surface, and blowing in the same
THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
31
attitude in which they are frequently seen in the southern lagoons; at such times
the combined sound of their respirations can be heard, in a calm day, for miles
across the ice and water. But in those far northern regions, the animals are rarely
pursued by the whale-ship’s boats: hence they rest in some degree of security;
yet even there, the watchful Esquimaux steal upon them, and to their primitive
weapons and rude processes the whale at last succumbs, and supplies food and
substance for its captors.
The Esquimaux whaling-boat, although to all appearance simple in its con-
struction, will be found, after careful investigation, to be admirably adapted to the
purpose, as well as for all other uses necessity demands. It is not only used to
accomplish the more important undertaking, but in it they hunt the walrus,
shoot game, and make their long summer-voyages about the coast, up the deep
bays and long rivers, where they traffic with the interior tribes. When prepared
for whaling, the boat is cleared of all passengers and useless incumbrances, nothing
being allowed but the whaling-gear. Eight picked men make the crew.* Their
boats are twenty-five to thirty feet long, and are flat on the bottom, with flaring
sides and tapering ends. The framework is of wood, lashed together with the fibres
of baleen and thongs of walrus-hide, the latter article being the covering, or plank-
ing, to the boat. The implements are one or more harpoons, made of ivory, with
a point of slate - stone or iron; a boat- mast, that serves the triple purpose of
spreading the sail and furnishing the staff for the harpoon and lance; a large knife,
and eight paddles. The knife lashed to the mast constitutes the lance.
The boat being in readiness, the chase begins. As soon as the whale is seen
and its course ascertained, all get behind it: not a word is spoken, nor will they
take notice of a passing ship or boat, when once excited in the chase.
All is
silent and motionless until the spout is seen, when they instantly paddle toward it.
The spouting over, every paddle is raised ; again the spout is seen or heard through
the fog, and again they spring to their paddles. In this manner the animal is
approached near enough to throw the harpoon, when all shout at the top of their
voices. This is said to have the effect of checking the animal's way through the
water, thus giving an opportunity to plant the spear in its body, with line and
buoys attached. The chase continues in this wise until a number of weapons are
firmly fixed, causing the animal much effort to get under water, and still more to
remain down; so it soon rises again, and is attacked with renewed vigor. It is the
* It is said by Captain Norton, who com-
manded the ship Citizen, wrecked in the Arctic
several years ago, that the women engage in the
chase.
32
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
established custom with these simple natives, that the man who first effectually
throws his harpoon, takes command of the whole party : accordingly, as soon as the
animal becomes much exhausted, his baidarra is paddled near, and with surprising
quickness he cuts a hole in its side sufficiently large to admit the knife and mast
to which it is attached; then follows a course of cutting and piercing till death
ensues, after which the treasure is towed to the beach in front of their huts, where
it is divided, each member of the party receiving two “slabs of bone,” and a like
proportion of the blubber and entrails; the owners of the canoes claiming what
remains.
The choice pieces for a dainty repast, with them, are the flukes, lips, and fins.
The oil is a great article of trade with the interior tribes of "reindeer-men :" it
is sold in skins of fifteen gallons each, a skin of oil being the price of a reindeer.
The entrails are made into a kind of souse, by pickling them in a liquid extracted
from a root that imparts an acrid taste: this preparation is a savory dish, as well
as a preventive of the scurvy. The lean flesh supplies food for their dogs, the
whole troop of the village gathering about the carcass, fighting, feasting, and howl-
ing, as only sledge-dogs can.
Many of the marked habits of the California Gray are widely different from
those of any other species of balona. It makes regular migrations from the hot
southern latitudes to beyond the Arctic Circle; and in its passages between the
extremes of climate it follows the general trend of an irregular coast so near that
it is exposed to attack from the savage tribes inhabiting the sea - shores, who pass
much of their time in the canoe, and consider the capture of this singular wanderer
a feat worthy of the highest distinction. As it approaches the waters of the torrid
zone, it presents an opportunity to the civilized whalemen—at sea, along the shore,
and in the lagoons — to practice their different modes of strategy, thus hastening
the time of its entire annihilation. This species of whale manifests the greatest
affection for its young, and seeks the sheltered estuaries lying under a tropical sun,
as if to warm its offspring into activity and promote comfort, until grown to the
size Nature demands for its first northern visit. When the parent animals are
attacked, they show a power of resistance and tenacity of life that distinguish them
from all other Cetaceans. Many an expert whaleman has suffered in his encounters
with them, and many a one has paid the penalty with his life. Once captured,
however, this whale yields the coveted reward to its enemies, furnishing sustenance
for the Esquimaux whaler, from such parts as are of little value to others. The
oil extracted from its fatty covering is exchanged with remote tribes for their fur-
clad animals, of which the flesh affords the venders a feast of the choicest food,
-
-
ܗ ܗ ܒ
走
​
Plate V.
leth Britton & Hon.SE
CM.Scammon.del.
CALIFORNIA GRAYS AMONG THE ICE
1
THE CALIFORNIA GRAY WHALE.
33
and the skins form an indispensable article of clothing. The North-west Indians
realize the same comparative benefit from the captured animals as do the Esqui-
maux, and look forward to its periodical passage through their circumscribed fishing-
grounds as a season of exploits and profit.
The civilized whaler seeks the hunted animal farther seaward, as from year to
year it learns to shun the fatal shore. None of the species are so constantly and
variously pursued as the one we have endeavored to describe; and the large bays
and lagoons, where these animals once congregated, brought forth and nurtured
their young, are already nearly deserted. The mammoth bones of the California
Gray lie bleaching on the shores of those silvery waters, and are scattered along
the broken coasts, from Siberia to the Gulf of California ; and ere long it may be
questioned whether this mammal will not be numbered among the extinct species
of the Pacific.
MARINE MAMMALS.-5.
CHAPTER II.
THE FINBACK WHALE.
BALÆNOPTERA VELIFERA, Cope. (Plate ii, fig. 2.)
Another species of the whale tribe is known as the Finback, or Finner, whose
geographical distribution is as extended as that of the Sulphurbottom, and which
ranks next to it in point of swiftness.
One picked up by Captain Poole, of the bark Sarah Warren, of San Francisco,
affords us the following memoranda : Length, sixty-five feet; thickness of blubber,
seven to nine inches; yield of oil, seventy-five barrels; color of blubber, a clear
white. Top of head quite as flat and straight as that of the Humpback. Baleen,
the longest, two feet four inches; greatest width, thirteen inches; its color, a light
lead, streaked with black, and its surface presents a ridgy appearance crosswise ;
length of fringe to bone, two to four inches, and in size this may be compared to
a cambric needle.
A Balænoptera, which came on shore near the outer heads of the Golden Gate,
gave us the opportunity of obtaining the following rough measurements :
Ft. In.
60 00
Length..
From nib-end to pectorals.
From nib-end to corner of mouth..
From nib-end to eye..
From notch of caudal fin to genital slit..
From notch of caudal fin to vent...
Expansion of caudal fin
15 00
12 00
12 06
21 00
19 06
14 00
Its side fins and flukes are in like proportion to the body as in the California
Gray. Its throat and breast are marked with deep creases, or folds, similar to the
Humpback. Color of back and sides, black or blackish - brown (in some individ-
uals a curved band of lighter shade marks its upper sides, between the spiracles
and pectorals); belly, a milky white. Its back fin is placed nearer to the caudal
than the hump on the Humpback, and in shape approaches to a right-angled
( 34 )
THE FINBACK WHALE.
35
triangle, but rounded on the forward edge, curved on the opposite one; the longest
side joins the back in some examples, and in others the anterior edge is the
longest. The gular folds spread on each side to the pectorals, and extended half
the length of the body.
The habitual movements of the Finback in several points are peculiar. When
it respires, the vaporous breath passes quickly through its spiracles, and when a
fresh supply of air is drawn into the breathing system, a sharp and somewhat
musical sound may be heard at a considerable distance, which is quite distinguish-
able from that of other whales of the same genus. (We have observed the interval
between the respirations of a large Finback to be about seven seconds.) It fre-
quently gambols about vessels at sea, in mid- ocean as well as close in with the
coast, darting under them, or shooting swiftly through the water on either side ; at
one moment upon the surface, belching forth its quick, ringing spout, and the next
instant submerging itself beneath the waves, as if enjoying a spirited race with the
ship dashing along under a press of sail. In beginning the descent, it assumes
a variety of positions : sometimes rolling over nearly on its side, at other times
rounding, or perhaps heaving, its flukes out, and assuming nearly a perpendicular
attitude. Frequently it remains on the surface, making a regular course and several
uniform "blows." Occasionally they congregate in schools of fifteen to twenty, or
less. In this situation we have usually observed them going quickly through the
water, several spouting at the same instant. Their uncertain movements, however
often showing themselves twice or thrice, then disappearing—and their swiftness,
make them very difficult to capture. The results of several attempts to catch them
were as follows: from the ship one was shot with a bomb-gun, which did its work
so effectually, that although the boat was in readiness for instant lowering, before
it got within darting distance the animal, in its dying contortions, ran foul of the
ship, giving her a shock that was very sensibly felt by all on board, and likewise
a momentary heel of about two streaks. We had a good view of the under - side
of the whale as it made several successive rolls before disappearing, and our obser-
vations agreed with those noted on board the Sarah Warren in relation to color
and the creases on throat and breast. The under-side of the fins was white also.
At another time the whale died about ten fathoms under water, and after carefully
hauling it up in sight, the "iron drawed, and away the dead animal went to the
depths beneath.” Frequently we have “lowered” for single ones that were playing
about the ship, but by the time the boats were in the water nothing more would
be seen of them, or, if seen, they would be a long way off, and then disappear.
An instance occurred in Monterey Bay, in 1865, of five being captured under
36
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
gave chase.
the following circumstances: A "pod" of whales was seen in the offing, by the
whalemen, from their shore station, who immediately embarked in their boats and
On coming up to them they were found to be Finbacks.
One was
harpooned, and, although it received a mortal wound, they all “run together” as
before. One of the gunners, being an expert, managed to shoot the whole five,
and they were all ultimately secured, yielding to the captors a merited prize. We
have noticed large numbers of these whales along the coast during the summer
months, and they seem to be more together at that particular season ; but, as the
opportunities for observing their habits have been much greater at that time of the
year, we may have been led into error upon this particular point. Their food is
of the same nature as that of the other rorquals, and the quantity of codfish
which has been found in them is truly enormous. On the northern coast, the
Finbacks, in many instances, have a much larger fin than those in warmer lati-
tudes, and we are fully satisfied that these are a distinct species, confined to the
northern waters.
We have had but little opportunity to observe the Finbacks that frequently
rove about the Gulf of Georgia and Fuca Strait. Several have been seen, however,
in May and June, on the coasts of California and Oregon, and in Fuca Strait in
June and July of the year 1864; these observations satisfy us that the dorsal fin
of this—the northern species referred to—is strikingly larger than in the more
southern Finbacks.
Appended are the outlines of one individual of several seen in Queen Charlotte
Sound, in February, 1865, which is a fair representation of them all.
Those we
have noticed about Fuca Strait seem to have the back fin modified in size between
the extremely small one found on the coast of Lower California and the one here
represented.
Plate VI.
Lith.Britton & Rey.S.F.

1.
2.
3.
4
5.
6.
C.M.Scammon,del.
ESQUIMAUX WHALING CANOE AND WHALING IMPLEMENTS
1. CANOE,2. BUOY, 3, EDGE VIEW OF HARPOON, 4. SIDE VIEW OF HARPOON, 5.HARPOON ATTACHED TO STAFF, 6.LANCE.
PLNES :
AIR
goiBACK
. ܀
THE TINBACK WHALE.
37

Puti
UTLINES OF A Northern FinBACK.
CHAPTER III.
THE IIUM PBACK WHALE.
MEGAPTERA VERSABILIS, Cope. (Plate vii, fig. 1.)
The Humpback is one of the species of rorquals that roam through every
ocean, generally preferring to feed and perform its uncouth gambols near extensive
coasts, or about the shores of islands, in all latitudes between the equator and the
frozen oceans, both north and south. It is irregular in its movements, seldom going
a straight course for any considerable distance; at one time moving about in large
numbers, scattered over the sea as far as the eye can discern from the mast - head;
at other times singly, seeming as much at home as if it were surrounded by hun-
dreds of its kind; performing at will the varied actions of "breaching," "rolling,"
"finning," "lobtailing," or "scooping;” or, on a calm, sunny day, perhaps lying
motionless on the molten - looking surface, as though life were extinct.
Its shape, compared with the symmetrical forms of the Finback, California
Gray, and Sulphurbottom, is decidedly ugly, as it has a short, thick body, and
frequently a diminutive "small,” with inordinately large pectorals and flukes.
protuberance, of variable shape and size in different individuals, placed on the
back, about one-fourth the length from the caudal fin, is called the hump. An-
other cartilaginous boss projects from a centre fold immediately beneath the
anterior point of the under jaw, which, with the flukes, pectorals, and throat of
the creature, are oftentimes hung with pendent parasites* (Otion Stimpsoni), and on
А
* We print here Dall's description of the unusually long and stout. First pair of hands
Cyamus suffusus; also his remarks on the Olion quadrant-shaped ; second pair slightly punctate,
Stimpsoni (Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., Dec. 18th,
arcuate, emarginate on the inferior edge, with a
pointed tubercle on each side of the emargina-
1872). Illustrations, figures 3 and 5, plate x.
tion. Third joint of the posterior legs keeled
Cyamus suffusus, n. sp. Body flattened, elon above, with a prong below. Pleon extremely
gate; segments, sub-equal, outer edges widely minute. Segments smooth. No ventral spines
separated. Branchiæ single, cylindrical slender, on posterior segments. Color, yellowish white,
with a very short papilliform appendage before suffused with rose - purple, strongest upon the
and behind each brancbia Superior antennæ antenna and branchiæ. Length, 0.41 inches;
[38]
THE HUMPBACK WHALE.
39
one.
the males it is frequently studded with tubercles, as upon the head.
A bulge
also rounds down on the lower part of the “small,” nearly midway between the
hump and caudal. Its under jaw extends forward considerably beyond the upper
All these combined characteristics impress the observer with the idea of an
animal of abnormal proportions. The top of its head is dotted with irregular,
rounded bunches, which rise about one inch above the surface, each covering nearly
four square inches of space.
The following measurements and memoranda of a male Humpback were taken
by Captain F. S. Redfield, of the whaling and trading brig Manuella, while cruising
in Behring Sea, September 17th, 1866 :
Ft.
In.
49 7
13 7
3 2
12 0
Extreme length....
Length of pectorals.
Breadth of pectorals...
Distance from snout to pectorals
Distance from corner of mouth to snout.....
Distance from eye to snout
Distance from spout-holes to snout.
Expansion of flukes....
Breadth of flukes....
Distance from anus to flukes ..
9 6
10 2
94
15 7
3 4
11 6
breadth (of body), 0.25 inches. All the speci in other specimens. The tubular prolongations
meus which have passed under my observation, very irregular and variable in size and form,
some eight or ten in number, were males. usually unsymmetrical; one sometimes nearly
Habitat, on the Humpback Whale (Megaptera abortive. Length of peduncle, 2.08 inches; of
rcrsabilis, Cope) Monterey, California.
body, 2.16 inches; of lobes, 2.00 inches; of ori-
fice, 1.18 inch; of scuta, 0.55 inch; width of
OTION, Leach.
scuta, 0.16 inch.
Otion, Leach, Ency. Britannica, suppl. vol. Habitat, on the Humpback (M. versabilis);
iii, p. 170.
sessile on the Coronulæ which infest that spe-
Otion Slimpsoni, Dall, n. sp.
cies, but never, so far as I have observed, on
Scuta only present, beaked, with the um the surface of the whale itself.
bones on the occludent margins; anterior pro Dr. Leach describes five calcareous species,
longation the longeë, pointed, rather slender; having the scuta, terga, and rostrum of the typ-
posterior prolongation, rounded, wider; external ical species (O. Cuvieri, Leach) and they are
margin concave; color (in spirits), light orange, figured by Reeve; but this species has certainly
with a dark purple streak on the rostral surface only the scuta. Whether this difference is of
and on each side of the peduncle; while the more than specific value I am not able to de-
lateral surfaces of the body-caso and lobes are cide, owing to the great paucity of works of
mottled with dark purple. The lower lip of the reference here. I should be unwilling to de-
orifice is transversely striated and translucent; scribe the species, were it not that it was sub-
the upper margins slightly reflexed internally, mitted to the late lamented Dr. Stimpson for
white; in some specimens with two prolonga- examination, and was pronounced by him to be
tions or small lobes above, which are wanting
new.
40
MAMMALS
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Ft.
In.
.
Distance from genital slit to flukes...
17 0
Length of folds on belly..
16 0
Whole breadth of folds on belly.
10 0
Distance from flukes to hump..
12 3
Length of hump along the back.
3 0
Height of hump...
1 0
Depth of small close to flukes..
2 6
Thickness of small close to flukes.
1 6
Thickness of blubber, five to ten inches; color of blubber, yellowish white;
yield of oil, forty barrels; number of folds on belly, twenty-six, averaging from
four to six inches in width. These folds, which extend from the anterior portion
of the throat over the belly, terminating a little behind the pectorals, are capable
of great expansion and contraction, which enables the Humpbacks, as well as all
other rorquals, to swell their maws when their food is in abundance about them.
The following additional measuren
rements, etc., were taken from Humpbacks capt-
ured on the coast of Upper California, in 1872.
1. Sex, female. Color of body, black above, but more or less marbled with
white below. Fins, black above, and dotted with white beneath. Color of blub-
ber, white. Number of folds on throat and breast, twenty-one, the widest of which
were six inches. Yield of oil, thirty-five barrels. The yield of bone, which is of
inferior quality, is about four hundred pounds to a hundred barrels of oil.
Ft. In,
Ft. In.
Length of animal...
48 0 Anus to notch of caudal fin....
12 6
Length of each pectoral...
13 0 Genital slit to notch of caudal fin... 12 11
Thickness of each pectoral.
08 Length of genital slit.....
3 6
Breadth of each pectoral....
3 5 Size around the body behind pectorals.. 25 0
Expansion of caudal fin, or flukes... 18 0 Average thickness of blubber...
0 5
Breadth of each lobe..
3 6 Depth of small at junction with caudal fin, 1 9
Thickness of each lobe..
0 9 Thickness of small at junction with caud-
From nib-end to pectorals.
16 0
al fin......
1 6
Pectorals to top of back....
4 6 From nib-end to hump...
28 0
Corner of mouth to nib-end..
10 0 Height of hump..
0 10
Corner of mouth to top of head... 5 4 Length of hump..
4 0
Eye* to nib-end.
10 10 Thickness of black skin
007
Eye to top of head...
4 6 Eye to ear.
2 0
Spiracles to nib-end...
8 0 Length of ear slit...
0 14
Length of exterior opening of spiracles.. 16 Navel to genital slit.
5 0
The nib-end, or point of the upper jaw, fell short of the extremity of the
* We refer the reader to fig. 4, plate x, for forty-six feet in length. The figure is drawn
illustration of an eye taken from a Humpback to natural size.


C.M.Scammon ci
1. HUMPBACK ( MEGAPTERA VERSABILIS COPE.) 2. SHARP
Plate V..
-


HEADED FINNER BALÆNOPTERA DAVIDSONI.Scammon.)
THE HUMPBACK WHALE.
41
lower one about fifteen inches. The tongue and throat were of a leaden color.
The orbit of the eye was four inches in diameter. The longest plate of bone, or
baleen, was two feet ; its color, black, with a fringe of lighter shade.
2. Sex, female. Color of body, black, with slight marks of white beneath.
Color of pectorals, black above, white below. Color of flukes, black above and
below. Color of blubber, white; average thickness of same, six inches. Yield of
oil, thirty barrels. Gular folds, eighteen. Tubercles on lips, nine.
Ft. In.
Ft. In.
48 0
13 0
16 6
11 6
3 0
Length of animal...
Length of pectorals
Breadth of pectorals.
Thickness of pectorals.
Expansion of flukes...
Breadth of flukes...
From nib-end to pectorals.
Notch of flukes to anus.
Notch of Aukes to genital slit.
Length of longest baleen.
Breadth of longest baleen...
12 0
08
2 9
14 0
0 10
4 3
3. Sex, female. Color of body, black above, slightly mottled with white and
gray
below. Fins and flukes, black above, white beneath. Color of blubber, white;
thickness of same, six to nine inches. Yield of oil, forty barrels. Number of
laminæ, five hundred and forty ; black, streaked with white, or light lead color.
Ft. In.
Ft. In.
12 5
28
Length of animal.....
52 0
Length of pectoral..
12 0
Width of pectoral...
3 6
End of lower jaw to spiracles...
10 0
End of lower jaw to corner of mouth... 11 9
End of lower jaw to eye...
Length of longest baleen..
Breadth of longest baleen..
Length of fringe to baleen.
09
0 5
It is proper to state, that the dimensions of the skull, or upper jaw-bone, of
any ordinary sized animal would be about fifteen feet long by six broad. The
lower jaw - bones, which are joined by a slight symphysis, are each about the same
length in their curves, and are about one foot wide and eight inches thick midway
between the extremities. The thickness of the lumbar vertebræ is about eight
inches; the distance between the points of the spurs, two feet eight inches; and
the weight, twenty-four or more pounds. The largest ribs are from nine to twelve
feet long, measured on the curve, and ten to fifteen inches in circumference. The
aggregate weight of two well-dried specimens (measuring respectively nine and ten
feet) was eighty pounds. The first joint of the pectoral bones may be set down
at two and a half feet in length, and the same in circumference at its union with
the shoulder-blade. This section of the fin bones exceeds fifty pounds in weight.
The usual color of the Humpback is black above, a little lighter below, slightly
marbled with white or gray; but sometimes the animal is of spotless white under the
MARINE MAMMALS.-6.
42
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
fins and about the abdomen. The posterior edge of the hump, in many examples,
is tipped with pure white. The megaptera varies more in the production of oil
than all others of the rorquals. We have frequently seen individuals which yielded
but eight or ten barrels of oil, and others as much as seventy-five; the length of
the animal varying from twenty-five to seventy-five feet. Most of these variations
may be attributed to age and sex, as the female with a large cub becomes quite
destitute of fat in her covering. These animals, more especially the smaller or
younger ones, are infested with parasitic crustaceans (Cyamus suffusus), which collect
in great numbers about the head and pectorals; or, in case there are any wounds
upon the body, these troublesome vermin are sure to find them. On the coast of
California, in 1856, we captured a whale of ordinary size, which had many patches
of these parasites united almost in one mass upon that portion of the body which
was exposed when the animal came to the surface, and when "cut in” it proved
to have what is termed a "dry skin,” the blubber being destitute of oil; this was
attributed to the abundance of these troublesome parasites. The Humpback has
also the largest barnacles adhering to, or imbedded in, the epidermis, about the
throat or fins. The habits of this whale -particularly in its undulating movements,
frequent “roundings," "turning of flukes," and irregular course—are characteristic
indications, which the quick and practiced eye of the whaleman distinguishes at a
long distance. Even when beneath the surface of the sea, we have observed them
just “under the rim of the water” (as whalemen used to say), alternately turning
from side to side, or deviating in their course with as little apparent effort, and as
gracefully, as a swallow on the wing. Like all other rorquals, it has two spiracles,
and when it respires, the breath and vapor ejected through these apertures form
the "spout,” and rises in two separate columns, which, however, unite in one as
they ascend and expand. When the enormous lungs of the animal are brought
into full play, the spout ascends twenty feet or more. When the whale is going
to windward, the influence of the breeze upon the vapor is such, that a low, bushy
spout is all that can be seen. The number of respirations to a "rising” is exceed-
ingly variable: sometimes the animal blows only once, at another time six, eight,
or ten, and from that up to fifteen or twenty times.
Although the Humpbacks are found in every sea and ocean, our observations
indicate that they resort periodically, and with some degree of regularity, to partic-
ular localities, where the females bring forth their young. It seems, moreover, that
large numbers of both sexes make a sort of general migration from the warmer
to the colder latitudes, as the seasons change. They go north in the northern
hemisphere, as summer approaches, and return south when winter sets in.
TIL HUNPBACK IVHALE.
43
The following observations were made along the coasts of North and South
America, and in Oceanica. In the years 1852 and 1853, large numbers of Hump-
backs resorted to the Gulf of Guayaquil, coast of Peru, to calve, and the height
of the season was during the months of July and August. The same may be said
of the gulfs and bays situated near the corresponding latitudes north of the equa-
tor; still, instances are not unfrequent where cows and their calves have been seen
at all other seasons of the year about the same coast. In the Bay of Valle de
Banderas, coast of Mexico (latitude 20° 30'), in the month of December, we saw
numbers of Humpbacks, with calves but a few days old. In May, 1855, at Mag-
dalena Bay, coast of Lower California (about latitude 24° 30'), we found them in
like numbers; some with very large calves, while others were very small. The
season at Tongataboo (one of the Friendly Islands, latitude 21° south, longitude
174° west), according to Captain Beckerman, includes August and September. Here
the females were usually large, yielding an average of forty barrels of oil, including
the entrail fat, which amounted to about six barrels. The largest whale taken at
this point, during the season of 1871, produced seventy-three barrels, and she was
adjudged to be seventy - five feet in length. It is worthy of remark, that a large
majority of the whales resorting thither were white on the under side of the body
and fins.*
fourth the entire length of the body; nose and
sides of throat have round warts; belly plaited.
* Eminent zoologists have divided the Hump-
backs into several species. Gray, in his Cata-
logue of the British Museum, 1850, makes mention
of the following names and outward descrip-
tions :
1. MEGAPTERA LONGIMANA (Johnston's Humpback
Whale). --Black, pectoral fins and beneath white,
black varied; lower lip with two series of tu-
bercles; pectorals nearly one - third the entire
length; dorsal elongate, the front edge over
end of pectoral; throat and belly grooved. Fe-
male: upper and lower lip with a series of
tubercles; dorsal an obscure protuberance.
2. MEGAPTERA AMERICANA (Bermuda lump-
back).— Black, belly white; head with round tu-
bercles.
3. MEGAPTERA POESKOP (Poeskop or Cape Hump-
back). -- Dorsal nearly over the end of pectorals.
4. MEGAPTERA KUZIRA The Kuzira).- Dorsal
small, and behind the middle of the back; the
pectoral fins rather short, and less than one-
We have frequently recognized, upon the
California coast, every species here described,
and even in the same school or
gam.” More-
over, we have experienced the greatest difficulty
in finding any two of these strange animals
externally alike, or possessing any marked gen-
eric or specific differences. If the differences
pointed out as constituting different species are
maintained, we conclude there must be a great
number. We have observed, both in the dead
and living animals, the following different ex-
ternal marks : 1st. Body black above, white
beneath. 20. Body black above and below, with
or less white mottling under the throat
and about the abdomen; pectoral and caudal
fins white beneath, or slightly spotted with
black. 3d. Body black above, white beneath,
more
44
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-IV ESTERN COAST.
In the Bay of Monterey, Upper California, the best season for Humpbacks is
in the months of October and November ; but some whales are taken during the
period from April to December, including a part of both of those months. The
great body of these whales, however, are observed working their way northward
until September, when they begin to return southward ; and the bay being open
to the north, many of the returning band follow along its shores or visit its south-
ern extremity, in search of food, which consists principally of small fish and the
lower orders of crustaceans. When the animals are feeding, the whalers have a
very favorable opportunity for their pursuit and capture. The observations of the
whaling parties, which have been established at this bay for over seventeen years,
furnish reliable data in reference to the periodical movements of whales along the
Pacific Coast. Of the Humpbacks, individuals of every variety, size, and age
have
been taken, including one of the most gigantic specimens of the genus. This ani-
mal, which yielded one hundred and forty-five barrels of oil, was taken in 1858,
when the usual school of large megapteras was making its annual passage south-
ward. One of the largest of these whales having an unusual mark—a white spot
on the hump—was recognized for several years in succession in its periodical mi-
more
with under side of pectoral and caudal fins of a
dark ash-color. 4th. Body black above, with
gray mottling beneath.
In all these varieties,
both the caudal and pectoral fins differ in shape
and size; the latter in some individuals being
exceedingly long, narrow, and pointed, as repre-
sented in figure 1 of plate vii; while others are
comparatively short and broad, as shown in the
outline (page 47), which also shows the parasites,
commonly called barnacles, adhering to the
throat, pectorals, and caudal fin.
There are
still others whose pectorals are of intermediate
proportions, but terminate abruptly, as seen on
page 48, which also represents the scalloped
flukes present in some individuals. (In this fig-
ure, the mark “A” shows the outlines of spira-
cles, which form nearly a right argle). Again, in
other examples, the caudal fin is narrow, point-
ed, and lunate; in others, st:!1, it is broad, and
nearly straight on the posterior edge. All these
varieties feed and associate together on the same
ground, and in every particular their habits are
the same, so far as we have been able to ascer-
tain from careful observation; all, likewise, are
infested by the same parasites. As to the dorsal
protuberance called the hump, it is, as has been
previously stated, of no regular shape or size,
but is nearly of a uniform height; the posterior
edge is sometimes tipped with white. As to the
tubercles on the head and lips, they were pres-
ent on all we have examined, twenty or
specimens; those about the head are always
well-developed, while those upon the lips, in
many individuals, are scarcely perceptible. In
some instances, however, they equal or exceed
those which crown the skull. There is no reg-
ularity in the number of gular folds, which, as
far as observed, vary in number from eighteen
to twenty-six. In some cases they run parallel
to each other; but usually there are several that
either cross or terminate near the pectorals.
The animals are all described as being black
above; but in the examples which have been
examined, there was not one, when closely scru-
tinized, which did not reveal some slight marks
of white.

{ { ; ,
--
*
"£
: 1 ܕ""f .." :;";
ܙ . ' :1)!- . - ' ° ;ܝ
-!
!
4 ; '1
ii , . ' | ' " ܕ ܝܢ 1
• •
ܝ
ܘܲܗ
;.)
° '
ܠܐ
°
ܐ
܂ ܐ ܐ { {€
ܠܐ
܂ . }' i:܀
ܐ '
4
ܚܕ
.1
°ܙ
: .QJ ' , ܝ
܂
. ܐ' ܙܢܨ 1
ܠܐ - ?() ¢ °9
; """ I.:-
u4
ܙ
ܝܬ
ܟܠܗ
.. *
.. ', ; [.1'
ܗܗ ܀
,f .) ܙ ; ܂ .
you can
71' ܐ '
; :
! T ' ( ,
ܙ. '!
܀
܀ ]. ]] .
Plate VIII
Britton & Rey Lith.
3
-

C.M.Scammon del.
HUMPBACKS LOBTAILING BOLTING BREACHING AND FINNING.
THE HUMPBACK WHALE.
45
grations with the rest of its wandering companions, and the time of passing
Point Pinoz (the outer headland of the bay), was ascertained to be during or
near the month of September. Repeated efforts were made, from year to year,
to capture the member of the "gam” thus distinguished by a white hump; but
it was only when the bomb - gun and bomb - lance had come into use that its
destruction was effected. The animal proved to be of enormous size, but its
product of oil was comparatively small, amounting only to about eighty - five
barrels.
After many years' study of the characteristic habits of the Humpback, we be-
lieve that the females of this species resort in large numbers to favorite inland
waters, connected with the ocean, to bring forth their young; but there are many
exceptions to this rule, incident to their roving disposition. They are found on
different coasts in all accessible latitudes, from the new-born calf to the extremely
aged. In their wanderings, they are addicted, more than any other rorqual, to
"breaching,"
"bolting,” and “finning.” In the mating season they are noted for
their amorous antics. At such times their caresses are of the most amusing and
novel character, and these performances have doubtless given rise to the fabulous
tales of the sword - fish and thrasher attacking whales. When lying by the side of
each other, the megapteras frequently administer alternate blows with their long
fins, which love - pats may, on a still day, be heard at a distance of miles. They
also rub each other with these same huge and flexible arms, rolling occasionally
from side to side, and indulging in other gambols which can easier be imagined
than described. The time of gestation is not known; but in all probability it is
the same as that of other large Cetaceans, not exceeding ten or twelve months.
The calf, when brought forth, is about one-fourth the length of the dam ; and it
suckles by holding the teat between the extremity of the jaws or lips, while the
mother reclines a little on one side ; raising the posterior portion of her form
nearly out of water, and lying in a relaxed condition. This peculiar manner of
suckling the young appears to be common to all the whalebone whales. In this
way two calves would be enabled to obtain their nourishment at the same time.
The Humpbacks are captured with a common hand - harpoon and lance, or
“Greener's Harpoon Gun,” and the bomb - lance, by the whaleship's crew; and as
they are very liable to sink when dead, every exertion is made to get the har-
poon in, with line attached, before the bomb-gun is discharged. Then, if the crea-
ture goes to the bottom, a buoy is attached to the end of the line, or a boat lies
by it, until the decomposition of its flesh has generated sufficient gas to allow the
animal to be drawn up. The length of time that elapses before this takes place of
46
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
course depends much on the depth of water and the solidity of the animal's forma-
tion; some individuals remaining but a few hours on the bottom, while others will
remain down for two or three days at the same depth. We have known many
whales to be recovered when sunk in from forty to sixty fathoms of water. The
modus operandi in hauling these decomposing subjects to the surface is this: If the
water is rough, the line is taken into the bow-chocks* of the boat; then uniting
two crews in the after part of one boat, they either haul on the line by hand, or
with a tackle, until the boat's bow is nearly submerged, or the whale is lifted; or,
if in a smooth bay, two boats are sometimes used, by laying a spar across both,
and taking the line between them over the spar, which serves as a sort of windlass
purchase. If the dead animal has been long down, in a considerable depth, care is
taken to avoid its coming up under the boat; for as the carcass nears the surface,
its velocity is so much accelerated, that in some instances the animal rises with a
bound which equals its sprightliest actions before life became extinct.
The megapteras are captured by the Indians of the North-western Coast, and
the Esquimaux about the shores of the Arctic Ocean, in the same manner as the
California Grays, as has been described in the opening chapter of this work; and
the natives of the Aleutian Islands pursue them, as well as other rorquals. When
a whale is seen, the baidarka (skin- boat) is launched and manned by two or three
men, and a spirited chase ensues. When close to the object of pursuit, their toy-
like harpoons are hurled into the animal. This, however, does not insure an im-
mediate capture ; but their weapons, which are pointed with glass or flint-stone,
and barbed with bone, are so fashioned, that, as the wounded creature writhes in
its agony, every motion tends to work the tortuous instrument farther in; and at
last the fatal work is accomplished. Each whaler's spear has his own private
mark, and should the prize be found by others, they seek to ascertain by this
means the rightful owners, who by their laws or customs are entitled to the booty
wherever it may be found.
The best points for Humpback whaling on the coast have been Magdalena,
Balenas, and Monterey bays; but, since the acquisition of Alaska, numerous places
have been found in the bays and about the islands of that Territory, which doubt-
less in the future will become profitable whaling stations. Several bays around the
Aleutian Archipelago, bordering on Behring Sea, may be indicated as likely to be
valuable for this business.
* The bow-chocks are two pieces of wood
fastened upon each side of the stem of the
boat; between these chocks is a metallic roller,
over which the whale-line runs.
THE HUMPBACK
47
WHALE.

ES OF
A
Putline Hump
UMPBACK,
With special reference to its short and broad pectorals, and to the parasites, commonly called barnacles, which
adhere to the throat, pectorals, and caudal fin.
ALEUTIAN ISLANDERS WHALE MARPOON.
48
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
%
a
`
so
noomne
Putlines OF A HUMPBACK, FROM
mm
ABOVE.

7'!.
«
:
- . سرا
3 ,11 :
Plate X.
Brittoa.? Pepit.
T

C.M.Scannon Del.
APPEARANCE CF.FELIALE HUT PB.ICK SUCILIITG HER YOUNG.
จ
CHAPTER IV.
THE SHARP-HEADED FINNER WHALE.
BALENOPTERA DAVIDSONI, Scammon. (Plate vii, fig. 2.)
The name "Sharp-headed Finner" is applied to this, the smallest species of
Balaenoptera known on the coast. The only one we have examined was found dead
on the northern shore of Admiralty Inlet, Washington Territory, by some Italian
fishermen, in October, 1870; transported by them to the opposite shore, and towed
into Port Townsend Bay, where it was flensed on the beach. This opportunity
of seeing the animal out of the water became unusually interesting to us, for
there was a mystery about its history which we had not been able to solve in the
course of twelve years' observations, during which time we had traced it from the
coast of Mexico to Behring Sea. In the Strait of Juan de Fuca opportunities were
afforded for observing its habits more closely than elsewhere.
The animal in question is generally called by whalers a "young Finback," or a
“Finback's calf,” and for several years we were under the impression that this
inference was correct. In the Strait of Juan de Fuca, these whales were met with
in numbers together, or singly, throughout the year ; but, though they frequently
played around the vessel, we could never get near enough to decide whether they
were toothed whales or allied to the whalebone species. The length of the indi-
vidual captured in Admiralty Inlet was twenty-seven feet. When compared with
other Balcenido, it appeared so small, that we were skeptical whether it was an
adult or not; but, upon making an examination, a well-developed foetus*
was found
* This fætus was remarkably well formed,
and in point of color-marks, corresponded with
those upon the parent animal, with the excep-
tion of being somewhat dimmer. The following
are its dimensions :
Ft. Iu
From fork of caudal to dorsal fin ....17
Dorsal junction along the back...... 0 5
Height of dorsal ....
0 23
Point of snout to corner of mouth ... 1 2
Point of snout to eyes...
1 21
Point of snout to pectorals...
1 10
From top of back to pectorals .......09
From top of head to corner of mouth 0 4
Ft. In.
5 6
Total length...
Caudal fin between extremities ....
1 2
Width of each lobe of caudal fin.....0 41
MARINE MAMMALS.-7.
(49)
50
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
in it, five and a half feet long, which dispelled all doubts in regard to its matu-
rity. The principal distinguishing features of this whale are, its dwarfish size ; its
pointed head, which in form resembles a beak; its low, falcated dorsal fin, which
is placed about two-thirds of the length of the animal from the anterior extremity
of its lower jaw, which is the longest ; and its inordinately small, pointed pectorals,
which are marked with a white band above and near their bases, and are placed
about one-third of the animal's length from its anterior extremity. The bone, or
baleen, in its natural state is of a pure white, with a short, thin fringe of the same
color. The number of laminæ on each side of the mouth was two hundred and
seventy, and the longest of these measured ten inches. The surface of the animal
was a dull black above, white below. The under side of both pectoral and caudal
fins was white also. Seventy longitudinal folds extended along the throat and the
lower portion of the body, between and a little behind the fins; and, while the
outer surface of the folds was of a milky whiteness, the creases between them were
of a pinkish cast, imparting the same shade to the throat as far back as the pecto-
rals. The following table gives the proportions of this specimen :
Ft. In.
27 0
4 0
1 1
3 8
8 6
4 8
9 0
Length of animal.
Length of pectorals.
Breadth of pectorals
End of snout to spiracles
End of snout to pectorals..
End of snout to corner of mouth..
Dorsal to fork of caudal fin ....
Dorsal junction along the back ....
Dorsal's height..
Caudal fin from point to point...
Breadth of lobes of caudal fin. ......
Fork of caudal fin to anus
Fork of caudal fin to genital slit ...
Depth of animal at pectorals
2 4
0 10
7 6
2 1
8 4
9 6
5 4
The foregoing measurements were hurriedly taken while the whale was being
cut up, which was quickly accomplished; for as fast as the Italians stripped off the
blubber, the Indians came from a village near, and slashed away at the half-putrid
flesh, which they packed off to their camps, declaring loudly that the meat was
excellent food. The coating of yellowish fat that incased the body averaged three
inches in thickness, and the yield of oil was about three hundred gallons.
The habits of this whale are in many respects like those of the Finback. It
THE SHARP-HEADED FINNER WHALE.
51
frequently gambols about vessels when under way, darting from one side to the
other beneath their bottoms. When coming to the surface it makes a quick, faint
spout, such as would be made by a suckling of one of the larger Cetaceans; which
plainly accounts for whalemen taking it to be the young of more bulky species.
At sea the Sharp - headed Finners are seldom seen in pairs, but wander solitarily
along, frequently changing their course in the depths below, and meandering along
the whole continental coast of the North Pacific; occasionally visiting the large
estuaries about the shores. They pass through Behring Sea and Strait into the
Arctic Ocean, where they appear to be as much at home as their superiors in size,
the Bowheads and the California Grays. Like the latter they thread the icy floes,
and frequently emerge through the narrow fissures bolt upright, with their heads
above the broken ice, to blow. When roaming about the inland waters of lower
latitudes, they often shoot along the shallow borders of the bays in search of the
myriads of small fry on which they mainly sustain themselves. They can not be
considered as objects of pursuit by whaling vessels, and are but rarely taken by
the natives of Cape Flattery—they being the only whalers in that region who
attempt the capture of these animals.
CHAPTER V.
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
BALÆNA MYSTICETUS, Linn. (Plate xi.)
The Bowhead, or Great Polar Whale, is by far the most valuable, in a commer-
cial point of view, of all the Balvenidæ, and is the chief object of pursuit by the
whalemen in the northern seas. From its great yield of oil, which in some individ-
uals has exceeded two hundred and seventy-five barrels, with a production of bone
or baleen equal to over three thousand five hundred pounds, * one might suppose
it to be the largest of all the Cetaceans. Such, however, is not the fact, for it
seldom attains the length of sixty-five feet, and it is a stout whale which measures
fifty feet between its extremities. The striking feature of the animal is its ponder-
ous head, forming, as far as our observations go, more than one-third of the whole
creature, which is short, bulky, and bloated in its appearance. Its upper jaw, or
the top of the head, is curved downward more than that of the Right Whale
(Balcena Sieboldii?), to which it bears the nearest resemblance. To the edge of this
jaw, the long, finely fringed, transverse layers of baleen are attached, projecting
downward and outward, and hedging in, as it were, the animal's tongue, and all is
inclosed by the under lip when the mouth is shut. The tongue is incapable of
protrusion, being fixed from near its point to the root. It is a mass of spongy fat,
intermixed with sinewy flesh, and yields one-tenth as much oil as the “body - blub-
ber."
The two extended rows of baleen which line the sides of the upper jaw
provide the means by which the animal secures its insect food, which is the chief
sustenance of the colossal mysticetus. Its eyes, which in size quadruple those of
an ox, are placed, one on each side, about a foot above and behind the angle of
the mouth. The spiracles are at the apex of the high protuberance on the head,
which is forward of the eyes. Its short but heavy pectorals are placed about two
feet from the eyes and nearly in a horizontal line with them. Its ears are a little
above and behind the eyes; they are simply openings, not over one-fourth of an
* Vide Roys' first voyage in the Arctic.
[52]

C.M.Scammon,del.
THE BOWHEAD OR
BALÆNA MYSI
Plate XI.

> OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
A YYSI CETUS. LINN.
Britton & Pey, Lith.
THE BOIVITEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
53
inch in extent, and in some individuals they are so minute that it is with the
greatest difficulty they can be discovered. An immense caudal fin, which forms the
posterior limb and extremity of the body, is from sixteen to twenty feet in exten-
sion, and in shape thick, broad, lunate, and notched in the centre of the posterior
edge, while the extremities are somewhat rounded.
I am indebted to Captain J. F. Poole, formerly of the American bark N. 8.
Perkins, for the measurements and memoranda of a mysticetus, forty-seven feet in
length, which was taken in the Arctic Ocean, August, 1867; and to Captain G. L.
Smith, of the American bark Vineyard, for similar statements of one forty-five feet
long, taken in the same ocean during the season of 1870, as follows: *
CAPTAIN POOLE'S WHALE.
Sex, female. Color, black on back and sides ; throat white; also, occasional
white spots on under side of body. Yield of oil, eighty barrels (the whale was
judged large enough ordinarily to have yielded one hundred and fifty barrels of oil).
Ft. In.
47 0
8 0
Length of animal...
Length of pectorals.
Breadth of pectorals..
Distance from nib-end to spout-holes....
Length of spout-holes ....
Distance from corner of mouth to nib-end...
Extension of Aukes..
Thickest blubber....
Average thickness of blubber.
Thickness of black skin on back.....
Length of genital slit...
Distance from genital slit to vent....
Distance from genital slit to flukes....
Length of longest bone or baleen..
Length of fringe or hair on bone...
Breadth of longest bone...
4 0
16 0
1 0
17 10
19 0
1 4
0 11
0 1
1 10
0 4
9 0
10 6
20
1 01
The bone was imbedded in the gum of the jaw ten inches. Number of layers
of bone on each side of jaw, three hundred and thirty ;I weight of largest slab of
* We regret that our measurements of Bow-
heads, taken in Tchantar Bay, 1862, were lost
in changing from one vessel to another the fol-
lowing year.
+ Two feet may be regarded as nearly twice
the usual length.
| This may be a fair average, and 370 is the
highest number we have counted.
54
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
bone, seven pounds. The bone extends back of spout - holes in the throat three
feet, and falls short of nib-end one foot.
Ft.
In.
45 0
28 0
7 3
3 9
18 8
16 0
CAPTAIN SMITH'S WHALE.
Sex, male ; color above and below, black.
Length..
Girth in largest place (behind pectorals)
Length of pectorals.
Breadth of pectorals..
Nib-end or nose to pectorals.
Corner of mouth to nib-end.
Eye to nib-end...
Spout-holes to nib-end....
Length of opening to spout-holes (longitudinally)..
Flukes from tip to tip...
Width of Aukes from notch to junction with the body....
Vent to flukes..
Genital slit to flukes.
Size around the “small” at genital slit...
Length of longest bone or baleen.
Width of longest bone or baleen...
Average thickness of blubber....
16 0
14 0
1 2
16 0
4 2
8 10
12 0
19 0
9
6
1 0
0 9
Color of blubber, slightly reddish. The number of layers of bone on each side
of the jaw was three hundred and eight. The yield of oil was sixty barrels; yield
of bone, one thousand and fifty pounds.
When the Bowhead feeds, it moves through its native element, either below or
near the surface, with considerable velocity, its jaws being open, whereby a body
of water enters its capacious mouth, and along with it the animalculæ (termed by
the whalemen "Right Whale feed,” or “brit"). The water escapes through the
layers of baleen,* but the insect food is retained by the fine fringes on its inner
edges, and is afterward swallowed. When not disturbed, the animal remains up,
generally, to respire, from one and a half to two and a half minutes, during which
time it spouts from six to nine times, and then disappears for the space of ten to
twenty minutes.
The volume of vapor ejected is similar to that of the Right Whale.
Sometimes, when engaged in feeding, it remains down for twenty-five minutes or
*For illustrations of layers of baleen, or tus); Right Whale of the North-western Coast,
“slabs of bone," as named by whalers, see (Balona Sieboldi?); Sulphurbottom, (Sibbaldius
page 55, which shows the relative proportions sulfureus); Humpback (Megaptera versabilis); and
of the baleen of the Bowhead, (Balæna mystice the California Gray (Rhachianectes glaucus).
-
-
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
55
C
5

2
The above illustration represents the relative proportions of the full-grown baleen of different
species of whalebone whales, as follows:
1. Baleen of the Bowhead, or Great Polar Whale.
2. Baleen of the Right Whale of the North - western Coast.
3. Baleen of the Sulphurbottom Whale.
4. Baleen of the Humpback Whale.
5. Baleen of the California Gray Whale.
Baleen of the California Gray Whale, in a section, showing the manner of its being
imbedded in the gum of the jaw.
7. Baleen of the California Gray Whale, in a section, showing how the fringes lie across.
56
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
PUTLINE
OF
Roys' BUNCHBACK."

-11 ܫܠܐܒ݂ܙܝ݂
܀܀
.
???
Sii
--
Plate X.
-
ملا
can
son
1

5
EYE AND PARASITES OF BALEEN WHALES.
Britton & Rey, Lith.
FIG. 1. CYAMUS SCAMMONI,DALL + $ FIG.4. RIGHT EYE OF HUMPBACK, nat. size.
2. CYAMUS MYSTICETI, DALL # 5. OTION STIMPSON DALL, nat. size.(SESSILE ON CORONULA DIADEMA.)
3. CYAMUS SUFFUSUS DALL f of 6. CRYPTOLEPAS RHACHIANICTI DALL.
99
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
57
more.
The depth to which the animal descends when pursued is not accurately
known, for as a general rule, it has been captured "on soundings" in the Arctic
Ocean and Behring Sea, as well as in the Sea of Okhotsk, where the depths, in
places, do not exceed a hundred fathoms, and from that to less than fifty. Some-
times they have been taken in very shallow water; yet this animal, when in deep
water, has been known to "sound out” a line, in its descent and return, equal to a
mile in length. But it must not be inferred that this was done by the perpendic-
ular course of the whale, for it is found that the line runs out with great swiftness,
when the creature begins its return to the surface. Repeated instances have
occurred, where the animal, after being fastened to, would “sound ;” and, if the
bottom was soft, would there remain motionless for quite an incredible length of
time for this species of Cetacea. In several cases, individuals have held their pur-
suers in momentary expectation of their rising, for an hour or more. One instance
occurred with Captain Comstock, (a well-known whaling-master), in the Arctic
Ocean, when, after fastening to a huge Bowhead, the creature descended to the
muddy bottom, and there remained for an hour and twenty minutes. The day was
unusually cold, and the men in the boats became much chilled during this period
of inactivity; and to use the captain's own words, when giving an account of the
incident, “The old sogger nearly played us a game of freeze - out." When the
whale returned to the top of the water, it was literally covered with mud, and
appeared much exhausted. A thrust of the lance prevented the animal from again
“sounding," and after throwing up heavy volumes of thick blood, in its spoutings,
it rolled over, "fin out," with but slight struggling.
The Arctic Bowhead is comparatively free from parasitic crustaceans, as well as
barnacles. Occasionally, however, a species of Cyamust is present about the head
The range of this animal extends east and west from Nova Zembla to
the coast of Eastern Siberia. Its northern limits remain undefined ; and it is sel-
or fins.
x, fig. 2:
† We quote the following from Dall's paper yellow. Length 33 inches; breadth (of body)
on the Cyamus mysticeti. See illustration, plate
16 inches. Two female specimens.
Habitat, on the northern Bowhead Whale,
probably Balæna mysticetus, Linn., near Behring
Cyamus mysticeti, n. sp. Body flattened, and Strait.
subovate, segments adjacent. Branchiæ single, This is the most compact of the three spe-
short, stout, pedunculated, a single papilliform cies, as well as the smallest. I find, in
compar-
appendage behind each. Head short and wide. ing large series of C. Scammoni, that a consid-
First pair of legs very small. Hands all simple erable variation in form obtains 80 far as re-
and smooth, fingers greatly recurved. Carpal ar gards comparative length and breadth, even in
ticulation in the second pair of hands, half way adult specimens, and these differences are great-
between the proximal and distal ends of the er than those observed, in the same characters,
hand. Pleon very minute. Color dark brownish between the sexes.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 8.
58
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
dom seen in Behring Sea south of the fifty-fifth parallel, which is about the far-
thest southern extent of the winter ice; while in the Sea of Okhotsk the southern
limit of this species is about the latitude of 54°. In tracing the history of its
capture, we can revert to the Dutch and Russian fishery about Spitzbergen anterior
to 1615, and we find that, as years passed on, it was extended westward, on the
Atlantic side, as far as the icy barriers in Davis Strait, and the adjacent waters
connecting with the Frozen Ocean. Everything tends to prove that the Balæna mys-
ticetus is truly an "ice - whale," for among the scattered floes, or about the borders
of the ice-fields or barriers, is its home and feeding - ground. It is true that these
animals are pursued in the open water during the summer months, but in no
instance have we learned of their being captured south of where winter ice-fields
are occasionally met with. In the Okhotsk Sea and its bays, these whales are
found throughout the season, after the ice disappears; nevertheless, they remain
around the floes until dispelled by the summer sun; and they are found in the
same localities even after the surface of the water has again become congealed by
the rigors of returning winter.
Right whales were pursued for several years on the North-western Coast, on
the coast of Kamschatka, about the Kurile Islands, and in the Japan Sea, before
Bowheads were known to exist in that part of the Arctic Ocean adjoining Behring
Strait, or in the Okhotsk Sea. In the year 1848, Captain Roys, in the American
bark Superior, was the first whaling-master to work his vessel through Behring
Strait into the Arctic Ocean, and there found whales innumerable, some of which
yielded two hundred and eighty barrels of oil.
The habits of the Bowhead are, in many respects, like those of the Humpback,
being irregular in its movements, in its respirations, and in the periods of time
either above or below the surface of the water. When going gently along, or lying
quietly, it shows two portions of the body: the spout-holes, and a part of the
back, on account of the high conical shape of the former, and the swell of the
latter, which is about midway between the spout-holes and flukes.
The Bowheads of the Arctic may be classed as follows: 1st class—the largest
whales, of a brown color; average yield of oil two hundred barrels. 2d class-
smaller, color black; yield of oil one hundred barrels. 3d class—the smallest,
color black; yield of oil seventy-five barrels.* Those belonging to the last named
class are generally found among the broken floes the first of the season, and they
have been known to break through ice, three inches in thickness, that had been
* We do not mean to convey the idea of spe-
cies when mentioning classes, as all observers of
our acquaintance agree that the difference in size
and shade of color arises from difference in age.
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
59
formed over water between the floes. They do this by coming up under and strik-
ing it with the arched portion of their heads. Hence they have been called "ice-
breakers." In point of color, nearly all are found with more or less white on the
under side, especially about the throat and fins.
Whalers bound to the Arctic are generally at the "edge of the ice,” which is
met with near lat. 60°, about the 1st of May. They then work their way
north-
ward as fast as the broken floes will permit, keeping as near shore as practicable,
in order to be on the best "whale-ground," and to avoid the ice. Many whales were
formerly taken off Karaginski Island, lat. 59°, on the coast of Kamschatka. Bch-
ring Strait is sufficiently clear of ice from the 1st to the 20th of July, for ships to
navigate with comparative safety. A large fleet collect, and grope their way through
ice and fog into the Arctic (as termed), and frequently reach the high latitude of
72° north. Occasionally an open season occurs, when whalemen hazard their ships
around Point Barrow. Captain Roys entered the ocean in the middle of July, and
left on the 28th of August, but at the present time ships remain until October.
The principal herding-places of the Bowheads in the Okhotsk were at the ex-
tremities of this great sheet of water, the most northern being the North-east Gulf
(Gulf of Ghijigha), the most southern, Tchantar Bay. The whales did not make
their appearance in North-east Gulf so soon as in the bay. Whalers endeavored,
as soon as possible, to get to the head of Tchantar Bay, where they found the
objects of pursuit in the intermediate water, between the ice and the shore, long
before the main body of the congealed mass was broken up, and before the
ships could get between the ice and the shore, even at high tide—the boats being
sent forward weeks previous to the ships. Soon after the ships' arrival, the whales
avoided their pursuers by going under the main body of ice, situated in the middle
of the bay, where they found breathing-holes among the floes. The boats cruised
about the edge of this barrier, watching for them to emerge from their covert,
which occasionally they did, when chase was instantly given. Frequently, in sailing
along this ice-field, you could hear distinctly the sound of whales blowing among
it, when no water was visible at the point whence the sound came. The first of
the season, before the ice broke up and disappeared, when there were “no whales
about," the question was frequently asked, “Where are the whales?" and as often
answered, “They are in the ice;" and, “When do you think they will come out?”
was answered by, “When the ice leaves." It has been established, beyond question,
that this species pass from the Atlantic to the Pacific, or rather, if we may be al-
lowed the expression, from the Atlantic Arctic to the Pacific Arctic, by the north ;
and, too, it is equally certain that numerous air - holes always exist in the ice that
60
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
covers the Arctic waters, even in the coldest latitudes. These fissures are caused
by the rise and fall of the tides, and contraction and expansion of the ice. Storms
acting upon the water hundreds of miles distant also have their influence in rend-
ing asunder the icy fetters of those frozen seas. It appears to us not improbable
that the Bowhead, has a feeding and breeding ground in a polar sea. And as they
have never been seen during the winter months in any other quarter of the globe,
except as before mentioned, it would appear that they must either remain among
the rough water and broken ice, at the southern edge of the winter barrier, or
migrate to some remote sea unknown to man.
OKHOTSK SEA BOWHEADS.
The preceding remarks have been confined chiefly to the Bowheads of the Arc-
tic, in the vicinity of Behring Strait, north and south. The Okhotsk Sea at one
time equaled if not surpassed the Arctic as a productive whaling-ground. Our
memorandum does not state with certainty what year Bowheads were first taken
in the Okhotsk. It, however, was not earlier than 1847, nor later than 1849.*
They were found to be easy of capture, and yielded a large amount of oil and
bone. On making further explorations, the whales appeared in great numbers, and,
from the peculiar shape of the head, the spout-holes terminating in a sort of cone,
they were at that time called “steeple-tops.” But a few years elapsed before a
large fleet of ships was pursuing the animals throughout the whole extent of this
vast inland water. Tchantar Bay, Taousk and Penjinsk gulfs soon became noted
whaling-grounds, as well as several other points about the coasts. The whales of
this sea, as far as known, are the same species as those of the Arctic; although
in the bays is found, in addition, a very small whale called the "Poggy," which
yields but little oil (twenty to twenty-five barrels). † Many whalemen are of the
* Captain J. H. Swift, who was cruising in enced and very intelligent whaling-masters, it
Behring Sea about the year 1847, is quite posi is desired to make mention, that we are under
tive that the French ship Asia was the first to much obligation to them for valuable data in
take Bowheads in the Okhotsk (in 1847). Cap relation to several species of Cetacea, more es-
tain Roys, of Arctic notoriety (before spoken pecially as they are regarded as very correct and
of), in a recent interview, seemed equally cer close observers of the habits of whales.
tain that the Asia was not the first to take Bow + We are convinced that there are two vari-
heads in that sea. He thinks none were taken eties of Bowheads, which are found on the same
till 1848 or 1849, and that the American ship ground. The variation from the animal above
Huntsville, Captain Freeman Smith, was about described is a bunch, or sort of hump, present
the first, if not the first, to take Bowheads in on the top of the "small,” which is situated
that region. In justice to both of these experi- about six feet forward of the Aukes, extending
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
61
opinion that this is a different species. There is little doubt, however, of this
being a young whale of the same species, as its blubber is close and fine, produc-
ing but little oil in proportion to size of body, as is the case with all calves or
young whales of every description. *
BOWHEAD WHALING.
In the Arctic and about Behring Sea, the whaling is “done from the ship,”
as it is termed : i. e., the vessels cruise, and the look-outs are kept aloft as usual,
and when whales are seen, the boats are lowered and the pursuit is carried on in
sight from the ships, unless obscured by fog. In the Okhotsk, much of the whal-
ing is about the bays, particularly Tchantar Bay, and contiguous waters. The nat-
ure of the pursuit is such, in these localities, that the modus operandi is quite differ-
ent. Vessels bound to Tchantar Bay endeavor to approach the land off Aian, if the
along the top of the back two to three feet, and Bowheads breed but slowly. Moreover, his ob-
in some individuals rises in the highest place servations of many years in northern whaling,
about six inches. The sketch on page 56 will goes to show that the young of this species
perhaps better represent the difference in shape, suck but a short time compared with other ceta-
than a written description. Captain Roys says ceous animals. This opinion seems quite con-
he has repeatedly taken them in the Arctic, as clusive when we compare the immense head and
well as in the Okhotsk. They have been fre baleen of even the smallest individuals with
quently taken in the North-east Gulf (Okhotsk those of other species, as though nature had
Sea). Our personal observation was only on a provided them with immensely capacious mouths
dead one (in Tchantar Bay, 1862), and on that to gather insect food, instead of drawing suste-
individual the protuberance was so slight, that nance from the dam.
As to the linear propor-
it would not have been noticed unless our par tions of the young of the Bowhead, in com-
ticular attention had been called to it. Captain parison with the dam, there is a diversity of
Randolph, of the American whale-ship South opinion among those whalers who may be relied
Boston (1862), informed us at the time that upon as men of excellent judgment, but a large
nearly all the whales he had taken that season majority maintain that the calf is not over one-
in the North-east Gulf were “Bunchbacks," and fourth the length of the cow, and usually the
yielded a very large amount of bone in propor proportions would be nearer one-fifth. From
tion to yield of oil. Captain Roys also men our own observations on the young of other
tioned that one season he took numbers of them, whales, we have arrived at the conclusion that
and to distinguish them from others they were there is considerable diversity of size in the
then called "Bunchbacks." Several whaling young of all whales when first born; and their
masters who have taken them observed that the rapid growth, until weaned, may doubtless be
spiracles are usually situated higher than upon ascribed to the constant attention of the mother,
those not having the bunch or hump on the in affording her offspring a bountiful supply of
"small.”
nutritious milk from her capacious and prolific
* Captain Roys is of the opinion that the udder.
62
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST,
ice will permit, which is generally sufficiently broken and scattered by the 20th of
June; then, working along between the ice and the Siberian coast, to the south-
ward, as far as practicable with the ships, they dispatch boats to follow along the
shore and if possible to reach the head of Tchantar Bay, where whales in former
years were to be found in very large numbers. These expeditions were always
attended with excessive labor, and much exposure as well as risk to the crews.
Frequent instances have been known of boats leaving the ships off Aian, then
threading their way along the coast, between the masses of ice, or between the ice
and shore, as the ebb or flood tides would permit, until they reached the head of
Tchantar Bay. On reaching their destination, and finding whales plenty they
immediately commenced whaling, and by the time the ships arrived, in several
instances, whales enough had been taken to yield a thousand barrels of oil.
The elapsed time from leaving the ship till again joining the vessel in the bay
would vary from one to three weeks. Meanwhile, the crews lived in or around
their boats, being afloat when making the passage or engaged in whaling; and
when driven to the shore by the ice or by stormy weather, or resorting thither to
cook their food, or sleep, the boats were hauled up and turned partially over for
shelter, and tents were pitched with the sails. Fallen trees or drift- wood furnished
abundance of fuel, and by a rousing fire all slept soundly when an opportunity
offered ; but the more abundant the whales, the less the chance of sleep for the
whalemen in those high latitudes, where daylight lasts nearly through the twenty-
four hours during summer.
TCHANTAR BAY WHALING.
Arrived on the ground, with the boats, all surplus provisions and outfits are
quickly landed, and the chase begins. Frequent spouts in the air tell that the
animals are all around. One of the number breaks the smooth surface of the
water, between the land and ice, and is at once pursued; but perhaps, before the
boat can reach within darting or shooting distance, the animal goes down. Then
comes an impatient waiting for it to rise again. As the Bowhead is irregular in
its course, when next seen it may be in another direction. Quickly the boat is
headed for it, and before approaching near enough the whale goes down again. In
this way the chase is frequently prolonged, sometimes abandoned, and other whales
pursued; or, it may be that, when nearly within reach, the animal glides under a
floe and thus evades its pursuers; or, if harpooned, it may run for the ice, and
before being killed reaches it, and escapes with harpoons, lines, etc. If the pursuit
proves successful, the captured whale is towed to the beach at high tide, and a
THE BOWHEAD, OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
63
scarf is cut along the body and through the blubber, to which one end of a tackle
is hooked, the other end being made fast on shore; then as the tide falls the ani-
mal is literally skinned, the carcass rolling down the bank as the process goes on.
The bone is extracted from the mouth as the animal is rolled over and presents the
best opportunity. As soon as the blubber is taken off it is “rafted,"* and lies in
the water until taken on board ship. The water being very cold, the blubber
remains in its natural state for a long time, retaining the oil with but small loss.
While the whaling is going on in this wise, the captain and the “ship-keepers”
improve every opportunity to work the vessel near the whales. If there is an
opening between the ice and the shore, she is at once worked through, either by
towing, kedging, or sailing. On meeting an adverse wind or tide, the vessel is an-
chored with a very light anchor, so that if beset by ice unexpectedly, in the night
or during the dense fogs which prevail, the vessel will drift with the floe, thereby
avoiding the danger of being cut through. Heavy fogs prevail until the ice disap-
pears, and the circumscribed clear water being crowded with vessels and boats, much
care and maneuvring is exercised to prevent accident. These fogs frequently are so
dense that no object can be seen much farther off than a ship's length; conse-
quently, at such times cruising and whaling in the bays is full of excitement and
anxiety. A ship may be lying quietly at anchor one moment, and the next be
surrounded by a field of ice, or the close proximity of another vessel may be re-
vealed by the splashing of the water under her bow. Then comes the blowing of
horns, the ringing of bells, the firing of guns, or pounding on empty casks, to in-
dicate the ship's position, in order to avoid collision.
Neither fog nor drifting ice, however, prevents the whalers from vigorously
prosecuting their work. In thick weather, when neither the spout of the whale
nor the animal itself can be seen, its hollow-sounding respiration may be heard a
long distance. In such instances the boats approach as near as can be judged
where the sound was heard, and if the animal is found and captured, it is at the
risk of the boats coming in contact with passing ships, ice, or what not-and, too,
not knowing with any degree of certainty what part of the bay they may be in,
the first and main object being to capture the whale at all hazards. This being done,
it is taken in tow by the boats, or is anchored. Then, if the crew can not discover
their own ship, but meet with another, the custom is to go on board to eat or
sleep, if necessary, and when recruited, or the fog lifts so as to give them a chance
of finding their own vessel, they are supplied with provisions, if needed, until they
* Tied together with ropes in a sort of raft.
64
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
can reach her.
If anchored, one boat always remains with the whale while the
others go in search of the ship. As soon as found, the master, learning of the
capture, makes every effort to work his vessel to the dead animal; or, if that can
not be done, every favorable tide is improved to tow the whale to the ship, where
it is cut in and tried out in the usual manner. As the season advances the ice
disappears, leaving more room for cruising with the vessels, when the fleet becomes
scattered, and the features of the whaling change. The boats are then kept more
of the time on board, look-outs are stationed at the mast - heads, and the whal-
ing is principally “done from the ship.” Sometimes two boats are sent to
look for whales in an adjoining bay. Meanwhile the nights have become longer.
Then comes the "night-whaling." The phosphorescent light caused by the whale's
movements in the water shows quite distinctly his whereabout, and, the Bowhead
whales being easy of capture compared with other kinds, "night-whaling" is often
successfully pursued.
We have spoken of the Bowheads as being comparatively easy of capture, but
it must not be inferred that the pursuit is not often tedious or unsuccessful, nor is
the attack made without risk of life or limb, as well as in other kinds of whaling.
The Bowheads, compared with other species of whales that are pursued, are con-
sidered very shy and timid. After the ice leaves the bays, until the fall winds
begin, much calm weather is experienced ; and, although we have frequently seen
large numbers of whales spouting among many boats scattered over the water, not a
single animal could be approached near enough to "dart at” with the hand-har-
poon, or to present a fair chance to shoot a bomb-lance into it, notwithstanding
the boats were rigged with extra large sails, in order to take advantage of the light
airs or winds that may prevail in midsummer. The use of oars or paddles would
be quite sure to frighten the whales, and when there is not sufficient wind “to
sail on to them” there is but little or no chance of “getting fast.” After the
"irons” are firmly planted in the animal, or, as we frequently hear whalemen say,
"after the whale has been fastened to, good and solid," down the creature may go
to the bottom, and there roll until either the "irons” are torn from its body or
the line is wound about it, and the valuable prize may be lost. Cases have oc-
curred where the animal, after being "fastened to,” has darted to the depths be-
neath in such a state of trepidation as to unheedingly strike the rocks or sand,
with so much force as to dislocate its head-bones, and cause instant death.
The breeding - places of the Bowheads seem to be a matter of conjecture
among the most observing and experienced whaling-masters. The only place known
has already been mentioned, in the vicinity of Tchantar Bay; and a difference of
THE BOWHEAD,
65
OR GREAT POLAR WHALE.
opinion exists as to whether the "Poggies” before mentioned are calves, or whether
they are not a "scrag” species, which have a corresponding relation to the full-
grown Bowheads that the “scrag" Right Whale has to the larger grades of that
species. Admitting, however, that they are the young ones, their numbers are com-
paratively few to the numerous progeny that are supposed to be brought forth by
the cows during each season. Another singular fact is, that no Bowheads of the
Okhotsk Sea have ever been seen passing in or out the passages of the Kurile
Islands, or from the Okhotsk to Behring Sea, or Arctic whales passing to the
Okhotsk. It has been a mystery among the most experienced whalemen, as to
where the Bowheads resorted to bring forth their young, or where the young re-
mained until grown to a considerable degree of maturity; but within a few years,
whales have been seen around Point Barrow with young calves, and that remote
line of open water, inaccessible to ships, between the summer ice-border and the
northern shores of the American continent, from Point Barrow to Banks' Land,
doubtless affords ample herding and breeding places for the mysticetes and rorquals
which are indigenous to those icy regions.
MARINE MAMMALS.-9.
-
CHAPTER VI:
RIGHT WHALE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
BALENA SIEBOLDI? Gray. (Plate xii.)
This great northern baleen whale, in its principal proportions, resembles the
Balæna mysticetus. The latter, however, is destitute of the protuberance called the
“bonnet," upon the anterior extremity of its beak - like upper jaw, which is a
peculiarly prominent feature of the Balona Sieboldii. The color of the Right Whale
is generally black, yet there are many individuals with more or less white about the
throat and pectorals, and sometimes they are pied all over. Its
average
adult length
may be calculated at sixty feet—it rarely attains to seventy feet—and the two
sexes vary but little in size. Its head is very nearly one-third the length of the
whole animal, and the upper intermediate portion, or the part between the spiracles
and “bonnet,” has not that even spherical form, or the smooth and glossy surface
present with the Bowhead, but is more or less ridgy crosswise. Both lips and head
have wart-like bunches moderately developed, and in some cases the upper surface
of the head and fins is infested with parasitical crustaceans. Its tongue yields oil
like the mysticetus, but its baleen is shorter and of a coarser and less flexible
nature. The average product of oil of the Balona Sieboldii may be set down at one
hundred and thirty barrels; yet there have been many individuals of this species,
captured in early times, that yielded from two hundred to two hundred and eighty
barrels. The amount of bone ranges from one thousand to fifteen hundred pounds.
In former years, the Right Whales were found on the coast of Oregon, and occa-
sionally in large numbers; but their chief resort was upon what is termed the
“Kodiak Ground,” the limits of which extended from Vancouver's Island north-
westward to the Aleutian Chain, and from the coast westward to longitude 150°.
In the southern portion of Behring Sea, also upon the coast of Kamschatka, and
in the Okhotsk Sea, they congregated in large numbers. The few frequenting the
coast of California are supposed to have been merely stragglers from their northern
haunts. Some, indeed, have been taken (from February to April) as far south as
(66)
RIGHT WHALE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
67
the Bay of San Sebastian Viscaino, and about Cedros or Cerros Island, both places
being near the parallel of 29° north latitude ; while on the North-western Coast
they are captured by the whalers from April to September, inclusive. The Balæna
Sieboldii is regarded as being a distinct species from the southern Right Whale, and
is universally known, by American whalemen, as the “North-West Whale." This
distinguished baleen animal of the north, in its geographical distribution, ranges to
the Japan Sea and Gulf of Tartary ; but how many species or varieties are included
under this name is not within our province to decide. Our observations, however,
make it certain that there is a "scrag” Right Whale in the North Pacific which
corresponds very nearly to that of the southern ocean, known under the technical
name of Balona gibbosa? and which yields a paltry amount of oil.
The time of gestation with the Balcena Sieboldi is not known, but is supposed
to be nearly one year ; the dam usually producing but one young at a birth,
although, in some instances, twins have been observed. The new-born “sucker"
is about one-fourth the length of the parent animal, which relative proportions are
approximately uniform in all the whalebone whales which we have had the oppor-
tunity of examining. It has ever been a matter of mysterious conjecture with the
most philosophical whalemen, where the northern Right Whales go to bring forth
their young, and whither they migrate during the winter months. That they do
not go into the southern hemisphere is well known, and it is equally certain that
but a few stragglers, even, reach within a number of degrees of the northern tropic
in their wanderings. The Esquimaux about the north-western shores of Behring
Sea speak about the Balæna mysticetus resorting to the bays when the "small ice
comes, and they look forward to that season as a time of plenty, and reap a kind
of marine harvest by catching numbers of them, thus securing an abundant supply
of food for winter store. It seems, therefore, beyond question, that the mysticetus
is quite at home in that region at the beginning of the Arctic winter, and the
immense numbers of Bowheads and Right Whales that would necessarily appear in
the temperate latitudes, if they migrated southward, would be sure to arrest the
attention of passing navigators, who frequently go far north, even in the winter
season, to make their passages from China and Japan. Some have asserted that
these animals probably congregate around the borders of the drifting or field ice,
which joins the open water of the Pacific about the Kurile and Aleutian Islands.
All agree that they do not pass the tropics and reach the southern ocean. The
southern Right Whales resort to the bays in that region to bring forth their young,
and formerly were sought for in the inland waters of those high southern latitudes,
where many a ship quickly completed her cargo by bay - whaling. But no bay has
68
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
yet been discovered north of the equator, in the Pacific, where the north-western
Right Whales go to calve; and, as before mentioned, nothing is definitely known
of their winter resort. The last seen of them in high latitudes, by whalemen, is
on their return from the Arctic Ocean, when they are found in the vicinity of St.
Paul's Island, Behring Sea, in the month of October, and these are usually very
large. In view of all the facts we have been able to gather, there is little doubt
that these gigantic animals, although of another group, have the same constitutional
habits as the Sperm Whales, of bringing forth their young at any time or place
that nature may require, without resorting to sheltered inland retreats. In the
Okhotsk Sea, the Right Whale is found toward the northern borders in the early
part of the season ; later, the ships cruise in the southern quarter, about the
Kurile Islands.
We find the habits of these animals, when roaming over the ocean, full of
interest. They are often met with singly in their wanderings; at other times in
pairs, or triplets, and scattered over the surface of the water as far as the eye can
discern from the mast - head. Toward the last of the season they are seen in large
numbers, crowded together. These herds are called “gams," and they are regarded
by experienced whalemen as an indication that the whales will soon leave the
ground. Their manner of respiration is to blow seven to nine times at a "rising,'
then “turning flukes” (elevating them six or eight feet out of the water), they go
down and remain twelve or fifteen minutes. It is remarked, however, since these
whales have been so generally pursued, that their action in this respect has some-
what changed. When frightened by the approach of a boat, they have a trick of
hollowing the back, which causes the blubber to become slack, thus preventing the
harpoon from penetrating. Many whales have been “missed,” owing to the boat-
steerer darting at this portion of the body. Having been chased every successive
season for years, these animals have become very wild and difficult to get near to,
especially in calm weather. The manner of propelling the boat at such times is by
paddling, and when there is a breeze, by sailing, if practicable, using the oars only
when it is not possible to use sails or paddles. Sometimes, during the first of the
season, the animals are very wild and shy, and for days in succession the boats
may be in hot pursuit without success.
Among right-whalemen there is a difference of opinion about "going on to a
whale, "* whether it is best to get out of or into its wake, to avoid “gallying” it.
As regards safety, some prefer to have a good breeze; then, setting all practicable
.
*«Going on to a whale" is a whaleman's term for getting near enough to dart the harpoon.

C.M.Scam non dei.
RIGHT WHALE OF THE NORTH
NORTH WEST COAST (BALENA SIEBOLDII?, GRAY)
Plate XII.

Britton & Rey Lith
THE RIGHT WHALE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
69
sail, “run over” the animal to leeward, at the same time that the harpoon is
thrown. The whale, after being struck, often runs to windward, thrashing its flukes
in every direction. After going a short distance, it frequently stops, or “brings
to," "sweeping" as it is said, "from eye to eye,” and at the same time making a
terrific noise called “bellowing ;" this sound is compared to that of a mammoth
bull, and adds much to the excitement of the chase and capture. Others will not
stop until they are hamstrung, as it were, by "spading.” The spading process is
performed by hauling the boat near enough to cut the cords that connect the body
and the flukes, either on the top or underneath, as the attitude of the animal may
be. A large vein runs along the underside of the "small,” terminating at the junc-
tion of the caudal fin, which, if cut, will give the creature its death - wound. The
instrument used for cutting is called a “boat- spade,” which may be compared to a
very wide chisel, with a handle six or eight feet long. Sometimes the cords are
so effectually severed that the flukes become entirely useless, and still the animal
hardly slackens its speed perceptibly, showing, evidently, that its pectorals are pow-
erful propellers. Another mode of stopping the whale is by throwing a number
of harpoons, detached from the line, into the "small;" a kind of torture that
would, if the bleeding victim could speak, cause it to entreat its tormentors to put
an end to its misery. Yet not unfrequently, after being lacerated on every side, it
holds its human pursuers at bay by assuming a vertical attitude, with flukes upper-
most, which are dashed in every direction with a furious swoop, hurling sheets of
spray and foaming water into the boats, and often nearly filling them. But
when once “brought to” it will remain quite stationary for a few minutes, or roll
from side to side, giving the officer of the boat a good opportunity to shoot a
bomb- lance, or use the hand - lance with good effect, which soon dispatches it.
Sometimes, however, one of these huge animals, in spite of the bomb-guns, har-
poons, and all the whaling-gear combined, will, after being "fastened to,” make
the best of its way to windward with the boat, taking it so far from the ship as
to oblige the men to cut the line and give up the chase. Of late, Greener's gun
has been used to some extent in its capture. But before harpoon or bomb guns
came into general use, the whalemen of the North-western Coast made such havoc
among these colossal animals (which were regarded as the most vicious of their
kind), as to have nearly extirpated them, or driven them to some unknown feed-
ing-ground.
1
CHAPTER VII.
THE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE.
SIBBALDIUS - SULFUREUS, Cope. (Plate xiii.)
The largest whale found upon the coast, and the largest known, is the Sul-
phurbottom. Never having had an opportunity of obtaining an accurate measure-
ment of its proportions, we can only state them approximately. Length, sixty to
one hundred feet.* Its body is comparatively more slender than that of the Cali-
fornia Gray. Its pectorals are proportionately small, even in comparison with the
Sperm Whale's, which in size and shape they very nearly resemble, being short and
rounded at their extremities. Its caudal fin bears about the same proportion to
the body as does that of the Finback, while its dorsal is much smaller and nearer
the posterior extremity. Its head is more elongated than the Finner's; its baleen
is broader at the base, the color being a jet black in several specimens we have
examined, while others were of a bluish hue. The Sulphurbottom, in its food and
manner of feeding, is like the other whales of its genus. It is a true rorqual,
with folds beneath the anterior portion of the animal, which are a series of fine
longitudinal furrows. The color of this, the greatest whale of the ocean, is some-
what lighter than the dull black of the lesser rorquals, and in some instances it is
a very light brown, approaching to white; but underneath it is of a yellowish cast
or sulphur color, whence the name "Sulphur bottom” is supposed to have arisen.
Its coating of blubber is unevenly distributed over its body, massively covering the
top of the head, but more thinly disseminated over the main portion of the trunk ;
while the posterior extremity, between the trunk and caudal fin, is more heavily
infolded with the oily covering than all the rest.
* Captain Roys, of whaling notoriety, has Length, 95 feet; girth, 39 feet; length of
kindly furnished me with the following memo jaw-bone, 21 feet; length of longest baleen, 4
randa of a Sulphurbottom whale, which was feet; yield of baleen, 800 pounds; yield of oil,
aken by him while he was in command of the 110 barrels; weight of the whole animal, by
barque Iceland:
calculation, 147 tons,
(70)
TIE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE.
71
A Sulphurbottom whale is found in the Atlantic as well as in the Pacific.
The Pacific species occurs at all seasons on the coasts of the Californias. During
the months from May to September, inclusive, they are often found in large num-
bers close in with the shore, at times playing about ships at anchor in the open
roadsteads, near islands, or capes, but as a general rule they do not approach ves-
sels with the same boldness that the Finback does, although we have observed
them following in a vessel's wake for several leagues. *
us.
* Through the kindness of Doctor J. D. B. When off a mile or two to leeward, our
Stillman, of San Francisco, Cal., we give the whale left us and went to her, but returned
following extracts from his journal of a voyage soon after. He showed great restlessness last
between that port and Realejo, Central America, night; and to-day, whenever we stood off on
in 1850, in relation to a Sulphurbottom which the outward tack, he kept close below us, and
followed the ship Plymouth, in which the Doctor rose just under our quarter, and most commonly
sailed, for twenty-four consecutive days. The to windward, to blow. But whenever we stood
account is as follows: · November 13th: We are toward the land he invariably hung back and
witnesses of a very remarkable exhibition of the showed discontent. This afternoon he left us.
social disposition of the whale. A week ago to It is now twenty-four days. since he attached
day, we passed several, and during the after himself to us, and during that time he has fol-
noon it was discovered that one of them contin. lowed us as faithfully as a dog an emigrant's
ued to follow us, and was becoming more famil wagon. At first we abused him in every way
iar, keeping under the ship and only coming that our ingenuity could devise to drive him off,
out to breathe. A great deal of uneasiness was lest he might do us some mischief; but, save
felt, lest in his careless gambols he might un some scratches he received from our ship's cop-
ship our rudder, or do us some other damage. pering, and numerous sloughing sores, caused
It was said that bilge-water would drive him by the balls that had been fired into him, no
off, and the pumps were started, but to no pur damage was received by either of us from his
pose. At length more violent means were re close companionship, though our white paint
sorted to; volley after volley of rifle-shots were was badly stained by the impurity of his breath.
fired into him, billets of wood, bottles, etc., We long since ceased our efforts to annoy him,
were thrown upon his head with such force as and had become attached to him as to a dog.
to separate the integument; to all of which he We had named him 'Blowhard,' and even fan-
paid not the slightest attention, and he still cied, as we called him, that he came closer
continued to swim under us, keeping our exact under our quarter, when I felt like patting his
rate of speed, whether in calm or storm, and glabrous sides, and saying : Good old fellow.'
rising to blow almost into the cabin windows. As the water grew shoaler he left us, with re-
He seems determined to stay with us until he gret unfeigned on our part, and apparently so
can find better company. His length is about on his. This story of the whale is so remark-
eighty feet; his tail measures about twelve feet able, that were there not so many witnesses, I
across; and in the calm, as we look down into would not venture to tell it, lest I be accused
the transparent water, we see him in all his of exaggeration. There were a number of ex-
huge proportions. November 291h: The bark perienced whalemen among our passengers, who
Kirkwood hove in sight, and bore down to speak said the animal was a 'Sulphurbottom.'”
72
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
It is rarely that the Sulphurbottom "bolts" or "breaches,” yet, when engaged
in this sprightly act, the animal presents itself in that degree of magnificence which
is commensurate with its inordinate activity and immense proportions. The Sul-
phurbottom is considered the swiftest whale afloat, and for this reason is but seldom
pursued, and still more rarely taken. Captain Thomas, of the bark Lagrange, in
1857, off San Bartolome Bay, caught one by first shooting a bomb - lance into a
vital part; and although the whale ran a long distance before “turning up,” the
pursuers were enabled to keep trace of it among the large number around by its
"spouting blood.” When the animal was nearly exhausted, the boats approached
near enough to "get fast," and the capture was completed. This individual yielded
about ninety barrels of oil, and measured eighty-five feet in length. The schooner
Page, of San Francisco, succeeded in taking several Sulphurbottom whales, near
Ascension Island, the capture being made with the bomb-gun and lance. Notwith-
standing that a large proportion of these whales sunk as soon as dead, the whale-
men were enabled to save them, the water being of moderate depth, in consequence
of which they rose to the surface before decomposition was far advanced. The
size of those taken by the Page compared favorably with the one taken by the
Lagrange.
Several days' trial were made in the brig Boston, in 1858, off Cerros Island, to
capture these animals. It was in the month of July, and the sea, as far as the
eye could discern, was marked with their huge forms and towering spouts. Ten
were “bombed” by the best shooters, who affirmed that they "chose their chance,"
but as soon as the gun was discharged the whale would disappear, and that was
the last trace seen of it, except a patch of foam, sometimes mixed with blood. On
the last day of pursuit, toward evening, another vessel appeared in the offing, and
approached within a mile or less, when the last trial bomb was fired, and the men
in the boats looked eagerly to the rising of the wounded whale, but in vain. A
signal was made from the approaching ship that they had seen the animal, as it
“broke water” close to their vessel, when it soon rolled over dead, and sunk. The
swiftness of the Sulphurbottom under water, as demonstrated at this time, appeared
to make pursuit impracticable. Doubtless, several of those fired at received mortal
wounds, or were killed outright, but their propensity to sink, and also to "run
under water," baffled the skill of the whalers to secure them.
On a second voyage of the Page, six of these immense creatures were taken
by the bomb-gun and lance, off the port of San Quentin, Lower California, where
the moderate depth of water was favorable for the pursuit. Large numbers of them
were found on this ground, where they had been attracted by the swarms of sar-

C. M.Scam mor, del
THE SULPHURBOTTOM
Plate XII.
-

Britton & Rey, Lith.
1:3 BALDIUS SULFUREUS, Cope.)
THE SULPHURBOTTOM WHALE.
73
dines and prawns with which the waters were enlivened ; and the whales, when in
a state of lassitude from excessive feeding, would frequently remain nearly motion-
less ten to twenty minutes at a time, thus giving the whaleman an excellent oppor-
tunity to shoot his bomb- lance into a vital part, causing almost instant death.
The enormous size of the Sibbaldius sulfureus is not easily to be comprehended
by the reader, when compared even with the lesser rorquals, or the mysticetus, or
the Cachalot. In 1862, the whalemen at Monterey, California, killed one of these
immense animals which measured ninety-two feet in length. Before they could tow
it to the station, it became “blasted ; "* but on arrival, no effort was spared to
strip the colossal prize of its fatty covering. Accordingly, their "purchases” were
applied to roll the swollen creature over upon the beach ; but in so doing, the
capstan, which was firmly placed on the bank, and had lifted many a large whale,
was torn up and the "falls" were parted. Finally the whalemen gave up the under-
taking, and only cut off the fat that could be reached above water. In contempla-
ting this, the greatest whale of the ocean, one can but admire its prominent char-
acteristics, which are its enormous yet symmetrical proportions, and the muscular
development which enables it to excel in velocity all its congeners, while its whole
bearing indicates its superiority to all the other Cetaceans. It glides over the sur-
face of the ocean, occasionally displaying its entire length. When it respires, the
volume of its vaporous breath ascends to a height which reveals at once, to the
observer, the presence of that leviathan of the deep, whose capture baffles the
practical skill of the most experienced whalers. When "rounding" to descend to
the depths below, it throws its ponderous flukes high above the waves,
with a
swoop that is well in keeping with its matchless strength and vigor.
*“Blasted” is a whaler's term for being much swollen.
MARDNE MAMMALS.-10.
CHAPTER VIII.
THE SPERM
WII ALE.
PHYSETER MACROCEPHALUS,
Linn.
(Plate xiv.)
This, the largest of the toothed Cetaceans, is known to English and American
whalemen as the Sperm Whale, to the Germans as the Pottfisch, and to the French
as the Cachalot. It widely differs from all others of its order, both in figure and
habits. The fully matured animal equals, if it does not exceed, the Bowhead, or
Great Polar Whale, in magnitude and in commercial value. The adult female, how-
ever, is only about one-third or one-fourth the size of the largest male. She is
likewise more slender in form, and has an effeminate appearance. The time of gesta-
tion is supposed to be ten months, and she seldom produces more than one young at
a birth-never more than two-and these are brought forth at any time or place
that nature may demand. The new-born cub is about one-fourth the length of the
mother. It obtains its nourishment from two teats, situated one on each side of the
vaginal opening. In giving suck, it is said the female reclines on her side, when
the calf seizes the teat in the corner of its mouth, thereby giving the milk - food
immediate passage to its throat. The length of time that the young follow the
dam is not known.
The largest males measure from eighty to eighty-four feet. The ponderous head
is nearly one-third of the whole bulk of the animal, and over one quarter of its
length. The opening of the mouth is about five-sixths the length of the head ; the
lower jaw, from the expansion of the condyles, contracts abruptly to a narrow sym-
physis, and is studded on each side with twenty-two or twenty-four strong, sharp,
and conical teeth, fitting to the furrow, or cavity, in the upper jaw, which is desti-
tute of, or contains only rudimentary teeth. The tongue, which is usually of a
whitish color, “is not capable of much protrusion.” The throat, however, is large,
and is said to be capacious enough to receive the body of a man. The eyes are
placed a little above and behind the angle of the mouth. A few inches behind
the eyes are the openings of the ears, which are not over one-fourth of an inch in
174)
THE SPERM WHALE.
75
side;
diameter. Above, and at the junction of the head with the body proper, is a swell
called the “bunch of the neck." About midway between this protuberance and
the caudal fin, is another and larger bunch, called the “hump;" then follows a
succession of smaller processes along the "small,” toward the posterior extremity,
which is termed the "ridge.” The pectorals, or side-fins, are placed a little behind
and below the eyes, and in size rarely exceed six feet in length and three feet in
width. The caudal fin is about six feet in breadth, and measures twelve to fifteen
feet between the extremities, or about one-sixth the length of the whole animal.
Unlike the baleen whales, the Cachalot has but one spiracle, or spout-hole, which is
placed near the anterior and upper extremity of the head, a little upon the left
its external form is nearly like the letter S. This fissure in the adult is ten
or twelve inches in length. The color of the Sperm Whale is generally black, or
blackish - brown above; a little lighter upon the sides and below, except on the
breast, where it becomes a. silvery gray. Some examples, however, are piebald.
The oldest males are frequently well- marked with gray about the nose, or upper
portion of the head, and when this is indicated, they are called "gray - headed.”
In the young Sperm Whales, as in the young of all Cetaceans, the black-
skin, or epidermis, is much heavier than in the adults, it being half an inch in
thickness, or thereabouts, while it does not exceed a quarter of an inch on the old
whale. As age advances, the skin becomes more furrowed. Beneath the black-
skin lies the rich coating of fat, or blubber, which yields the valuable oil of
commerce. The head produces nearly one-third of all the oil obtained. Next
to and above the bone of the upper jaw (which is termed the “coach," or
"sleigh"), is a huge mass of cartilaginous, elastic, tough fat, which is called the
"junk.” Above the "junk,” on the right side of the head, is a large cavity, or
sack, termed the “case," which contains oil in its naturally fluid state, together with
the granulated substance known as “spermaceti.” From this capacious hidden
receptacle, as much as fifteen barrels of “head - matter" has been obtained. The
“ambergris,” which is so highly prized, is nothing more than the retained anal
concretion of a diseased whale. On the left side of the cranium, above the "junk,”
is the breathing- passage, or nostril, of the whale. This, with the "case,” is pro-
tected by a thick, tough, elastic substance called the “head - skin,” which is proof
against the harpoon.
We now come to the general habits of this gigantic animal, relative to its
movements in the vast oceans of the globe. Among the whole order of Cetaceans,
there is no other which respires with the same regularity as the Cachalot. When
emerging to the surface, the first portion of the animal seen is the region of the
76
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
hump; then it raises its head, and respires slowly for the space of about three
seconds, sending forth, diagonally, a volume of whitish vapor, like an escape of
steam; this is called the "spout,” which, in ordinary weather, may be seen from
the mast-head at a distance of three to five miles. In respiring at its leisure, the
animal sometimes makes no headway through the water ; at other times it moves
quietly along at the rate of about two or three miles an hour; or, if "making a
passage” from one feeding-ground to another, it may accelerate its velocity. When
in progressive motion (after “blowing”), hardly an instant is required for inspira-
tion, when the animal dips its head a little, and momentarily disappears; then it
rises again to blow, as before, each respiration being made with great regularity.
The number of its spoutings, when in a state of quietude, depends on the size of
the animal: varying in the adult females and the younger of both sexes from the
oldest and largest males. The same may be said as to the period of time it remains
upon or beneath the surface of the ocean. With the largest bulls, the time occu-
pied in performing one expiration and one inspiration is from ten to twelve seconds,
and the animal will generally blow from sixty to seventy-five times at a "rising,"
remaining upon the surface of the sea about twelve minutes. As soon as “his
spoutings are out,” he pitches head-foremost downward ; then “rounding out," turns
his flukes high in the air, and, when gaining nearly a perpendicular attitude, de-
scends to a great depth, and there remains from fifty minutes to an hour and a
quarter.
While on a cruise in the bark Rio Grande around the Galapagos Islands, in
1853, a large Cachalot was captured, which yielded eighty-five barrels of oil. This
animal was pursued from eleven o'clock A. M. to four P. M., during which time it
spouted, or "blowed,” very regularly, fifty-five times at each "rising" while on the
surface, and when he descended was not visible again for fifty-five minutes. All
this time he was going a direct course at the rate of three miles an hour. The
smaller and younger whales, however, are not so regular in their time of remaining
upon or below the surface of the water, and, as before mentioned, they spout a
less number of times. They generally continue above the water one-fourth or one-
fifth of the time consumed by the others, making thirty or forty spouts while up, and
remaining under water twenty to thirty minutes. But when the Cachalot becomes
alarmed, or is sporting in the agean, its actions are widely different. If frightened,
it has the faculty of instantly siyking, although nearly in a horizontal attitude (as
the sailors say, "he can let go and go down in a jiffy"). When merely startled,
it will frequently assume a perpendicular position, with the greater portion of its
head above water, to look and listen ; or, when lying on the surface, it will sweep
11

C.M. Scamror je
SPERM WHALE
Plate XIV.


THE PHYSETER MACROCEPHALUS LINN.)
一
​THE SPERM WHALE.
77
around from side to side with its Alukes, to ascertain whether there is any object
within reach. At other times, when at play, it will elevate its flukes high in the
air, then strike them down with great force, which raises the water into spray
and foam about it; this is termed “lobtailing.” Oftentimes it descends a few
fathoms beneath the waves; then, giving a powerful shoot nearly out of the water
at an angle of forty-five degrees or less, falls on its side, or leaps bodily out in a
semi- lateral attitude, coming down with a heavy splash, producing a pyramid of
foam which may be seen from the mast- head, on a clear day, at least ten miles,
and is of great advantage to the whaler in searching for his prey. These singular
antics of the Sperm Whale are said to be performed in order to rid itself of a
troublesome parasite, known among the whale- fishers by the name of "Suckfish ;
but the animal is seldom infested with the parasitic crustacea which are indigenous
to the rorquals and Right Whales.
Many have the impression that the Sperm Whale is found but rarely out of
the limits of tropical or temperate waters, but we know that the largest Cacha-
lots have often been taken as far south as 56° of latitude, both in the Pacific
and Atlantic, and as far north in the Pacific as Cape Ommany, which is in latitude
56° 12'.
We may further add, that it is one of the few species of the larger Cetaceans
which inhabit every ocean not bound with icy fetters during the rigors of winter,
and although great numbers are found in the cold latitudes, they also delight to
bask in the equatorial waters under a tropical sun.* It is true, however, that but
few are met with in the far northern limits of the Atlantic or the Pacific, compared
with the number which inhabit the great range of the southern seas. This, how-
ever, may be easily accounted for, as there is no northern thoroughfare by which
these whales of passage can migrate to or from the Atlantic or Pacific, while at
the south they are continually passing to and fro from ocean to ocean throughout
the year.
The Cachalots are gregarious, and they are often seen in schools numbering
from fifteen or twenty up to hundreds. The oldest and largest males, however, for
the greater part of the year roam alone; yet there is no lack of instances where
* We are aware that eminent naturalists have to substantiate, as far as our observations go,
averred that there are several species of the what that excellent and practical observer, Beale,
Sperm Whale, on the ground of their geograph- has maintained : that there is but one species of
ical distribution; and it is not within our prov Sperm Whale “in the ocean roving,” and as far
ince, nor is it our intention, to enter into any as any variety is visible, it exists in every zone
discussion relative to the question, further than and hemisphere.
78
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-IVESTERN COAST.
these monsters have been found in herds by themselves; but the usual assemblage
is made up of males and females — the latter with their young. At such times two
or three large bulls are in attendance, which lead the van. The female is quite
solicitous for her playful offspring, and when pursued, the mother may be seen
assisting it to escape by partially supporting it on one of her pectorals. The
females likewise manifest much sympathy for each other, for when one of their
number is attacked by the boats, they all “bring to," and remain, usually for some
time, with their dying companion ; by this means a number of whales are often
captured from the same school. The young bulls periodically go in large herds;
but, unlike the females, if one of their band is harpooned, its cowardly associates
make off in great trepidation. When individually attacked, however, it makes a
desperate struggle for life, and often escapes after a hard contest. Nevertheless, it
is not an unusual occurrence for the oldest males to be taken with but little effort
on the part of the whaler. After being struck, the animal will oftentimes lie for a
few moments on the water as if paralyzed, which affords the active man of the
lance opportunity to dart his weapon effectually, and complete the capture. It
is said that the Cachalots are endowed with the faculty of communicating with each
other in times of danger, when miles (and some observers say leagues) distant.
If this be true, the mode of communication rests instinctively within their own
contracted brains.
It has been the general belief that the Sperm Whale is excessively timid; but,
if this is its general character, there are many exceptions among the larger males,
for when attacked, they have in repeated instances turned upon their pursuers, in
the most defiant manner, and their own disfigured jaws—which are their principal
weapons of defense-prove that they either engage in desperate contentions with
their kind, or with some unknown leviathan inhabiting the deep. Moreover, it is,
we believe, a well-established fact, that ships have been sunk by the deliberate
assaults of vicious, gray - headed, old Cachalots. *
* The accounts of the destruction of the Ameri-
can ships Essex and Ann Alexander having been
published in various works pertaining to the
whale-fishery, we will only briefly note them
here. The Essex was destroyed in the South
Pacific by an infuriated whale, in the year 1820,
under the following circumstances. The animal
was seen ahead approaching the ship at the rate
of about three miles an hour, and the ship run-
ning at about the same speed, when the huge
creature gave the vessel such a shock, as he came
in collision, as to spring a serious leak. Then
he went down and re-appeared a ship's length
or two off, lashing the water into foam. After
going a distance of about one-fourth of a mile,
and recovering from the concussion, he returned
with great velocity, and, striking the ship's bow,
staved it in, which caused the vessel to sink ten
minutes after. The Ann Alexander was sunk by
a Sperm Whale on the coast of Peru, in 1851,
THE SPERM WHALE.
79
It is the opinion of many experienced and observing whalemen— with whom
we concur—that the Sperm Whale has a higher organization than any other species
of Cetacea. Its massive form is composed of bone, flesh, and sinew, which has a
finer texture than that of the rorqual or the mysticetus. The latter subsists on
minute crustacea and small fishes, skimmed as it were from the surface of the seas
and inland waters. The mouth of the Cachalot is armed with teeth of ivory, finely
set, for the purpose of prehension, and the animal is endowed with the power of
descending to the remote caverns of the ocean in search of its prey, and remaining
there a length of time unequaled by any of its congeners. The principal food of
the Sperm Whale is familiarly named by the whalers “squid ;" which includes
more species of cuttle - fishes (cephalopods). The animal's manner of
pursuing its prey
is not definitely known; but several high authorities main-
tain, that after descending to the desired depth it drops its lower jaw nearly to
a right angle with the body, thereby exhibiting its polished white teeth, which
attract within its reach the swimming food, while the creature moves along through
the ocean's depths; the moment its prey comes in contact with the expanded jaw,
one
or
under like circumstances to those of the Essex. in this relief boat, the whale was foiled in his
In 1807, the ship Union, of Nantucket, was attempt to destroy it. In the midst of the fray,
wrecked “by striking,” says the narrator, “on a the bleeding animal caught sight of the ship,
Sperm Whale." It was in the night, and the which was approaching the boats under flowing
question is, whether the ship struck the animal
sails. Instantly the enraged animal made for
accidentally, or whether the whale made an the vessel ; while those on board, being advised
attack? Other disasters to vessels might be of the fact, put the craft before the wind to
cited, which were occasioned by the attack of, avoid him. On the whale came; but, owing to
or by coming in collision with, the colossal the increased speed of the ship, he shot past
Cachalot. The ferocity of many old male Sperm the stern a few feet, and soon after went into
Whales has been fully demonstrated by their his “flurry," and "turned up," when he was
attacks on boats, and to distinguish them from taken to the vessel, “cut in,” and “tried out,"
other whales they are often called “eating yielding seventy-five barrels of oil. Another
whales." According to the author of the Arctic instance, somewhat similar, occurred to the boats
Whalemen, an instance occurred with the boats of the bark Athalia.
however, the
of the ship Citizen, upon the Atlantic Ocean, in whale, after staving a boat, not being content
the year 1851, where, after the whale had been with the manner in which he destroyed it,
struck, lanced, and while spouting blood, he made went deliberately at the remains and chewed
an attack and demolished one boat, after which them into fine pieces. These instances are
he gave chase to another; but the fifth boat, only mentioned as among scores of other simi-
having been dispatched from the ship to the res lar cases which might be given. And we have
cue, came up just in time to divert the animal's no doubt but that many vessels which have
attention, when he turned upon it. By the dex sailed from port, and never been heard of after,
terous management of the captain, who had come have suffered wreck through Cachalots.
In this case,
80
THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
MARINE MAMMALS OF
it is instantly crushed, and a portion or all is swallowed. This hypothesis of the
mode in which the animal feeds may be correct. As to the nature of its food
there is no question, for it is well known that the cephalopods are its main
dependence; yet occasionally the codfish, albicore, and bonito, are laid under con-
tribution. But the true and natural way in which this great rover of the hidden
enor-
their power
* Relative to the food of the Sperm Whale, remains. From the parts of this specimen which
we quote the following from Beale's interesting are still preserved in the Hunterian Collection,
account of the Sepia octopus :
and which have always strongly excited the at-
tention of naturalists, it must have measured at
NATURE OF THE SPERM WHALE'S FOOD.
least six feet from the end of the tail to the
The Sepia octopus, or “sea squid,” as it is end of the tentacles. But this last we must
termed by whalers, sometimes reaches an imagine a mere pigmy, when we consider the
mous size. Mr. Henry Baker, F. R. S., in the enormous dimensions of the one spoken of by
Philosophical Transactions for 1758, p. 777, after Dr. Schewediawer, in the Philosophical Transac-
having given an interesting description of a tions, vol. lxxiii, p. 226, whose tentaculum, or
specimen, sent to him for examination by the limb, measured twenty-seven feet in length; but
Earl of Macclesfield, states that it can, by spread let the doctor speak for himself, "One of the
ing its arms abroad like a net, so fetter and gentlemen,” says he, “who was so kind as to
entangle the prey they inclose, when they are communicate to me his observations on this sub-
drawn together, as to render it incapable of ex ject (ambergris), also, ten years ago, hooked a
erting its strength; for, however feeble these Spermaceti Whale that had in its mouth a ten-
branches or arms may be singly,
taculum of the Sepia octopoda nearly twenty-
united becomes surprising; and we are assured seven feet long! This did not appear its whole
- Nature is so kind to these animals — that if in length, for one end was corroded by digestion,
their struggles any of their arms are broken off, so that in its natural state it may have been a
after some time they will grow again, of which great deal longer. When we consider,” says the
a specimen at the British Museum is an un Doctor, “the enormous bulk of the tentaculum
doubted proof, for a little new arm is there seen here spoken of, we shall cease to wonder at the
sprouting forth in the room of a large one which common saying of the fishermen, that the cut-
had been lost. “It is evident," he continues, tle-fish is the largest fish of the ocean.”
In
" from what has been said, that the sea polypus, Todd's Cyclopædia of Anatomy, p. 529, treating
or octopus, must be terrible to the inhabitants of Cephalopoda, in an admirable paper by Mr.
of the waters, in proportion to its size (Pliny Owen, it states, that “the natives of the Poly-
mentions one, whose arms were thirty feet in nesian Islands, who dive for shell -fish, have a
length), for the close embraces of its arms and well-founded dread and abhorrence of these
adhesion of its suckers must render the efforts of formidable cephalopods, and one can not feel
its prey ineffectual, either for escape or resist surprised that their fears should have perhaps
ance, unless it be endowed with an extraordi exaggerated their dimensions and destructive at-
ary degree of strength.” Of the smaller genera tributes." The same learned writer, after having
of these animals, the reader will find some in beautifully described another animal of the same
teresting details, by referring to the appendix to order, observes : "Let the reader picture to him-
Tuckey's Voyage to the Congo, vol. iii. There is self the projecting margin of the horny hook de-
also an account of a newly discovered cepha- veloped into a long-curved, sharp-pointed claw,
lopod, in the appendix to Sir J. Ross' Voyage to and these weapons clustered at the expanded
the Antarctic Regions. A gigantic cephalopod was terminations of the tentacles and arranged in a
discovered by Drs. Bank and Solander, in Capt. double alternate series, along the whole internal
Cook's first voyage, floating dead upon the sea, surface of the eight muscular feet, and he will
surrounded by birds, who were feeding on its have some idea of the formidable nature of the
-

-
(eds
.
1
in i... on
BIHis in i
indi, gra lover op til?
i with is of ship
Lid n till rise (
1
Still
6
*
herine thee
Diet, l-ic power
aud it's
of all U21
在​正
​i
7
5
2
Si., jt 910t!.
:) Cience
Bizi th.s 1.1
IV. Will (Galeri
w?of tiretra
in tla Phi
21, 1116 m
indi!r is
niinkit!
PÅ Husits
he, to Was bo : Je
fi'et"; int 2. Siryat uns on this
ar vipigo also, if yeu i ftis, born
Da li i liekant land in this ui'
tac::' of the Soprano, 11 y
2 l'et, 10713! Tbio di noi ....
?".1, for one end 3* "TTU!!
att in is natu al state it
iin
W13-1) niler,"
i the ter
Hell of
Cast 10 Tintir
1 lapagos ?n, that
uite
io
Anitta, ?', p. ini, ictitions
ola adirir
*, that is Les of tien :
Lielish, but
ride
laure': '
iu
0.5, ali one
pel
ir fears would
';!;. meni, 13 ario statie?
Jill, li a. ?
r, kimi hrines,
Hitam !!.!!
bei an.)? ailsi o te M**!!?
(10., boje meso T
ileri wifi
In the durat boli.se
velj",
: Ivel, - 19:"p-3.0,
an lae
clustat El tje
1
teni
tortacles a "r?: 1:11
din 'on th. tu nies
:: CUT I'?, Amal
Iurii,!o ato l'e
LY
! ;-. in
అవుతుందని
on it.l.1.8.!
Teemme
"
.
1
.
het pro;
1. Prit,
of peril." (
Bhes.
Kablar 11
mi:201 - RT.02 L US ON
a to
her is
uit 4,7 l Hostin
i ceyle
11 11",11:50
intense
14), !t.
?, 1 pp, ila hea,
ir f. liit-
.
33 :. ), ' .; ,";.ܝ .
*
:' :I:
Plate XY
Britton & Rey Lith

C.M. Scammon del.
SPERM WHALE IN SEARCH OF FOOD.
THE SPERM WHALE.
81
-
depths seeks and devours its animal food, is still tinged with mystery. In past
years it was commonly believed that the Cachalot's home was in the fathomless
depths of the ocean, and that only a few stragglers were occasionally met with
near coast waters of moderate depth. But we find abundant proof, and from our
own observations, too, that they are met with and have been captured in waters
carniverous Onychoteuthis." This species of ceph- by the albicore, or dolphins, and propel them-
alopod is thus armed with those kind of teeth selves head first, in a horizontal direction, for
at the termination of the tentacles, in order eighty or a hundred yards, assisting their pro-
to secure the "agile, slippery, and mucus-clad gression, probably, by a rotatory or screwing
fishes” on which it preys. And there is an in motion of their arms or tentacles, and which they
stance recorded in Sir Grenville Temple's Excur have the power of thus moving with a singular
sions in the Mediterranean, by which we perceive velocity. This species, also, as well as the large
that these terrible creatures sometimes prey upon
Onychoteuthis, I am led to believe, often serves
men! “In those shallow waters,” says Sir Gren the Sperm Whale with food. I have seen, on
ville, "are caught great quantities of fish, by several occasions, very large limbs of the latter
forming curved lines or palisades some way out species of squid floating on the surface of the
to sea with palm branches, by which the fish ocean, appearing as if bitten off by some ani-
that come up with the high water are detained mal- most probably by the Sperm Whale— for
when it recedes. The horrid polypus, which is, when these remains have been seen, I have al-
however, greedily eaten, abounds, and some are ways looked most anxiously for these animals,
of enormous size. They prove at times highly and have never been disappointed in seeing them
dangerous to bathers. An instance of this oc within a few hours afterward. One day, being
curred two years since. A Sardinian captain, on the coast of Peru, off Paita Head, as it is
bathing at Jerbeh, felt one of his feet in the called, which lies in about the latitude of five
grasp of one of these animals; on this, with his degrees south, I was startled by seeing a remark-
other foot he tried to disengage himself, but this able-looking animal raising itself quickly to the
limb was immediately seized by another of the surface of the sea by means of a number of very
monster's arms; he then, with his hands, en long flexible arms, which it threw about with
deavored to free himself, but these, also, in suc great precision, in a rotatory or screwing-like
cession, were firmly grasped by the polypus, and motion, so that it appeared to move itself through
the poor man was shortly after found drowned, the water with the same kind of action that an
with all his limbs strongly bound together by eight-pronged corkscrew would maintain in pass-
the arms and legs of the fish; and it was extra ing through any penetrable substance. This curi-
ordinary, that where this happened, the water ous animal, however, quickly disappeared ; and it
was scarcely four feet in depth!” Other species was not until I explained its appearance to the
of these surprising animals, as the Calamaries, captain, that I knew it to be a squid. On an-
or "flying squid," as they are termed by the other occasion, while upon the Bonin Islands,
whalers, have the power of propelling themselves searching for shells upon the rocks, which had
through the atmosphere. “There is good reason just been left by the receding sea -tide, I was
for believing," says Mr. Owen, “that some of much astonished at seeing at my feet a most ex-
the small, slender-bodied, subulate species of this traordinary looking animal, crawling toward the
genus are enabled to strike the water with such surf, which had only just left it. I had never
force as to raise themselves above the surface, seen one like it under such circumstances before;
and dart, like the flying - fish, for a short dis it therefore appeared the more remarkable. It
tance through the air.” I have myself seen, was creeping on its eight legs, which, from their
very frequently, while in the North and South soft and flexible naturo, bent considerably under
Pacific, tens of thousands of these animals dart the weight of its body, so that it was lifted by
simultaneously out of the water, when pursued the efforts of its tentacula only, a small distance
MARINE MAMMALS. - 11.
82
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
where the soundings were not over one hundred and fifty fathoms, and frequently
not over sixty or seventy: for example, off San Bartolome Bay, coast of Califor-
nia; also about Point Abraojos on the same coast, and near Asuncion Island, which
is midway between the first named points.
It has been previously remarked that the elongated under jaw of the Sperm
Whale, with its bristling teeth, is its chief arm of attack and defense, and the agile
manner in which the animal uses it when upon or near the surface is quite sur-
ured across its expanded arms about four feet,
while its body was not larger than a large
clenched hand. It was that species of Sepia
which is called by whalers 'rock squid."" Thus
are these remarkable creatures, from the differ-
ent adaptation of their tentacles, and slight
modifications of their bodies, capable of sailing,
flying, swimming, and creeping on shore; while
their senses, if we may judge from the elaborate
mechanism of their organs, must possess corre-
sponding acuteness and perfection. But for the
description of the anatomy of these animals, I
must refer the reader to Mr. Owen's masterly
paper on that subject, in Todd's Cyclopaedia of
Anatomy, above quoted.
from the rocks. It appeared much alarmed at
seeing me, and made every effort to escape, while
I was not much in the humor to endeavor to
capture so ugly a customer, whose appearance
excited a feeling of disgust, not unmixed with
fear. I, however, endeavored to prevent its ca-
reer, by pressing on one of its legs with my foot;
but although I made use of considerable force
for that purpose, its strength was so great that
it several times quickly liberated its member, in
spite of all the efforts I could employ in this
way on wet slippery rocks. I now laid hold of
one of the tentacles with my hand, and held it
firmly, so that the limb appeared as if it would
be torn asunder by our united strength. I soon
gave it a powerful jerk, wishing to disengage it
from the rocks to which it clung so forcibly by
its suckers, which it effectually resisted; but a
moment after, the apparently enraged animal
lifted its head, with its large eyes projecting
from the middle of its body, and letting go its
hold of the rocks, suddenly sprung upon my
arm, which I had previously bared to my shoul-
der, for the purpose of thrusting it into holes
in the rocks to discover shells, and clung with
its suckers to it with great power, endeavoring
to get its beak, which I could now see between
the roots of its arms, in a position to bite. A
sensation of horror pervaded my whole frame
when I found this monstrous animal had affixed
itself so firmly upon my arm.
Its cold slimy
grasp was extremely sickening, and I immedi-
ately called aloud to the captain, who was also
searching for shells at some distance, to come
and release me from my disgusting assailant.
He quickly arrived, and taking me down to the
boat, during which time I was employed in
keeping the beak away from my hand, quickly
released me by destroying my tormentor with
the boat-knife, when I disengaged it by por-
tions at a time. This animal must have meas-
Having thus quoted from Doctor Beale on
the nature of the Sperm Whale's food, we will
add another quotation, relative to ambergris:
Though ambergris, even during the sixteenth
century, appeared to be much valued as a mer-
cantile commodity by the English, it is curious
we knew nothing of its source, and very little
of the use which was made of it in other coun-
tries. In the year 1672, we find the Honorable
Robert Boyle claiming the honor of having dis-
covered its source, from a manuscript which was
found on board a Dutch East-Indiaman, which
had fallen into our hands by the chance of war.
This precious document stated, that "amber-
greese is not the scum or excrement of the
whale, but issues out of the root of a tree,
which tree, howsoever it stands on the land,
alwaies shoots forth its roots towards the sea,
seeking the warmth of it, thereby to deliver the
fattest gum that comes out of it, which tree
otherwise by its copious fatness might be burnt
and destroyed: wherever that fat gum is shot into
the sea, it is so tough that it is not easily
broken from the root, unless its own weight and
THE SPERM WHALE.
83
prising. It
It opens and shuts its mouth, if need be, in a twinkling, or it throws the
lower jaw down to nearly a right angle with its body, or sways it from side to side
at an astonishing angle, when we take into consideration the distance between the
condyles at their junction with the animal's head. When the creature essays to
grasp a large object on the water, it instantly rolls over to bite ; but does it necessa-
rily follow that the same attitude must be maintained when obtaining its food in the
abyss beneath? Or is it impossible that this protruding jaw of massive bone and
the working of the warm sea doth it, and so it all such whales they killed, and it has been
floats on the sea; there was found by a souldier since found in lesser quantities in several male
seven-eighths of a pound, and by the chief two whales of that kind, and in no other, and that
pieces, weighing five pounds. If you plant the scarcely in one of a hundred of them. They
trees where the stream sets to the shore, then add further, that it is contained in a cyst or
the stream will cast it up to great advantage ! bag, without any inlet or outlet to it, and that
March 1st, 1672, in Batavia.” (Phil. Trans., vol. they have sometimes found the bag empty and
viii, p. 6133.)
yet entire; the bag is nowhere to be found but
But notwithstanding the above statement, Doc near the genital parts of the fish. The amber-
tor Thomas Brown, in his work published a few gris is when first taken out moist, and of an
years afterward (1686), in his description of a exceedingly strong and offensive smell.” This
Sperm Whale which was thrown on the coast of letter was written to the Royal Society in 1724.
Norfolk, states that “in vain it was to rake for (Phil. Trans., vol. xxxiii, p. 193.)
ambergriese in the paunch of this leviathan, as
In the same year, however, we have another
Greenland discoverers, and attests of experience letter from America, written to the Royal Society
dictate, that they sometimes swallow great lumps by the Honorable Paul Dudley, F. R. S., who,
thereof in the sea-insufferable fetor denying that after telling us that the old Sperm Whales carry
inquiry; and yet, if as Paracelsus encourageth, their young ones “on the flukes of their tails,
ordure makes the best musk, and from the most who with their fins clasp about the small, and
feted substances may be drawn the most odorif hold themselves on,” also says, “one of our
erous essences, all that had not Vespasian's nose country doctors tells me that the tooth of this
might boldly swear there was a substance for fish (Sperm Whale) shaved or powdered, and
such extractions ;" which proves that the doctor so infused in liquor, equals the hartshorn, and
still suspected that the ambergris was found in has been used in the small-pox, and given to
the Sperm Whale, although it was found by lying-in women in case of sickness, with suc-
this animal floating in the sea, and swallowed cess!- the quantity is as much as will lie upon
by it in "great lumps !” But it was reserved an English shilling.” Farther on in the same
for Doctor Boylston, of Boston, to enlighten letter he states, “I meddle not here with the
mankind upon this important subject, and he precious ambergris found in this whale, because
therefore claims the discovery of its source in I design to close the whole with that discovery.'
the following manner : “The most learned part And here is his conclusion: “But truth,” says
of mankind are still at loss about many things he, “is the daughter of time; it is now at
even in medical use, and particularly were so length found out, that occultum naturæ is an
in what is called ambergris, until our whale animal production, and bred in the body of the
fishermen of Nantucket, in New England, some Spermaceti Whale. I doubt not,” he continues,
three or four years past made the discovery. “but in process of time some further particulars
Their account to me is this: Cutting up a may be procured with respect to ambergris, and
spermaceti bull-whale, they found, accidentally, I shall be proud to transmit them; in the mean
in him, about twenty pounds weight, more or time I hope the Society will accept of this first
less, of that drug; after which, they and other essay, and allow my poor country the honor of
such fishermen became very curious in searching discovering, or at least ascertaining, the origin
29
84
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
ivory is not sometimes employed to remove the kraken from its slimy bed? Be
that as it may, however, it is our belief that all Cetaceans occasionally resort to
the bottom of the ocean, sea, or inland waters, as well as rise to the surface to
breathe and display their various attitudes. We also regard the Cachalot as able
to descend to a greater depth and remain there a longer time than any other
whale; and that it evinces, in its characteristic movements or evolutions, a supe-
riority over all other cetaceous animals that have come under our observation.
and nature of ambergris.” (Phil. Trans., vol. ambergris is not only used as a medicine and
xxxiii.)
perfume, but considerable use is also made of
In a paper which was read before the Royal it in cooking, by adding it to several dishes as
Society by Doctor Schwediawer, in 1783, re a spice. A great quantity of it is also constant-
specting the medicinal properties of ambergris, ly bought by the pilgrims who travel to Mecca,
he remarks, that “if we wish to see any medi- probably to offer it there, and make use of it
cal effects from this substance, we must cer in fumigations, in the same manner as frankin-
tainly not expect them from two or three cense is used in Catholic countries. The Turks
grains, but give rather as many scruples of it make use of it as an aphrodisiac. Our perfum-
for å dose; though even then I should not ers add it to scented pastiles, candles, balls,
expect much from it, as I have taken of pure bottles, gloves, and hair powder; and its essence
unadulterated ambergris in powder thirty grains is mixed with pomatum for the face and hands,
at once, without observing the least sensible either alone or united with musk, though its
effect from it. A sailor, however, who had the smell is to some persons extremely offensive.
curiosity to try the effects of some recent Ambergris may be known to be genuine by its
ambergris upon himself, took half an ounce of fragrant scent when a hot needle or pin is
it melted upon the fire, and found it a good thrust into it, and its melting like fat of a uni.
purgative, which proves that it is not quite form consistence, whereas the counterfeit will
inert." (Phil. Trans., vol. lxxii, p. 226.) not yield such a smell, nor prove of such a fat
In 1791, the attention of the government was
texture. One thing, however, is very remark-
drawn to this subject, in order to discover if it able, that a resemblance to the smell of this
could be more frequently found. When Captain drug, which is the most agreeable of all the
Coffin was examined at the bar of the House of perfumes, should be produced by a preparation
Commons on the subject, he stated that he of one of the most odious of all substances.
had lately brought home three hundred and Mr. Homberg found that a vessel in which he
sixty-two ounces, troy, of this costly substance, had made a long digestion of human fæces, ac-
which he had found in the anus of a female quired a very strong and perfect smell of am-
Sperm Whale that he had captured off the bergris, insomuch that any one would have
coast of Guinea, and which he stated was very thought that a great quantity of essence of
bony and sickly. At the time he brought this ambergris had been made in it; the perfume
quantity to England, the ambergris was selling was so strong and offensive that the vessel had
for twenty-five shillings an ounce, but he stated to be removed from the laboratory! (Brande's
he sold his for nineteen shillings and sixpence Manual of Chemistry, p. 594.) Ambergris appears
per ounce, to a broker, who exported it to Tur to be nothing but the hardened fæces of the
key, Germany, and France, among the natives Spermaceti Whale, which is pretty well proved
of which it appears to have been long celebrated from its being mixed so intimately with the
for its aphrodisiacal properties. "The use of
“The use of refuse of its food (the squids' beaks). Mr.
ambergris,” says Brande, “in Europe is now Enderby has a fine specimen of this substance,
nearly confined to perfumery, though it has six or seven inches long, which bears very evi-
formerly been used in medicine by many emi dent marks of having been molded by the lower
nent physicians. In Asia and part of Africa, portion of the rectum of the whale.


?EK! (:,* sehen
tiin niin ito?
Be
tut al Citievede; ons la peiliniy tesort to
ind i vaters, as I ricot to ile nu fie " to
Hiilis might the ('3iloi as a'lo
is all in log file for any rider
art, movements per
til i, siun
this
1
ਸn
in
1
Il
De 8:10
5
le
ܩܘܬܗܝ
**
YOU anaingis is not conly ill ä's l'in and
pen! :bt es jarabi uspii w les
urile. selling it !) tira lisad
re: "Siyonis also auta
Pernil, tnvel t. VI.-cca,
mir i tome, i r'
180 of it
the 8.1 2.!) .* as fra krin-
lia (athili 10!
Tirs Tums
is as 'n 2):
Our 1,ifana
to Sit!...
m.leslaws,
21:(!!:
; turlig fansene
xrisi
er the
od burders,
1 with milima
Figli estre, civiļn :
Inn to kipii size lysts
•1 ,
Haint M
11on it tot fel!'? ji in
th
ituel il !1'S If it on!
'1', tihe.cas ti
11.
cha yil, ror:ruit i á fit
', thinner, Apoter, ! 16. 187.1"},
reside into ti
is .. mais t utrc...
Soul ! Pluce i lir? prep. atun
he 11.corate Ouious if il Fins.
ca i ne..
Iure found t'i Bei Ihlich he
Did I kng liçesion of hu li fica
linii tem trening and set to suit of E-
1rporis ins nei tint inny (16
4 Detta
that a
?!91:12
toyenne (f
:15
1.1 the
allers had been
; the perfu
id, sie &
WES of small it. I can
for tvirtina isuli 93 ali
estareid ti eitt ti, ir
he mola
annten
'! Xi'e 3 bin ai of Beans it p. 594.) A.I' 1".'..
1 er ( 12€, o Broker, w
helt T: r be rethin ni' whe hard led for seu
heliall 2. , wwel tar À ! ti a tivas :: nt it and Firl is pretis
jeh : 1pfers to
tiur. its bora,!, Linnéunion
disia
“:ji fue of ats tes
6... 'S B: rile, "ii luipe lo
Eyes El tine
perfurver, the site it alone Or Neronis
''w hy mr.
(10: 12V
20:
In didn't part of afwa, ;10.'!
1
-
1
I.
. ܚ ܣ
wand
, er...
-)! De
ne!
ie
Plate XVI.
1
i
3
)
2
C.M.Scammon, del.
key.
Fig.1 THE BLACKFISH (GLOBIOCEPHALUS SCAMMONII, COPE.) 2. UNDERSIDE View. 3. OUTLINES OF TOP OF HEAD SHOWING SPOUTHOLE

新
​CHAPTER IX.
THE DOLPHINS.
In addition to the whalebone whales, and the Cachalot, which have been de-
scribed in the preceding pages as frequenting the North-western Coast of North
America, many species of Dolphins are also found. Those coming under our ob-
servation are known as the Blackfish (Globiocephalus Scammonii), the Killer (Orca),
the Whitefish (Beluga), the Bay Porpoise (Phocæna vomerina), the Striped or Com-
mon Porpoise (Lagenorhynchus obliquidens), Baird's Dolphin (Delphinus Bairdii), the
Right Whale Porpoise (Leucorhamphus borealis), the Cowfish (Tursiops Gillii), the
White-headed or Mottled Grampus (Grampus Stearnsië), the Bottle-nosed Grampus,
the Panama Grampus, the Puget Sound Grampus, the San Diego Bay Grampus, the
Square- headed Grampus, the Brown-sided Dolphin of Santa Barbara Channel, and
the Narwhal (Monodon monoceros All these species are covered with a coating
of fat, or blubber, varying in thickness from one-half of one inch to four inches.
SECTION 1.-THE BLACKFISH.
GLOBIOCEPHALUS SCAMMONI, Cope. (Plate- xvi.)
Blackfish are generally found wherever Sperm Whales resort, but in many in-
stances they congregate in much larger numbers, and range nearer the coast, than
the regular feeding - grounds of the latter. Although subsisting almost entirely upon
the same kind of food—the "squid,” or octopus — still, at times, when schools of
them visit bays or lagoons, they prey upon the small fish swarming in those shal-
low waters. In Magdalena Bay we have seen them in moderate numbers, appearing
as much at home miles from sea as the Common Porpoise or the Cowfish. They
collect in schools, from ten or twenty up to hundreds, and when going along upon
the surface of the sea, there is less of the rising and falling movement than with
the Porpoise, and their spoutings, before "going down," are irregular, both in num-
ber and time between respirations. If the animal is moving quickly, much of the
head and body is exposed. Whalemen call this going "eye out." In low latitudes,
[85]
86
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
during perfectly calm weather, it is not unfrequent to find a herd of them lying
quite still, huddled together promiscuously, making no spout-and seemingly taking
a rest. Sometimes they assume a perpendicular attitude, with a portion of the head
above the water, as does the Sperm Whale.
On the 14th of December, 1862, on the coast of Lower California, in latitude
31°, land ten miles distant, a school of Blackfish was "raised.” The boats were
immediately lowered and gave chase, and three fish were taken. The largest one
was a male, and measured accurately as follows:
Ft. In.
15 6
3 6
Length ..
Depth of body..
Circumference of body
Expansion of Aukes ....
Breadth of fiukes.
From end of head to spout-holes...
From end of head to eye...
From end of head to dorsal fin....
Length of pectorals .....
Erom end of head to pectorals.
Extreme width of pectorals..
Opening of mouth
Length of dorsal fin, along the back..
Extreme length of dorsal fin, upper edge...
Extreme width of dorsal fin..
From notch of Aukes to vent...
From notch of flukes to genital slit...
Extension of spout-hole across the head.
8 9
3 6
1 0
1 6
1 4
4 6
2 10
2 9
1 0
1 4
2 0
2 4
1 0
5 0
6 0
04
The breadth of the body, just forward of the side fins, was twenty-two inches.
The number of teeth on each side of the upper jaw varies from ten to twelve; in
the lower one from eight to ten; the protruding parts being from one-fourth to
three-fourths of an inch in length. The outline of the head shows its shape lat-
erally, and also the spiracle, which is of half-circle shape, opening downward
as the spout ascends, and closing upward when it has escaped. The jet does not
rise above two or three feet, and its direction is at a right angle with the body,
when not affected by the wind. From all that we can learn of their breeding
habits, they bring forth their young at any time, or in any part of the ocean, as
necessity may require. Off the Gulf of Dulce, coast of Guatemala, in February,
1853, a foetus a yard long was taken from an adult measuring thirteen feet.
In the same school from which this female was captured, we saw several young
THE DOLPHINS.
87
ones, apparently about the same size as the above mentioned fætus, and doubtless
this animal, had it not been disturbed, would have soon played in its native ele-
ment. The Blackfish is taken for its oil, which is, however, much inferior to that
of the Sperm Whale. The yield is small compared to its size, it being from ten
to twenty-five feet in length, and producing from ten gallons to ten barrels of oil.
The blubber varies in thickness from one to four inches; its color is nearly white.
The flesh of the Blackfish is like coarse beef, and after being exposed to the air
for a few days, then properly cooked, is by no means unsavory food, and is often
used by whalemen as a substitute for the fresh meat of land animals.
The same
may be said of the different species of porpoises. Formerly, Blackfish were found
in large numbers on the coast of Lower California, particularly about Cape St.
Lucas, and up the Gulf of California ; but probably, from the same cause as made
mention of concerning Sperm Whales, these grounds are now seldom frequented by
them.
Although the Blackfish is taken for its oil, it is not an object of pursuit by
the whaler, like the balænas and the Cachalot. Sperm whalers do not lower their
boats for Blackfish, when on Sperm Whale ground, unless the day is far spent, or
there is little prospect of “seeing whales." The northern or polar whale-ships pay
but little attention to them, except, perhaps, when passing the time "between sea-
sons,” cruising within or about the tropics. Occasionally a small vessel is fitted
out for hunting the Blackfish and Sperm Whale, carrying a proportionately limited
crew, thereby making the capture of this species of the smaller Cetaceans profitable.
When a ship's boat is lowered for Blackfish, the chase begins as for other whales ;
although many masters have their boats all ready, and run just ahead of, or into
a "school,” with the ship, before lowering, by which means the animals are so
frightened or "gallied,” that they “bring to," or move slowly in all directions,
giving the boats, which are instantly lowered, a good chance to "get fast." The
harpoon frequently kills the fish ; if not, a few darts with the hand - lance dis-
patch it. As soon as it is dead, the prize almost invariably sinks; and if the
ship is close at hand, it is towed to the vessel at once; but if a considerable
distance away, it is either made fast to the "loggerhead” at the stern of the boat,
or a buoy is tied to it and left, to be afterward recovered; the boats still continu-
ing the chase. In this way quite a number are captured from one school. The
favorite resorts of Blackfish, along the coasts of North and South America, on the
Pacific side, are off Guatemala, Equador, and Peru; yet their geographical distribu-
tion is occasionally extended to high northern and southern latitudes.
88
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
SECTION II.-THE ORCA, OR KILLER.
(Plate xvii.)
The Orca— à cetaceous animal, commonly known as the “Killer"-is one of
the largest members of the Dolphin family. The length of the adult males may
average twenty feet, and the females fifteen feet. The body is covered with a
coating of white fat, or blubber, yielding a pure, transparent oil. An extremely
prominent dorsal fin, placed about two-fifths of the length of the body from the
end of the animal's beak, distinguishes it from all other Dolphins. In the largest
species (Orca rectipinna) this prominent upper limb stands quite erect, reaches the
height of six feet, is dagger-shaped, and frequently turns over sideways at its
extremity. In the animals of more moderate size, the fin is broader at the base,
less in altitude, and is slightly curved backward, while upon others it is shorter
still, and broader in proportion at its junction with the back, and is more falcated.
The Orea rectipinna, so far as we have observed, is more slender in its propor-
tions, and is less marked with white or light spots than the others. It is usually,
in color, jet- black above and lighter below; yet many of inferior size are most
beautifully variegated, the colors being almost as vividly contrasted as in the stripes
of the tiger of India. Some individuals have a clear white spot, of oblong shape,
just behind the eyes, and a maroon band, of nearly crescent shape, adorning the
back, behind the dorsal fin, which it more than half encircles. In others, the
marks behind the eyes and dorsal are of a yellowish tinge, and usually, when this
occurs, a small patch of light shade borders the semicircled exterior spout-hole.
The dorsal band is somewhat pointed at the centre of its convex side, and, when
looked at from behind the creature, nearly assumes the form of a heart. The
under side of the pectorals and the caudal fin are generally of a milk-white or
cream color, bordered by a darker shade; and the nether portion of the body is
white, with patches of the same color edging the sides. The head of the Orca is
more pointed than that of the Blackfish (Globiocephalus), but less so than that of
the Bay Porpoise (Phocæna vomerina), to which it bears a resemblance.
appear sharp and prominent in comparison with other Cetaceans, which in a modified
degree indicates the animal's disposition. Its mouth is armed with strong, sharp,
conical teeth, which interlock, like those of the smaller Dolphins,* and its whole
Its eyes
* In the head-bones of two specimens which
we examined, the number of teeth on each of
the upper and lower jaws, were, respectively,
twelve and thirteen.
- ༦ ཀ
* ས



---
7
1.
s
II, ..!! 1031; 2017 u
12: jT?
litli. Tv
.
!!!! pirts
Lot, mert ry
ered
freiny
op bundy fit.
In ih
ella,
--
it is
sha,
not faiinis
in i3 pro
Fier
sulla
10:
c
1
3 1
*7
The
hi
. :. !l .? ! , (7 v '
ie
܂ :) ! |
:!???
{":
carp
11.
10 SIT oj Wisla
samler on111
Plate XVI

1.

N

3
Loin dritun & Rey
C.M. Scon luin Gel.
ORCAS OR KILLERS.
1. ORCA RECTIPINNA, COPE. 2.ORCA ATER, COPE. 3. ORCA (ATER, VAR?)
THE DOLPHINS.
89
formation combines great strength with agility--if we exclude its towering upper
fin, with which the largest are furnished. This protuberance, on account of its
extraordinary elongation, imparts to the animal a very unwieldy appearance; and,
as it vibrates in the air when the creature rolls to and fro, or makes its sidelong
bounds over the waves, appears to be a great burden, and to require much effort
on the part of the wearer to keep right-side up. Its two spiracles, which unite in
one at their orifice, situated above and behind the eyes, are covered by a cartilagi-
nous valve, which opens and closes on its posterior side at every respiration. The
vapor or spout emitted is “low and bushy,” like that of the Blackfish. The animal
is entirely free from parasites, its scarf-skin being beautifully smooth and glossy.
Until recently, we were under the impression that the short-finned Killers
upon the western coast of North America were inhabitants especially of the frosty
regions; but recent observations prove that they frequent both the high and low
latitudes. Indeed, they may be regarded as marine beasts, that roam over every
ocean; entering bays and lagoons, where they spread terror and death among the
mammoth balænas and the smaller species of dolphins, as well as pursuing the
seal and walrus, devouring, in their marauding expeditions up swift rivers, num-
berless salmon or other large fishes that may come in their way. It is well known
that there are several species of Orcas, incident to their wide geographical distribu-
tion, which includes every zone and hemisphere; but those we have described are,
to our knowledge, found in the waters of the Pacific, in the Okhotsk and Behring
seas, and through Behring Strait into the Arctic Ocean. The habits of the Killers
exhibit a boldness and cunning peculiar to their carnivorous propensities. At times
they are seen in schools, undulating over the waves — two, three, six, or eight
abreast-and, with the long, pointed fins above their arched backs, together with
their varied marks and colors, they present a pleasing and somewhat military aspect.
But generally they go in small squads— less than a dozen-alternately showing
themselves upon the surface of the water, or gliding just below, when nothing will
be visible but their projecting dorsals; or they disport themselves by rolling, tum-
bling, and leaping nearly out of water, or cutting various antics with their flukes.
At such times, they usually move rapidly over the surface of the sea, and soon
disappear in the distance.
Both the high and low finned Orcas are found in the same school; yet we
have occasionally seen those with the lowest and most falcated fins exclusively by
themselves. Three or four of these voracious animals do not hesitate to grapple
with the largest baleen whales ; and it is surprising to see those leviathans of
the deep so completely paralyzed by the presence of their natural, although
MARINE MAMMALS.-12.
90
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
diminutive, enemies. Frequently the terrified animal — comparatively of enormous
size and superior strength-evinces no effort to escape, but lies in a helpless con-
dition, or makes but little resistance to the assaults of its merciless destroyers.
The attack of these wolves of the ocean upon their gigantic prey may be likened,
in some respects, to a pack of hounds holding the stricken deer at bay. They
cluster about the animal's head, some of their number breaching over it, while
others seize it by the lips and haul the bleeding monster under water; and when
captured, should the mouth be open, they eat out its tongue. We saw an attack
made by three Killers upon a cow whale and her calf, in a lagoon on the coast of
Lower California, in the spring of 1858. The whale was of the California Gray
species, and her young was grown to three times the bulk of the largest Killers
engaged in the contest, which lasted for an hour or more. They made alternate
assaults upon the old whale and her offspring, finally killing the latter, which sunk
to the bottom, where the water was five fathoms deep. During the struggle, the
mother became nearly exhausted, having received several deep wounds about the
throat and lips. As soon as their prize had settled to the bottom, the three Orcas
descended, bringing up large pieces of flesh in their mouths, which they devoured
after coming to the surface. While gorging themselves in this wise, the old whale
made her escape, leaving a track of gory water behind. Instances have been known,
on the North-western Coast, where a band of Orcas laid siege to whales that had
been killed by whalemen, and which were being towed to the ship, in so deter-
mined a manner, that, although they were frequently lanced and cut with boat-
spades, they took the dead animals from their human captors, and hauled them
under water, out of sight. The Orca, however, does not always live on such
gigantic food ; and we incline to the belief that it is but rarely these carnivora of
the sea attack the larger Cetaceans, but chiefly prey with great rapacity upon their
young. The Orca finds its principal food in the smaller species of its own genus,
together with seals and the larger fishes, as before mentioned. For several seasons
we had watched them about the seal islands of California, and came to the con-
clusion that they subsisted on the fish found around the edge of the kelp which
fringes the shores. By chance, however, we were so fortunate as to take one at
the island of Asuncion, and, on examining its stomach, found it filled with young
seals. At the time it was the height of the sealing season, and the beaches around
the island were lined with innumerable herds; and, although there were sealing
parties about the rocks from early dawn until dusk of evening, no one ever saw
these savage animals molest the seals that were continually swimming about in very
large numbers. Subsequently, we had an excellent opportunity to observe them at
-
THE DOLPHINS.
91
the island of Santa Barbara, in animated pursuit of their prey. Only four of the
short-finned Killers were in the band. It was a windy day, and a heavy surf
beat high and spitefully against the rugged points and bluffs, which seemed to
arouse both aquatic beast and bird into most unusual activity, for the gulls and
eagles hovered and swooped above, watching to snatch any morsel that might
drop from the murderous jaws of the pursuing Killers, who were making the circuit
of the island, apparently intent on surprising any unwary seal that might be play-
ing in the surge; and upon meeting with one they would instantly dive after it,
or bound over the projecting rocky points in hot chase, as the surf swept over
them ; but as soon as they discovered our boat, they dashed their flukes in the
air, and made off for the open sea. Even the largest male sea- lions endeavor to
avoid the Orcas ; for whenever the latter are about the rocks and islets, those
howling monsters seek a safe retreat on shore.
That the Orca is possessed of great swiftness is undeniable, when we realize
the fact that the numerous species of Dolphins are overtaken by them and literally
swallowed alive. Eschricht, in his interesting memoir on The Northern Species of
Orca, states that it had been known to swallow four porpoises in succession, and
that thirteen of these animals, together with fourteen seals, had been found in the
maw of one of these greedy creatures, which measured only sixteen feet in length.
The fierce character of the Orca, and the nature of its food, necessarily bring its
haunts at or near the coast; and the sounds and bays, which teem with every
variety of marine animal life, are much more frequently its feeding-grounds than
the periodical abodes of the balænas, which are farther out in the ocean. The vast
net-work of inland waters on the western coasts of British Columbia and Alaska
is a favorite resort for the Orcas throughout the year. In the fishing season we
have met with them in the vicinity of the Nass River, exhibiting their variously
figured dorsals and colored marks, as they made their gambols or shot out upon the
surface in the chase. During the early spring months the oulacon literally choke
the mouth of the Nass, and here the seals and porpoises congregate to fill them-
selves to repletion from the myriads of those minnows; and, in turn, in obedience
to the laws of nature, the Orcas are found here, pursuing and devouring the ene-
mies of the "small fish.”* They will sometimes be seen peering above the surface
with a seal in their bristling jaws, shaking and crushing their victims, and
swallowing them apparently with great gusto; or, should no other game present
itself, porpoises and salmon may fill their empty maws, or a Humpback or Finback
whale may furnish them an ample repast.
*"Small fish” is the common name for oulacon.
92
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Farther northward, among the icy regions, the Orca delights in the pursuit
and destruction of the White Whale, or Beluga, and in robbing the walrus of its
helpless offspring. The tender flesh and rich fat of the White Whale furnishes them
with choice food; but, as if not content with satiating their own greed, they seem
to aim at the total destruction of their victims, by tearing the whole animal into
fragments. Captain Holböll writes of the Greenland Killers as follows: "In the
year 1827, I was myself an eye-witness of a great slaughter performed by these
rapacious animals. A shoal of belugas had been pursued by these blood-thirsty
animals into a bay in the neighborhood of Godhaven, and were there literally torn
to pieces by them. Many more of the belugas were killed than eaten ; so that the
Greenlanders, besides their own booty, got a good share of that of the Killers.”
It has been said that even the full-grown walrus, although armed with long
tusks, is fearful of the Orca ; but in relation to that, we have nothing in our notes
of observation to substantiate the assertion. It is true, the ponderous creatures
will crawl upon the ice with their little ones to avoid the Killers, but it seems
to be only for the purpose of keeping their cherished young beyond the reach of
their enemies. Sometimes the cub will mount upon its mother's back for refuge,
clinging to it with instinctive solicitude. When in this apparently safe position,
the rapacious Orca quickly dives, and, coming up under the parent animal, with a
spiteful thud throws the young one from the dam's back into the water, when in
a twinkling it is seized, and, with one crush, devoured by its adversary.
Compared with other species of the Dolphin tribe, the Orcas are not numer-
ous, neither do they usually go in large shoals or schools, like the porpoises and
Blackfish. Their mating season, or time of gestation, is a matter of conjecture;
probably in this respect they are similar to the Sperm Whale. We have met with
them in midwinter, in the Gulf of Georgia and along the northern coast as far as
Sitka, as often as at other seasons of the year, showing plainly that they are not
confined to warm latitudes, nor migrate from the colder elimates during the rigor-
ous months. They are seldom captured by civilized whalemen, as their varied and
irregular movements make the pursuit difficult, and the product of oil is even less
than that of the Blackfish, in proportion to their size. The Makah Indians, how-
ever, occasionally pursue and take them about Cape Flattery, in Washington Terri-
tory, as they consider their flesh and fat more luxurious food than the larger
balænas, or rorquals. But, in whatever quarter of the world the Orcas are found,
they seem always intent upon seeking something to destroy or devour.
THE DOLPHINS.
93
SECTION III. –THE WHITEFISH, OR WHITE WHALE.
BELUGA, n. sp.?
(Plate xviii, fig. 1.)
;
Our opportunities for observing this beautiful member of the Dolphin family
have been as follows: In the Okhotsk Sea, along the coast of Eastern Siberia,
during the summer of 1862; in Plover Bay (latitude 64° 26' north, longitude
173° 07' west), September, 1865; in the same place and month, 1866; and in
Norton Sound, September, 1865.
Before entering into the details of its habits and the mode of its capture, we
will briefly describe this inhabitant of the far north, as we have seen it, westward
of the Pacific American shores; and whose haunts also include the Arctic Ocean,
and the seas of Okhotsk and Behring. The animal, which is distinguished by its
uniform light soft hue at maturity, resembles the Leucorhamphus Peronii in its sym-
metry of upper contour. Its linear dimensions average perhaps thirteen feet;
although the largest ones considerably exceed that length. Its head is small; its
prominent forehead being protected with a fatty cushion similar to that of the
Blackfish. Its short oval and fleshy pectorals are placed more than one-fifth of the
length of the whole animal from its muzzle, giving that portion between the head
proper and the fins the appearance of a true neck. The opening of its mouth is
contracted and curved upward. Both
upper
and lower jaws are furnished with
sharp conical teeth, and among the adults the dental formulæ may be put down at
¥ 4, or eleven teeth on each side of the upper jaw, and eight on each side of the
lower one. Its diminutive eyes are but little larger than those of the Common Por-
poise. The minute orifices which constitute the ears are covered with a sort of
scale that quite conceals them. Its spiracle is situated a little behind the angle
The body is full, and tapers rather abruptly toward the caudal fin,
which is broad, and in expansion exceeds that of the Orca, or Globiocephalus. The
color of the adults is invariably a yellowish white, while the very young are of a
leaden or bluish black; but as these mature they become mottled, and eventually
assume the soft cream - like tinge of the parent animal. This species of the Dolphin
family is very rapid in its motions, and its swiftness is brought into full play when
in pursuit of the numerous varieties of fishes along the sea shores or up the rapid
rivers. When making prey of such bottom fish as the flounder and halibut, it
often darts into shallows where it can hardly float; but, like the California Gray,
in this respect, it evinces no alarm at its situation, and makes but little effort to
reach a greater depth. The White Whale, like all others of this family, is fond
of the eye.
94
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
of gathering in troops, yet we have observed that it generally advances in lines of
seldom more than two or three abreast, or more frequently in single file ; spouting
irregularly, and showing little of its form above water. When undulating along in
this manner, it often makes a noise at the moment of coming to the surface to
respire, which may be likened to the faint lowing of an ox; but the strain is not
so prolonged. Sometimes these animals will gambol about vessels as porpoises do ;
but at the slightest noise upon the water, or at the discharge of fire-arms, they
instantly disappear.
Through the kindness of Captain Arnold, we are able to add the measurements
of a White Whale killed at the fishery on Tigel River, Eastern Siberia. The de-
scription and proportions of the specimen alluded to are as follows:
at.
In.
16 6
1 0
1 4
2 2
3 8
From tip of snout to notch of flukes....
From tip of snout to corner of mouth..
From tip of snout to eye.....
From tip of snout to spout-hole.
From tip of snout to pectorals...
From eye to top of head..
From notch of flukes to vent....
From notch of flukes to genital slit...
Expansion of flukes...
Breadth of flukes ...
Thickness of flukes..
Round the body in largest place....
Length of pectorals .
Width of pectorals..
Thickness of blubber...
1 2
4 5
5 9
3 10
1 11
0 3
9 10
1 11
1 3
0 4
Sex, male; color, white. Color of blubber, yellowish white; yield of oil, one
hundred gallons.
At this place the animal ascends the river a distance of thirty miles, * where
it is captured with the harpoon and lance as in ordinary whaling; but in other
estuaries which branch from the northern seas it is taken in nets, during the sea-
son from June to September. Large numbers are captured by the natives of those
coasts, and the oil obtained is to them a valuable article of commerce.
In winter,
the fat of the White Whale is considered a luxurious dish for the table, and the
lean flesh supplies ample food for the sledge-dogs.
* Dall gives an account of a beluga being
taken by the Russians, in 1863, at Nulato, on
the Yukon River, about seven hundred miles
from the sea.
THE DOLPHINS.
95
SECTION IV.-THE BAY PORPOISE,
PHOCÆNA VOMERINA, Gill. (Plate xviii, fig. 2, 3, 4.)
This peculiar species of Dolphin is the least in size of the entire whale tribe
inhabiting the Pacific North American Coast. When fully matured it may attain
the length of six feet, but those we have had opportunity to measure fell con-
siderably short of these dimensions. Usually the adults are not more than four
and one-half feet between linear extremes. The body of the male is jet black
above, a little lighter below; and while the female is of the same color above, it
is lighter on the sides, with a narrow black streak running from the corner of the
mouth to the pectorals, and the lower portion of the animal is of a milky white-
ness, yet the pectoral and caudal fins are black underneath, or of a dark gray.
Occasionally, however, both males and females are found with the larger portion,
or the whole, of their dorsal and caudal fins white. The former are of triangular
shape, and placed very nearly midway between the animal's extremities. The
caudal fin varies much in its contour, sometimes being quite broad and straight
on its posterior edge, which is slightly notched in the centre; in other specimens
the caudal lobes are lunate, and united present a forked appearance. Its pectorals
are extremely small and placed low. Its head is somewhat pointed, but destitute
of the slender, elongated beak of the Delphinus Bairdii, and the Right Whale
Porpoise. The anterior portion of the animal resembles that of both the Orca and
the White - headed Grampus: Its eyes are placed about two inches behind the
corner of the mouth, and nearly in a line with it. Its ears are two inches
from the eyes, and these minute orifices would not be noticed by the casual
observer, as they are less than a sixteenth of an inch in diameter. The spiracles
are placed a little forward of the eyes, and unite in one where they pass through
the fleshy part of the cranium. The valve which covers them is convex on its
posterior side. When the animal respires this valve is turned downward. Both
upper and lower jaws are furnished with teeth, which in the adults are thin, flat,
and broadest near their summits. In one example, a female four feet long, taken
at San Francisco, California, the number was H, and in another, H. In a male,
four feet eight inches in length, taken in Port Townsend Bay, Washington Terri-
tory, the number was the same as last mentioned.
The following measurements and memoranda were carefully taken from a male
specimen obtained at Port Townsend, Washington Territory, April 28th, 1869 :
96
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Ft. In.
4 8
3 2
1 4
1 0
08
0 24
2 0
0
9
0 33
Length ..
Greatest girth (behind pectorals)....
Girth at the vent....
From tip of snout to pectorals.
Length of pectorals.
Width of pectorals...
From tip of snout to dorsal fin.....
Length of dorsal fin, along the back.
Height of dorsal fin.
Expansion of caudal fin.....
Greatest breadth of each lobe..
From tip of snout to genital slit...
From tip of snout to vent...
Opening of mouth .
From tip of snout to eyes...
From tip of snout to spout-hole....
Depth of small at junction with caudal fin.
Depth of small at the vent...
Thickness of blubber..
1 2
0 5
2 1
3 4
0 31
0 6
05
0 3
O 7
0 1
Another specimen, a female, taken at San Francisco, California, during the
summer of 1872, was examined and measured, with the following results :
Ft.
In.
4 0
2 34
0 11
0 6
0 23
1 9
0 4
0 9
1 0
0 4
Length ...
Greatest girth (behind pectorals)...
From tip of snout to pectorals..
Length of pectorals.
Width of pectorals...
From tip of snout to dorsal fin...
Height of dorsal fin...
Length of dorsal fin along the back...
Expansion of caudal fin.
Breadth of each lobe of caudal fin...
Depth of small at junction with caudal fin.
Thickness of small at junction with caudal fin.
From tip of snout to corner of mouth...
From tip of snout to eyes..
From tip of snout to spiracle...
From tip of snout to ears.
From notch of caudal fin to vent...
From notch of caudal fin to genital slit..
From notch of caudal fin to teat slit....
Thickness of blubber..
0 3
0 15
0 4
06
0 51
0 8
1 4
1 5
1 6
0 03
-
-
ܒܗ ܂
-


VOTI TUK
CUT.
1
33
1
C
n
9
0 31
1
f
5
0
*
5
3
0
1
Licias,
a fiiltal
We... and
kun irrison, Californii, curing
Lill, it! thu fulloring.no
2
Oil
1)
ܐܡܗ
9
the link
0
9
*
1
C
it!
}
Det
Y
ofizuali
0...
slal fin
: daili.
1
Le tip of
ureti og
1:09 rutal
1) not Couldn't
i vi con is to be
f ba
0
1
1
1
1
---
Lith. Britton & Rey


2
4
C.M. Scammon del
1. (BELUGA NSP?) WHITE WHALFOR WHITEFISH OF THE WHALERS.
2&4 MALE BAY PURPOISE (PHOCAENA, VOMERINA, GILL.) VIEW FROM SIDE AND BELOW. 3. FEMALE BAY PORPOISE VIEW FROM BELOW
THE DOLPHINS.
97
Color of body, black above, lighter on the sides, and white below; under side
of caudal and pectoral fins, black.
The coating of fat or blubber which covers the Bay Porpoise, is either of a
yellowish white or pearl color, and in thickness, varies from one-half of an inch
to an inch and a half.
The habits of this animal differ from those of other species found in the open
sea or along the coast. Their favorite resort seems to be in the discolored waters,
between the limits of the pure ocean element and the fresh rivers. They are rarely
seen far from either side of these boundaries. Our observation proves that they
are found as far south as Banderas Bay, and about the mouth of the Piginto
River, on the coast of Mexico (which estuary is in latitude 20° 30'), and as
far north as the Columbia River, latitude 46° 16'. In the winter season they are
seen off Astoria, and in Cathlamet Bay, twenty miles above; but during the spring
and summer, when the river is fresh to its mouth, and in some instances for miles
at sea, they leave the Columbia, following in the vein of mixed water. They are
never found in large schools; but occasionally six or eight may be seen scattered
about, appearing on the surface alternately, sometimes singly, or two or three at
the same instant. Neither do they make those playful gambols and leaps that the
larger dolphins do, their general habit being to make a quick puff and turn as
soon as they appear above water, apparently choosing the darkness below rather
than the light above. It is not from shyness, however, for they are met with
about roadsteads and harbors, among shipping, and frequently play their odd turn-
ings close to vessels under way, or at their moorings. By night, when at anchor,
we have known them to play about the vessel's rudder ; but this may be regarded
as an unusual occurrence. Sometimes they are seen among the breakers, on the
bars fronting harbor mouths, darting through or along the crests of the rollers
as if excited into unusual action by the dashing waves surrounding them. They
feed upon small fish, and are occasionally taken in the seines that are hauled along
the shores of San Francisco Bay by the Italian fishermen. The northern Indians
frequently capture them about the inland waters, during the clear, calm weather of
the summer months. At such times they come up and lie quite motionless, for a
brief interval, upon the glassy surface of the water, as if basking; then the
wily savage, who is on the watch, silently paddles his canoe within gunshot,
and fires a ball through the animal's brain ; this, of course, kills it instantly, and
it generally floats a sufficient length of time to enable the pursuer to obtain his
prize, which is regarded as a great delicacy, and a time of feasting in his lodge
quickly follows.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 13.
98
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
SECTION V.-THE-STRIPED OR COMMON PORPOISE.
LAGENORHYNCHUS OBLIQUIDENS, Gill. (Plate xix, fig. 2.)
3
This species of the smaller dolphins varies but little in its general proportions
from Baird's Dolphin, except in its back fin, which is more falcated and slender,
and its snout, which is more blunt. In point of color it is greenish black on the
upper surface, lightened on the sides with broad longitudinal stripes of white, gray,
and dull black, which in most examples run into each other, but below it is of a
pearly or snowy white. The posterior edge of the dorsal fin is tipped with dull
white or gray, and sometimes the fukes are marked in the same manner.
We have observed that this species has a wider range, congregates in larger
numbers, and exhibits more activity, than any other of the Dolphin family. They
are seen, in numbers varying from a dozen up to many hundreds, tumbling over
the surface of the sea, or making arching leaps, plunging again on the same curve,
or darting high and falling diagonally sidewise upon the water, with a spiteful
splash, accompanied by a report that may be heard at some distance. When a
brisk breeze is blowing they frequently play about the bow of a ship going at her
utmost speed, darting across the cutwater and shooting ahead, or circling around
the vessel, apparently sporting at ease. In calm weather they are sometimes seen
in immense shoals, leaping, plunging, lobtailing, and finning-in fact, exhibiting an
endless variety of attitudes—and at the same time the whole assemblage moves
swiftly in various directions, as if enjoying a general frolic.
While on a cruise in the U. S. Revenue cutter Wayanda, during the month of
October, 1872, we had an opportunity of witnessing, at midnight, the gambols of an
immense herd of these active and rapacious animals. The sea was quite smooth,
and not a breath of wind was stirring. At first we could hear a harsh rustling
sound, as if a heavy squall of wind, accompanied with hail, was sweeping over the
otherwise tranquil sea; and, as the moon burst through the clouded sky, we could
see a sheet of foam and spray surging toward us. In a few moments the vessel
was surrounded by myriads of these Common Porpoises, which, in their playful
movements, for the space of one hour, whitened the sea all around as far as the
eye could discern, when they almost instantly disappeared.
The Striped Porpoises are often seen in considerable numbers about the large
bays and lagoons along this coast, that have no fresh water running into them.
They abound more along the coasts where small fish are found than in mid-ocean,
THE DOLPHINS.
99
as they principally prey upon the smaller finny tribes; and to obtain them shoot
swiftly through the water, seizing the object of pursuit with the slightest effort.
Occasionally a large number of them will get into a school of fish, frightening them
so much that they will dart around in all directions, taking no regular course to
escape their pursuers, and finally get so bewildered as to lose nearly all control
over their movements. At such times the Striped Porpoise is manifestly the "sea
swine," filling itself to repletion.
In perfectly calm weather they are sometimes seen huddled together on the
glaring surface, their heads slightly raised, or reclining a little on their sides, as if
resting from their constant activity ; but such instances are not frequent. Gener-
ally they are seen in great numbers rushing over and through the undulating sea,
exhibiting their active habits and propensity to roam over an unlimited extent of
ocean.
SECTION VI.-BAIRD'S DOLPHIN.
DELPHINUS BAIRDII, Dall.
(Plate xix, fig 1.)
This Dolphin inhabits the Pacific North American coast, in common with other
varieties which abound in those waters. At a distance it much resembles the Com-
mon Porpoise of fishermen and sailors; but it differs in several points from that
species. We were so fortunate as to obtain two female specimens off Point Argu-
ello, in the fall of 1872, from which we obtained the following notes. Apparently,
both individuals were adults, and nearly the same size and weight. The body of
the Delphinus Bairdii is more slender, and its snout more elongated and rounded,
than that of the Striped or Common Porpoise, and may be compared to the bill of a
snipe. Its teeth are slender, conical, and slightly curved inward. Its dorsal fin is
more erect and less falcated than that of the Lagenorhynchus obliquidens, while the
pectorals are nearly of the same shape and comparative proportions; but the caudal
fin is less in breadth, and greater in proportionate expansion. Its back, immediately
forward of the dorsal fin, is somewhat concave, so that when taking a side view
the upper contour appears lower before than behind the fin. Its varied colors
are, top and sides of head, black; sides of body behind the vent, and both sides
of pectorals and Aukes, a greenish black; a black patch around the eye, with a
white streak passing forward above the mouth ; a continuous black streak from the
side of the under jaw to the anterior edge of the pectorals; sides, behind the eye,
gray--the upper boundary of this color being somewhat above the plane of that
organ, beginning to curve downward just behind the dorsal fin, and meeting both
;
100
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
No. 2.
6 9
white and black marks between the vent and the flukes, in or near the mesial line
on the under side of the body; a lanceolate white patch extending on the ventral
side, from the middle of the under jaw to the anterior angle of the vulvæ; a nar-
row white strip extending from the corner of the mouth backward, on each side,
slightly arched above the pectoral, and then curving downward gradually, the two
meeting below in the region of the vent. Another, still narrower and somewhat
obscure, starts at the same place with the last, but is soon lost in the white ven-
tral patch before alluded to. Appended are the dimensions, in feet and inches, of
the examples above mentioned :
No. 1.
Total length of animal....
6 73
Anterior edge of pectorals.
1 0 1 0
Posterior edge to angle of truncation.
08 0 84
Breadth of pectorals.
0 31 0 33
Expansion of flukes.
1 6 1 54
Longitudinal width.
0 5 0 6
Height of dorsal fin.
0 7 0 71
Length of dorsal fin along the back....
083 1 0
Tip of beak to anterior edge of pectorals..
1 8 1 8
Tip of beak to anterior edge of dorsal fin.
3 0 3 1
Tip of beak to corner of mouth....
0 111
1 08
Tip of beak to eye....
1 1 1 18
Tip of beak to spiracles..
1 2 1 3
Width of spiracles....
0 1 0 13
Notch of Aukes to vent....
1 81 1 11
Notch of flukes to teats....
1 11 1 2
Length of vulva and genital slit...,
04 0 5
Circumference behind pectorals.
3 13
3 0
Circumference at genitalia....
2 33
2 11
Circumference before the dorsal fin.....
3 4 3 3
Height from eye to top of head (straight line)....
0 39
0 45
Height from eye to under side of throat (straight line)..
0 4 0 4
Height from pectorals to top of back (straight line)......
09 0 10
Height from corner of mouth to top of head (straight line).
0 41 0 43
Height from corner of mouth to underside of throat (straight line)... 0 3 0 3
Height of small close to the flukes...
0 3 0 4
Centre of eye to ear (one inch below eye)....
0 2 0 2
Weight of animals (avoirdupois), respectively, one hundred and one hundred
and sixty-one pounds; weight of brain, two pounds.
The Delphinus Bairdii may be considered symmetrical in its proportions. It
moves through the water with great swiftness and grace.



L
-
:
.
PATII
ZA IST.
will fuhe, in or spend the mesia: line
white putik ortening on the ventral
cap äitorium ad. Or this vulva; anar-
it the mouth we want, on euh ide,
purving downw.
eru lunily:
the two
rinn, sail urruwer and seewhat
idi, but is non lust in the live-
? 42 mie dimansions, it feet and licht; of
No. 2
6 9
7}
0
1
1
0
08
0 31
1 6
0 39
1 0.
0 5
0
6
0
1
0
0 62
1 8
PRVIH...
1 8
i loral fin...
3
0
8
1
0 11,
1 02
1
ܪܡܬ
pood
ܛܚܕ
2
0 1
1 91
1 :
015
1 11
1
3 13
8
0
1
2 1
( 4
0
9
..stprint line
:ht hue)...
mę turni
birbt liae)..
to tal...' bal (traight line)...
!!.... le of th: oat (traight liae)...
Hel.
Cenre of eye to our ( 17,3ale! 2.750 eve)..
0
1
0
02
ni of alir:) in v
su ciivey, one hundreu al one huuled
ais one hadi VE prin 1170 pounds.
Pisa, ale nie ces by conuicere sy?:11. tr.ca! ia is impor ions.
It
rol : ille ker with 5! sviities and groce,
*
Plate XIX.
Brittond Hey.lilh.
1
1
2
2
3
1. Bairds Dolphin (Delphinus Bairdii, Dall.) View from side &below.
2. Striped or Common Porpoise (Lagenorhynchus obliquidens, Gill.) View from side & below.
3. Right Whale Porpoise (Leucorhamphus borealis?)



C. M. Scammon del.
THE DOLPHINS.
101
-
SECTION VII.- THE RIGHT WHALE PORPOISE.
LEUCORHAMPHUS BOREALIS, Peale. (Plate xix, fig. 3.)
The Right Whale Porpoise of the western coast of North America, in habit
and form, is nearly the same as the Right Whale Porpoise of the southern hemi-
sphere (Leucorhamphus Peronië), but it is not so beautifully marked, in vivid con-
trast, with pure white and jet black, as the latter; the former being black above
and lighter below, with but little of its lower extremities banded with white. The
Leucorhamphus borealis is not usually met with in large numbers, and is seldom found
in shallow bays or lagoons. We have seen them as far south as San Diego Bay,
on the California coast, and as far north as Behring Sea; showing plainly, that the
two species of the same genus have a feeding-ground which embraces at least the
western coast of North and South America.
SECTION VIII. - THE COWFISH.
TURSIOPS GILLII, Dall.
This porpoise is larger than the Striped or the Right Whale species, and is
known by the name of Cowfish. It is longer also in proportion to its girth,
and its snout is somewhat contracted. Its teeth are much larger, straight, conical,
and sharply pointed, but less in number. A specimen taken at Monterey, in 1871,
had 4 it.
The animal also differs in color, it being black all over, lightened a
little below. This description is based upon two momentary observations, the
first at San Bartolome Bay, in 1853, and the second in Ballenas Lagoon, in 1859.
The babits of the Cowfish, as observed on the coasts of California and Mexico, are
strikingly different from that of the true porpoises. It is often remarked by whale-
men that they are a "mongrel breed” of doubtful character, being frequently seen
in company with Blackfish, sometimes with porpoises, and occasionally with Hump-
backs, when the latter are found in large numbers on an abundant feeding-ground.
They are met with likewise in the lagoons along the coast, singly, or in pairs, or
in fives and sises— rarely a larger number together-straggling about in a vagrant
manner through the winding estuaries, subsisting on the fish that abound in those
circumscribed waters. At times they are seen moving lazily along under the shade
of the mangroves that in many places fringe the shores; at other times lying
about in listless attitudes among the plentiful supplies of food surrounding them.
102
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
APPROXIMATE OUTLINES OF A COWFISH.
APPROXIMATE OUTLINES OF A WHITEHEADED OR MOTTLED GRAMPUS.
APPROXIMATE OUTLINES OF A BOTTLENOSED GRAMPUS.
APPROXIMATE OUTLINES OF A PANAMA GRAMPUS.
THE DOLPHINS.
103
GRAMPUSES.
Our per-
Of this group of the Delphinido, which has been observed along the Pacific
North American Coast, there is but little known; they are commonly distinguished
by the names given in the list of the dolphins found upon this coast.
sonal knowledge of these obscure animals is so limited that we have hesitated
whether or not to mention them; but after due consideration we submit the fol-
lowing remarks:
SECTION IX. — THE WHITEHEADED OR MOTTLED GRAMPUS.
GRAMPUS STEARNSII, Dall.
The average length of the Whiteheaded or Mottled Grampus may be ten feet.
Its muzzle terminates in a rounded point, and very nearly resembles that of the
Phocæna vomerina. Its dorsal fin is narrow, quite high, and slightly falcated; hence
the animal is sometimes taken for the Orca ater, and its general appearance and
movements through the water are very similar to those of that animal. Its indi-
vidual marks vary more than any other species of the toothed whales of the coast.
While the prevailing color is very dark, approaching to black, the head and anterior
portion of the body-as far as the pectorals in some examples—are white, in
others it is only partially so; and frequently they are seen more or less mottled
with light gray to the region of the dorsal fin. They are gregarious, and congre-
gate frequently in large schools ; at other times two or three, or even a solitary
individual, will be met with, wandering about the coast or up the bays in quest of
food, which consists of fish and several varieties of crustaceans. It is rarely taken,
as it is extremely wild and shy.
SECTION X.- THE BOTTLENOSED GRAMPUS.
The Bottlenosed Grampus is probably the largest of the Dolphin family of
Cetaceans. Its color approaches nearer to brown than black. The fin on the back
is comparatively small, angular in shape, with the longest side attached to the body,
and placed much nearer the caudal fin than on other species of the same genus.
104
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
.
The name “Bottlenose” is said to have been given it by reason of the head re-
sembling the upper portion and neck of a junk - bottle; if so, from our observation
of it (which was many times, from the vessel's deck or masthead), in its differ-
ent natural positions, the bottle must have been one with a very large but exceed-
ingly short neck; still the comparison is not, perhaps, inappropriate. The largest
of this species are not less than twenty-five feet long, and otherwise are similar in
their proportions to the Blackfish. The head appears to be of a shape between that
of the Globiocephalus and the Phocæna vomerina, having a short rounded beak. The
habits of the Grampus are such as nearly preclude capture, and little is known of
its peculiarities. Two or three are generally seen together, "rounding" to go down
as soon as they come to the surface of the water and spout, and when next
rising may be beyond view. An exception to this, however, occurred in July and
August, 1856, on the coast between Cape St. Lucas and Cerros Island, at which
time we saw large numbers of them going in schools, ten, twenty, or thirty
together, nearly all being of the largest growth ; their actions were a good imi-
tation of a school of small Cachalots spouting several times when up, and
only remaining down the usual time of Sperm Whales of their apparent size.
Several fruitless trials were made to capture one. In two instances the harpoons
were fastened effectually, and the consequence was that the animals immediately
went down with great velocity, each in its descent taking a line one hundred and
fifty fathoms long, almost before the boats' crews knew what they were about. It
is said, however, that they have been taken with comparatively little difficulty,
where the boats were supplied with lines upwards of three hundred fathoms long.
The oil produced by the Bottlenose is reputed to be equal in quality to that
of the Sperm Whale, and the yield is in a similar ratio to that from the Blackfish
and Killer.
SECTION XI.-THE PANAMA GRAMPUS.
In March, 1853, off Panama Bay, on board the bark Rio Grande, we captured
what were supposed to be two small Blackfish; but, on making an examination, it
was decided that they were a species of grampus. Our notes are as follow:
Length of largest specimen, ten feet. Back fin placed as on a Blackfish. Up-
per end of dorsal more pointed than that of the Globiocephalus— the whole fin was
very nearly the form of that of the Striped or Common Porpoise. Body less in
circumference in proportion to length than that of the Blackfish. Form of head
somewhat pointed, approaching to a beak. Color, a uniform jet black. Average
THE DOLPHINS.
105
thickness of blubber, about an inch ; its color is quite red, and the oil retained
the same hue after extraction, and appeared watery. The jaws were furnished with
sharp, straight, conical teeth.
These animals are found in large schools, and move over the surface of the
sea in the same manner as the Globiocephalus.
SECTION XII. - THE PUGET SOUND GRAMPUS.
In Port Townsend Bay, Washington Territory, June 19th, 1868, a great number
of small whales, evidently a species of grampus, were seen gamboling, in squads of
six or eight individuals, whose movements were similar to those of the Blackfish
(Globiocephalus). They were likewise of the same jet black color; but the dorsal
fin was narrower, very pointed, and placed about one-fourth of the animal's length
from its flukes. So far as our observations go, the Puget Sound Grampuses are
not numerous, and they are but rarely seen about the inland waters of Washington
Territory, which is the only place where we have met with them.
SECTION XIII. — THE SAN DIEGO BAY GRAMPUS.
Of this individual Cetacean, our observations have been confined exclusively to
those frequenting the Bay of San Diego, where the animals are seen passing into
and out of the estuaries connecting with the main lagoon. The distinguishing
mark peculiar to this species, is its broad, triangular, and prominent dorsal fin,
which is placed about midway between its extremities, and is slightly falcated.
Nothing is definitely known about the animal's dimensions. As seen when undu-
lating over the water, it exhibits the ordinary movements of the Cowfish. Its
length may be approximated at twelve or fifteen feet; otherwise its proportions of
body are nearly the same as those of the Orca ater. Its color is black above, with
more or less white beneath. It feeds on fish, for which purpose it ascends the
estuaries. Repeated attempts have been made to secure one of the creatures, and
during the chase they have been approached so near as to allow good views of
their proportions upon the surface of the water ; but their shyness and rapid
movements have thus far precluded every effort to capture them.
MARINE MAMMALS.-14.
106
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
SECTION XIV.—THE SQUAREHEADED GRAMPUS.
The conflicting descriptions given of this animal forbid an exact delineation.
Some observers say it has nearly the form of the Sperm Whale-especially its
head, which is square and extremely bulky. Others aver that its mouth, which
"lays low," terminates in a short beak, with a high square forehead.
Our own
observations have been confined to distant views of them from the masthead
or from the deck; yet they have afforded considerable opportunity to note their
movements, which are very nearly an imitation of the smaller Sperm Whales.
Their spouting and “turning of flukes,” which are performed with characteristic
regularity, have deceived many an expert whaleman, and repeatedly the boats have
been lowered in pursuit of them, the animals having been mistaken for Cacha-
lots. The Squareheaded Grampuses, however, frequently remain longer upon and
underneath the surface of the water than the Sperm Whales, and seldom, if ever,
go in large schools, as do the Cachalots and Blackfish. In this respect they
have more the habits of the Orcas. They are said to yield a superior quality
of oil, but in small quantity, compared to their size.
SECTION XV.—THE BROWNSIDED DOLPHIN OF SANTA BARBARA
CHANNEL
Although the knowledge we possess of this dolphin is very meagre— having
discovered the animal after the natural history part of this work had been pre-
pared for the press-still it is thought advisable to submit a description, however
brief it may be. While lying at anchor off the town of Santa Barbara, May 16th,
1873, a school of what we took to be the Striped or Common Porpoises, was
scen playing around the vessel. Their irregular movements, and the unusual length
of time they remained upon the surface of the water, afforded an opportunity to
study them. Their forms were apparently the same as that of the Striped or
Common Porpoise, except that the dorsal fin is of the triangular shape which is
present with Baird's Dolphin, and the color on its sides is brown, while its back
is of a dull black; hence it has been given the provisional name of the Brown-
sided Dolphin. With regard to the habits of the animal, we observed one peculiar
feature: that of darting through the thick beds of kelp which fronted the shore.
Really they seemed to delight in sporting among it, and occasionally one of the
THE DOLPHINS.
107
band would be seen leaping clear of the water, taking with it long sprays of the
fucus. All our efforts to capture one proved unavailing; but enough was seen to
convince us that they were an undescribed species.
SECTION XVI.—THE NARWHAL.
MONODON MONOCEROS, Linn.
Although the Narwhal is but rarely met with in that part of the Arctic Ocean
accessible to the whalemen who pass through Behring Strait, yet, beyond question,
it is an occasional visitor to those icy waters, and even to the neighboring shores
of eastern Siberia. We have it authentically stated by a trader and traveler in
Siberia, that the aborigines of that frozen coast have a superstitious dread of the
casual visits of the Narwhal, and when one is seen by a single native, it is regarded
as an ill omen, and the beholder either immediately puts an end to his existence,
or he becomes a prey to evil forebodings, which ultimately bring the poor
victim
to an untimely end. The tusks of the Narwhal have been exchanged in barter by
the inhabitants of that portion of north-eastern Asia bordering the Arctic Ocean,
and, as articles of traffic, have passed from one party to another, till they have
finally reached the trading-posts on the northern shores of the Okhotsk Sea. Cap-
tain Arnold, who was engaged in a trading expedition from San Francisco to the
Okhotsk coast, in 1868, obtained at Tavisk Bay a very fine tusk of a Narwhal,
which measured eight feet in length, including the root, which was fifteen inches.
The tusk at its base was seven and a half inches in circumference, and tapering
to its extremity, where its diameter was one-half of an inch. From its junction
with the head, its whitish and polished surface exhibits a uniform twist, which
adds much to its symmetrical beauty. Relative to the natural history of the Nar-
whal, we can state nothing from our own observations, but make the following
extracts from Godman's monograph of the animal, which is based entirely upon the
observations of the renowned Scoresby : “The Narwhal, when fully grown, measures
from thirteen to fourteen feet in length, exclusive of the tusk, and at the thickest
part, which is two feet behind the fins, the circumference is about eight or nine
feet. The part of the body anterior to the fins and head is paraboloidal; the
middle portion of the body is almost cylindrical; the posterior portion, to within
three or four feet of the tail, is somewhat conical; thence a ridge, commencing
both at the back and belly; the section becomes first an ellipse, and then a rhom-
bus at the junction of the tail. The back and belly ridges run half-way or more
108
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
across the tail; the ridges of the tail run the same way along the body, and form
ridges on the sides of the rump. The back appears depressed and flat, three or
four feet posterior to the neck. The head forms about one-seventh of the whole
length of the animal, being small, blunt, and round. The mouth is small and
incapable of much extension, having a wedge-shaped under lip. The eyes are only
one inch in their largest diameter, and are placed on a line with the opening of
the mouth at about thirteen inches from the snout. The opening of the ear,
situated six inches behind the eye on the same horizontal line, is of the diameter
of a small knitting-needle. The spiracle, or blow- hole, is situated immediately over
the eyes, and is a singular semicircular opening about three and one-half inches in
diameter, and one inch and a half in length. The fins are twelve or fourteen
inches long, and six or eight broad, and placed at one-fifth of the length of the
animal from the snout. Where fixed to the body, the fin is
Where fixed to the body, the fin is elliptical. In the adult
Narwhal, the ground is wholly white, with dark - gray or blackish spots. These
spots are of a roundish or oblong form; on the back, where they seldom exceed
two inches in diameter, they are the darkest and most crowded together. On the
sides these spots are fainter, smaller, and more open. On the belly they are
extremely faint and few. A close patch of brownish - black, without any white, is
often found on the upper part of the neck, just behind the blow-hole. The sucker
Narwhals are almost uniformly of a bluish - gray, or slate color. Very old individ-
uals become almost white. The remarkable peculiarity of the Narwhal is its long,
spiral, ivory tusk, which grows from the left side of the inferior portion of the
upper jaw, sometimes to the length of ten feet or more. This tusk is generally
covered with a dark, greasy incrustation above, while below and at the point it is
kept white by use. In addition to this external tusk, peculiar to the male, there
is another on the right side of the head, about nine inches long, imbedded in the
skull. In females, as well as in young males, in which the tooth does not appear
externally, the rudiments of two tusks are generally found in the upper jaw.”
The food of the Narwhal is said to consist of molluscous animals, and some-
times fish, although the creature is destitute of teeth exclusive of its tusks. The
Narwhal is considered a harmless animal, but active and possessed of considerable
swiftness ; yet, when on the surface of the water for the purpose of respiration, it
* Scoresby, in his Greenland voyage, killed a
female Narwhal having an external horn four
feet three inches long, twelve inches of which
were imbedded in the skull. It had also,
usual, a milk-tusk nine inches long, which was
of conical form and obliquely truncated at the
thickest end, and without the knot formed in
many of the milk - tusks. The horn was on the
left side of the head, and the spiral was dex-
trorsal.
as
THE DOLPHINS.
109
frequently lies motionless for several minutes. The Narwhal is captured by shooting
it with a rifle, or it is taken with the harpoon and lance, as are other whales.
The blubber of the body yields a fine quality of oil. The Greenlanders and Esqui-
maux utilize the whole creature. The flesh is devoured as excellent food; the oil
is burned in their moss lamps; the intestines are manufactured into lines and
garments; and the tusks are fashioned into spears and other weapons.
PA RT II.
PI N NIPE DIA.
PART II.- PINNIPEDIA.
INTRODUCTION.
A VARIETY of marine animals inhabit the western coast of North America which
are scientifically classed under the head of Pinnipedia, but familiarly known under
the general name of Seals. Those described in the following monograph are enu-
merated, and their technical names given, at the conclusion of the catalogue appended
to this work.
All the pinnipedes periodically inhabit both the water and the land adjacent.
Their food consists of fish, crustaceans, and various other marine invertebrates
found about the shores, and of sea - fowls. All the different species of pinnipedes
bring forth and suckle their young in a similar manner to other mammals. The
general form of the animal is elongated, with quite full anterior proportions,
exclusive of the head and neck. The posterior part of the body is tapering, and
terminates at the junction with the hind limbs. Their appendages for locomotion
are commonly called flippers. The anterior, or side ones, nearly correspond to the
fore limbs of carnivorous animals; and, in some species, they take closely the form
of the pectorals of Cetaceans. Where one set of flippers is furnished with claws,
or nails, the other is nearly or quite destitute of them; and, whether it be the
anterior or posterior members which are thus armed, it is these of which the
animal principally makes use in its movements upon the land. These flippers are
very flexible, and seem much better suited for propulsion in the water than for
terrestrial locomotion. The body of the animal is usually covered with short
and bristly hair ; but in some few species their inner coating is a thick, rich
fur, with long, glistening hairs over all. The geographical distribution of the
pinnipedes is unlimited, the family being distributed in different groups over every
zone and both hemispheres.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 15.
(113)
114
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
It is difficult to produce a satisfactory figure of a seal, for the reason that in
its various attitudes the animal materially changes its contour. In one position its
neck becomes somewhat slender and elongated, and its head appears comparatively
small; while in another posture the creature seems distorted into a swollen form
throughout. Hence we shall introduce a few illustrative figures in addition to the
plates which represent the general forms of these animals.
CHAPTER I.
THE SEA ELEPHANT.
MACRORHINUS ANGUSTIROSTRIS,
Gill.
(Plate xx, fig. 1, 2.)
Among the varieties of marine mammals which periodically resort to the land,
no one attains such gigantic proportions as the Sea Elephant. This animal, which
was sometimes called the Elephant Seal, and known to the old Californians as the
Elefante marino, had a geographical distribution from Cape Lazaro, latitude 24° 46'
north, longitude 112° 20' west, to Point Reyes, latitude 38° north, longitude
122° 58' west on the coast of California ; and, strange as it may appear, we have
no authentic accounts of this species of amphibious animal being found elsewhere
in the northern hemisphere. At the south, however, about Patagonia, Tierra del
Fuego, and numerous islands in both the Atlantic and Pacific, and the Crozets,
Kerguélen, and Herd's Islands, in the high latitudes of the Indian Ocean, have
been points where the Sea Elephants have gathered in almost incredible numbers,
and where hundreds of thousands of them have been slain by the seamen, pursuing
their prey in those distant regions.
The sexes vary much in size, the male being frequently triple the bulk of the
female; the oldest of the former will average fourteen to sixteen feet; the largest
we have ever seen measured twenty-two feet from tip to tip. The following meas-
urements (in feet and inches) and notes were taken of two large females and one
new-born pup, obtained on the coast of Lower California:
No. 1.
90
No. 2.
10 0
5 9
5 10
0 2
0 2!
0 2
0 25
Length from tip to tip.....
Round the body behind fore flippers.
Length of tail..
Breadth of tail at root...
Length of posterior flippers...
Expansion of posterior flippers.
Length of fore flippers...
Width of fore flippers..
1
7
1 8
1 10
1 8
1 2
0 6
1 5
06
(115)
116
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
No. 1.
No. 2.
1 7
Round extremity of body at root of tail.
From tip of nose to corner of mouth....
Opening of mouth..
From tip of nose to eye..
From tip of nose to fore flippers..
Length of fissure between the eye lids.
1 6
0 7
0 44
0 8
2 7
0 0
0 8
0 44
09
3 0
0 1f
...
New-born Pup.
4 0
Length from tip to tip....
Length of posterior flippers.
Length of fore flippers.
Breadth of fore flippers.
From tip of nose to side flippers.
From tip of nose to eye...
From eye to ear (the minute opening of which is barely perceptible).
From tip of nose to corner of mouth..
Opening of mouth.
0 71
0 7
0 21
1 6
0 4
0 2
0 41
0 3
The posterior flippers of the Sea Elephant are very nearly like those of the
Léopard Seal, except that they are clawless. The fore flippers, however, are fur-
nished each with five nails, which, in shape, somewhat resemble those of the human
hand, but in color they are a dull black; the longest in the two adult examples
examined measured one and a half inches. The two teats of the smaller animal
were twenty inches from the posterior termination of the body. In the larger one
they were two feet and three inches from the root of the tail, which is extremely
short and pointed. The whiskers on each side of the face, in both specimens,
numbered from thirty-five to forty, the longest of which were seven inches; their
color was of a dark brown tipped with a lighter shade. Eight or ten bristle-like
hairs were present upon or near the upper lid of the eye, and constituted the eye-
brows. The pup, whose measurements are given above, had forty-six whiskers on
one side of its face, and forty-two on the other, and ten frizzly hairs over each
cye. Its color was a dark brown, or nearly a chestnut shade.
The color of the adult Sea Elephant is a light brown, when its thin short hair
is grown to full length ; but, immediately after shedding, it becomes like that of
the land elephant, or of a bluish cast. The average thickness of its skin is fully
equal to that of the largest bullock. A fat bull, taken at Santa Barbara Island, by
the brig Mary Llelen, in 1852, was eighteen feet long, and yielded two hundred and
ten gallons of oil. Round the under side of the neck, in the oldest males, the
animal appears to undergo a change with age; the hair falls off, the skin thickens
and becomes wrinkled — the furrows crossing each other, producing a checkered
-
Plate XX.

C.M.Scammon, del.
SEA-ELEPHANT. (MACRORHINUS ANGUSTIROSTRIS.)
GILL.
1
MALE. 2
FEMALE.

Fru Pnoto. cy Watkins
SEA-LION (EUMETOPIAS STELLERI.) GILL.
MALE. 2
FEMALE.
T
!:
f
1
ܐ ܀ ; rܙ
3
-
I wil
othuk
tuai ot the
urtr, !..
poi.li.
1!
d'À
Elen.
ber: from
.
**
ut ta
Cer!..
Twin
ir ?
active
ii
*
:
Oiir Cint,
so we but 1 ti
Cuiiruaii.


THE SEA ELEPHANT.
117
surface—and sometimes the throat is more or less marked with white spots. Its
proboscis extends from opposite the angle of the mouth forward (in the larger
males) about fifteen inches, when the creature is in a state of quietude, and the
upper surface appears ridgy; but when the animal makes an excited respiration,
the trunk becomes more elongated, and the ridges nearly disappear. The mouth is
furnished with teeth similar to those of the Sea Lion. The adult females average ten
feet in length between extremities. They are destitute of the proboscis, the nose be-
ing like that of the common seal, but projecting more over the mouth. Their canine
teeth are shorter, smoother below the sockets, larger at the base, and hollow nearly
to the upper point. The sailors on a voyage to the Sea Elephant grounds, not having
a supply of tobacco pipes, made them of these teeth, and the quills or leg bones
of the pelican ; the former furnishing the bowls, and the latter the stems.
The habits of the huge beasts, when on shore, or loitering about the foaming
breakers, are in many respects like those of the Leopard Seals. Our observations
on the Sea Elephants of California go to show that they have been found in much
larger numbers from February to June than during other months of the year ; but
more or less were at all times found on shore upon their favorite beaches, which
were about the islands of Santa Barbara, Cerros, Guadalupe, San Bonitos, Nativi-
dad, San Roque, and Asuncion, and some of the most inaccessible points on the
main - land between Asuncion and Cerros. When coming up out of the water, they
were generally first seen near the line of surf; then crawling up by degrees, fre-
quently reclining as if to sleep; again, moving up or along the shore, appearing
not content with their last resting-place. In this manner they would ascend the
ravines, or "low-downs,” half a mile or more, congregating by hundreds. They
are not so active on land as the seals; but, when excited to inordinate exertion,
their motions are quick — the whole body quivering with their crawling, semi-
vaulting gait, and the animal at such times manifesting great fatigue. Notwith-
standing their unwieldiness, we have sometimes found them on broken and elevated
ground, fifty or sixty feet above the sea.
The principal seasons of their coming on shore, are, when they are about to
shed their coats, when the females bring forth their young (which is one at a
time, rarely two), and the mating season. These seasons for “hauling up” are
more marked in southern latitudes. The different periods are known among the
hunters as the "pupping cow," "brown cow," "bull and cow," and “March bull”
seasons; but on the California coast, either from the influence of climate or some
other cause, we have noticed young pups with their mothers at quite the opposite
months. The continual hunting of the animals may possibly have driven them to
118
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
irregularities. The time of gestation is supposed to be about three-fourths of the
year. The most marked season we could discover was that of the adult males,
which shed their coats later than the younger ones and the females. Still, among
a herd of the largest of those fully matured (at Santa Barbara Island, in June,
1852), we found several cows and their young, the latter apparently but a few
days old.
When the Sea Elephants come on shore for the purpose of "shedding,” if not
disturbed they remain out of water until the old hair falls off. By the time this
change comes about, the animal is supposed to lose half its fat; indeed, it some-
times becomes very thin, and is then called a "slim - skin.”
In the stomach of the Sea Elephant a few pebbles are found, which has given
rise to the saying that “they take in ballast before going down” (returning to the
sea). On warm and sunny days we have watched them come up singly on smooth
beaches, and burrow in the dry sand, throwing over their backs the loose particles
that collect about their fore limbs, and nearly covering themselves from view ; but
when not disturbed, the animals follow their gregarious propensity, and collect in
large herds.
The mode of capturing them is thus: the sailors get between the herd and
the water; then, raising all possible noise by shouting, and at the same time flour-
ishing clubs, guns, and lances, the party advance slowly toward the rookery, when
CLUB AND LANCE USED IN THE CAPTURE OF THE SEA ELEPHANT.
the animals will retreat, appearing in a state of great alarm. Occasionally an over-
grown male will give battle, or attempt to escape ; but a musket-ball through the
brain dispatches it; or some one checks its progress by thrusting a lance into the
roof of its mouth, which causes it to settle on its haunches, when two men with
heavy oaken clubs give the creature repeated blows about the head, until it is
stunned or killed. After securing those that are disposed to show resistance, the
party rush on the main body. The onslaught creates such a panic among these
peculiar creatures, that, losing all control of their actions, they climb, roll, and
tumble over each other, when prevented from farther retreat by the projecting
cliffs. We recollect in one instance, where sixty-five were captured, that several
were found showing no signs of having been either clubbed or lanced, but were
THE SEA ELEPHANT.
119
smothered by numbers of their kind heaped upon them. The whole flock, when
attacked, manifested alarm by their peculiar roar, the sound of which, among the
largest males, is nearly as loud as the lowing of an ox, but more prolonged in one
strain, accompanied by a rattling noise in the throat. The quantity of blood in
this species of the seal tribe is supposed to be double that contained in an ox, in
proportion to its size.
After the capture, the flaying begins. First, with a large knife, the skin is
ripped along the upper side of the body its whole length, and then cut down as far
as practicable, without rolling it over; then the coating of fat that lies between
the skin and flesh – which may be from one to seven inches in thickness, accord-
ing to the size and condition of the animal — is cut into "horse-pieces,” about
eight inches wide, and twelve to fifteen long, and a puncture is made in each piece
sufficiently large to pass a rope through. After flensing the upper portion of the
body, it is rolled over, and cut all around, as above described. Then the “horse-
pieces” are strung on a raft-rope (a rope three fathoms long, with an eye-splice
in one end), and taken to the edge of the surf; a long line is made fast to it,
the end of which is thrown to a boat lying just outside of the breakers; they are
then hauled through the rollers and towed to the vessel, where the oil is tried
out by boiling the blubber, or fat, in large pots set in a brick furnace for the
purpose. The oil produced is superior to whale oil for lubricating purposes. Ow-
ing to the continual pursuit of the animals, they have become nearly if not quite
extinct on the California coast, or the few remaining have fled to some unknown
point for security.
Thus far, we have been writing of the Sea Elephant and manner of capturing
it on the islands and coasts of the Californias; and, although thousands of the
animals, in past years, gathered upon the shores of the islands contiguous to the
coast, as well as about the pebbly or sandy beaches of the peninsula, affording full
cargoes to the oil - ships, yet their numbers were but few, when compared with the
multitudes which once inhabited the remote, desolate islands, or places on the
main, within the icy regions of the southern hemisphere; and even at the expense
of digression, we have thought it well to give an account of the animal in those
regions. Several geographical points have already been mentioned, and among these
Kerguelen Land, or Desolation Island, and Herd's Island, are the great resort-
ing-places of these animals at the present day. The last-named place is in latitude
53° 03' south, and longitude 72° 30' to 73° 30' east. Its approximate extent is
sixty miles. Its shores are somewhat bold, broken, and dangerous to land upon ;
no harbor being found that is secure for the smallest vessel. In the smoothest
120
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
time, when landing, the boat's crew are obliged to jump into the water, to hold and
steady the boat, that it may not be staved on the beach, or swept out by the reced-
ing undertow. In fact, a heavy surge always beats upon those frozen, rock-bound
shores, varied only by the combing seas, that dart higher yet up the precipitous
cliffs, when urged on by the oft-repeated gales that sweep over the southern por-
tions of the Indian Ocean.
Captain Cook, the celebrated explorer, on his voyages of discovery in the Res-
olution, when he visited Kerguelen Land, called it the Island of Desolation, on
account of its barren and uninhabitable appearance, although it possessed fine har-
bors, where the hardy mariner could rest securely with his ship during the violent
winter storms. But not so at Herd's Island. The Sea Elephant oil-ship, breasting
the changing winds and waves to procure a cargo, is officered by the most fearless
and determined men, who have had experience in whaling, sealing, or Sea Elephant
hunting in those rough seas. The majority of the men are shipped at the Cape de
Verde Islands, they being of a muscular race, who have proved themselves to be
excellent hands for the laborious work. The ship, when first sent out, is provided
with a "double crew," and is accompanied by a small vessel, of a hundred tons or
less, for a “tender." On arriving at the island, the ship is moored with heavy
chains and anchors, and every other preparation is made for riding out any gale
that
may
blow toward the land. The sails are unbent, all the spars above the top-
masts are sent down, and, with the spare boats, are landed and housed during the
season,” which begins about the middle of November, and ends in the middle of
February. Quarters are provided for that portion of the ship's company which is
assigned to duty on shore. The habitation is a small hut, properly divided off
into apartments - one for the mates, one for the steerage officers, and another for
the men.
This dwelling is no larger than necessity demands. Its walls are built
of the detached pieces of lava, or bowlders, nearest at hand; rough boards and
tarred canvas, supplied from the ship, form the roof, which must be made water-
proof and snow-proof. During the day, light is admitted to each room through a
single pane of glass, or å spare deck or side light—perhaps found among the
rubbish on board the vessel ; and doors are made after the fashion of "good old
colony times,” with the latch-string ever swinging in the wind. In this dank
habitation, planted between an iceberg on one side and a bluff volcanic mountain
on the other, these rough men of the sea at once adapt themselves to their several
situations, and all the discipline is maintained that they would be subject to if on
board ship. The high surf at this island renders it impracticable to haul off the
blubber in "rafts," as at Desolation Island and on the coasts of the Californias :
--
THE SEA ELEPHANT.
121
hence it is usually "minced" (the "horse-pieces” cut into thin slices) and put
into tight casks to prevent any waste of the oil ; then, when a smooth day comes,
they are rolled down the beach, and pulled through the rollers by the boats; or
the tender is anchored near shore, a line is run to the vessel, and the casks hauled
alongside, hoisted in, and transferred to the ship, where the oil is tried out and
“stowed down” in the usual manner.
As soon as the season is over-or, rather, when the time has come for the
ship to leave, either for home, or to find shelter in some harbor at the Island of
Desolation—the shore-party is supplied with provisions, all the surplus articles
that were landed are re-embarked, the heavy anchors are at last weighed, and
amid hail, snow, and sleet, the ship under her half-frozen canvas bounds over the
billows, and soon disappears in the offing.
The vessels having departed, the officers and men left on the island resume
their daily occupations. Usually the number is divided into two "gangs,” stationed
at separate places, where clusters of huts have sprung up for the use of those
belonging to the different vessels, who have from time to time made it a tempo-
rary abiding-place. Try-works are built, and a shanty is erected for a cooper's
shop. These two habitable spots are known as “Whisky Bay" and "The Point;'
the former being a slight indentation of the shore-line, where the Elephants in
countless numbers were found by the first vessel visiting there, which, as report
says, had a supply of "old rye” stowed in her run.
The captain, in the heat
of his successful prosecution of the arduous business of procuring a cargo, gave
his men permission to "splice the main brace strong and often,” so long as the
work went briskly on; and it is humorously told that this noted landing-place was
"christened” at the cost of barrels of the beverage, thus securing to it a name as
lasting as that of the prominent headland on the borders of the Okhotsk Sea, well
known to whalemen as "Whisky Bluff.” From day to day the separated parties,
living some thirty miles apart, hunt the animals for leagues along the shores, with
the varied success incident to season or circumstances; and, although on the same
island, the face of the country is so broken-being rent into deep chasms, walled
in as it were by giddy, shelving heights, making it impossible to travel, even on
foot, far inland toward its extremities, and the shores hedged in by sharp ridges
of basalt, stretching out into the sea — the two divisions know nothing of each
other until the vessels return, which is frequently after an absence of from eight
to twelve months, and during that time a thousand or more barrels of oil may have
been collected.
Notwithstanding the hardships and deprivations that are undergone to make a
MARINE MAMMALS. - 16.
122
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
successful voyage, there is no lack of enterprising merchants ready to invest their
capital in any adventure when there is a prospect of ultimate gain; and no ocean
or sea where there is a possibility of navigating appears too perilous for the advent-
urous seamen to try their luck upon. The very fact of the voyage being fraught
with danger and difficulty tends to stimulate them to action. And in this remote
part of the world of which we have spoken, that was unknown to the early explor-
ers, as well as to those who have more recently voyaged toward the Antarctic con-
tinent—and for the geographical position of which we are indebted to the enter-
prise and nautical skill of those of our countrymen who commenced the life of a
sailor by “coming through the hawse - holes"— we find that rival parties are left on
its bleak shores, who, when opposed the one to the other, watch with greater care
every movement that may be made, than the coming and going of the creatures
which are the objects of pursuit. Many a war of words has arisen, with the brand-
ishing of club and lance in the strife; but, like the pioneer California miners,
when left to rely on their own good sense for self-government, there was little to
fear but that all laws made would be simple, just, and strictly adhered to. When
parties from different vessels are located on the same beach, the custom is for all
to work together when killing the animals, as well as when skinning and cutting
the blubber from the bodies into "horse - pieces.” These are thrown into one or
more piles ; after which, the men of each party are ranged in squads, and each
one, in turn, draws a piece from the heap, until all is disposed of. These divisions
are made whenever the animals are found and killed in any considerable numbers ;
and, if far from the rendezvous, the blubber 'is “backed,” or rolled in casks to the
main depot. “Backing" is the stringing of eight or ten pieces on a pole, which
is carried on the shoulders of two men; but if a cask is used, three men are allot-
ted to each one of six or eight barrels capacity, to roll which the distance of two
miles is allowed to be a day's work. While the ship is away, homeward bound, or
returning to the island for another cargo, the tender may be at Desolation Island,
picking up what scattering Elephants can be found upon shores that once swarmed
with millions of those huge beasts ; or a short whaling-cruise is made, until the
time comes for commencing operations at the island.
IIunting for the scattering animals about the shores of Desolation Island,
“between seasons,” is the most exposed and solitary pursuit either in the whale
or seal fishery. The tender takes a detachment of the crew, and plies along the
island coast, landing one or two men on each of the best beaches, with a supply
of water and provisions; a tent or shanty is erected, partly of wood, partly of
canvas; and the skins of the Elephants furnish the floor, couch, and covering of
THE SEA ELEPHANT.
123
the temporary habitation. Here the banished hunter or hunters rest at night,
after the fatigues of ranging along the shores, killing and flaying the animals met
with, and transporting the blubber to a place of deposit, where it is buried, to pre-
vent the gulls from devouring it, until taken aboard. As the season returns at
Herd's Island, the vessels are usually "on the ground ;" the treacherous surf is again
passed and repassed in the light, frail whale - boats, landing the fresh crew from
home, who relieve those who have thus literally “seen the elephant.” The time
passes quickly away, in the toil and excitement of killing and flensing; and again
the floating fragment of the world departs for the land of civilization, leaving her
last crew from home to pass an Antarctic winter, amid the solitudes of icebergs
and the snow-covered peaks of the mountain land. No passing sail is seen to
break the monotony of their voluntary exile ; even many varieties of sea- birds
found at Desolation Island do not deign to visit them. Multitudes of penguins,
however, periodically resort to the island, and their eggs, together with the tongues
of the Sea Elephants, and one or two kinds of fish, furnish a welcome repast for all
hands, by way of change from that substantial fare called "salt- horse" and "hard-
tack.” Beside the close stoves in their apartments, which are heated with coal from
the ship, or the fat of the Elephant pups, and the flickerings of a murky oil-lamp,
the long winter evenings are passed in smoking and playing amusing games —"old
sledge” and “seven-up” being favorites—and the reckless joking that circulates
among adventurers who make light of ill-luck, and turn reverses into ridicule.
The extent and value of the Sea Elephant fishery, from its commencement up
to the present date, is not definitely known, as the ships engaged in the enterprise,
when whaling and sealing was at its height in the southern ocean, were also in
pursuit of the valuable fur- bearing animals, as well as the Cachalot and the ba-
læna; hence their cargoes were often made up of a variety of the oils of com-
merce. We have reliable accounts, however, of the Sea Elephant being taken for
its oil as early as the beginning of the present century. At those islands, or upon
the coasts on the main, where vessels could find secure shelter from all winds, the
animals have long since been virtually annihilated ; and now they are only sought
after in the remote places we have mentioned, and these points are only accessible
under the great difficulties that beset the mariner when sailing near the polar re-
gions of the globe. Enough data are at hand, nevertheless, to show that hundreds
of thousands of the animals, yielding as many barrels of oil, have been taken from
Desolation and Herd's Islands, by American ships, which for many years have main-
tained a monopoly of the business.
CHAPTER II.
THE SEA LION.
(Plate xxii, fig. 1, 2.)
ure.
Among the numerous species of marine mammalia found upon the Pacific Coast
of North America, none excite more interest than the Sea Lion; even the valuable
and almost domesticated Fur Seal of the Pribyloff group of islands fails to equal it
in utility to the Aleutians, who depend upon it not only as a staple article of
food, but obtain, by the sale of its silky skin, their foreign luxuries of every nat-
But the Fur Seal (Callorhinus) dwells only periodically in isolated places,
while the Sea Lion, although having an extended geographical range, is a frequent-
er, not only of remote and secluded places, but also of thickly inhabited coasts ;
entering inland bays and rivers; at times disporting among the shipping, and quite
frequently making some detached rock or reef, contiguous to the busy shore, a
permanent abode, where it seems to enjoy its approximate union with civilization.
The Sea Lion is known, among naturalists, as belonging to the sub-family Tricho-
phocince, of which there are three genera, and several varieties, said to be distribut-
ed as follows: Otaria jubata, found on the southern coasts and islands of South
America; Eumetopias Stelleri, which inhabits the coasts and islands of the North
Pacific, from California and southern Kamschatka northward ; Zalophus Gillespië, found
on the coasts and islands of the North Pacific, from Lower California and southern
Japan northward ; Zalophus lobatus, of the Australasian seas.* To whatever genus of
the Trichophocince the animals may belong, their general habits, so far as I have
had opportunity to observe, are the same; the only difference being that those
among their number who migrate north or south, conformn, in some respects, to the
various situations they may be placed in between the equatorial and polar regions.
* The classification and geographical distri Eared Seals, lately published; with an account
bution here given, are based upon the authority of the northern Fur Seals, by Captain Charles
of the valuable work of J. A. Allen, on the Bryant.
(124)
THE SEA LION.
125
We are acquainted, however, with only two genera, one of which (Otaria jubata)
inhabits the coast of South America, and the other (Eumetopias Stelleri) we have
met with between the tropical lines of the Pacific, from the Galapagos Islands-
which are situated about the equator-northward on the west coast of North
America nearly to Behring Strait, and westward to the Island of Saghalien on the
coast of eastern Siberia. The first-named genus has a short, rounded head, prom-
inent above the eyes, and a shaggy mane, which imparts a resemblance to the king
of beasts ; hence the appropriate name, Sea Lion, which was given it when first
described.
The Eumetopias Stelleri is of more symmetrical proportions than the Otaria
jubata, and very nearly resembles the Fur Seal, more particularly the males; and,
* Since the publication of the article “About Lions there found will rarely exceed eleven feet
Sea Lions,” in the Overland Monthly of Septem in extreme length; while on the coast of Cali-
ber, 1871, we have had opportunity of making fornia, animals of that length are frequently
additional observations upon these animals at met with, and, as before stated, there is no
the Farallone Islands, where we saw the largest lack of cases where the animals have reached
females we have ever met with on the California the length of twelve feet, and an instance is
coast. Hence, what we have formerly taken to known, as stated by Professor Davidson, of the
be the Eumatopias Stelleri may prove to be the U. S. Coast Survey, where the specimen meas-
Zalophus Gillespii?; but, if such be the fact, both ured fifteen feet from tip to tip. In any event,
species inhabit the coast of California, at least there is no further question about the northern
as far south as the Farallones. Moreover, both Sea Lions exceeding in size the Sea Lions of
species, if we may be allowed the expression, California, as those inhabiting the last-named
herd together in the same rookeries. On mak region are at least fully equal in magnitude to
ing a series of observations upon the outward their congeners of the north. The accompany-
forms of Sea Lions, it will be found that a ing figures may convey a better idea of their
confusing variety exists in the figures of these
forms than a written description.
very interesting animals, especially in the shape Doubts have beon expressed as to the mi-
of the head : some having a short muzzle, with gratory habits of the Sea Lion; but we are fully
a full forehead; others with forehead and nose convinced that there are individuals, at least,
somewhat elongated; and still others of a mod among all the northern herds, that change from
ified shape, between the two extremes.
the cold latitudes to the tropics, as
we have
Within the past five years, several observers killed several of the animals upon the southern
have assured me that the Sea Lions of the coast of California, during the month of June,
north, particularly those of St. Paul's Island, in which were found arrow or spear heads, such
Behring Sea, were much larger than those on as are used by the northern sea-coast natives.
the coast of California; but this information Professor Davidson states that in June, 1870, &
proves to be incorrect, for the same observers, spear-head, such as is used by the natives of
after visiting the island a second time, and in Alaska, was found in a large male Sea Lion,
vestigating the matter more thoroughly, have taken at Point Arenas, in latitude 39°, on the
arrived at the conclusion that the male Sea coast of California.
126
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.

From a Pheta by MUTARIOGA.
MALE SEA LION SLEEPING.

Sr.
Proma Paste by Mur 11062
MALE SEA LION WAKING.
THE SEA LION.
127

C.M Sammon.ge
APPEARANCE OF A MALE SEA LION WHEN ROARING.

Alleen
7 INCO
Free LAL011
FEMALE SEA Lions OF ST PAUL'S ISLAND.
128
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
at a distance, it is difficult to distinguish between a fully matured Fur Seal and a
Sea Lion of ordinary size. The extreme length of the full-grown male Sea Lion
of the north may be set down at sixteen feet from tip of nose to end of posterior
flippers, and yield of oil at forty gallons; but it is seldom they are found meas-
uring twelve feet from tip of nose to tip of tail, and the individual yield of oil
throughout the season would not exceed ten gallons. Its greatest circumference
would not be over eight feet, and its weight about one thousand pounds. Its head
and neck are more elongated, and the latter is destitute of the mane which is
characteristic of the Lion of the southern seas. Its mouth is armed with strong,
glistening, white teeth. Its projecting upper lip is furnished, on each side, with
strong, flexible whiskers, which are generally of a white, or yellowish - white color,
some of which grow to the length of eighteen inches. When the animal is either
excited by curiosity or anger, its eyes are full of expression; and at such times
they appear large, but when the creature is dozing, these members have quite the
opposite appearance. Its ears are cylindrical at the root, tapering to a point, are
covered with short, fine hair, and lie nearly in a line with the body. Its limbs,
which are incased with a sort of thick shagreen, combine the triple functions of
legs, feet, and fins, and are far better adapted to locomotion in the watery ele-
ment; where, when excited, its movements are swift and graceful, while on the
land, the creature's imposing, though awkward traveling, requires great effort. Its
body is covered with short, coarse, shining hair. The color of the adult males is
much diversified ; individuals of the same rookery being quite black, with scatter-
ing hairs tipped with dull white, while others are of a reddish brown, dull gray, or
of light gray above, darker below. The adult female is not half the bulk of the
male, and its color is a light brown. One of the average size, taken at Santa Bar-
bara Island, coast of California, in the spring of 1871, measured six feet four
inches from tip of nose to tip of posterior flippers, and weighed one hundred and
eighty-two pounds.
We submit the following measurements, etc. (in feet and inches), of a full-
grown male Sea Lion (No. 1), taken at the Farallone Islands, July 17th, 1872 ; of
an adult female Sea Lion (No. 2), taken at Santa Barbara Island, coast of Califor-
nia, April 12th, 1871; and of a male Sea Lion (No. 3), about ten months old,
taken at the last-named island, April 4th, 1872:
No. 1.
No. 3.
No. 2.
6 4
4 10
0 111
Length of animal from tip of nose to tip of posterior flippers, 12 0
Length of posterior Alippers....
2 2
Breadth of posterior flippers (expanded)..
09
Round the body behind the pectorals.
7 0
1 1
0 8
3 3
2 8
THE SEA LION.
129
No. 1.
5 0
No. 2.
2 1
No. 3.
1 9
2 6
1 4
1 4
0 6
1 3
0 41
10 0
0 39
0 11
0 8
0 11
1 6
From tip of nose to pectorals.
Length of pectorals.
Breadth of pectorals....
Distance between extremities of pectorals..
From tip of nose to eye...
From tip of nose to ear..
Length of ear...
Girth of body at root of posterior flippers.
From tip of nose to root of tail.....
From tip of nose to corner of mouth....
From end of lower jaw to corner of mouth.
Length of tail......
Length of longest whiskers....
Length of longest claws on posterior flippers..
Breadth of longest claws on posterior flippers.
From root of tail to genital slit....
From root of tail to hind teats...
From root of tail to forward teats...
Distance between the two hind teats across the belly....
Distance between the two forward teats across the belly......
Thickness of blubber...
0 311
0 7
0 1
0 111
3 104
0 31
0 23
0 21
051
041
0 3
0 7
0 2
06
1 6
0 14
0 og
1 2
0 6
1 2
1 10
0 5
08
0 1 000
0 0.1
Number of whiskers on each side of the face: No. 1, thirty-one; No. 2, thir-
ty-five; No. 3, thirty-six and thirty-five.
Three other males were measured at the same time of the first example, which
varied but little in their proportions. The number of claws on posterior flippers
of No. 1 were five, three of which were rudimentary. In the adult female example,
(No. 2) the blubber was half an inch thick on the back, and one inch on the
belly.
The following are the measurements, etc. (in feet and inches), of a female Sea
Lion (No. 1), supposed to be a yearling, taken at Santa Barbara Island; and of
a new-born female Sea Lion pup, (No. 2), taken at the same island, May 3d, 1873:
Length of animal from tip of nose to tip of posterior flippers.
Length of posterior flippers.
From tip of nose to root of tail...
Length of tail......
From tip of nose to pectorals.
Length of pectorals....
Breadth of pectorals.
Girth of body behind pectorals
Girth of body at junction with posterior flippers...
No. 1. No. 2.
4 10 2 4
0 11 0 51
3 101 1 11
0 23 0 11
2 0
0 101
1 2} 0 7
0 41 0 3
2 7 1 3
1 1 0 63
MARINE MAMMALS. - 17.
130
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
From tip of nose to corner of mouth....
From end of under jaw to corner of mouth....
From tip of nose to eye..
From tip of nose to ear..
Length of ear.
Thickness of blubber..
No. 1. No. 2.
0 37 O 2
02
0 3 0 13
06 0 4
0 17
0 0 0 0
In the first example, the whiskers on each side of the face numbered thirty-
five and thirty-six; length of the longest whisker, four and three-eighths of an
inch. The color of the second example was black above, a little lighter below,
with scattering hairs of light brown or dull white. It had three rudimentary claws
on each pectoral ; and five claws on posterior flippers, two of which were rudiment-
ary. Weight of animals, respectively, eighty and ten and a half pounds.
We give also several zincographic illustrations, which may afford a better idea
of the different forms of the animals in varied attitudes, as well as their facial
expression when sleeping, waking, and when in a state of excitement, which is
manifested by howling or roaring.
Both males and females have a double coating of fat or blubber, lying between
the skin and the flesh of the body. These coatings are separated by a thin layer
of muscular tissue. The fat yields the oil of commerce, although inferior in quality
to that of the Sea Elephant. The young pups, or whelps, are of a slate or black
color, and the yearlings of a chestnut brown. An erroneous impression gener-
ally prevails relative to the size of the Sea Lion, which is considered, by many,
to be of mammoth proportions. And, when describing the larger species of mam-
malia found in the vast ocean, there is a manifest propensity to magnify them
until transformed into huge monsters, like the whale of the ancient voyagers, which
“wore nine hundred foot long,” or that distinguished specimen of the seal family,
honored with the name of “Ben Butler,” who, with his troop, holds possession of
Seal Rock, off the cliffs of San Francisco, and that has been estimated at the great
weight of two thousand pounds.
The habits of the Sea Lion exhibit many striking features. It not only dwells
near the Arctic and Antarctic latitudes, but it basks upon the glittering sands
under an equatorial sun. On approaching an island, or point, occupied by a num-
erous herd, one first hears their long, plaintive howlings, as if in distress; but,
when near them, the sounds become more varied, and deafening. The old males
roar so loudly as to drown the noise of the heaviest surf among the rocks and
caverns; and the younger of both sexes, together with the "clapmatches,” croak
hoarsely, or send forth sounds like the bleating of sheep or the barking of dogs;
THE SEA LION.
131
in fact, their tumultuous utterances are beyond description. A rookery of the
matured animals presents a ferocious and defiant appearance; but usually, at the
approach of man, they become alarmed, and, if not opposed in their escape, roll,
tumble, and sometimes make fearful leaps, from high precipitous rocks, to hasten
their flight. Like all others of the seal tribe, they are gregarious, and gather in
the largest numbers during the "pupping season," which varies in different latitudes.
On the California coast it is from May to August, inclusive, and upon the shores
of Alaska it is said to be from June to October ; during which period the females
bring forth their young, nurse them, associate with the valiant males, and both
unite in the care of the little ones, keeping a wary guard, and teaching them, by
their own parental actions, how to move over the broken, slimy, rock-bound shore,
or upon the sandy, pebbly beaches, and to dive and gambol amid the surf and
rolling ground-swells. At first the pups manifest great aversion to the water, but
soon, instinctively, become active and playful in the element; so, by the time the
season is over, the juvenile creatures disappear with the greater portion of the old
ones; only a few of the vast herd remaining at the favorite resorts throughout the
year. During the pupping season, both males and females, so far as we could
ascertain, take but little if any food, particularly the males; though the females
have been observed to leave their charges and go off, apparently in search of sub-
sistence, but they do not venture far from their young ones. That the Sea Lion can
go without food for a long time is unquestionable. One of the superintendents of
Woodward's Gardens informed me, that in numerous instances they had received
Sea Lions into the aquarium, which did not eat a morsel of nourishment during a
whole month, and appeared to suffer but little inconvenience from their long fast.
As the time approaches for the annual assemblage, those returning or coming
from abroad are seen near the shores, appearing wild and shy. Soon after, how-
ever, the females gather upon the beaches, cliffs, or rocks, when the battles among
the old males begin for the supreme control of the barems; these struggles often
lasting for days, the fight being kept up until one or both become exhausted, but
is renewed again when sufficiently recuperated for another attack; and, really, the
attitudes assumed, and the passes made at each other, equal the amplifications of a
professional fencer. The combat lasts until both become disabled, or one is driven
from the ground, or perhaps both become so reduced that a third party, fresh from
his winter migration, drives them from the coveted charge. The vanquished ani-
mals then slink off to some retired spot, as if disgraced. Nevertheless, at times,
two or more will have .charge of the same rookery; but, in such instances, frequent
defiant growlings and petty battles occur. So far as we have observed upon the
132
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Sea Lions of the California coast, there is but little attachment manifested between
the sexes; indeed, much of the Turkish nature is apparent. But the females show
some affection for their offspring : yet, if alarmed when upon the land, they will
instantly desert them, and take to the water. The young cubs, on the other hand,
are the most fractious and savage little creatures imaginable, especially if awakened
from their nearly continuous sleeping; and frequently, when a mother reclines to
nurse her single whelp, a swarm of others will perhaps contend for the same favor. *
To give a more extended and detailed account of the Sea Lions, we will
relate a brief sketch of a sealing season on Santa Barbara Island. It was near the
end of May, 1852, when we arrived ; and, soon after, the rookeries of “clapmatches,"
which were scattered around the island, began to augment, and large numbers of
huge males made their appearance, belching forth sharp, ugly howls, and leaping
out of or darting through the water with surprising velocity ; frequently diving
outside the rollers, the next moment emerging from the crest of the foaming break-
* It is positively asserted by the natives of
St. Paul's Island, Behring Sea, that the female
Sea Lion of that locality suckles the male pup
the second year. Special Agent Bryant, who
has passed several seasons upon this island, has
informed us that he has investigated the mat-
ter as far as practicable, and gives credit to the
assertion. There would seem to be nothing im-
probable about the young Sea Lion suckling the
second year, as the fact of yearlings of land
mammals doing likewise is fully established.
But whether the female Sea Lion, of a year's
growth, is denied the nourishment which is af-
forded to the male, would seem a critical ques-
tion; yet, if such is the fact, this may account
for the great discrepancy of size between the
adult males and females.
Although a digression from, yet in & sense
corroborative of, the habits imputed to the Sea
Lion, in nursing its young, we will mention
facts which have just come to our knowledge,
through the whalemen at Monterey Bay, Cali-
fornia, which present nearly a parallel case with
that of the Sea Lions. On the 1st of October,
1873, the whalers captured a cow whale of the
Humpback species; also & calf that was with
her, which was judged to be about one year
old. That this yearling was the offspring of the
captured female, there can be no question, as
she followed close to the calf (which was first
harpooned) until it was nearly lifeless; and when
the exhausted creature was about to expire, the
mother made an effort to support it by holding
it upon the surface of the water with her head.
These solicitous manifestations on the part of
the female are regarded as unquestionable evi-
dence, that the young whale in question was
her cherished offspring. As soon as it expired,
the mother turned to make her escape, but while
in this act, she was “harpooned” and “bomb-
ed,” killing her almost instantly. Both whales
were towed to the station; and when the calf
was cut in, it was found to be a male ; and on
flensing the mother, a well-grown foetus was
found in her, which proved, in this instance,
that the yearling whale not only follows its
dam, but during that period the mother asso-
ciates with the adult males, and again becomes
pregnant before separating from her former calf.
At the time of the capture of the two whales
above mentioned, an adult bull was in their
company, which was also captured.
THE SEA LION.
133
ers, and waddling up the beach with head erect, or, with seeming effort, climbing
some kelp-fringed rock, to doze in the scorching sunbeams, while others would lie
sleeping or playing among the beds of sea - weed, with their heads and outstretched
limbs above the surface. But a few days elapsed before a general contention, with
the adult males, began for the mastery of the different rookeries, and the victims
of the bloody encounters were to be seen on all sides of the island, with torn
lips, or mutilated limbs and gashed sides; while, now and then, an unfortunate
creature would be met with, minus an eye, or with the orb forced from its socket,
and, together with other wounds, presenting a ghastly appearance. As the time of
“hauling up” drew near, the island became one mass of animation ; every beach,
rock, and cliff, where a seal could find foot-hold, became its resting-place; while
a countless herd of old males capped the summit, and the united clamorings of the
vast assemblage could be heard, on a calm day, for miles at sea. The south side
of the island is high and precipitous, with a projecting ledge hardly perceptible
from the beach below, upon which one immense Sea Lion managed to climb, and
there remained for several weeks — until the season was over. How he ascended,
or in what manner he retired to the water, was a mystery to our numerous ship’s-
crew, as he came and went in the night; for “Old Gray”-as named by the sail-
ors — was closely watched in his elevated position during the time the men were
engaged at their work on shore.*
None but the adult males were captured, which was usually done by shooting
them in the ear or near it; for a ball in any other part of the body had no more
effect than it would in a grizzly bear. Occasionally, however, they are taken with
the club and lance, only shooting a few of the masters of the herd. This is easily
accomplished with an experienced crew, if there is sufficient ground back from the
beach for the animals to retreat. During our stay, an instance occurred, which not
only displayed the sagacity of the animals, but also their yielding disposition, when
hard pressed in certain situations, as if naturally designed to be slain in numbers
equal to the demands of their human pursuers.
On the south of Santa Barbara
* Relative to the Sea Lions leaping from
giddy heights, an incident occurred at Santa
Barbara Island, the last of the season of 1852,
which we will here mention. A rookery of
about twenty individuals was collected on the
brink of a precipitous cliff, at a height at least
of sixty feet above the rocks which shelved from
the beach below; and our party were sure in
their own minds, that, by surprising the ani-
mals, we could drive them over the cliff. This
was easily accomplished; but, to our chagrin,
when we arrived at the point below, where we
expected to find the huge beasts helplessly mu-
tilated, or killed outright, the last animal of
the whole rookery was seen plunging into the
sea.
134
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Island was a plateau, elevated less than a hundred feet above the sea, stretching
to the brink of a cliff that overhung the shore, and a narrow gorge leading up
from the beach, through which the animals crawled to their favorite resting -place.
As the sun dipped behind the hills, fifty to a hundred males would congregate
upon the spot, and there remain until the boats were lowered in the morning,
when immediately the whole herd would quietly slip off into the sea and gambol
about during the day, returning as they saw the boats again leave the island for
the ship. Several unsuccessful attempts had been made to take them; but, at last,
a fresh breeze commenced blowing directly from the shore, and prevented their
scenting the hunters, who landed some distance from the rookery, then cautiously
advanced, and suddenly, yelling, and flourishing muskets, clubs, and lances, rushed
up within a few yards of them, while the pleading creatures, with lolling tongues
and glaring eyes, were quite overcome with dismay, and remained nearly motion-
less. At last, two overgrown males broke through the line formed by the men,
but they paid the penalty with their lives before reaching the water. A few
moments passed, when all hands moved slowly toward the rookery, which as slowly
retreated. This maneuvre is called “turning them," and, when once accomplished,
the disheartened creatures appear to abandon all hope of escape, and resign them-
selves to their fate. The herd at this time numbered seventy-five, which were
soon dispatched, by shooting the largest ones, and clubbing and lancing the others,
save one young Sea Lion, which was spared to ascertain whether it would make
any resistance by being driven over the hills beyond. The poor creature only
moved along through the prickly pears that covered the ground, when compelled
by his cruel pursuers; and, at last, with an imploring look and writhing in pain,
it held out its fin-like arms, which were pierced with thorns, in such a manner as
to touch the sympathy of the barbarous sealers, who instantly put the sufferer out
of its misery by the stroke of a heavy club. As soon as the animal is killed, the
longest spires of its whiskers are pulled out, then it is skinned, and its coating of
fut cut in sections from its body' and transported to the vessel, where, after being
"minced," the oil is extracted by boiling. The testes are taken out, and, with the
selected spires of the whiskers, find a market in China— the former being used
medicinally, and the latter for personal ornaments.
At the close of the season — which lasts about three months, on the Califor-
nia coast—a large majority of the great herds, both males and females, return to
the sea, and roam in all directions in quest of food, as but few of them could
find sustenance about the waters contiguous to the islands, or points on the main-
land, which are their annual resorting-places. They live upon fish, mollusks, crus-
THE SEA LION.
135
taceans, and sea - fowls; always with the addition of a few pebbles or smooth stones,
some of which are a pound in weight.* Their principal feathery food, however, is
the penguin, in the southern hemisphere, and the gulls in the northern; while the
manner in which they decoy and catch the gaviota of the Mexican and Californian
coasts, displays no little degree of cunning. When in pursuit, the animal dives
deeply under water and swims some distance from where it disappeared ; then, rising
cautiously, it exposes the tip of its nose above the surface, at the same time giving
it a rotary motion, like that of a water - bug at play. The unwary bird on the
wing, seeing the object near by, alights to catch it, while the Sea Lion, at the
same moment, settles beneath the waves, and at one bound, with extended jaws,
seizes its screaming prey, and instantly devours it.
A few years ago great numbers of Sea Lions were taken along the coast of
Upper and Lower California, and thousands of barrels of oil obtained.
The num-
ber of seals slain exclusively for their oil would appear fabulous, when we realize
the fact that it requires on an average, throughout the season, the blubber of three
or four Sea Lions to produce a barrel of oil. Their thick, coarse - grained skins
were not considered worth preparing for market, in a country where manual labor
was so highly valued. At the present time, however, they are valuable for glue-
stock, and the seal - hunter now realizes more comparative profit from the hides than
from the oil. But while the civilized sealers, plying their vocation along the sea-
board of California and Mexico, destroy the Leon marino, for the product of its oil,
skin, testes, and whiskers, the simple Aleutians of the Alaska region derive from
these animals many of their indispensable articles of domestic use. It appears an
* The enormous quantity of food which would piece of sturgeon, upon which fish the animals
be required to maintain the herd of many thou are chiefly fed, would be thrown in the water
sands, which, in former years, annually assem near by; and, although it would sink out of
bled at the small island, of Santa Barbara, would sight from the surface, the huge beast would
seem incredible, if they daily obtained the al make a bound from the rocks, and diving, would
lowance given to a male and female Sea Lion, instantly recover it and again return to his ele-
on exhibition at Woodward's Gardens, San Fran vated position; or when a morsel lodged upon
cisco, California, where the keeper informed me the rocks, he would seize and devour it in a
that he fed them regularly, every day, forty moment, and in the same manner as the ani-
pounds of fresh fish. Since these animals have mal picks up a crab, with his mouth, from the
taken up their abode in the ponds of the gar slimy rocks of the ocean, and instantly bolts it.
dens, the male has become quite expert in The female was fed in the water; and as the
catching food within his jaws, as it is thrown food was thrown from side to side in the aqua-
to him or near him, while lying upon a pile of rium, the animal would dart through the ele-
rocks in the centre of the pond. Sometimes a ment with surprising velocity to receive it.
136
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
But on
instructive fact in the order of Providence, that the northern belt of coast is clothed
with gigantic forests, and swarms with terrestrial animals of the chase, whereby
the natives of the wooded regions find means of transport across the inland waters,
and ample clothing from the skins of the animals which range through their hunt-
ing-grounds, while the thousand islands which diversify the shore between the
capes of Mendocino and Ommany are but sparsely inhabited by the Eumetopias,
and those found are turned to little account by the semi-aquatic savage.
the seal islands of Alaska, where the only timber at hand is drifted from the
great rivers draining the wooded main - land, or borne by the Kamschatka branch
of the Kuro Siwo, we find rookeries of the largest Sea Lions met with upon the
shores of the Pacific, gathered with the great herds of Fur Seals which constitute
the chief wealth of Alaska ; and although the two species differ in their character,
still they are found peacefully occupying the same or adjacent breeding-grounds.
The Aleutians even aver that the Sea Lion and the Fur Seal sometimes cohabit
together.
The principal rookery of Sea Lions on St. Paul Island is near its north-east
point; and to this place the natives resort, between the toils of the Fur Seal
season, to make their annual “drive" to their village, which is clustered about the
slope and glen of the opposite shore. This "drive,” to the good - natured Aleuts,
is what the buffalo-hunt has been to the red-skins on the plains of the Platte, or
matanza- time with the old Californians; for the party starts out as on a sporting
foray, and at night they stealthily get between the herd of Sea Lions and the
water; then, with professional strategy, they manage to “cut out” six or eight
of the largest at a time, and drive them a short distance inland, where they are
guarded until a band of two or three hundred are assembled. Formerly the
implement used in driving was a pole with a small flag at the end; but, since our
adopted country- folk have become more Americanized, that Yankee production, a
cotton umbrella, has been substituted, and it is said that any refractory siutch in
the "drive" is instantly subdued by the sudden expansion and contraction of an
umbrella in the hands of a pursuing native.
To collect the desired number for the yearly supply involves several days;
therefore a throng of villagers, it is said, sets out prepared with everything needful
for the campaign. As the work of driving goes on only at night, the day is
passed in sleeping and cooking their food by smoldering fires of drift-wood and
seal- fat, sheltered by their umbrellas, or a sort of tent contrived by spreading
blankets and garments over whales' ribs in lieu of tent-poles-never forgetting in
their repast the fragrant chi, which is quaffed in numberless cups fro:n the steam-
THE SEA LION.
137
ing sam-o-var. At length, the whole troop of animals being assembled, a flash
of umbrellas here and there, with the call of the herdsmen, brings all into moving
phalanx. But the time for driving must be either at night, after the dew is fallen,
or upon a dark, misty, or rainy day; as the thick mat of grass that covers the
land must be wet, in order that the animals may easily slip along in their vaulting
gait over the green road to their place of execution. Under the most favorable
circumstances, the march does not exceed six miles in twenty-four hours ; and it
being a distance of four leagues or more to the village, three days and nights, or
more, are spent before they arrive at the slaughtering place. There they are allowed
to remain quiet for a day, to cool their blood, which becomes much heated by
the tedious journey; after which, they are killed by shooting. The dead animals
are then skinned, and their hides packed in tiers until fermented sufficiently to
start the hair, when they are stretched on frames to dry, and eventually become
the covering or planking for the Aleutian baidarkas and baidarras. The fat is taken
off and used for fuel, or the oil is rendered to burn in their lamps. The flesh is
cut in thin pieces from the carcass, laid in the open air to dry, and becomes a
choice article of food. The sinews are extracted, and afterward twisted into thread.
The lining of the animal's throat is put through a course of tanning, and then made
into boots, the soles of which are the under covering of the Sea Lion's fin-like
feet. The intestines are carefully taken out, cleaned, blown up, stretched to dry,
then tanned, and worked into water-proof clothing. The stomach is emptied of its
contents, turned inside out, then inflated and dried for oil-bottles, or it is used as
a receptacle for the preserved meat ; and what remains of the once formidable and
curious animal is only a mutilated skeleton.
Crossing Behring and the Okhotsk seas, to the coasts of Siberia, including the
peninsula of Kamschatka and the island of Saghalien, the mode of capture by the
natives changes from that of the eastern continental shores. The inlets and rivers
of these Asiatic regions swarm with salmon from June to September, and at this
season the seals follow, and prey upon them as they ascend the streams. The
natives then select such places as will be left nearly bare at low tide, and there
set their nets — which are made of seal-thongs— to strong stakes, so placed as to
form a curve open to the confluence of the stream. These nets are similar to gill-
nets, the meshes being of a size to admit the seal's head—which gives free passage
to the shoals of fish—and the pursuing animal, as soon as entangled in the net,
struggles forward in its efforts to escape, but is held firmly in the meshes, where
it remains till low water, when the natives, in their flat-bottomed skin - boats,
approach and dispatch the victim with their rude bone implements. As the season
MARINE MAMMALS.-18.
138
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
becomes warm, the animals of both sexes congregate in their favorite rookeries, and
the females climb to the most inaccessible places among the rocks and crags, to
bring forth and nurture their offspring. But here they are hunted by the natives
accustomed to the use of fire-arms, who shoot them for the skins of the young
ones, which are used for clothing.
In this region also, during the spring and fall, after the "net-sealing” is
over, great numbers of Sea Lions are captured upon the floating ice, with gun or
spear; and during the rigorous months, the seal-hunters cut through the congealed
mass what they term “breathing-holes.” Through these the seals emerge to the
frosted surface, and, if the sun peers through the wintery clouds, the creature,
warmed into new life, may stroll hundreds of yards away ; the watchful hunter,
secreted behind a cake of ice or a bank of snow, rushes out from his covert, and
places a covering over the hole, effectually preventing the animal's escape, and then
dispatches it with knife and spear. Its skin is stripped off, scraped clean, closely
rolled, and laid away until the hair starts—this process is called “souring ;" then
the hair is scoured off, and the bare hide is stretched to season —a process usually
requiring about ten days—when it is taken down and rubbed between the hands
to make it pliable; this completes the whole course of dressing it. The prepared
hides are then converted into harness for the sledge-dogs and reindeer, and water-
proof bags ; if wanted for the soles of moccasins, or to cover their skin - boats, they
are dried with the hair on, and become nearly as stiff as plates of iron. The blub-
ber of the animals, if killed in the fall or winter, is preserved by freezing, and is
used for food, fuel, and lights, as desired; while the same part of those taken
during the spring and summer is put in the skins of young seals, and placed in
earthen vaults, where it keeps fresh until required for consumption. The residue
of the animal is tumbled into a reservoir, sunk below the surface of the ground,
where it is kept for the winter's supply of food for the dogs, which live upon
the frozen flesh and entrails of the seals, whose skin furnishes the tackle by
which they transport the primitive sledge over the snow-clad wastes of Siberia and
Kamschatka.
In the southern regions, the Sea Lion is but rarely pursued by the aborigines;
for the Fuegians, who are so little elevated above the beast, have no means of
capturing the animal, as have the Aleuts and Koraks of the north ; and those
degraded types of humanity, who wander about the shores of Tierra del Fuego,
partake of the same food as do the amphibious herds. But the Patagonians are
sometimes found clothed in long mantles of Sea Lion skins, and the seal is other-
wise utilized by them. Along the coasts of Chile and Peru, the inflated skins of
THE SEA LION.
139
the Sea Lion are frequently used instead of the wooden balsa, or catamaran. The
vast herds of these marine animals, to the far north and south, do not materially
diminish, as they are hunted by the natives solely for domestic consumption ; but
those on our California shores will soon be exterminated by the deadly shot of the
rifle, or driven away to less accessible haunts.
CHAPTER III.
THE BANDED SEAL.
HISTRIOPHOCA EQUESTRIS,
Gill.
(Plate xxi, fig. 1, 2.)
Of this beautifully marked animal, which attains the length of six or eight feet,
there is but very little known. Its geographical distribution is said to extend east-
ward to Amoor land. It is found upon the coast of Alaska, bordering on Behring
Sea, and the natives of Ounalaska recognize it as an occasional visitor to the Aleu-
tian Islands. It is said to be found in greater numbers on the Asiatic coast than
on the American. In April, 1852, we observed a herd of seals upon the beaches
at Point Reyes, California ; these, without close examination, answered to the
description given by Gill, which is as follows: “The species is remarkable for
color as well as structural peculiarities. The male is at once recognizable by the
color, and this may be said to be a chocolate brown, except (1) a band of whitish
yellow, bent forward toward the crown around the neck; (2), an oval ring of the
same color on each side, encircling the fore feet and passing in front just before
them; and (3) another band, also bent forward above, behind the middle of the
trunk. There is considerable variation in extent of these bands, and sometimes the
puribrachial rings are more or less confluent with the posterior band. The females
are simply whitish yellow, or have very indistinct traces of the pastmidian band."
Although we are quite confident the seals we saw on Point Reyes were the same
as those described by Gill, still it is a remarkable fact that we have never seen
this species on the coast of California since. The Russian traders, who formerly
visited Cape Romanzoff, from St. Michael's, Norton Sound, frequently brought back
the skins of the male Histriophoca, which were used for covering trunks and for
other ornamental purposes.
(140)

in

1
..
ori.,'fet,
nas
1872, Oides for the
se; these, withirt CN
i, which is as follows:
el percebriti3. The inale is it. Once relia
mil?
Pasko..te icon, ex: (1) a banli, s!itish
Varand the link. 2. an (va
? prefcet a
1.1 firyar als
tryn in Xiert
lers coni..
lave very i . ileti
,2
4
7
5
.
racis
Sdiy
Szine
see.
TY
T!
visited CT
"el's,
.
utli cinet.nti. ...
Piate XXI
2

CMXD110r.dez.
BANDED SKAL CHISTRIOPIIO CA EQUESTRIS) GILL.
L.MALE. 2. FEMALE

2
Cmiscammon, del.
FUR SEAL. CALLORHINUS URSINUS.) GRAY
L.MALE - 2 FEMALE
CHAPTER IV.
FUR SEALS.
THE NORTHERN FUR SEAL (CALLORHINUS URSINUS, Gray.) (Plate xxi, fig. 1, 2.)
The Fur Seals have so wide a geographical range-extending nearly to the
highest navigable latitudes in both the northern and southern hemispheres—and
are found assembled in such countless numbers at their favorite resorts, that they
become at once a source of great commercial wealth ; and, among marine mammalia,
they are the most interesting we have met with. Captain Fanning—one of the
noted sealing-masters in early times— distinguished the different ages and sexes as
follows: "Full-aged males, called 'wigs;' the females, 'clapmatches ;' those not quite
80 old, 'bulls ;' all the half-grown of both sexes, 'yearlings;' the young of nearly
a year old, called 'gray' or 'silvered pups ;' and before their coats are changed
to this shade, called 'black pups.
The color of the full-grown males, or "wigs," is dark brown - with scattering
hairs of white about the head, neck, and anterior portion of the body-and, in
some instances, nearly approaches to black. At a distance, it is difficult to distin-
guish between an old "wig” and a full-grown male Sea Lion of the California
coast, the former being frequently found measuring nine feet from tip of nose to
extremity of posterior flippers.
The "clapmatches" average fully one-half the length of the largest "wigs," and
the greater portion of them are of a silver-gray color; the very oldest, however,
are dark brown on the back and sides, with scattering white hairs over all. The fur
is reddish brown inside. The thick mixture of black, glistening hairs imparts the
dark hue to the oldest animals, and the white hairs on the younger ones give them
the silvery lustre. Both old and young are of lighter shade underneath, particu-
larly about the pectorals and posterior portions of the body. The layer of fat, or
blubber, between the skin and flesh, may average one and a half inch in thickness,
varying according to the time the animal has been on shore-it being very fat
(141)
142
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
when the season begins, and very lean when the season is over, which changes
the animal's appearance considerably from its former robust condition. When in
full flesh, the adult females weigh about eighty-five pounds.
Following are measurements of five female Fur Seals, taken at the mouth
of the Strait of San Juan de Fuca, in the spring of 1869 :
No. 2.
4 7
0 2
1 6
08
No. 1.
4 0
0 11
1 4
08
0 6
0 04
067
0 17
0 2
021
Length of animal from tip of nose to tip of tail.....
Length of tail....
Length of posterior flippers...
Extreme width of posterior flippers when expanded
From end of posterior flippers to nails or claws on same
Length of nails or claws..
From tip of nose to ear...
Length of each ear
Length of under jaw.
From tip of nose to eye....
Length of fissure between the eyelids.
From tip of nose to pectorals...
Length of each pectoral.
Width of each pectoral....
Circumference of body just behind pectorals.
No. 3.
4 0
011
1 4
0 7
0 6
003
06
0 11
02
0 22
0 61
0 14
021
0 23
0 13
1 11
2 0
1 10
1 2
0 5
2 7
1 2
05
3 0
1 2
0 44
25
No. 8.
No. 4.
4 9
0 2
1 5
3 6
0 14
1 3
0 7
Length of animal from tip of nose to tip of tail.....
Length of tail....
Length of posterior flippers...
Breadth of posterior flippers when expanded
From end of posterior flippers to nails.....
Length of nails on posterior flippers
From tip of nose to pectorals.
Length of pectorals..
Width of pectorals
From tip of nose to ear.
Length of each ear..
From tip of nose to eye...
Length of under jaw...
Circumference of body just behind pectorals.
0 3
0 0
1 4
1 2
i i
0 5 0 41
0 6
0 11
0 21
0 2
3 1 2 27
The succeeding figures afford a general illustration of the forms, or proportions,
of the animals, when in various attitudes. The zincograph (No. 1) of the full-aged
male gives a good representation of the animal's anterior figure, as well as imparting,
FUR SEALS.
143
to some degree, the surly expression ever present with those veterans who have
fought for prestige upon the rookeries many successive seasons. No. 2 is an
excellent representation of a female head when seen in that position. No. 3
affords a good idea of the outline of the head (side view), and the expression
of the harmless mother, who bears her offspring, and submits to the harsh treat-
ment of her male companion and master, without manifest complaint or resistance.

immo
Pas.
LINCOV
S.
No. 1.-FULL-AGED MALE FUR SEAL, ST. PAUL'S ISLAND. (Drawn by Elliott.)
Nos. 4 and 5 represent the relative proportions of a female, ( (view from side and
below, which were drawn from a dead animal, verified by measurements. No. 6
illustrates the familiar attitudes of Fur Seals of both sexes, more especially the
younger animals, or those supposed to be three or four years old.
It is very rarely that the "clapmatch” has more than one pup. Out of twenty-
two individuals examined, not one was found with twins; and the Indians about
Fuca Strait say they never have seen two foetuses in the same seal. They have,
144
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
however, two teats each side of the belly, nearly on a line with the corners of the
mouth and the posterior limbs. While taking measurements of some “clapmatches"
at the summer village of Kiddy Kubbit, situated near the mouth and on the south
side of the strait, where the animals lay in one of the large lodges, the women
were engaged in skinning them and trying out the oil from the blubber. The
question arose, whether a Fur Seal ever had more than one pup at a birth. A bevy
of squaws discussed the subject with great spirit, raising such a din about our ears
that nothing else could be heard ; at last, a herculean kloochman clutched a knife,
and slashing into the seals, brought forth one pup only from each individual, and,
with a knowing look as well as a multitude of words, gave us to understand that
this examination, together with past experience in the matter, was proof positive
that the offspring of this species of mammalia did not come in pairs.
The time of gestation has been supposed to be about nine months, but later
observations at the seal islands of Behring Sea prove it to be at least ten months,
or more. The pups, when first born, are about one-third the length of the mother.
They are covered with a thick mat of coarse fur, which changes to a finer texture
and lighter shade as the animals mature. The time of bringing forth the young
(“pupping season"), on the coast of California, is from May to August, including
a part of both months; on the coast of Patagonia, and the latitudes near Cape
Horn, from October to March.
The flippers of the Fur Seal are destitute of hair, being covered with tough,
black skin, similar to shagreen, which is very flexible about the terminations of
their extremities; the side limbs are shaped much like the fins of the smaller
Cetaceans; the posterior ones have each five distinct toes, or digits, and three nails,
or claws, project from their upper sides, four inches or more from their tips, accord-
ing to the size and age of the animal. The tail is extremely short, and pointed.
The ears are quite pointed also, slanting backward, and are covered with short, fine
hair. The head, in proportion, is longer and sharper than that of the Leopard Seal.
The number of whiskers on each side of the face may average twenty ; they are
of different shades, from blackish brown to white, and frequently attain the length
of seven inches. The eyes are invariably dark and glistening, and have a human-
like expression.
The intrinsic value of the animal does not depend upon the price of its skin
alone ; for the layer of fat adhering to it yields the oil of commerce, and supplies
light and heat to the natives in their dismal winter quarters. The flesh, likewise,
affords them a staple article of food. Fanning, as well as other early voyagers,
speaks of the flesh of the Fur Seal pups, when six weeks old or more, as being
FUR SEALS.
145

MARINE MAMMALS. - 19.
Zincor'xv.'s.
No. 2. —Head OF FEMALE FUR SEAL, VIEWED FROM BELOW, Two-THIRDS NATURAL SIZE. (Drawn by Elliott.)
146
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
equal to the best mutton, if properly cooked. Notwithstanding, after repeated
trials, we confess our preference for the latter. The hearts and livers of young
seals, whether of the Fur or Hair species, are excellent; but we would advise those
fond of fresh meat not to witness the killing of the animals and the extraction of
those choice portions of them. The employés of the Russian-American Company
frequently salted seal meat for ship's use, when a supply of beef could not be
obtained.
The habits of the Fur Seals differ in several respects from those of the numerous
Hair species. One of their most remarkable traits is their extended geographical
range. To give a clear idea of their varied haunts as regards climate and diversity
of locality, we may mention the following as among their favorite resorting-places :
The coast of Patagonía, west coast of Africa, Falklands, New South Shetlands, South
Georgia, southern coast of Chile, island of Masafuero, Lobos Islands (on the coast
of Peru), Galapagos Islands (off the coast of Ecuador), the islands of Desolation,
Crozets, and St. Paul's in the Indian Ocean, and St. Paul and St. George islands
(Behring Sea), and Robin and Jonas islands in the Okhotsk Sea. Thus it will be
seen that these curious animals are inhabitants of the antipodes of the globe, and
bask in a tropical sun as well as endure the rigors of the icy regions of the Arctic
and Antarctic.
Some idea may be had of their numbers in former years, when on the island
of Masafuero, on the coast of Chile - which is not over twenty-five miles in circum-
ference—the American ship Betsey, under the command of Captain Fanning, in the
year 1798,* obtained a full cargo of choice skins. It was estimated at the time
* At the present day, when the American
ships that double Cape Horn, and the Cape of
Good Hope, are magnificent types of naval arch-
itecture compared with those of the early voy-
ages, a reminiscent note, relative to the Betsey,
her owners, commander, and ship's company,
is of peculiar interest, as portraying the char-
acter of all those who, at that period, entered
so practically yet enthusiastically into commer-
cial pursuits. “In the early part of the month
of May, 1797,” writes Captain Fanning, “it was
the good fortune of the author to meet at New
York with Captain John Whetten, a gentleman
distinguished as an able navigator, and at the
time in command of the ship Ontario, in the
China trade. With him originated, and with
him also was the project first discussed, of fit-
ting out a suitable vessel, which should proceed
to the South Seas, there to procure a cargo of
Fur Seal skins, and with this cargo thence to
cross the Pacific for the Canton market, where
the article was well ascertained to be greatly in
demand, and held at prices that furnished good
grounds upon which to hope that a very hand-
some profit would be realized. Another great
inducement held out in favor of the attempt,
was the probability that Captain Whetten him-
self, in the Ontario, would be at Canton at
about the period of the arrival there (which
would be in our fall part of the year, say the
month of September, October, or November) of
any vessel shortly fitted out. The intimate knowl.
FUR SEALS.
147

(Zinco XV, 5.F.
No. 3. — HEAD OF FEMALE Fur SEAL, SIDE VIEW, TWO-THIRDS NATURAL SIZE. (Drawn by Elliott.)
148
OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
MARINE MAMMALS
that there were left on the island at least five hundred thousand seals. Subse-
quently, there were taken from the island but little short of one million skins.
The seal fishery was extensively prosecuted for many years by our countrymen.
The sealing fleet on the coast of Chile alone, in 1801, amounted to thirty vessels,
many of which were ships of the larger class, and nearly all were under the Amer-
ican flag. Up to the present day, American vessels are the pioneers in the most
remote and unexplored regions, wherever the migratory animals are to be found in
sufficient numbers to induce that class of our seamen who are fond of a sportsman's
life, in addition to that of sea - faring, to embark in the enterprise.
In the midst of the Crimean War, an enterprising firm in New London, Con-
necticut, fitted out a clipper bark, which was officered and manned expressly for a
edge Captain Whetten had of the manner of doing
business with these people, and the great assist-
ance he could afford, being conversant in all
their intricate trade, and in the purchasing of
silks and other articles for the New York mar-
ket, as our homeward cargo, were certainly such
arguments as were well calculated to increase
the confidence of success in the contemplated
voyage. This was an opportunity not to be left
unimproved; and to one naturally possessed of
an ambitious and aspiring mind, with a strong
attachment to a seaman's profession, increased
as it had been, since my first visit to the South
Seas, by a perusal of the voyages of such cir-
cumnavigators as Drake, Byron, Anson, Bougan-
ville, Cook, and others, the hope of being able
to add some new discoveries to the knowledge
already in the possession of man relating to
those seas, and the no less flattering hope of
realizing a fortune should the enterprise be well
conducted and successful in its termination, were
sufficient to bind me to exert myself in bringing
about this desired voyage. Every view was en-
couraging; but funds were necessary, and to
raise these without delay, I applied to that up-
right and liberal merchant, Mr. Elias Nexsen,
with whom also to consult and advise upon the
best means of securing the early fitting-out and
sailing of the enterprise. To the information
and encouragement given by Captain Whetten,
was added my own strong confidence in its
practicability, and the flattering results that such
an adventure held forth. The plan met with
his entire approval, and after some conversation
with Captain Whetten, on 'Change that day, in
the afternoon of the same he made the offer of
his brig, the Betsey, then in port.
She was
New York built, a little short of one hundred
tons, and an excellent vessel of her class. If
she will answer,' said he, 'I will put her into
the business, and at whatever price, upon a mi-
nute inspection, her value shall be ascertained
to be, I will take the one-half in the adventure
of the vessel, and her outfits.' I was unable,”
adds the captain, “ to take more than one-eighth
myself, but the remaining three were, by the
evening of the same day, taken by other friends,
and thus the whole amount required to insure
the sailing of the vessel was made up. An in-
ventory was taken, agreeably to the understand-
ing at the commencement, by which the value
of the vessel was ascertained, and made satis-
factory to all concerned. In less than a month
from the time the enterprise was first enter-
tained, the Betsey sailed from New York, to stop
at New Haven (the native place of Mr. Caleb
Brintnall, the first officer, a great disciplinarian),
and afterward at Stonington, to obtain and com-
plete her complement of men, in all twenty-
seven; for it had been concluded to be the
FUR SEALS.
149

mer
No. 4. —SIDE VIEW OF FEMALE Fur Seal.

ZINCO XURY
Crann On Del
No. 5.- View OF FEMALE FUR SEAL FROM BELOW.

lllll
ZINCOX.V.S.E
RON ELLIOTT
No. 6. — ATTITUDES OF FUR SEALS.
150
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
sealing voyage in the Okhotsk Sea. The captain was a veteran in the business, and
many thought him too old to command, but the result of the voyage proved him
equal to the task. The vessel proceeded to Robin Island -a mere volcanic rock,
situated on the eastern side of the large island of Saghalien. Many outlying rocks
and reefs are about it, making it dangerous to approach, and affording but slight
shelter for an anchorage. Here the vessel (of about three hundred tons) lay, with
ground - tackle of the weight for a craft of twice her size. Much of the time
fresh winds prevailed, accompanied by the usual ugly ground-swell; and, in conse-
quence of her being long, low, and sharp, the deck was at such times frequently
flooded; nevertheless, she “rode out the whole season, though wet as a half-tide
rock," and a valuable cargo of skins was procured, which brought an unusually
most judicious policy, to select the greatest pro hoisted it on deck, to be made to answer any
portion of them from the New England States. purpose that future emergency might require."
Having obtained the number of hands required “While on the passage to the Cape de Verdes,
for the Betsey, on the 13th day of June, 1797, by the expressed wish and counsel of the offi-
the vessel was got under way, and proceeded to cers, it was thought advisable to alter the rig of
sea, from Stonington, Connecticut. When off the Betsey, and change her into a ship. This,
Watch - hill Point, (situated about nine leagues it was supposed, and afterward ascertained to
to the northward of Montague Light, on the be the fact, would be greatly to our advantage ;
east end of Long Island) she was brought to, for while laying off and on at the seal islands,
in order to discharge the pilot, and the occasion to procure our cargo of Fur Seal skins, the
was embraced, as the best suited to ascertain cabin - boy alone could tend and work a mizzen-
the minds and inclinations of the seamen. All topsail, who certainly would be altogether unable
hands were therefore mustered on deck, aft, and to do anything with the heavy boom of a brig's
liberty was given to all such as were disinclined fore-and-aft mainsail. At this place the alter-
to proceed on the voyage— to all those who were ation was carried into effect; the mizzen-mast,
unwilling to encounter the dangers, privations, top, spars, rigging, sails, etc., were already in
and sufferings, usually attendant on similar ex readiness, and the armorer, at his forge erected
peditions - now to return with the pilot. Not on shore, forged and made the chains and all
withstanding this, no one seemed so inclined, the other requisite iron - work, so that the mast
but all, to a man, answered, their desire was to was stepped, sails bent, and the Betsey rigged
proceed on the voyage, confirming the same by into a ship all ready for sea, in five days' time.
three hearty cheers. And here it may be re This was accomplished without one dollar extra
marked, that a more orderly and cheerful crew expense to the owners.” The Betsey, having ob-
never sailed round the world in any vessel. The tained supplies at the Cape de Verdes, sailed
pilot accordingly returned by himself. At six on the 23d day of July, 1797, for the Falkland
P.M. we took our departure from Block Island, Islands, where she arrived October 19th of the
with a fine breeze from the southwest." On
same year.
Not finding Fur Seals there in any
their passage to the Cape de Verde Islands, as considerable numbers, it was decided to double
related on the ship's log, “At four P.m. fell in Cape Horn and make the best of their way to
with a mast; sent the boat to tow it alongside ; the Island of Masafuero; accordingly they sailed
FUR SEALS.
151
high price in the European market, on account of the regular Russian supply being
cut off in consequence of the war. This is only given as one instance of the many
that may be related of sealing life.
The “season," as understood by sealers, is the time the animals collect in
herds, or rookeries, on shore: the females to bring forth their young, and copulate
with the vigorous males, while the valiant old bulls guard the rookeries, until all
again return to the sea, and migrate to some unknown quarter. A few days before
the main body arrive, a number of old “wigs” come up as if to see that all is
right. Frequently the innumerable herd have been seen, in the southern hemi-
sphere, from the high elevations of mountainous islands, as far as the eye could
distinguish at sea, leaping and plunging like a shoal of porpoises until nearing the
ner.
lows:
from the Falkland Islands December Sth, 1797,
Our carpenter and armorer were first-rate
and arrived at their destination January 20th, workmen, and had made a set of machinery, by
1798. On the 5th day of April following, hav means of which, from the old rigging, we laid
ing obtained a full cargo of selected seal-skins, a new set of running rigging throughout; thus
the little vessel with her valuable freight depart- equipped, our ship, as respected her rigging,
ed for China. On the passage thence, through was in a far better condition than when she left
the trade winds, the ship was unrigged and the United States.” We will add, that the Bet-
rigged again from deck to truck, which inci sey was an armed vessel, which carried “eight
dent Captain Fanning makes mention of as fol four-pounders, of iron, and two brass long si
“Previous to the ship’s departure from pounder guns," with a ship's company of twen-
New York, a sufficient quantity of rope for a ty-seven officers and men. This pigmy ship
new gang of standing rigging had been taken arrived safely at Canton, and disposed of her
on board; this had been prepared, during our valuable furs to great advantage. A China cargo
leisure hours heretofore, and fitted, in readiness was purchased, and when received on board, the
to go over the mast-head when necessary. For vessel sailed for home by the way of the Cape
several days past the trade wind had not veered of Good Hope. In passing through the Straits
more than two points, blowing directly on our of Sunda, the vessel was attacked by a fleet of
stern, so that all the sails which would be of twenty-nine piratical proas, which were badly
service, could be set on one mast. This was a punished by her gallant crew. Continuing on
most favorable opportunity for replacing our old her course, the Betsey, which sailed as a brig
rigging with the new; we, therefore, hit upon upon voyage of adventure the 13th day of
the expedient of stripping one mast at a time, June, 1797, returned to her home - haven on
and accordingly commenced with the foremast, the 6th day of April, 1799, transformed into a
securing it well by purchases and tackles at the full-rigged ship, having accomplished one of the
hounds, before letting up the lower rigging; most successful sealing voyages of those days.
afterward, putting the new suit on the lower Furthermore, the author states "he believes it to
mast, topmast, etc., and then setting all taut up be the first American vessel, manned and offi-
preparatory to spreading sail upon it. As soon cered wholly by native-born citizens, that ever
as everything was completely ready, this was sailed around the world from the port of New
done, and the mainmust served in a like man York.”
152
ESTERN
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
shore; then, passing through the surf, they collect upon the beaches, and divide
into families, or rookeries, as far as practicable. These families, or divisions,
are guarded by the "wigs,” who can only maintain their authority and position
at the expense of frequent pitched battles with others of their sex who may
attempt to displace them. They also keep a watchful eye over the numerous
clapmatches” under their charge ; and should one attempt to take to the water,
she is immediately driven back, and frequently suffers from the savage bites of her
master for attempting to escape. It is no unusual occurrence, in the height of the
season, to see two full-grown “wigs” fight by the hour, exhibiting much tact in
their assaults upon each other, both endeavoring to gain advantage by some adroit
movement—at times making a savage lock with their mouths, or seizing each other
by the fore flippers, or gashing necks and bodies with their sharp, tusk - like teeth.
Sometimes we have seen several old males together on a separate beach, who
were cut in every direction, and apparently had retired from the main herd, being
unable to continue the fight in consequence of wounds received.
Frequently, many thousands of seals congregate on the same island.
They
prefer remote, isolated situations, often upon barren rocks or islands, the shores of
which are surrounded by a high surf, in which they delight to play. They some-
times ascend high, precipitous rocks, where it is next to impossible for man to
follow them. Their food consists of fish and a variety of other marine productions,
and small stones or pebbles are found in their maws. When a great number are
collected on shore, their barking and howling is almost deafening; and when
passing to leeward of a seal island, the odor arising from it is anything but pleasant.
We have before spoken of the wide geographical distribution of the Fur Seals,
and of their gregarious propensities. We may add, likewise, from our own observa-
tion as well as the expressed opinion of several experienced sealing-masters, that
their natural migrations extend over a great expanse of the ocean ; and if they are
unusually disturbed in their favorite haunts for several successive seasons, they are
quite sure to seek some distant or unknown place, where they can congregate
unmolested by man.
The females have great affection for their young, which may be more manifested
on a coast where, by almost constant hunting from year to year, they have become
wild and shy.
On one of the San Benito Islands, on the coast of Lower California, we once
watched with interest a “clapmatch” and her pup, which was but a few weeks
old. She approached the shore cautiously, with her little one nestling about her ;
and while “hauling" upon the beach, she was constantly on the lookout, but at
FUR SEALS.
153
the same time caressing and endeavoring to quiet the object of her care, with a
fondness almost human. All being still about the shore save the "wash" along the
beach, she soon lulled it into quietness, and both lay huddled on a shelving rock,
enjoying the warmth of a midday sun. Now and then a heavier swell than usual
would roll in, varying the otherwise monotonous sound, when instantly the mother
would raise her head and gaze with glaring eyes to make sure that there was no
cause for alarm; then again she would resume her former posture, with her pup
hugged to her breast by one of her pectorals, as if to sleep.
Some small sticks being at hand, we broke one, to see what effect so slight a
noise might have upon them. The instant it snapped, the young one uttered cries
of alarm, and the mother yelped defiantly; they soon, however, became quiet again,
and we were on the point of leveling the rifle, when accidentally an old "wig"
was caught sight of, lying on a high rock not far distant: taking sure aim we fired,
then turned to observe the movements of the "clapmatch” and her little one.
With a bound or two she reached the water, but returned again to urge her young
one off as best she could ; soon both were in their chosen element, and disappeared
around a rocky point-and that was the last seen of them.
Our observations having been confined almost exclusively to the Pacific Coast,
and chiefly between Chile and Alaska, what may follow, in addition to personal
knowledge, has been obtained from the most reliable sources within our reach.
In former times, when Fur Seals abounded, they were captured in large num-
bers with the ordinary seal-club in the hands of the sealer, who would slay the
animals “right and left” by one or two blows upon
the head. A large party
would cautiously land to leeward of the rookery, if possible; then, when in read-
iness, at a given signal all hands would approach them, shouting, and using their
clubs to the best advantage in the conflict. Many hundreds were frequently taken
in one of these “knock-downs," as they were called. As soon as the killing was
over, the flaying commenced. Some sealers became great experts in skinning the
animals ;
and the number of skins one would take off in the course of an hour
would be a decidedly fishy story to tell. However, to flay fifty seals in a day
would be regarded as good work. It will be readily seen that a sealing-ship’s
erew, numbering twenty or more, would make great havoc among a seal rookery
in very short time; and it is no matter of surprise that these valuable fur-bearing
animals soon became comparatively scarce. As early as 1835, about Cape Horn,
Patagonia, and other points in the Antarctic regions, men were left to "watch
out” and shoot the animals as one or more came on shore.
Both officers and men have been frequently landed from sealing-vessels on
MARINE MAMMALS.-20.
154
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
barren islands, rocks, or points, which would appear quite inaccessible to any but
sealers or sea-elephant hunters, by reason of the heavy surf and surge about them ;
and where men occasionally have perished of starvation or thirst, by not receiving
the needful supplies from the ship, which might have been wrecked before the time
for 'her return. One can hardly imagine more desolate habitations than the Diego
Ramirez, off Cape Horn, or the Crozets and Prince Edward's Islands, in the Indian
Ocean ; but these places are no more forbidding in point of gloomy climate, isola-
tion, and barrenness, than scores of others that might be mentioned, where men
were left for months with or without a boat, as occasion required.
On the coast of California, many beaches were found fronting gullies, where
seals in large numbers formerly gathered ; and as they there had plenty of ground
to retreat upon, the sealers sometimes drove them far enough back to make sure
of the whole herd, or that portion of them the skins of which were desirable.
On the North - western Coast, south of the Aleutian Islands, but few Fur Seals
are taken, and those are chiefly caught by the Indians with spears of native manu-
facture— the fishing being almost entirely confined to the mouth of Juan de Fuca
Strait, and the contiguous coast of the Pacific.
The Indian seal - fishers are among the tribes inhabiting the coast from Gray's
Harbor to the southern part of Vancouver Island. The seals appear on the coast
some years as early as the first of March, and more or less remain till July or
August; but they are most plentiful in April and May. During these two months,
the Indians devote nearly all of their time to sealing, when the weather will permit.
It is but a few years since the Indians have turned their attention to taking
seals solely to procure their skins and oil for barter ; and what may seem surpris-
ing, it is but a few years since the animals have been known to resort to the
vicinity of the strait in such large numbers. We have it from the most reliable
source, that there were but a few dozens of Fur Seal skins taken annually by the
Indians, from 1843 to 1864; after which period, the number of skins sold by them
at Victoria, Vancouver Island, Nee-ah Bay, and points on Puget Sound, has steadily
increased, up to 1869, when the number in the aggregate amounted to fully five
thousand skins.
When going in pursuit of seals, three or four natives embark in a canoe at an
early hour in the morning, and usually return the following evening. The fishing-
gear consists of two spears, which are fitted to a pronged pole fifteen feet in length;
to the spears a line is attached, which is fastened to the spear-pole close to, or is
held in the hand of, the spearman when he darts the weapon. A seal - club is also
provided, as well as two seal-skin buoys—the latter being taken in the canoe to
FUR SEALS.
155
be used in rough weather, if necessary; or if a seal, after being speared, can not
be managed with the line in hand, a buoy is "bent on," and the animal is allowed
to take its course for a time. Its efforts to escape, by diving repeatedly, and
plunging about near the surface of the water, soon exhaust the animal somewhat ;
and when a favorable time is presented, the spearman seizes the buoy, hauls in the
line until within reach of the seal, and it is captured by clubbing. But, generally,
the line is held in the hand when the spear is thrust into the seal; then the pole
is instantly withdrawn, and the canoe is hauled at once to the floundering creature,
which is dispatched as before described. Indians from the Vancouver shore fre-
quently start in the night, so as to be on the best sealing-ground in the morning.
This locality is said to be south-west of Cape Classet, five to fifteen miles distant.
Frequently, during the early part of the day, in the spring months, fresh
winds come from the eastward, causing a rough, short sea in the whirling currents
about the mouth of the strait. At such times these seal-fishers, or hunters, squat-
ting in their canoes—which have a skin buoy lashed on each side of the bow -
present not only a comical, but perilous appearance, they being continually drenched
with salt water by the toppling seas, and the canoes making as great a diversity
of bounds and plunges as do the seals themselves.
In Behring Sea, the islands of St. Paul and St. George are now the main resort-
ing places of the Fur Seals, although in former years Copper Island swarmed with
these periodical visitors; considerable numbers were also inhabitants of Behring
Island, as well as several of the more isolated points in the Aleutian chain. The
Aleutians, under the direction of officers of the Russian-American Company, were
employed in taking the seals. Under the judicious management of the Russians,
the animals did not decrease in numbers, and, to a certain extent, they became
tamed, for they returned periodically to the islands, and brought forth and nurtured
their young; and it was the custom to drive thousands of them inland, that their
capture might be more easily accomplished. The loud moanings of the animals
when the work of slaughtering is going on beggars description; in fact, they
manifest vividly to any observing eye a tenderness of feeling not to be mistaken.
Even the simple-hearted Aleutians say that “the seals shed tears."
Our observations about the mouth of the Strait of Juan de Fuca lead us to
believe that the unusually large number seen in the vicinity during the past two
years are a portion, at least, of the great herd that resort to St. Paul and St.
George. One reason for this conclusion is, that no adult males are found with
them. This would naturally follow the careful course adopted by the Russians of
sparing the females, in order to propagate the stock. Moreover, this female herd-
156
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
for, almost invariably, those of the band which had been taken by the Indians
were females—are found to have foetuses in them that must necessarily be brought
forth in the course of a month or two, which would probably be about the time
they would arrive in that far northern region. The Indians unanimously affirm
that they come from the south and go to the north. It is quite certain that they
do not resort to any islands in or near the strait, or the adjacent coast.
As near
as can be ascertained, the main body pass by the mouth of the strait during the
months of March and April and a part of May, after which comparatively few are
seen; scattering ones, however, remain till the close of summer, as before men-
tioned. But where these countless herds of fur - bearing animals resort to in winter
seems a mystery. All we know is, that at the proper seasons of the year they
come on shore plump and fat, the females have their young, and all remain about
the land until the little ones are sufficiently matured to migrate.
At the expense of being prolix, we quote the following from the notes of
Captain Bryant, * whose stay upon the Island of St. Paul, Behring Sea, afforded
him ample opportunity to study the habits of the Callorhinus ursinus :
“The Fur Seals resort to the Pribyloff Islands during the summer months for
the sole purpose of reproduction. † Those sharing in these duties necessarily remain
on or near the shore until the young are able to take to the water. During this
considerable period the old seals are not known to take any food. These, and no
others, occupy the rookeries (or breeding-grounds) with the females.
“The breeding-rookeries, which are frequented exclusively by the old males
and females, with their pups, occupy the belt of loose rocks along the shores
between the high - water line and the base of the cliffs or uplands. The old male
appears to return each year to the same rock, so long as he is able to maintain
his position. I The native chiefs affirm that one seal, known by his having lost
one of his flippers, came seventeen successive years to the same rock. Those
under six years are never allowed by the old ones on these places. They usually
swim in the water along the shore all day, and at night go on the upland above
the rookeries, and spread themselves out, like flocks of sheep, to rest.
* See Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative - animals do not invariably return every year to
Zoology, Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass., Vol. the same rookery, or island. We are informed
II, No. 1-"On the Eared Seals," by J. A. by Captain Earskin, of the Alaska Commercial
Allen.
Company's service, that some young seals which
† Some observers say that they shed their were marked
upon
St. Paul's Island during
fur.
the season of 1872, were found the year follow-
Subsequent observations prove that these ing on St. George's Island. - C. M. S.
FUR SEALS.
157
"Wherever a long, continuous shore line is occupied as a breeding-rookery,
neutral passages are set apart at convenient distances, through which the younger
seals may pass from the water to the upland, and return, unmolested.
“Constant care is necessary lest thoughtless persons incautiously approach the
breeding-grounds, as the stampede of the seals that would result therefrom always
destroys many of the young. The old males are denominated by the natives
Seacuth (married seals). These welcome the females on their arrival, and watch
over and protect them and their young until the latter are large enough to be left
to the care of their mothers and the younger males. Those under six years old are
not able to maintain a place on the rookery, or to keep a harem, and these are
denominated Holluschuck (bachelors). These two classes of males, with the full-
grown females, termed Motku (mothers), form the three classes that participate in
the duties of reproduction.
"By the first to the middle of April the snow has melted from the shore, and
the drift ice from the north has all passed. Soon after this period, a few old male
seals make their appearance in the water near the island, and after two or three
days' reconnoissance, venture on to the shore and examine the rookeries, carefully
smelling them. If the examination is satisfactory, after a day or two a few climb
the slopes and lie with their heads erect, listening. At this time, if the wind
blows from the village toward the rookeries, all fires are extinguished, and all
unnecessary noises avoided. These scouts then depart, and in a few days after,
small numbers of male seals of all ages begin to arrive. The old patriarchs soon
take their places on the rookeries, and prevent the younger males from landing.
They thus compel them to either stay in the water or go to the upland above.
In locating, each old male reserves a little more than a square rod of space to
himself and his ten or fifteen wives.
"Male seals continue to arrive in small numbers daily, a few of which are year-
lings; those two, three, four, and five years old arrive in about equal proportions.
Those older than this are more numerous than the younger, each one of which
battles his way to his old place on the rookery, or, taking a new one, prepares to
contend for it in case the owner comes to take it. As they acknowledge no right
but that of might, the later comer has to select again, or fight for his rights on
his chosen spot.
“About the 15th of June the males have all assembled, the ground being then
fully occupied by them, as they lie waiting for the females to come.
in small numbers at first, but increase as the season advances, till the middle of
July, when the rookeries are all full, often overlapping each other.
These appear
158
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Many of the females, on their arrival, appear desirous of returning to some
particular male, and frequently climb the outlying rocks to overlook the rookeries,
calling out, and listening as if for a familiar voice. Then changing to another
place, they do the same again, until some 'bachelor' seal, swimming in the water,
approaches and drives her on shore, often compelling her to land against her will.
Here comes in the duty of the 'bachelor' seals. They swim all day along the
shore, escorting and driving the females on to the rocks as fast as they arrive.
As soon as a female reaches the shore, the nearest male goes down to meet her,
making meanwhile a noise like the clucking of a hen to her chickens. He bows
to her and coaxes her, until he gets between her and the water, so that she can
not escape him. Then his manner changes, and with a harsh growl he drives her
to a place in his harem. This continues until the lower row of harems is nearly
full. Then the males higher up select the time when their more fortunate neigh-
bors are off their guard, to steal their wives. This they do by taking them in
their mouths and lifting them over the heads of the other females, and carefully
placing them in their own harem, carrying them as cats do their kittens. Those
still higher up pursue the same method, until the whole space is occupied. Fre-
quently a struggle ensues between two males for possession of the same female, and
both seizing her at once, pull her in two, or terribly lacerate her with their teeth.
When the space is all filled, the old male walks around, complacently reviewing his
family, scolding those who crowd or disturb the others, and fiercely driving off all
intruders. This surveillance always keeps him actively occupied. In two or three
days after landing, the females give birth to one pup each, weighing about six
pounds. It is entirely black, and retains this color for the whole season. The
young are quite vigorous, even at birth, nursing very soon after they are born.
The mother manifests a strong attachment for her own offspring.
“In a few days after the birth of the young, the female is ready for inter-
course with the male. She now becomes solicitous of his attentions, and extends
herself on the rocks before him. Owing to the position of the genital organs, how-
ever, coition on land seems to be not the natural method, and only rarely, perhaps
in three cases out of ten, is the attempt to copulate under such circumstances
effectual. In the meantime, the four and five year old males are in attendance along
the shore. When the jealous lord is off his guard, or engaged in driving away a
rival, a female will slip into the water, and an attentive 'bachelor' seal follows her
some distance from shore. Then, breast to breast, they embrace each other, turning
alternately for each other to breathe, the act of copulation sometimes continuing
from five to eight minutes. Then the female again returns to the shore, she
FUR SEALS.
159
By the
treated with indifference by all the males.
middle of August, the young are all born, and the
females are again pregnant. The old males, having
occupied their stations constantly for four months,
without food, now resign their charge to the younger
males, and go some distance from shore to feed.
"The fact of their remaining without food seems
so contrary to Nature, that it appears to me proper to
state some of the evidences of it. Having been assured
by the natives that such was the fact, I deemed it of
sufficient importance to test it by all the means avail-
able. Accordingly I took special pains to examine daily
a large extent of the rookery, and note carefully the
results of my observations. The rocks on the rookery
are worn smooth and washed clean by the spring-tides,
and any discharge of excrement could not fail to be
detected. I found, in a few instances, where newly-
arrived seals had made a single discharge of red-colored
excrement, but nothing was seen afterward to show that
such discharges were continued, nor any evidence that
the animals had partaken of food. I also examined the
stomachs of several young ones, killed by the natives
for eating, and always without finding any traces of
food in them. The same was true of the few nursing
females killed for dissection.
“About the 20th of July, the great body of the
previous year's pups arrive, and occupy the slopes with
the younger class of males, and they continue to be
mixed together during the remainder of the season.
The two-years-old females, which pair with the young
males in the water near the island, also now associate
with the other females. The pups are five weeks old
when the old females go off to feed; they go with the
mothers to the upland, but keep by themselves. The
pups born on the lower edge of the rookery, where the
surf breaks over them occasionally, learn to swim early,
but the larger portion of them do not take to the

SEAL SPEAR OF THE MAKAH INDIANS, NEE-AM BAY, W.T. 186 8.
SPEAR-HEAD, FULL SIZE,WITH LINE ATTACHED.
160
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
water until later, and many have to be forced in by the parents. Once in, how-
ever, they soon love to sport in it. The young are taught to swim by the old
males on their return from feeding.
"By the last of October, the seals begin to leave the islands in small compa-
nies, the males going last, and by themselves. In November, the
In November, the young seals (as I
was informed by the natives, my own observations ending in August) stop to rest a
few days on the Aleutian Islands, and at Ounalaska the natives obtain several hun-
dred skins annually.
“MANNER OF KILLING THE SEALS. It will be recollected that I have described
the younger seals as spreading out on the slopes above the rookeries to rest at
night. A party of men approach these places armed with clubs, and quietly creep
between the seals and the shore. When ready, the men start up with a shout at a
given signal, and drive the seals inland in a body. When at a sufficient distance
from the rookery, they halt to screen the flock of as many as possible that are too
old for killing, only those that are two and three years old yielding prime skins ;
the fur of those older is too coarse to be marketable. The screening is done by
driving the seals slowly forward in a curve; the older, sullenly holding back, force
the more timid forward, when the men, opening their ranks, let them pass through
and return to the shore. The remainder of the flock is then driven to the killing-
ground, though still containing many too old to be of value.
“It is necessary to drive the flock some distance from the breeding-ground,
as the smell of the blood and the carcasses disturbs the seals. Another object is,
to make the seals carry their own skins to the salt-house ; hence it is sometimes
necessary to drive them six or seven miles. The driving has to be conducted with
great care, as the violent exertion causes the seals to heat rapidly, and, if heated
beyond a certain degree, the fur is loosened, and the skin becomes valueless. In
a cool day they may be driven one mile and a half per hour with safety. When
arrived at the killing-ground, a few boys are employed to keep them from strag-
gling, and they are thus left to rest and cool. Then from seventy to one hundred
are separated from the flock, surrounded, and driven on each other, so that they
confine themselves by treading on each other's flippers. Those desired for killing
are then easily selected, and quickly dispatched by a blow on the nose. When
these are killed, the remainder are allowed to go to the nearest water, whence
they immediately return to the place from which they were driven. This operation
is repeated until the whole flock is disposed of. The work of skinning is per-
formed by all the men on the island, and everyone participating in it is allowed
to share in the proceeds.
FUR SEALS.
161
“As the seals are not wholly at rest until the females arrive, great care is
necessary in selecting the time and place from which to drive. These points are
determined by a head - man, who assumes the whole control of this part of the bus-
iness. In the month of May, only the small number required by the natives for
food are driven. In June, when the seals are more numerous, they are driven and
killed for their skins, although the percentage of prime skins is at this time very
small, often not twenty per cent. of the whole flock driven. About the middle of
July, the females go off into the water, and there is a period of general rest among
all the seals, during which time the natives desist entirely from killing for ten to
fifteen days. At the close of this period, the great body of yearling seals arrive.
These, mixing with the younger class of males, spread over the uplands, and greatly
increase the difficulty of killing properly. Up to this time, there having been no
females with the seals driven up for killing, it was only necessary to distinguish
ages; this the difference in size enables them to do very easily. Now, however,
nearly one-half are females, and the slight difference between these and the younger
males, renders it necessary for the head - man to see every seal killed, and only a
strong interest in the preservation of the stock can insure the proper care.
Sep-
tember and October are considered the best months for taking the seals.
“Besides the skin, each seal will yield one gallon and a half of oil, and the
linings of all the throats are saved and salted as an article of trade to other ports
in the territory, these being used by the natives for making water-proof frocks to
wear in their skin-canoes when hunting the sea -otter or fishing. These parts have
no very great commercial value, though they are considered by the natives as indis-
pensable to them.
“MODE OF CURING THE SKINS.— The skins are all taken to the salt- houses, and
are salted in kenches, or square bins, the skins being spread down, flesh - side up,
and a layer of salt spread over them. They remain thus packed for thirty or forty
days, when they are taken from the bins ; the salt is removed, and the skins are
folded together, the flesh-side in, and sprinkled as they are folded with a quantity
of clean salt. They are then ready for shipment.
"NUMBER OF SEALS FREQUENTING THE ISLAND. — There are at least twelve miles of
shore-line on the island of St. Paul's occupied by the seals as breeding - ground, with
an average width of fifteen rods. There being about twenty seals to the square
rod, gives one million one hundred and fifty-two thousand as the whole number of
breeding males and females. Deducting one-tenth for males, leaves one million
thirty-seven thousand and eight hundred breeding females. Allowing one-half of
the present year's pups to be females, this will add half a million of breeding females
MARINE MAMMALS – 21.
162
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
This was
to the rookeries of 1872, in addition to those now there, while the young of last
year and the year before are also to be added. This estimate does not include the
males under six years of age, these not being allowed on the rookeries by the older
males, nor the yearlings. If we now add those frequenting St. George's Island,
which number half as many, and make a very liberal discount for those that may
be destroyed before reaching maturity, the number is still enormous. It will also
be seen that the great importance of the seal - fishery is not to be calculated from
the basis of its present yield, since each year adds to its extent, as with proper
care the number can be increased until both islands are fully occupied by these
valuable animals.
“PRICES PAID FOR THE SKINS AT THE ISLANDS, AND THEIR VALUE IN EUROPE. — The
Russian Company allowed the natives the value of ten cents per skin.
the pay they received for their labor of killing, curing the skins, and delivering
them alongside the vessel, ready-for-shipment, the company finding salt and mag-
azines in which to salt them.
“The parties who took advantage of the interval between the transfer of the
territory and the enacting and enforcement of the law of the 27th of July, 1868,
to kill and purchase of the natives, paid twenty-seven cents per skin, and had they
been allowed to trade the present year, would have bidden forty cents apiece for
them. To this is to be added the cost of salt, buildings, and the expense of the
agency on shore.
Their market value was at that time five dollars, so that, after a
liberal allowance for incidental expenses, the profit must be very large. Previous
to 1866, these skins were worth only three dollars each, but, owing to recent
improvements in their manufacture, they have become fashionable for ladies' wear,
and soon after the transfer of the territory to the United States the price rose to
seven dollars.
At this time, the Russians had one hundred thousand on hand,
which were forwarded to London, the only market for seal - skins in the raw state,
and the only place where they are dressed. . The different parties which sealed on
the islands in the summer following the purchase, took two hundred thousand,
which so overstocked the market that they are now [1871] worth only three or
four dollars.
“The agents of the Russian Fur Company aimed to control this branch of the
fur trade in Europe by regulating the supply. To do this they sent orders a year
in advance to have such a number killed as in their judgment the market might
need, always keeping at the same time one year's supply on hand. At the time of
the sale of the territory, the annual yield was estimated at eighty thousand skins.
The opinion of the men who have the special care of the seals is, that it has
FUR SEALS.
163
reached one hundred thousand, and that the killing yearly of this number will in
no way check their increase.
“USE OF THE FLESH BY THE NATIVES.—The flesh of the seal constitutes the prin-
cipal food of the inhabitants, they killing, from time to time, such numbers as are
necessary for that purpose. Before the seals leave in autumn, a number are killed
sufficient for their winter's supply. The carcasses are allowed to freeze, and in this
state they keep them until the return of the seals in the spring. The flesh of the
yearling seal is somewhat darker than beef; it is juicy and tender, but lacks the
sweetness and flavor of beef, and is less firm and nutritious. In highly seasoned
dishes, it is relished by nearly all who partake of it. The soldiers on the island
preferred it to salt rations. A five-weeks-old pup roasted is esteemed a great
luxury."
*At the present time (fall of 1873), the
number of Fur Seals taken annually may be
put down at one hundred and forty-five thou-
sand, which are obtained at the places follow-
ing: At St. George's and St. Paul's islands,
Behring Sea, one hundred thousand; at Copper
. and Behring islands, twenty-five thousand; on
the coasts of California and Washington Terri-
tory, at Robin Island (Okhotsk Sea), at the
South Shetland Islands, and about Cape Horn
and other places, twenty thousand.
The price
of the skins in Europe may average nine dol-
lars, from which deduct ten per cent. for ex-
penses, making the home price of each skin
about eight dollars, and bringing the net value
of the fishery up to $1,174,500 yearly.
CHAPTER V.
THE LEOPARD SEAL.
Phoca PEALII,?* Gill. (Plate xxii, fig. 1.)
C.M.Scammon Dal
MOVING ATTITUDE OF A LEOPARD SEAL, ON SHORE.
This species of Phoca, known under
the local name of Leopard Seal, inhabits,
according to our observation, the western
coast of North America and the contiguous
northern region as far as the most western
islands of the Kurile chain. The adult
animals we have met with in different lat-
itudes, were, to all outward
all outward appearances,
of the same form and of the same modi.
fied colors. The places of observation were
Plover Bay, coast of Eastern Siberia, 1865; coast of Upper California, 1852 ; coast
of Lower California, 1856; Strait of Juan de Fuca, 1869. The skeleton of the one
examined at Plover Bay was forwarded to the Smithsonian Institution, through our
friend W. H. Dall, who assumed charge of the scientific enterprise connected with
the Western Union Telegraph Expedition, after the death of the lamented Kenni-
cott. The Leopard Seal in its proportions may be regarded as under-sized. It
never exceeds six feet in length; and its thick body, with its short limbs, gives
the animal a bloated appearance, which seems ill adapted to much activity. Its
head is short, broad, and rounded; the eyes are large, full, and expressive, with five
coarse, bristle - like hairs placed on a curve one inch above the edge of the upper
lid, which constitute the eyebrows. It has thirty to thirty-five whiskers on each

+ W. H. Dall, who has had considerable op-
portunity to observe upon these seals, is under
the impression that several species of them exist
upon this coast, in which opinion we concur;
but, whether such is the fact or not, we will
state that, so far as our observation has extend-
ed, the habits of these seals, both north and
south, are the same.
164


,
ܐ ܝܗ
܀
i ).'-
܀
ܕ
iܬ ܂ܢ '- : ,".ff
܂ ܢ :| ܢ ' ܢ 8:܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ '_'-,: ܂
.'1 ::i
:
II
,
..
"
I : ܐ: '1; ; ;: !1::
*
ܘܢ܀
dild of the site
ܙܵܐ 1
. ܢ܂ '1' -I' ܢ () ܐ ܢ܇܆܆ ܂ ܃ ܂
%
] ; ܙ :'
ܕܫܟ
ܗܝܣ
. -
( 4: () :"if ( ܂ '
' ، { fliui-
[ :
-fiiܐܢܐ ܢܳܐ;i ,ܢ݈ܬ݁ ܐܳܒ݂ܝܢ .܂
A
܂ ܙ . .I_ ;::' }}
܂ܐ ()( ܃ ܃ ܃
ܐ , ܙܟ
، ،T I .{
܀
ataul
1 11
:
i::
Plate XXII.

C.M. Scammon del.
LEOPARD SEAL.(PHOCA PEALII ] GILL.

From Wolf.
SEA-OTTER. ENHYDRA MARINA. FLEMING.
-
THE LEOPARD SEAL.
165
side of the face, which protect or screen the mouth. The ears are merely openings
in the surface of the skin, which are placed one and a half inches behind the eyes.
Both side and posterior flippers are covered with the same thick short hair as the
body, and each one is furnished with five sharp, slender claws, those on the pecto-
rals being the longest, the principal of which measure one linear inch. The poste-
rior flippers, when relaxed, may be three and a half inches in breadth, but are
capable of expansion to ten. Two orifices in lieu of teats, placed two and a half
inches apart, are situated on the lower portion of the belly, and nine inches for-
ward from the origin of the tail. The tail is about three inches long, and is thick
and fleshy. The color of the animal varies but little from a light gray, thickly
mottled with dull black on the back and half - way down its sides, then changing
to a dingy white underneath, with here and there distinct spots of darker shades.
About the throat and breast, the creature at a distance looks to be of a uniform
dull white.
The following measurements in feet and inches, and weights, were taken of two
adult females caught at Smith's Island, Juan de Fuca Strait, in the months of Feb-
ruary and March, 1869 :
No. 1.
No. 2.
3 10
3 8
1
1
0 7
0 6
0 9
0 3
Length of animal from tip of nose to tip of tail..
From tip of nose to fore flippers..
Length of fore flippers..
Length of posterior flippers..
Length of tail...
From tip of nose to eye..
From tip of nose to ear..
From tip of nose to corner of mouth....
Distance between the eyes...
Circumference of body immediately behind side flippers..
0 3
0 8
0 23
021
0 4
0 23
0 2
2 3
0 27
2 61
Weight of No. 1, sixty pounds; weight of No. 2, fifty-six pounds. The time
of gestation with the Leopard Seals is supposed to be nine months. We have met
with the new-born pups about Puget Sound in the months of July and August ;
on the coast of California, in June and July.
The thick coating of white fat which infolds the body produces the purest
oil of any of the pinnipedes. The Leopard Seal is endowed with no little sagacity,
and, although exceedingly wary, it displays considerable boldness. It is found
about outlying rocks, islands, and points, on sand-reefs made bare at low tide, and
is frequently met with in harbors among shipping, and up rivers more than a hun-
dred miles from the sea. We have often observed them close to the vessel when
166
MARINE MANUALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
under way, and likewise when at anchor, appearing to emerge deliberately from the
depths below, sometimes only showing their heads, at other times exposing half of
their bodies, but the instant any move was made on board, they would vanish like
an apparition under water, and frequently that would be the last seen of them, or,
if seen again, they would be far out of gun-shot.
The animals come ashore more during windy weather than in calm, and in the
night more than during the dy; and they have been observed to collect in the
largest herds upon the beaches and rocks, near the full and change of the moon.
They delight in basking in the warm sunlight, and when no isolated rock or shore
is at hand, they will crawl upon any fragments of drift-wood that will float them.
Although gregarious, they do not herd in such large numbers as do nearly all others
of the seal tribe ; furthermore, they may be regarded almost as mutes, in compar-
ison with the noisy Sea Lions. It is very rarely, however, any sound is uttered
by them, but occasionally a quick bark or guttural whining, and sometimes a pecul-
iar bleating is heard when they are assembled together about the period of bring-
ing forth their young. At times, when a number meet in the neighborhood of
rocks or reefs distant from the main land, they become quite playful, and exhibit
much life in their gambols, leaping out of the water or circling around upon the
surface.
Its terrestrial movements, however, are quite different from those of the Sea
Lion, having a quick, shuffling, or hobbling gait, only using its pectorals to draw
itself along with, while a small portion of the animal's belly alternately rests upon
the ground, the posterior part of the body, including the hind flippers, being turned
a little upward. The head and neck are slightly elevated, also, when the animal is
in its land - traveling attitude, but the creature is not so erect as, nor does it
present the imposing appearance of, the Sea Lion, in its habits upon the shore.
Its food is principally fish, and its rapacity in pursuing and devouring the smaller
members of the piscatory tribes is quite equal, in proportion to its size, to that
of the Orca. When grappling with a fish too large to be swallowed whole, it
will hold and handle it between its fore flippers, and, with the united work of its
mouth — which is armed with incisors, canines, and molars — the wriggling prize is
demolished and devoured as quickly, and much in the same manner, as a squirrel
would eat a bur-covered nut.
The animal is easily tamed, and very soon becomes attached to its keeper.
We have had several young ones 'on board ship, and in every instance it was but
a few weeks before they would follow, if permitted, the one who had especial
charge of them, and when left solitary, they would express discontent by a sort of
THE LEOPARD SEAL.
167
mournful bleating. A very interesting specimen of the Leopard Seal is on exhibi-
tion at Woodward's Gardens. This little favorite has been a resident of that pop-
ular and interesting resort for over three years, and, although a female, as we were
informed, is honored with the title of "Commodore.” The animal generally makes
its appearance close at hand whenever within hearing, if called by name, and when
its keeper appears on the lawn, to feed the pelicans, black swans, and other aquatic
birds, which are its companions in the artificial pond, the Commodore does not
wait to be invited, but, knowing as well as its keeper the meal - hour, is on the
watch, and the moment the food - bearer is seen, the little creature — which is not
over four feet long-lifts itself out of the water over the curb-stones and waddles
quickly to its master's side, then holding up its head with mouth wide open,
receives the choice morsels of fish which drop from his hand.
Leopard Seals are very easily captured when on shore, as a single blow with
a club upon the head will dispatch them. The Indians about Puget Sound take
them in nets made of large hemp-line, using them in the same manner as seines,
drawing them around beaches when the rookery is on shore. They are taken by
the whites for their oil and skins, but the Indians and Esquimaux make great
account of them for food. The last- mentioned eat them, as they do nearly every
article of sustenance, with or without cooking, but the natives of Puget Sound
singe them before a fire until the hair is consumed and the skin becomes crisp, after
which it is cut up and cooked as may best suit their relish.
CHAPTER VI.
THE SEA OTTER.
(Plate xxii.)
The most valuable fur-bearing animals inhabiting the waters of the North-west-
ern Coast of North America are the Sea Otters. They are found as far south as
twenty-eight degrees north latitude, and their northern limits include the Aleutian
Islands. Although never migrating to the southern hemisphere, these peculiar
amphibious animals are found around the isolated points of southern Kamschatka,
and even to the western Kuriles, a chain of islands that separates the Okhotsk Sea
from the north-eastern Pacific. The length of the full-grown animal may average
five feet, including the tail, which is about ten inches. The head resembles that of
the Fur Seal. The eyes of the Sea Otter are full, black, and piercing, and exhibit
much intelligence. The color of the female, when "in season," is quite black; at
other periods, it is a dark brown. The males are usually of the same shade,
although, in some instances, they are of a jet, shining black, like their mates.
The fur is of a much lighter shade inside than upon the surface, and, extending
over all, are scattering, long, glistening hairs, which add much to the richness and
beauty of the pelage. Some individuals, about the nose and eyes, are of a light
brown, or dingy white. The ears are less than an inch in length, quite pointed,
standing nearly erect, and are covered with short hair. Occasionally, the young
are of a deep brown, with the ends of the longest hairs tipped with white, and,
about the nose and eyes, of a cream color.
The mating season of the Sea Otter is not known, as the young are met with
in all months of the year ; hence, it is reasonable to suppose they differ from most
other species of fur- bearing marine mammalia in this respect. The time of gesta-
tion is supposed to be eight or nine months.
The hind feet, or flippers, of the animal are webbed, much like the seal's.
Its fore legs are short, the fore paws resembling those of a cat, being furnished with
five sharp claws, as are the posterior flippers.
(168)
THE SEA OTTER.
169
11
The oldest and most observing hunters about Point Grenville (in latitude 47°
20') aver that the “Sea Otter is never seen on shore unless it is wounded." Nev-
ertheless, we have accounts of their being found on the Aleutian Islands when
the Russians were first engaged in the fur trade, and the animals are still occa-
sionally taken, while asleep upon the rocks. We quote the following from Coxe's
work on Russian Discoveries between Asia and America, and the Conquest of Siberia,
published in 1780 : "Of all these furs, the skins of the Sea Otters are the richest
and most valuable. These animals resort in great numbers to the Aleutian and Fox
islands; they are called by the Russians Boobry Morfki, or sea beavers, on account
of the resemblance of their fur to that of the common beaver. They are taken
four ways: struck with darts as they are sleeping upon their backs in the sea;
followed by boats and hunted down until they are tired ; surprised in caverns, and
taken in nets." They are possessed of much sagacity, have great powers of
scent, and are exceedingly imbued with curiosity. Their home is nearly as much
in the water as that of some species of whales; and as whalers have their favorite
"cruising-grounds,” so, likewise, do the Otter- hunters have their favorite hunting-
grounds, or points where the objects of pursuit are found in greater numbers than
along the general stretch of the coast. About the sea - board of Upper and Lower
California, Cerros, San Geronimo, Guadalupe, San Nicolas, and San Miguel islands,
have been regarded as choice places to pursue them; and farther northward, off Cape
Blanco, on the Oregon coast, and Point Grenville and Gray's Harbor, along the
coast of Washington Territory. At the present day, considerable numbers are taken
by whites and Indians about those northern grounds. Thence, to the northward
and westward, come a broken coast and groups of islands, where the animals were,
in times past, hunted by the employés of the Hudson's Bay Company and Russian-
American Company, and where they are still pursued by the natives inhabiting
those rock-bound shores. These interesting mammals are gregarious, and are fre-
quently seen in bands numbering from fifty up to hundreds. When in rapid move-
ment, they make alternate undulating leaps out of the water, plunging again, as do
seals and porpoises. They are frequently seen, too, with the hind flippers extended,
as if catching the breeze to sail or drift before it.
They live on clams, crabs, and various species of crustacea, and sometimes
small fish. When the Otter descends and brings up any article of food, it instantly
résumes its habitual attitude-on the back-to devour it. In sunny days, when
looking, it sometimes shades its eyes with one fore paw, much in the same manner
as a person does with the hand. The females rarely have more than a single one
at a birth--never more than two-which are “brought forth upon the kelp," say
MARINE MAMMALS. - 22.
170
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
the white hunters, that abounds at nearly all points known as their favorite resort-
ing-places. The mothers caress and suckle their offspring seemingly with much
affection, fondling them with their fore paws-reclining, in their usual manner-
and frequently uttering a plaintive sound, which may have given rise to the saying
that “Sea Otters sing to quiet their young ones,” and gives some credence to the
suggestion that the human-like actions of the animal originated the story about
mermaids. But when they are startled, they rise perpendicularly half their length
out of the water; and if their quick, sharp eyes discern aught to cause alarm, the
cubs are seized by the mouth, and both mother and offspring instantly disappear
under water. Males and females are sometimes seen curled up in such shapeless-
ness as to present no appearance of animal form. When in this posture they are
said to be sleeping.
Sea Otters are rarely seen far from shore, their home being among the thick
beds of kelp near the beach, or about outlying rocky reefs and islets. Point Gren-
ville, however, seems to be an exception, as there is no kelp in sight from the
shore.
PURSUIT AND CAPTURE. —About the period of the establishment of Fort Astoria,
near the mouth of the Columbia River, and for many succeeding years, the Sea
Otter hunters along the coasts of California and Oregon were made up from nearly
all the maritime nations of Europe and America, as well as from the different tribes
of natives that dwelt near the sea - shore. Those of the former were hardy spirits,
who preferred a wild life and adventurous pursuits, rather than civilized employ-
ment. The distance coasted in their lightly constructed boats, the stealthy search
for the game, and when discovered, the sharp-shooting chase, gave these hunting
expeditions a pleasant tinge of venture. Moreover, the taking of Sea Otters on the
coasts of the Californias was prohibited by the Mexican government, and the hunt-
ers were aware that, if detected, the penalty would be severe; hence, they ever
kept a watchful eye on all vessels seen, which were carefully avoided or cautiously
approached.
À peculiar sort of boat is used by the hunters, called an “Otter-canoe.” It
is fifteen feet long, nearly five wide, and eighteen inches deep. It is sharp at each
end, with flaring sides, and but little sheer. Still, these boats are excellent "sea-
goers,” and are regarded as unsurpassed for landing through the surf, their shape
being peculiar. So, likewise, are the paddles for propelling them, which are short,
with very broad blades—they being better adapted for use in the thick beds of
kelp. The outfit, when going on a cruise, is limited to nearly the barest necessities.
Three men usually go in one boat-two to paddle, and one to shoot; the latter
THE SEA OTTER.
171
Then every
having two or three favorite rifles, with a supply of ammunition.
A little tea,
coffee, sugar, flour, or ship-bread, is provided, adding pipes and tobacco, and, as
a great luxury, perhaps a keg of spirits completes their equipment.
All being in readiness, they leave the quiet waters of the harbor, and put to
sea, following the general trend of the land, but at times making a broad devia-
tion, to hunt about some islands, miles from the main - land. When an Otter is
seen within rifle-shot, instantly the hunter fires; and if only wounding the animal,
it dives under the water, but soon re-appears, to be repeatedly shot at until killed.
Sometimes, three boats will hunt together. Then they take positions, one on each
side, but in advance of the third, and all three in the rear of where the animal
is expected to be seen. It is only the practiced eye of the experienced men that
can detect the tip of the animal's nose peering above water, and frequently dis-
guised by a leaf of kelp. Occasionally, a large band is met with.
exertion is made to keep them within the triangle formed by the boats; and, at
such times, a deal of rapid and sharp shooting ensues, and many a bullet sings
through the air, or skips over the water, almost as near the pursuers as the ani-
mals pursued. However, six, eight, or a dozen Otters are sometimes secured before
the main body disperses; and it is rarely any accident occurs by reckless firing.
From day to day, if the weather is pleasant, they cruise in search of the ani-
mals— landing to pass the night at different places well known to them, behind
some point or rock that breaks the ocean swell. The landings are made by watch-
ing the successive rollers as they break upon the beach, and when a favorable time
comes, the boat, under dexterous management, glides over the surf with safety to
the shore. It is then hauled up clear of the water, and turned partially over for
a shelter, or a tent is pitched. A fire is made of drift-wood, or, if this fail, the
dry stalks of the cactus, or a bunch of dead chaparral, serves them; and, if their
provisions should be getting short, an excursion is made up some one of the many
ravines or intervals—perhaps to a stagnant water-pool, where the deer and ante-
lope in that arid region resort to quench their parching thirst. The unerring rifle
brings one to the ground, when out comes the hunter's knife, and cutting the choice
pieces from the creature, he sallies back again to camp, and soon has the venison
broiling over the coals, and, in due time, it is added to their evening meal, which
is partaken of with hearty relish; then follow the pipes, which are enjoyed as only
those men of free and easy life can enjoy them. Relieved from all care, these
adventurers talk of past exploits or frolics, and finally roll themselves in their
blankets for a night's invigorating sleep in the open air. At daybreak they are all
awakened by the screams of sea- birds and the barking of coyotes, attracted by the
172
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
scent of the encampment. The morning repast over, they again embark in their
cockle-shell boats, launch through the surf, gain the open sea, and paddle or sail
along the shores in search of “Otter signs." But the scarcity of Otters on the old
hunting-grounds has developed the character of these fearless hunters, who, in order
to still maintain their game-life, have again reluctantly taken to their pigmy sea-
craft-a small vessel of forty tons— in which they have stretched across the Pacific
to the western Kuriles (the extreme geographical limit of the breeding-grounds),
and now successfully pursue them around those rugged islands during summer,
returning again to the California shores with their rich booty as winter approaches.
HUNTING FROM THE SHORE. — From San Francisco northward, as far as Juan de
Fuca Strait, the hunting is chiefly prosecuted by shooting the animals from the
shore; the most noted grounds being between Gray's Harbor and Point Grenville
—a belt of low coast, lying within the parallels of 46° and 48°, north latitude.
The white hunter builds his two log-cabins; one, near the southern limits of
his beat, and the other at its northern terminus near Point Grenville. During the
prevalence of the southerly winter gales he takes up his quarters at the last-named
station, as the game is found there more frequently; but when the summer winds
sweep down from the north he changes his habitation, and pursues the animals
about the breakers of Gray's Harbor. From early dawn until the sun sinks beneath
the horizon, the hunter, with rifle in hand and ammunition slung across his shoul-
der, walks the beach on the lookout for "a shot." The instant one is seen, crack
goes the rifle; but it is seldom the animal is secured by one fire.
head bobbing about in the restless swell is a very uncertain mark; and if instantly
killed, the receding tide or adverse wind might drift the animal seaward : so that,
even if it eventually drift to shore, it may be far out of sight from the hunters
by day, or be thrown on the rocks by the surge during the night, and picked up
by some of the strolling Indians who run the beach in quest of any dead seal
or Otter that may come in their way.
The difficulty in shooting from the shore, when the marksman stands nearly on
a level with the ever-changing swell, has always been an aggravating annoyance;
to avoid which, the hunters now use a sort of ladder, or, as it may be termed,
two ladders, joined near the upper ends by a hinge, spreading at the lower ends,
forming a triangle - when placed on the beach or in the edge of the water-on
which the hunter climbs in order to gain elevation. The ladders are made of light
material, so that they can be easily carried at any time, should the sea be ruffled
by a local wind or waves from seaward. When an Otter is seen, up go the lad-
ders, and up goes the hunter to the topmost round, and fires. The shot is repeated
THE SEA OTTER.
173
very quickly, if the first does not take effect; and ball after ball is sent after the
animal, until it is far' out of reach. It is estimated that the best shooters average
at least twenty-five shots to every Otter obtained, and that about one-half the
number killed are secured by the rightful owners; but, when once in their posses-
sion, it is quickly fleeced of its valuable skin, which is stretched on the walls of
the cabin to dry. It is no unusual occurrence for the hunter to pass a week trav-
eling up and down the beach, and he may shoot sixty or more rounds, and, per-
haps, kill several Otters; but, owing to "bad luck,” not one may be secured — the
carcass either drifting to sea, or to shore, possibly, with the flowing night-tide, and
the object so patiently and eagerly sought for is at last stealthily appropriated by
some skulking savage.
Notwithstanding their propensity to purloin, the Indians of the North-west-
ern Coast not only occasionally shoot the Sea Otters, as do the whites, but in the
months of July and August, when calm weather prevails, they capture them by
night. A small canoe is chosen for the purpose, and the implement used to capt-
ure the animals is a spear of native make, composed of bone and steel, fitted to a
long pole by a socket. Four chosen men make the crew for the canoe. Near the
close of day, a sharp lookout is kept for any band of the animals that may have
been seen from the shore, and their position accurately defined before beginning the
pursuit. All being in readiness, as the shade of evening approaches, they launch
their pigmy craft upon the calm sea, and three men paddle in silence toward the
place where the Otters were seen, while the fourth takes his station in the bow.
He is either a chief, or some one distinguished in the chase. He watches intently
for the sleeping Otters. As soon as one is descried, the canoe is headed for it,
and, when within reach, the spear is launched into the unwary creature. In its
efforts to escape, it draws the spear from the pole. There is a small but strong
cord connecting the spear and pole, which admits them to separate a few feet, but
does not free the Otter. The animal dives deeply, but with great effort, as the
unwieldy pole greatly retards its progress. The keen-eyed savage traces its course,
in the blinding darkness, by the phosphorescent light caused by the animal's tran-
sit through the water; and when it rises upon the surface to breathe, it is beset
with clubs, paddles, and perhaps another spear, and is finally dispatched, after
repeated blows or thrusts. The conflict arouses the whole band, which instantly
disappear; so that it is seldom more than one is secured. As soon as the hunt is
over, the animal is brought on shore, the skin taken off and stretched to dry, and,
when ready for market, the lucky owner considers himself enriched to the value
of ten or fifteen blankets, and the flesh is devoured as a choice article of food.
174
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
The mode of capturing the Sea Otters between Point Grenville and the Aleu-
tian Islands varies with the different native tribes inhabiting that coast. The Aleu-
tians, dressed in their water-proof garments, made from the intestines of seals,
wedge themselves into their baidarkas (which are constructed with a light, wooden
frame, and covered with walrus or seal skin), and, donning their hunting-caps,
plunge through the surf that dashes high among the crags, and, with almost instinct-
ive skill, reach the less turbulent ground-swell that heaves in every direction.
These aquatic men are so closely confined by the narrow build of their boats, and
keeping motion with them, too, that their appearance suggests the idea that some
undescribed marine monster had just emerged from the depths below. Once clear
of the rocks, however, the hunters watch diligently for the Otters. The first man
that gets near one darts his spear, then throws up his paddle by way of signal;
all the other boats forming a circle around him, at some distance. The wounded
animal dives deeply, but soon returns to the surface, near some one of the baidarkas
forming the circle. Again the hunter that is near enough hurls his spear and ele-
vates his paddle, and again the ring is formed as before. In this way the chase is
continued until the capture is made. As soon as the animal is brought on shore,
the two oldest hunters examine it, and the one whose spear is found nearest its
head is entitled to the prize.
The number of Sea Otter skins taken annually is not definitely known, but
from the most authentic information we can obtain, the aggregate for the past
three years has been five thousand, one thousand of which came from the Kurile
Islands; and, valuing each skin at fifty dollars, amounts to the sum of two
hundred and fifty thousand dollars.
Whether these very valuable fur animals have decreased in numbers”within the
past few years, is questionable. The hunting of them on the coast of California is
no longer profitable for more than two or three hunters, and we believe of late
some seasons have passed without any one legitimately engaging in the enterprise ;
notwithstanding, off Point Grenville, which is an old hunting-ground, sixty Otters
were taken by only three hunters during the summer of 1868—a great annual
increase over many past years. It is said the Russian - American Company restricted
the number taken yearly by the Aleutian Islanders, from whom the chief supply
was obtained, in order to perpetuate the stock. Furthermore, may it not be that
these sagacious animals have fled from those places on the coasts of the Californias
where they were so constantly pursued, to some more isolated haunt, and now
remain unmolested?
THE SEA OTTER.
175


ALEUTIAN ISLANDERS' SEA OTTER CANOE, OR BAIDARKA, WITH HUNTERS ENGAGED IN THE CHASE.
SA
ZincoN.S.F
CM SCAMMON, Del
ALEUTIAN ISLANDER'S SEA-OTTER SPEAR.
SPEAR-HEAD,
FULL SIZE,
CHAPTER VII.
THE WALRUS.
ROSMARUS OBESUS, IUiger.
Eminent naturalists have remarked that the Walrus, or Sea-horse, appears to
be the connecting link between the mammals of the land and those of the water.
This bulky and unwieldy animal when on shore has some resemblance to the seal,
yet differs materially in its proportions, as well as in its elephant-like tusks. The
Walrus attains the size of the largest Sea Lion, and measures from ten to four-
teen feet in length, and about eight feet in circumference. Its head is rounded,
small (when compared with the anterior portion of the body), and flattened in
front. Its eyes are diminutive in size, and deeply set; the small orifices of the
ears are about three inches behind, and two inches below the eyes. The cheeks
are studded with four or five hundred spines or whiskers, some of which are
rudimentary, while others grow to the length of three or four inches. They are
transparent, curved, abruptly pointed, and about the size of a straw, but not twisted,
as has been stated by some writers. Its neck is short, and its unwieldy body is
largest about the chest. Its posterior is abrupt.
By the courtesy of Mr. H. W. Elliott, we present on the following page figures
of the Walrus, copied from his excellent sketches, executed at St. Paul's Island,
Behring Sea, in 1872. The tusks of the Walrus are not only a means of defense,
but are used in obtaining food, and in mounting the ice-floes, when the shore is
not accessible. The canine teeth, as they are sometimes called, may average two
feet in length, including the root, which is imbedded in the jaw six or eight
inches. Yet some individuals have been taken with tusks two and a half to three
feet in length, and each weighing from ten to twenty pounds. In shape they are
somewhat bowing, and slightly hollowed, notched, and ridgy at their bases. At
their junction with the skull, they are about three inches asunder ; they project
at an obtuse angle from the upper jaw, and, in some instances, meet at their
extremities; while others grow perpendicular to each other, or turn outward on each
—
---
(176)
THE WALRUS.
177
side. There is considerable diversity in their length, shape, and size, even in the
full grown tusks, some being very short and stout, while others are elongated and
slender. The Walrus has no sharp incisors like the seal. The nostrils are placed on
the superior portion of the snout, through which the animal appears to inspire, and
expires through its mouth, as it dips its head below the surface, blowing up the
water into spray, in such a manner as to resemble the spout of a whale. Never
having had an opportunity of taking detailed measurements of the Walrus, we quote
from the most reliable authorities : “Its fore feet, or flippers, are from two to
two and a half feet in length, and about twelve inches in breadth ; they are webbed,
and the under sides are protected by a tough skin, a quarter of an inch or
more in thickness. The posterior flippers are from two to three feet long, and are

ZINCO!X.
WALRUSES.
capable of expansion at their extremity nearly equal to their length ; each toe is
furnished with a small nail.” The skin of the animal is thick and somewhat spongy,
but exceedingly tough. The hair that covers it in most adult individuals is short
and of a dark brown; yet there is no lack of examples where it is of a much
lighter shade, or a light but dingy gray. Unlike others of the seal tribe, the
animal is abundantly infested with vermin. Under the skin lies the coating of fat
which yields oil- it is from two to three inches in thickness. The appearance of
the fully developed Walrus in the water, with its long tusks, which seem like an
incumbrance, has a striking contrast with that of the common seal.
however, before its cumbrous canines protrude, resembles the latter in general form,
but is of a black color. On land the Walrus is comparatively inactive and clumsy
The young
MARINE MAMMALS. - 23.
178
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Its geo-
The sea-
in its movements; but in the water its motions are easy and vigorous.
graphical distribution quite encircles the globe in that colder belt of the northern
hemisphere, above the latitude of 45°, and but few individuals are met with south
of 47° north. In Behring Sea they are found as far south as the shores of the
peninsula of Alaska, ånd in the Pacific Ocean about several of the islands which
fringe the central coast of Alaska Territory. They feed upon shell-fish and other
submerged marine productions. The Walrus is gregarious, being sometimes found
in herds upon the ice, and at the proper season the animals collect upon the
beaches, or they clamber upon rocky islets in remote places. They are said to be
monogamous, but we are of the opinion that they are not exclusively so.
son when the sexes seek each other is in the last of the spring months, or the
first of the summer. The time of gestation is about nine months. The mother
and her offspring manifest a stronger mutual affection than we have observed in
any other of the marine mammals; and the cub seeks her protection, clinging to
her back whenever there is cause for alarm,* and she will at all times place herself
between the foe and her helpless charge. Frequently has she been known to clasp
to her breast the terrified little one, embracing it with her fore flippers, while
receiving mortal wounds from the whaleman's lance. A male, and a female with
her cub, are often seen together; yet herds of old and young, of both sexes, are
met with, both in the water and upon the ice. When undisturbed they are quite
inoffensive, but if hotly pursued they make a fierce resistance; their mode of attack
is by hooking their tusks over the gunwales of the boats, which may overturn
them, or they strike a blow through the planking, which has repeatedly been the
means of staving and sinking them. Captain Lyon remarks: "Mr. Shirer described
the fury of the wounded animals as being quite outrageous; but those which were
unhurt quickly forsook their suffering companions." There may have been instances
of a combined attack of Walruses on besieging boats ; but like all other marine
mammals which have been continuously pursued, they soon become wary, and when
there is cause for alarm they give warning to their neighboring associates by loud
Captain T. W. Williams, & whaling master
of much experience and observation, states, that
on one voyage to the Arctic Ocean, a female
Walrus was captured two miles from the ship,
and the young cub kept close to the boats that
were towing its dead mother to the vessel ; and
whon arrived, made every effort to follow her as
she was being hoisted on board.
A rope with
a bowline was easily thrown ovor it, and the
bereaved creature taken on deck, when it instant-
ly mounted its mother's back and there clung
with mournful solicitude, until forced by the
sailors to again return to the sea; but even
then it remained in the vicinity of the ship, be-
moaning the loss of its parent by uttering dis-
tressful cries.
THE WALRUS.
179
roarings, or if asleep, by pecking at them with their tusks, when all make a pre-
cipitate retreat from the ice, or they will tumble and roll over the rocks or rough
ground, if on shore, in their flight to the sea, unless detained with their young.
"The chase of the Walrus is of great antiquity; accordingly, we find that Ohthere,
a Norwegian, about the year 890 gave an account of it to Alfred the Great, having,
he
says, 'made a voyage beyond Norway for the more commodite of fishing horse-
whales, which have in their teeth bones of great price and excellence, whereof he
brought some at his return to the King.'”
The capture of the Walrus is made both upon the water and land. It is
stated that a Greenlander will never venture on the encounter alone, nor without
the assistance of three or four expert comrades. They employ a harpoon, which,
however, from the toughness of the skin, is fixed with difficulty, and hence it is
not so easy an operation as the striking of a whale. When the instrument holds,
the animal is allowed to swim about until it is wearied ; they then try to secure it
and kill it with lances. But even under these circumstances the process is not an
easy one ; the creature, as we have stated, getting roused and fighting a hard battle.
It is necessary, according to Zorgdrager, to make a selection. Accordingly, the
fishers aim at the eyes, which obliges the animal to turn its head, and then the
fatal blow is aimed at the breast. “In this crisis,” remarks Scoresby, “the best
defense against these enraged animals is sea- sand, which, being thrown into their
eyes, occasions partial blindness and obliges them to disperse; then the captured
one becomes a more easy prey.” According to Lord Sheldham's account of the
capture of Walruses upon the land in early times, the hunters, armed with spears,
and under cover of night, with trained dogs, made an effort to partially disperse
the main herd; then falling upon detachments of the animals, which, being bewil-
dered in the darkness, were then slain in large numbers. Godman relates that
one of the Esquimaux modes of killing the Walrus in summer is, when perceiving a
large herd asleep on the floating ice, they paddle to some other piece near by,
which is small enough to be moved. On this they lift their canoes, and then bore
holes, through which they fasten their lines ; and when every thing is prepared,
they quietly paddle their ice-float toward the herd, each hunter sitting by his own
spear and line.
“When arrived at the place where the animals lie snoring, each
man, if so disposed, strikes a different one, though two generally attack the same.
The stricken creature instantly makes great effort to escape, but, although he tum-
bles into the water, he is held by the spear-lines which are made fast to the ice.
As soon as the victim becomes wearied, the hunter launches his canoe, and at a
safe distance spears him to death.” According to our observation, the manner of
180
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
capturing the animals by the natives about the eastern coast of Behring Sea, and
in the Arctic Ocean, is by shooting them when on shore with a rifle, and pursu-
ing them when in the water with spears and lances. In approaching the animal in
their skin - boats, a paddle formed from a slab of whalebone is employed to gently
beat the surface of the sea, which is thought to serve as a kind of decoy to the
creature; and when within reach, the spear, with a line of walrus hide attached, is
thrust into the object of pursuit, and subsequently it is dispatched by being pierced
with knives and other sharp instruments. But the natives of the Pribyloff Islands,
and also those of the peninsula of Alaska (who have become excellent marksmen),
shoot them with heavy muskets.
Great numbers of Walruses are found about the waters of the Arctic uniting
with Behring Straits, and in Behring Sea, and innumerable herds still resort in the
summer months to different points on the southern or central coasts of Alaska,
particularly at Amak Island and Point Moller, on the northern shore of the
Alaskan peninsula. Within the last ten years many of these animals have been
destroyed by the whalers, both in the Arctic and Behring Seas. The mode of
capture was by shooting them when upon the ice with Spencer rifles, or, if in the
water, by harpooning and lancing them. To the natives of the coasts where the
Walrus frequents, the animal is of indispensable value. The flesh supplies them
with food; the ivory tusks are made into implements used in the chase, and for
other domestic purposes, as well as affording a valuable article of barter; and the
skin furnishes the material for covering their summer habitations, planking for
their baidarras, harness for their dog-teams, and lines for their fishing-gear. But
the savage native and the civilized fisherman and sailor are not the only enemies
of the Walrus. The polar bear seeks them in its prowlings, and when meeting
with a herd, the huge beast selects and seizes one of the smallest individuals with
his capacious jaws, and the resisting struggles of the poor victim to free itself are
quickly suppressed by repeated blows with bruin's paws, which cause almost instant
death. The murderous beast then quickly tears the skin from the body by means
of his long, sharp claws, when the remains are devoured. That carnivorous animal
of the cetacean order, known as the Orca, or Killer, also watches for the young
cubs of the Walrus, and if there is floating ice at hand, the mother with her
charge clambers upon it to avoid the pursuer ; if this fails, however, the cub will
mount the mother's back as the only place of refuge. But the Killer is rarely
baffled in obtaining the object it seeks by this mode of the mother's protection,
for the pursuing animal dives deeply, and then comes head up under the old
Walrus, with such force as to throw the cub from the dam's back into the water,
THE WALRUS.
181
when it is instantly seized and swallowed by its adversary. Instances have been
known, however, where the Orca has paid dearly for its murderous temerity, as the
enraged Walrus, when bereft of her young, will sometimes strike her tusks into
her foe with such effect as to cause a mortal wound or instant death.
Among the numerous enemies of the Walrus, it is to be regretted that the
whalers are included, they having been driven to the necessity of pursuing them on
account of the scarcity of Cetaceans. Already the animals have suffered so great a
slaughter at their hands that their numbers have been materially diminished, and
they have become wild and shy, making it difficult for the Esquimaux to success-
fully hunt them, in order to obtain a necessary supply of food. It is stated that
there has been much suffering among those harmless people of the far north, on
account of this source for supplying themselves with an indispensable article of
sustenance being to an alarming extent cut off.
According to The Friend, published at Honolulu, March 1st, 1872, the whalers
first began to turn their attention to Walrus-catching about the year 1868, and the
work has continued up to the present time. Usually, during the first part of every
season there has been but little opportunity to capture whales, they being within
the limits of the icy barrier. Hence, much of the whalers' time during the months
of July and August has been devoted to capturing the Walrus; and it is estimated
that at least sixty thousand of these animals have been destroyed by the whale-
fishers in the Arctic Ocean and Behring Sea during the last five years, which pro-
duced about fifty thousand barrels of oil, with a proportionate amount of ivory.
PART III.
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
PART III.—THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
CHAPTER 1.
ORIGIN AND ANCIENT MODE OF WHALE-FISHING.
BEFORE entering upon the history of the American Whale- fishery, we will intro-
duce a few remarks relative to the origin and prosecution of whaling in other
quarters of the world. If we go back to the time of the early Grecian sailors, and
follow through the maritime history of every nation, there appears to be no posi-
tive record as to the time when, or place where, whale-fishing originated. In the
collection of various whaling and exploring voyages which we have perused, nearly
all the authors agree that the Basques and Biscayans were the first to capture
whales as a regular commercial pursuit. Eminent writers, however, maintain that
the Norwegians were the first to pursue those leviathans of the deep, and that they
carried on a fishery long before any other European nation. It may be possible
that the Norwegians were the first who made the whale-fishery a legitimate busi-
ness. This, however, seems to be very doubtful, when we look to the shores of
Japan and Chinese Tartary, where, ever since we have been in possession of any
reliable knowledge of that region and its inhabitants, we know that the Japanese
and Tartars have successfully pursued the whale in large boats from their shores.
Among the American authorities relative to the foreign whale-fishery is the Hon.
J. Ross Browne, who, having had recourse to the Congressional Library at the time
of compiling his Etchings of a Whaling Cruise, and History of the Whale- fishery,
has given, in the appendix to that work, a concise and somewhat chronologi-
cal account of whaling commerce, beginning as early as 887, and following down
to the present century, from which we shall quote numerous statistics of that
eminent writer, as also extracts from the works of other authors.
“As early as 887, according to Anderson (in his Historical and Chronological
MARINE MAMMALS. - 24.
(185)
186
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Deduction of the Origin of Commerce), or, as Hakluyt thinks, about 890, Our
excellent King Alfred' received from one Octher [Ohthere?], a Norwegian, an
account of his discoveries northward on the coast of Norway; a coast which seems
to have been before very little, if at all, known to the Anglo-Saxons. There is
one very
remarkable thing in this account; for he tells King Alfred 'that he sailed
along the Norway coast, so far north as commonly the whale-hunters used to
travel ;' which shows the great antiquity of whale- fishing; though undoubtedly
then, and long after, the use of what is usually called whalebone was not known ;
so that they fished for whales merely on account of their fat or oil. Octher, after
giving a very curious description of the country inhabited by the Finmans, proceeds
to say, 'he visited this country also with a view of catching horse - whales, which
had bones of very great value for their teeth, of which he brought some to the
king; that their skins were good for making ropes for ships. These whales are
much less than other whales, being only five ells long. The best whales were
caught in his own country, of which some were forty-eight, some fifty yards long.
He said that he was one of six who had killed sixty in two days.'
"These horse - whales, spoken of by Octher, were what we call sea - horses,
and the Dutch, sea - cows, or morses. It is probable that the length of the
whales caught in his own country is greatly exaggerated. Beale quotes from many
of the ancient writers instances of extraordinary exaggerations of this kind, and
doubts whether any whales were ever seen of a greater length than eighty or ninety
feet, even admitting they were once found of larger growth than any now seen or
captured. The earliest authentic data that I have been able to find respecting the
origin of the whale-fishery, as a regular and permanent branch of trade, is that
furnished by M'Culloch in his Commercial Dictionary; which, although little more
than a condensation from the works of Anderson, Macpherson, and others, is of a
more reliable character than any similar compilation I have met with. At the time
* This would seem incredible ; but when we
investigate the statement, it is found that Ohthere
was a Flemish writer. Hence, instead of reckon-
ing ells at three feet, we put them down at twen-
ty-seven inches, which would make the largest
whale one hundred and twelve feet long. As
to the killing of sixty whales in two days, by
six men, as stated by Ohthere, Scoresby (Arctic
Regions, Vol. II, page 9) gives a very plain ac-
count, in a note, of how this assertion might be
truthful; which is as follows: “ The Honorable
Daines Barrington, in the account of Ohthere's
voyage, published in his Miscellanies, translates
the passage, containing his exploit in the whale-
fishery, in the words, ‘he had killed some six;
and sixty in two days. But, conscious of the
unintelligibleness of the sentence, he observes,
in a note, that syxa, he conceives, should be a
second time repeated here, instead of syötig, or
sixty; it would then only be asserted that six
had been taken in two days, which is much more
probable than sixty.”
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
187
;
the inhabitants of Massachusetts were making their first attempts in the capture of
the whale (about 1650), the Biscayans had already extensively engaged in that
business; the Dutch and the English had followed their example; the Russian
Company had obtained an exclusive charter for it, and many other nations of
Europe had directed their attention to the northern fisheries.”
“It is probably true, as has been sometimes contended," says M'Culloch, "that
the Norwegians occasionally captured the whale before any other European nation
engaged in so perilous an enterprise. But the early efforts of the Norwegians were
not conducted on any systematic plan, and should only be regarded in the same
point of view as the fishing expeditions of the Esquimaux. The Biscayans were
certainly the first people who prosecuted the whale- fishery as a regular commercial
pursuit. They carried it on with great vigor and success in the twelfth, thirteenth,
and fourteenth centuries. In 1261, a tithe was laid upon the tongues of whales
imported into Bayonne, they being there a highly esteemed species of food. In
1388, Edward III relinquished to Peter de Puayanne a duty of six pounds sterling
a whale, laid on those brought into the port of Biarritz, to indemnify him for the
extraordinary expenses he had incurred in fitting out a fleet for the service of his
majesty. This fact proves beyond dispute that the fishery carried on from Biarritz
at the period referred to must have been very considerable indeed ; and it was also
prosecuted to a great extent from Cibourre, Vieux Boucan, and subsequently from
Rochelle and other places. The whales captured by the Biscayans were not so
large as those that are taken in the Polar Seas, and are supposed to have been
attracted southward in the pursuit of herrings. They were not very productive of
oil, but their flesh was used as an article of food, and the whalebone was applied
to a variety of useful purposes, and brought a very high price.”
In 1554, Pierre Belon writes concerning the Right Whale, or at least one of
the baleen whales, as follows: "The animal which we call the whale (baleen) was
named by the ancient Greeks, phalene; by the Latins, balena; and is designated by
the Italians as the capodoglio (oil - head). It is generally considered to be the
largest of all fishes, as may well be supposed from the size of the bones and ribs
of the animal, which is enormous, so that they have been much wondered at when
exhibited. It is for this reason that some have called it the Cete. There is no
ground for believing that the whale has two large horns on its head, as some have
drawn this animal; but there is a kind of tube on the upper part of the head,
which does not, however, rise above the skin, and the existence of which only
becomes apparent when the animal throws out the water through it, which has
been taken in by the muzzle. This it does sometimes with such violence that
188
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
ships have been capsized by it” (the jet of water). “It is also believed that the
whale, like the porpoise and the dolphin, jumps entirely out of the water in order
to take breath, and even that it has been heard blowing from a great distance off.
This fish has neither hair nor scales, but is covered with smooth, hard, black, and
thick skin, or hide, under which there is a layer of fat fully a foot in thickness,
and this is what is sold during Lent. The tongue is marvelously
The tongue is marvelously large, and excel-
lent eating; and it is customary to salt and preserve it, as is also done with all
the rest of the flesh of this fish. And that which is called whalebone (coste de
balene — literally, whale's ribs), with which ladies nowadays make their corsets
and stiffen out their dresses, and which the beadles of some churches carry as
wands—these are certain pieces cut off and drawn out from that which serves as
eye-lids for the whale, and which covers his eyes, and which is furnished at its
extremity with a kind of long, stiff hair. This is what the Latins call the pretentures,
and which they say enables the animal to direct his course through the sea. As
far as the other exterior and interior parts of the whale are concerned, they clearly
resemble those of the sea - hog, and, making allowance for size, those of the por-
poise and dolphin."
Although this writer in some points gives us a very erroneous account of the
whalebone whale, yet in a general view it is an intelligible description of the
animal; and it also establishes the fact that the animal's baleen, fat, and flesh were
utilized at that period, the former being used as at the present day to distort the
figures of women in their dress, and the latter was esteemed as luxurious food.
The author's figure of the balana is almost entirely in error, yet it is hardly more
so than the representations of the same animal which may be found in popular
works of the present century. We continue to quote from M'Culloch:
"This branch of industry among the Basques and Biscayans ceased long since,
and from the same cause that has occasioned the cessation of the whale-fishery in
many other places—the want of fish. Whether it was that the whales, from a
sense of the dangers to which they exposed themselves in coming southward, no
longer left the icy sea, or that the breed had been nearly destroyed, certain it is
that they gradually became less numerous in the Bay of Biscay, and at length
ceased almost entirely to frequent that sea; and the fishers being obliged to
pursue their prey upon the banks of Newfoundland and the coasts of Iceland, the
French fishery rapidly fell off. The voyages of the Dutch and English to the
Northern Ocean, in order, if possible, to discover a passage through it to India,
though they failed of their main object, laid open the haunts of the whale. The
companions of Barentz, who discovered Spitzbergen in 1596, and of Hudson, who
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
189
soon after explored the same seas, represented to their countrymen the amazing
number of whales with which they were crowded. * Vessels were in consequence
fitted out for the northern whale-fishery by the English and Dutch, the harpooners
and a part of the crew being Biscayans. They did not, however, confine their
efforts to a fair competition with each other as fishers. The Muscovy Company
obtained a royal charter, prohibiting the ships of all other nations from fishing in
the seas round Spitzbergen, on pretext of its having first been discovered by Sir
Hugh Willoughby. There can, however, be no doubt that Barentz, and not Sir
Hugh, was its original discoverer; though, supposing that the fact had been other-
wise, the attempt to exclude other nations from the surrounding seas on such a
ground was not one that could be tolerated. The Dutch, who were at that time
prompt to embark in a commercial pursuit that gave any hope of success, eagerly
entered on this new career, and sent out ships fitted equally for the purposes of
fishing and of defense against the attacks of others. The Muscovy Company having
attempted to vindicate its pretensions by force, several encounters took place between
their ships and those of the Dutch. The conviction at length became general that
there was room enough for all parties in the northern seas; and in order to avoid
the chance of coming into collision with each other, they parceled Spitzbergen and
the adjacent ocean in districts, which they respectively assigned to the English,
Dutch, Hamburgers, French, Danes, etc. The Dutch, thus left to prosecute the
fishery without having their attention diverted by hostile attacks, speedily acquired
a decided superiority over all their competitors. When the Europeans first began
to prosecute the fishery on the coast of Spitzbergen, whales were everywhere
found in vast numbers. Ignorant of the strength and stratagems of the formid-
able foe by which they were now assailed, instead of betraying any symptoms of
fear, they surrounded the ships and crowded all the bays. Their capture was, in
consequence, a comparatively easy task, and many were killed which it was after-
ward necessary to abandon, from the ships being already full. While fish were
thus easily obtained, it was the practice to boil the blubber on shore in the north,
and fetch home only the oil and whalebone; and perhaps nothing can give a more
vivid idea of the extent and importance of the Dutch fishery in the middle of the
seventeenth century, than the fact that they constructed a considerable village (the
* Doctor Lindeman states in his work upon
the whale-fishery (Die arktische Fischerei der Deut-
schen Seestädte, 1620 to 1868), “in the thirteenth
and fourteenth centuries the Hanseatic cities car-
ried on war with Denmark on account of inter-
ference with their whale-fisheries on the coast of
Jutland.” He further mentions, that “the first
English whaling-ships were sent out from Hull
in 1598, to the coasts of Iceland and the region
of the North Cape.”
190
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
houses of which were all previously prepared in Holland, on the isle of Amster-
dam), on the northern shore of Spitzbergen, to--which they gave the appropriate
name of Smeerenberg (from smeeren, to melt, and berg, a mountain). This was the
grand rendezvous of the Dutch whale-ships, and was amply provided with boilers,
tanks, and every sort of apparatus required for preparing the oil and bone. But
this was not all. The whale-ships were attended with a number of provision-ships,
the cargoes of which were landed at Smeerenberg, which abounded during the busy
season with well-furnished shops, good inns, etc., so that many of the conveniences
and enjoyments of Amsterdam were found within about eleven degrees of the Pole!
It is particularly mentioned that the sailors and others were every morning supplied
with what a Dutchman regards as a very great luxury, hot rolls for breakfast.
Batavia and Smeerenberg were founded nearly at the same period, and it was for a
considerable time doubted whether the latter was not the more important establish-
ment. (De Reste, Histoire des Pêches, etc., tome i, p. 42.)
“During the flourishing period of the Dutch fishery, the quantity of oil made
in the north was so great that it could not be carried on by the whale-ships, and
every year vessels were sent out in ballast to assist in importing the produce of
the fishery. But the same cause which had destroyed the fishery of the Biscayans
ruined that which was carried on in the immediate neighborhood of Spitzbergen.
Whales became gradually less common, and more and more difficult to catch.
They retreated first to the open seas, and then to the great banks of ice on the
eastern coast of Greenland. When the site of the fishery had thus been removed
to a very great distance from Spitzbergen, it was found most economical to send
the blubber direct to Holland. Smeerenberg was, in consequence, totally deserted,
and its position is now with difficulty discernible. When in the most flourishing
state, toward 1680, the Dutch whale-fishery employed about two hundred and sixty
ships and fourteen thousand sailors.”
Frederic Marten, who made a voyage to Spitzbergen and Greenland during the
summer of 1671, gives a quaint account of the British whalers at that period, from
which we extract the following:
“We set sail the 15th of April, 1671, about noon, from the island of Elbe.
The name of the ship was Jonas in the Whale, Peter Peterson, of Frisland, master.'
Having arrived at Spitzbergen, the writer continues : "On the 5th of June, in
the forenoon, it was moderately cold and sunshiny, but toward noon darkish and
cloudy, with snow and great frost. We saw daily many ships sailing about the ice.
I observed that as they passed by one another, they hailed one another, crying
Holla! and asked each other how many fish they had caught, but would not stick
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
191
sometimes to tell more than they had. When it is windy, that they could not
hear one another, they waved their hats to signifie the number caught. But when
they have their full freight of whales, they put up their great flag as a sign
thereof; then if any hath a message to be sent, he delivers it to them. On the
12th of July we had a gloomy sun— sunshine all day. We saw but very few
whales more, and those we did see were quite wild, that we could not come near
them. That night it was so dark and foggy that we could hardly see the ship's
length. We might have got sea-horses enough, but we were afraid of losing our
ships, for we had examples enough of them that had lost their ships, and could
not come to them again, but have been forced to return home in other ships.
When after this manner any have lost their ships, and can not be seen, they dis-
charge a cannon from the ship, or sound the trumpets or hautboys, according as
they are provided in their ships, that the men that are lost may find their ships
again."
As to the mode of capturing and flaying the mysticetus, as well as the process
of extracting the oil from the blubber, the narrator gives the following description,
under the headings respectively of “How they Catch the Whale,” “What they do
with the Dead Whale,” and “Of the Trying out of the Train - oyl from the Fat.”
"First, it is to be observ'd, that when it's like to be a good year to catch
whales in, there is many white - fish to be seen before: but where we see many
seales, there we do not expect to meet with many whales; for they say, that they
eat up the food of the whale, wherefore the whales will not stay in such empty
places, but go to find out better, and so come to Spitzbergen, for there, at the
shoar, we see great plenty of the small sea - snails, and perhaps some other small
fish. They are caught after the following manner : When they see whales, or
when they hear them blow or spout, they call in to the ship, Fall, fall; then
every body must be ready to get into the long-boat that he doth belong to;
commonly six men go into every long-boat, and sometimes seven, according as
the long-boats are in bigness; they all of them row until they come very near
unto the whale; then doth the harpoonier arise, who sits always before in the
boat, where the harpoon, or the sharp iron made like unto an arrow fixed to a
stick, doth also lie on the foremost board of the long-boat, which the seamen
call the Staffen, that is, the broad piece of wood that cometh up before the boat
from the bottom, and stands up higher than all the rest. But when the whale
runs strait down towards the bottom underneath the water, then he doth draw
the rope very hard, so that the upper part of the long-boat is even with the
surface of the water; nay, he would certainly pull it down to the bottom, if they
192
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
should not give him rope enough. This he doth commonly where the sea is
deepest; and this doth require an incredible force to draw so many hundred
fathoms of rope under water. This gives me occasion to remember, that when
we on the 27th of April, in the year 1672, did fling out our lead, near St. Kilda,
behind Scotland, into the sea, where it was one hundred and twenty fathom deep,
when the weather was calm, and when we would pull it up again, it was so heavy
that twenty men had much to do to heave it. The harpoonier taketh his har-
poon, and holds the point, or the iron thereof, together with the rope or line
of five or seven fathom long, about an inch thick, and is laid up round like a
ring, that it may not hinder the harpoon when it is flung, for as soon as he doth
fling or dart the harpoon, this line follows; for it is more pliable than the rest
that are fastened to it, wherewith they pursue the whale. It is made of the finest
and softest hemp, and not daubed with tar, but it doth swell in the water, and
so it grows hard. The harpoonier darts his harpoon with the right hand at the
fish. When the whale is hit with the harpoon, all the men that are in the
long-boat turn themselves about and look before them, and they lay their oars
nimbly upon the sides of the long-boat. There is a man in the long-boat,
whose business it is to look after the rope ; for in each of these long- boats
there is a whole heap of lines, between the two seats or benches; this heap is
divided into three, four, or five parts, and each of them is of eighty, ninety, to
one hundred fathoms long. The first of them is tyd to the fore- runner, or small
line; as the whale runs under the water, they tye more and more line to it, and
if in one boat there should not be enough, they make use of those that are in the
other long- boats. These ropes or lines are thicker and stronger than the fore-
runner, and are made of strong and tough hemp, and tarr'd over.
The line-fur-
nisher, or the man that doth look after the ropes, and also the other men that
are in the long- boat, must have great care that the ropes or lines may not be
entangled when they run out so swift, or that they may not run towards the side
of the long-boat, for then the long- boat would be overset, and many men lose
their lives, if other long - boats were not near to their assistance. The line must
run just before, in the middle of the long- boat, that is called the Stave by the
seamen, and by reason of this strong and violent motion, the wood and rope
would be set on fire. But to prevent this, the harpoonier hath a wet rag ty'd to
a stick (like unto a mop) ready at hand, wherewith he wets the wood without
ceasing. The other three men that are in the long-boats take also care of the
lines, as well when they are let out, as when they are taken in again ; and when
they can not hold it with their hands, they wind it about the staves of the boat,
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
193
and so they do stop it from going any further. Another, that is called the steer-
man, stands behind in the long - boat, and steers the boat with an oar, and he
takes great care, and minds the rope, to see which way it runs out, for if it doth
go towards either side, and doth not run just before over the stave, he so guides
the boat, that it may run exactly out before. The whale runs away with the
long- boat as swift as the wind. If the harpoonier can, he doth dạrt the harpoon
just behind the spout-hole of the whale, or in the thick fat of his back, where
they also do launce him, for that maketh him spout blood sooner than if wounded
in any other place, and die sooner than if you should launce them into their belly,
or through the guts. The first whale we caught spouted blood in such a quantity,
that the sea was tinged by it wherever he swam, whereunto the Mallemucks flock'd
in great numbers, as I have mentioned before. They also launce the whales near
their privy - parts, if they can come at it; for if they are run in there, it doth
pain them very much ; nay, even when they are almost dead, if you run in your
launce thereabout, it causes the whole body to tremble. For the most part they
do not much mind where they launce or push them ; for there is no time to take
deliberation, but they strike at him as well as they can. But about the head the
harpoon can do him no hurt, because the fat is but very thin there on the bones,
which the whales know as well as we; for when they find themselves in danger,
so that they can not escape the harpoon, they rather leave their head than their
back undefended, for there the harpoon breaks out easier, and so the whale gets
away, like one that hath no mind to fight any longer. The use of the harpoon
is, to tye, as it were, the whales with them, that they may not run away. It
is shaped like an arrow before: it hath two sharp beards, they are sharp at the
edge, and have a broad back, like unto a hatchet that is sharp before and blunt
behind, or on the back, so that it may not cut with its back, for else it would
tear out, and all your labour would be lost. The iron handle is thicker behind
than before, and it is hollow, whereinto they put the stick. Before this hollow
part, the fore-goer is fasten'd or ty'd, that is to say the foremost rope. Those are
the best harpoons that are made of clean and fine steel, and are not hardened too
much, so that you may bend it without snapping, for oftentimes two hundred
pounds are lost (for a midling whale is esteem'd at so much) in a minute's time
for want of a good and well- temper'd harpoon. The wooden stick is fastened
within the iron collet or funnel of the harpoon, with packthread wound all about
the iron; somewhat higher up, about two spans off, there is a hole made through
the stock. The harpoon is light behind, and heavy towards the point, or before,
like an arrow, that is made heavy before with iron, and light behind with feathers,
MARINE MAMMALS. - 25.
194
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
so that fling it which way you will, it doth fall always upon the point. Through
this hole cometh a piece of packthread, wherewith the end of the fore- runner is
fastened to the handle or stock of the harpoon, but this is soon torn off, and it
serveth for nothing more after the harpoon sticks in the body of the whale ;
neither is the wooden handle of any further use, and so it doth soon come out
from the iron. When the whale is struck with the harpoon, all the other long-
boats row out before, and take notice which way the line doth stand, and some-
times they pull at the rope or line. If it is stiff and heavy, the whale doth draw
it still with his might; but if it doth hang loose, so that the long - boat is before
and behind equally high out of the water, then the men pull in the rope again,
and the rope - giver layeth it down in very good order, round, and one row above
the other, that if the whale should draw on again, he may have it ready to give
him without being entangled. Here is also this to be observed, that if the whale
runs upon the level, they must not give him too much rope, for if he should turn
and wind himself much and often about, he might easily wind the rope about a
rock or heavy stone, and so fasten it to it, and so the harpoon would come out,
and all the labour would be lost, which hath often hapned, and we ourselves lost
one that way. The other long-boats that are towed behind, wherein the men look
all before them, and sit still, and let the whale draw them along. If the whale
doth rowl upon the ground, so that the long- boats or sloops lye still, they draw
their lines in again by degrees, and the rope- master doth lay them down again in
their proper places, as they had been laid before. When they kill the whale with
launces, they also pull their lines in again, untill they come near to the whale, yet
at some distance, that the others may have room to launce. But they must have
great care, that all the lines of every sloop may not be cut off together, because
some whales sink, and others do swim even with the water when they are dead,
which nobody can tell beforehand, whether they will do one or the other. The
fat ones do not sink presently after they are fresh killed, but the lean ones sink
immediately after they are dead, but after some few days they come up again, and
swim on the water. But it would be too long a while for a man to stay till he
cometh up again, and the sea is never so quiet that one can stay long in the same
place; and where the sea is quiet, and without waves, there the stream doth carry
the ships and the ice along together, so that we should be forced to leave the
whale unto others, that would find him dead some days after. 'Tis true, this is the
easiest way to catch whales, but it is very nasty and stinking work; for long and
white maggots grow in their flesh, they are flat, like unto worms that breed in
men's bellies, and they smell worse than ever I smelt anything in my life. The
THE
195
AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
longer the whale lies dead in the water, the higher he doth swim above it; some
swim a foot high above the water, others to their middle, and then they do burst
easily, and give a very great report. They begin immediately to stink, and this
encreases hourly, and their flesh boils and ferments like unto beer or ale, and holes
break in their bellies, and their guts come out. If any man is enclined to sore
eyes, this vapor inflames them immediately, as if quicklime was flung into them.
But when the live whales rise and swim again, some of them are astonish'd, others
wild or stark mad. To those that are wild we come softly or gently from behind,
as we do when we are going to trapan them; for when the wind is down, the
weather calm, and air serene, so that the sea doth not foam or roar, the whales
hear immediately the striking of the oars
“If many small ice-sheets lye near to one another, so that we can not follow
the whale with our sloops or long-boats, we fetch in our line with all might and
strength, and if with one or more pulls we can fetch out the harpoon, it is well,
if not, we chop off the rope or line. The whale is best and surest struck with a
harpoon when he spouts water, as is already said above, for we do observe, that
when they lie still and very quiet, that they then listen, and are sometimes under,
and sometimes above water, so that their back doth not quite dry, and before we
are aware of it he flings up his tail behind out of the sea, and so bids us good-by.
The whales may easily be caught when the air is very serene and clear, and the
sea quiet, and where there float neither great nor small ice-sheets, so that we may
go in between them with our boats or sloops, to follow them; for at the ice-fields
the whales do commonly lye and rub themselves at them, perhaps by reason of the
lice that bite them. Besides, against the ice-sheets the sea beats, dashes, and
foams, with small curling waves, so that the whales do not observe nor mind the
striking of the oars, and so they are easily struck with the harpoon.
dangerous to kill a female, chiefly when she is big with young, for they defend
themselves very long, and are harder to be kill'd than a male one. Oftentimes the
long-boats wait six or seven hours, nay, a whole day, for a whale, before they
It is very
see one.
“Where great quantity of small ice is crowded together, there it is also very
dangerous, and hard to come to the whale, for he is so cunning, that when he per-
ceives where the ice is he retires thither immcdiately. The harpoonier stands at
the head of the long-boat, and doth draw on the rope, to try whether it is heavy
or light; if it feels hcavy, so that we are afraid that it will pull the boat under
water, then we give him more rope; if he runs strait out before, he draweth the
sloops after him. If he doth run underneath a great ice-field, the harpoonier taketh
196
MARINE MAMJALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
a knife in his hand, which they call the chopping-knife, and if the ice-field be
hollow, or spongy, or full of holes in the middle, so that the whale can fetch
breath underneath it, and the rope is not long enough to follow him, and if the
ice be several miles long, they draw the rope in as much as possibly they can,
until it be strait, and then he chops it off, loosing the piece of the rope whereon
the harpoon is fastened, that sticketh in the body of the whale, yet not without
great loss, for oftentimes they run away with the lines that belong to five and
more sloops. It happens very often, that they run to the ice with the long- boats,
so that they dash against it, as if they would break it into pieces, which also very
often happens. But when the whale rises again, they oftentimes fling one or two
more harpoons into him, according as they find he is tired more or less; then he
dives under water again. Some swim or run even all along on the water, and they
play with their tail and fins, so that we must have great care that we may not
come too near them. When the whales fling their tails about in this manner, they
wind the line about their tail, so that we need not to fear the harpoon tearing
out, for then they are ty'd strong and firm enough with the rope. After they are
wounded, they spout with all their might and main, so that you may hear them as
far off as you may a cannon ; but when they are quite tired, it cometh out only
by drops, for he hath not strength enough to force the water up, and therefore it
sounds as if you held an empty mug or bottle under water, and the water runs
into it. And this sound is a certain sign of his feebleness, and that he is going to
expire. Some whales blow blood to the very last, after they have been wounded,
and these dash the men in the long-boats most filthily, and dye the sloops red as if
they were painted with a red colour; nay, the very sea is tinged red all along where
they swim.
Those whales that are mortally wounded heat themselves, that they
reek while they are alive, and the birds sit on them, and eat on them while they
are still alive. When the whales blow up the water, they fling out with it some
fattish substance that floats upon the sea like sperm, and this fat the Mallemucks
devour greedily, of which several thousands attend him, so that a whale often hath
more attendants than a king hath servants. Sometimes also the harpoons break
out; then often long-boats of other ships attend, and as soon as they see that the
harpoon is come out, they fling their own into him, and the whale is theirs, altho'
the first harpoon hath almost kill'd the whale, yet if he doth get loose, the second
party claims him, and the first must look for another. Sometimes at the same time
two harpoons, belonging to two several ships, are struck into the whale; such ones
are divided equally, and each one hath half: the other two, or three, or more sloops,
as many as there is of them, wait for the whales coming up again, and when they
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
197
see that he is tird, they kill him outright with launces. In doing this is the
greatest danger, for the first that do fling the harpoon into him are drawn along by
the whale, and are at a good distance from him, but those that kill him with
launces are as well upon his body as at his sides, according as the whale turns and
winds himself, and they receive many severe blows. Here the steerman must take
care to observe how the whale runs and turns himself about, that the harpoonier
may reach him with his launces; all the other men in the sloops row diligently,
sometimes forwards, and sometimes backwards, which they call rowing on and strik-
ing; and when the whale lifts up himself out of the water, he commonly doth strike
about with his tail and fins, that the water dasheth up like dust. A long-boat he
values no more than dust, for he can beat it all into shatters at a blow; but a
great ship is too hard for him, and if he strikes against it with his tail, he feels it
more than the ship, for he doth so paint the ship with his own blood, that it maketh
him very feeble. A good steerman is next unto the harpoonier most useful in the
sloop; he steers with one oar and doth look out before; the other four men turn
their back to the head, and look towards the stern, therefore doth the steerman
and harpoonier always cry, row on, or strike, that is to say, row near to the whale,
or else keep farther off. The launces have a wooden stick or handle above two
fathoms long, or somewhat shorter than a pikestaff; the iron thereof is commonly
a fathom long, and pointed before like unto a pike; it is made of steel or tough
iron, that it may bend without breaking. For after you have made a deep hole in
his body with your launces, you poke into it with them one way and the other
way, as they do when they poke for eels, but if he doth get one or more out
of your hands, you take another, for every sloop hath at least five, six, or seven,
and yet sometimes he has them all out of three, four, or more boats sticking in
his body
"After the whale is killed they cut off his tail; some keep the tail and fins,
and hang them up at the outside of their ship, for that defends them from the ice
when it presseth upon the ship.
The tail hinders the boat in its course, because
it doth lye across, and that is the reason why they cut it off. Before the tail they
fasten a piece of a rope, and at the other end at the stern of the last sloop.
There is in all four or five sloops fastened to one another behind, and so they row
one behind the other to the great ship. When they have brought the whale to the
ship, they tye it with ropes fast to the ship; that part where the tail is cut off
they fasten to the fore-part of the ship, and the head towards the stern, about
the middle, near the great shrowds of the mainmast on the larboard of the ship;
it is seldom that a whale doth reach farther than from the poop to the middle of
198
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
the ship, except the vessels are very small. By the larboard is to be understood
that side of the ship that is at your right hand as you go from before towards the
stern ; but that side of the ship that is on your right hand as you go from the
stern towards the fore-part is called star - board, because you go from the steer
forward.
“Whoever of the ships' crews sees a dead whale, cries out. Fish mine, and there-
fore the merchants must pay him a ducat, for his care and vigilance. Many of
them climb often up into the mast, in hopes to have a ducat, but in vain. When
the dead whale is thus fastened to the ship, two sloops hold on the other side
of the fish or whale, and in each of them doth stand a man or boy,
or boy, that has a
long hook in his hands, wherewith he doth hold the boat to the ship, and the
harpoonier stands before in the sloop, or upon the whale, with a leathern suit on,
and sometimes they have boots on. Underneath the hook are some sharp nails
fixed, that they may be able to stand firm, for the whale is very slippery, so that
one may easily fall, as upon slippery ice. These two men that cut the fat off have
their peculiar wages for it, viz: about four or five rix-dollars. First, they cut a
large piece from behind the head, by the eyes, which they call the Kenter - piece,
that is as much as to say the winding-piece; for as they cut all the other fat all
in rows, from the whale towards the end, so they cut this great kenter-piece larger
and wider than all the rest. This piece, when it is cut round about from the
whale, reaches from the water to the cradle, (that is the round circle that goeth
round about the middle of the mast, and is made in the shape of a basket), from
whence you may guess at the bigness of a whale. A strong and thick rope is fixed
to this kenter-piece, and the other end is fixed underneath the cradle, whereby the
whale is as it was born up out of the water, that they may come at it, and by
reason of the great weight of the whale, the ship leans towards that side. One
may judge how tough the fat is, for in this piece an hole is made, through which
the
rope is fastened, yet not deep into the fat, wherewith they turn the fish at
pleasure. Then, as is before said, they cut another piece down hard by this, that
is also hauled up to the ship; and then in the ship they cut it into less pieces
about a foot square.
These two men have in their hands, as well as those that
stand on the whale, long knives, wherewith they cut these square pieces. These
knives are, with their haſts, about the length of a man; and the more the fat of
the whale is loosened, just as the hide is flea'd from an ox, the higher must they
pull up the fat with their pulleys, that they may cut it the easier. And when
they have drawn up this fat, the men take it to them into the ship, and loosen
the
rope that it was fastened unto. The rope is fastened with a ring whereinto they
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
199
put a great iron hook, which is fastened to a strong tackle, and also sometimes,
before in the ship, are fix'd two other tackle, wherewith all the fat is drawn up
into the ship. In the ship stand two men, with hooks as long as a man, where-
with they hold the great piece of fat, which the two men cut into square pieces
with their long knives. By them stands another, that hath a short hook with a
ring in his hands, which he thrusts into the pieces of fat that are cut square, and
puts it upon bench or dressing - board, where it is cut by others into less
pieces. The two first men with their long knives, that cut the large pieces of fat,
stand near the larboard of the ship, at that side where the whale is fix'd, and the
other men, that afterwards cut it into less pieces, stand on the other side call'd
starboard. When it is a good time to catch whales, and they will not lose it, they
tow sometimes several fish behind their ship, and catch more ; and they cut only
the great pieces of fat of them, and fling them underneath into the ship. But
when they have no more vessels to put their fat into, they sail into an harbor; or
if it be calm weather, and not windy, they stay in the sea, and fasten themselves
to a sheet of ice, and so they drive along with the stream. The other men cut
the fat into small pieces, on a table ; on the further side of the table is a nail
fastened, whereunto they fasten a hook, which they put into the fat, that it may
may lye steddy when they cut it into small pieces; the fat is tough to cut, where-
fore it must lie firm. That side whereon the skin is they lay undermost, and so
cut the fat from it by pieces. The knives wherewith they cut the fat into small
pieces are less than the other, about three foot long with their hafts. They all cut
from them that they may not be bedaubed with the fat, which might occasion a
shrinking-up and lameness of the sinews of their hands and arms. One of them
cuts the soft and tough fat into small pieces with a long knife; this man they call
the chopper, and he is mightily daubed, wherefore he doth hang about him all sorts
of rags and clouts he can get. The fat of some whales is white, of others yellow,
and of some red. The white fat is full of small sinews, and it does not yield so
much oyl as the yellow. The yellow fat that looks like butter is the best. The
red and watery fat cometh from dead whales, for in the place where the fat runs
out the blood settles in its room, and yields the worst and least oyl. Before the
table is a gutter made of two boards nailed together, whereinto the small or
minced fat is flung; by it stands a boy that shuffles the fat by degrees into a bag
that is fixed to the end of the gutter, and is like unto a pudding - bag, so that it
reaches down into the ship; out of this bag the fat runs down into a tub or
wooden funnel, which they put upon empty vessels, or cardels, as they call them,
and the men that are below in the ship fill them with it, and so it is kept until
200
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
they try it up into train-oyl. When the fat is cut off from one side of the whale,
before they turn him they cut out the whalebone in one entire piece; and this is
so heavy that all the ship's crew hath enough to do to pull it up. They make
use, for that purpose, of a peculiar sort of hooks, two whereof they fix on the
sides, and one on the middle of it, very well provided with strong tackle, and
afterwards they cut out the whalebone of the other side of the fish, and draw it
up also with pulleys into the ship, where it is cut into such pieces as they bring
it hither in. The whalebone doth only belong to the owners of the ship, and the
others that run their hazard, whether they catch few or many whales. The rest,
which take their pay by the month, receive their money when they come home,
whether they have caught many or none, and the loss or gain falls upon the
merchants. The hooks that they crane up the whalebone withal, are made on
purpose for it, like a beam of a pair of scales ; on each end are two sharp points,
which they knock in between the whalebone ; in the middle of the beam is
fastened a long handle with a ring, whereon the ropes are fastened ; on this handle
there are fixed two other crooked hooks like bird's claws; in the ring where the
ropes are fastened is another crooked hook, at the top fastened by a ring, such a
one as we make use of here when we wind anything up by a crane ; but in the
middle between these two hooks is fastened another rope, which keeps the lower-
most hook steddy; the two hindmost points are knocked into the whalebone
behind, and the two foremost short ones before, which hold the whalebone fast
between them when it is wound or pulled up.
“The dead whales, when the fat is cut off of them, they let float, and are the
food of the birds of prey when they are hungry; but they had rather have dead
whales that have still their fat left on them. The white bear is generally not far
off, whether there be any fat left on them or no, and look like dogs that only
feed upon carrion, and at that time their white fur is turned into a yellow colour,
and at the same time they shed their hair, and their skins are worth very little.
Where a dead whale is near, we see it by the birds, whereof are many, and also
the white bears discover it, chiefly in the spring, when but few whales are caught,
for then they are greedy of their prey; afterwards, when many whales float on the
sea, they have their bellies full, and we do not find so many by a whale, because
they are dispersed.
"Formerly the Dutch did try out their train-oyl in Spitzbergen, at Smeeren-
berg, and about the Cookery of Harlingen, where still, for a remembrance, all sorts
of tools belonging thereunto are to be seen, whereof I have made mention before.
The Frenchmen try up their train-oyl in their ships, and by that means many
THE AMERICAN IHALE- FISHERY.
201
ships are burnt at Spitzbergen ; and this was the occasion of the burning of two
ships in my time. They try out their train - oyl at Spitzbergen, that they may
load the more fat in their ships; and they believe it to be very profitable, for
they go their voyage upon part, that is to say, they receive more or less, according
to what they catch : but I do not account it wisdom to fill up the room of the
ship with wood, where they might stow vessels. But our countrymen, as I told
you before, put the fat into the vessels, wherein it doth ferment just like beer;
and I know no instance that ever any vessel did fly in pieces, although they are
stopt up very close, and so it becometh for the greatest part train - oyl in them.
Of the fresh fat of whales, when it is burnt out you lose twenty in the hundred,
more or less, according as it is in goodness. At the place where they try up the
fat into train-oyl, near Hamburg, they try up the fat out of the vessels into a
great wooden trough or tub, and out of this two men empty it into a great kettle
that stands near it, that doth hold two cardels of fat, that makes one hundred and
twenty, one hundred and thirty, and sometimes one hundred and forty gallons.
Underneath this copper that is made up with bricks they put the fire, and so they
boil it, and try it up into train - oyl, as you try up other fat. This copper is very
well secured, as the dyers' coppers use to be; it is very broad and flat, just like
a frying-pan made of copper. When the fat is well tryed or fryed out, they take
it out of the pan with small kettles, into a great sieve, that the liquid only may
run through ; the rest is thrown away. This sieve stands over a great tub, which
is above half filled with cold water, that the hot train-oyl may be cooled, and
that what is unclean and dirty of the blood and other soil may fall to the bottom,
and only the clear train-oyl swim at the top of the water, like other oyl. In this
great tub or trough is a small spout or tap, which doth run out over another as
big as a tub, out of which the train - oyl runs into another tub, when it is almost
ready to run over, which is also filled with cold water to the middle, wherein it is
more cooled, and becomes clearer, and more refined than it was before. In this
trough is another spout, through which the train-oyl runs into the warehouse into
a vatt, whereout they fill it into cardels or vessels. Some have but two tubs.
A cardel or hogshead holds sixty-four gallons. A true train - oyl barrel doth hold
thirty-two gallons. The greaves they try up the second time, and make brown
train-oyl out of it; others that think it not worth their while, fling them away."
Having submitted a brief sketch of primitive European whaling commerce, de-
duced from the most reliable papers and publications accessible to us, we will now
enter upon an account of the American whale- fishery.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 26
CHAPTER II.
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
;
The American Whale-fishery began as early as 1614. .According to Captain
John Smith, the enterprise was prosecuted by the colonists along the New England
coast prior to that date, and it was among the first pursuits of the colonial inhab-
itants of New York and Delaware. * The right of whale- fishing “was guaranteed
by the Royal Charter of 1629 to the proprietors of Massachusetts, as being within
their waters.”+ Yet, according to Cheever, “the first person that is recorded to
have killed a whale, among the people of New England, was one William Hamil-
ton, somewhere between 1660 and 1670;"I and as early as 1700 they began to
fit out vessels from Cape Cod and Nantucket, to “whale out” in the deep sea for
sperm whales. These treasures of the ocean were of great value to the early settlers,
both commercially and in a domestic point of view. One John Higginson, of Cape
Cod, writes: “We have a considerable quantity of whale-oil and bone for exporta-
tion.” Even in those primitive times, among the few inhabitants of the coast who
were engaged in the exciting adventure, it was not without its strifes, for, in 1692,
Mr. Higginson, one of the spiritual advisers of those days, and Timothy Lindall,
wrote to Nathaniel Thomas : $
"Sir, we have been jointly concerned in seuerall whale voyages at Cape Cod,
and have sustained greate wrong and injury by the unjust dealing of the inhabitants
of those parts, especially in two instances ; yo first was when Woodbury and com-
pany, in our boates, in the winter of 1690, killed a large whale in Cape Cod harbour.
She sank, and after rose, went to sea with a harpoon, warp, etc., of ours, which have
been found in the hands of Nicholas Eldridge. The second case is this : Last
winter, 1691, William Edds and company, in one of our boates, struck a whale,
which came ashore dead, and by yo evidence of the people of Cape Cod was the
very whale they killed. The whale was taken away by Thomas Smith, of Eastham,
and unjustly detained."
* Annals of Salem, vol. ii, p. 223.
| Vide Annals of Salem, vol.. ii, p. 223.
IWhale and his Captors, p. 23.
§ Annals of Salem, vol. ii, p. 223.
(202)
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
203
These remarks show that shore-whaling was pursued at the Cape previous to
1690. About 1748, the whales, having been driven from the contiguous shores,
were pursued farther seaward in sloops and schooners of fifty tons, each of which
had a company of thirteen men, and lowered two boats in the chase. In 1765, the
whale- fishery from Boston and adjacent ports amounted to one hundred small
vessels, * which cruised as far to the northward and eastward as the Straits of Belle
Isle, the Gulf of St. Lawrence, and to the Western Islands. But at the island of
Nantucket, or among the Nantucket men, originated the grand whaling enterprise
which has reached every accessible point around the world. † The colonists who
had come hither to settle were, like all other New Englanders of their time, made
up of those characteristic spirits, who believed in God, and maintained the right
of worshiping Him according to the dictates of their own convictions. Moreover,
they were inured to frugal habits, but were alive to industry and adventure. Their
first whaling from the island was in boats from the shores, which occurred as
early as 1690. I A tall spar was erected, upon which the whalemen in turn
ascended to watch for whales. As soon as the spout of the animal was seen in
the distance, the signal was given, when immediately the boats were manned,
launched through the surf, and with sturdy stroke they plied. their rudely fashioned
oars, and away flew the primitive whaling squadron, which was soon invisible from
the island hamlet. The capture being made, the prize was towed to the beach and
stripped of its blubber, which was transported in carts to the try-houses, where
the oil was extracted and put into casks ready for market. The shore-whaling
continued for over fifty years, but eventually it was abandoned, for the same reason
that the Spitzbergen and Smeerenberg fisheries were— the scarcity of whales near
* Annals of Salem, vol. ii, p. 225.
navigation, which they have an opportunity of
tJ. Hector St. John, who published a book practicing on the spot. They learn the great
in 1793, entitled Letters from an American Farmer, and useful art of working a ship in all the dif-
gives many interesting facts concerning the Nan ferent situations which the sea and wind so oft-
tucket people and the whale-fishery of the pe en require; and surely there can not be a better
riod, from which we extract a few paragraphs. or a more useful school of that kind in the
Relative to the children, he says:
world. Then they go gradually through every
“At school they learn to read, and to write station of rowers, steersmen, and harpooners;
a good hand, until they are twelve years old; thus they learn to attack, to pursue, to over-
they are then in general put apprentices to the take, to cut, to dress their huge game : and
cooper's trade, which is the second essential after having performed several such voyages,
branch of business followed here; at fourteen, and perfected themselves in this business, they
they are sent to sea, where in their leisure are fit either for the counting-house or chase.”
hours their companions teach them the art of | Hunt's Merchants' Magazine, vol. iii, p. 364.
204
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
-
the coast. As early as 1712 or 1713, sloops of thirty-eight to fifty tons were fitted
out from Nantucket, for voyages east to Newfoundland and south to the Gulf
Stream. They had two boats each, and were manned with a crew of twelve or
thirteen men, half of the number being natives.* In some instances the whole
company, except the captain, were Indians; and the "Nattick” language was, in a
great measure, adopted on board.† With these vessels, thus manned, and with the
addition of an occasional representative of the African race, the fishery was success-
fully pursued up to 1746, I when larger ones, schooners and brigs, from one hun-
dred to one hundred and thirty tons, were employed. These more capacious whaling
craft stretched across the Atlantic, in their voyages, to the coast of Africa, traversed
the Banks of Newfoundland, and contended with the ice of Baffin's and Hudson's
bays, in search of their mammoth prey, and in open seasons reached the latitude
of 81°.
According to Ricketson's History of New Bedford, the founder of that city,
Joseph Russell, Esq., was the first to engage in the whale- fishery at that point,
which dates back to 1755. In 1765, he, with others, employed in the enterprise
the sloops Nancy, Polly, Greyhound, and Hannah, each of which was about fifty tons
burden. Their cruises were extended during the milder months of the year as far
south as the "Capes of Virginia." In these primitive voyages, the oil was not
extracted from the blubber until the vessel's return, when the hoy-like craft was
hauled broadside upon the shore, and an ox-cart was the means of transporting
* Pitkins mentions that the American whal spouted thick blood, with irons in them, and
ing-fleet, in 1731, amounted to thirteen hundred drags (“droges”) fastened to them, which are
tons. — Pitkins on Commerce, p. 43.
thick boards about fourteen inches square." It
+ It has been stated by several writers that was considered presumption to attempt to capt-
the American colonists followed up the Indian ure the huge creatures "in small boats, and by
mode of capturing the whale, by first striking the aid of lines, from the end of which was
it with a harpoon having a log of wood attached attached the harpoon, by which they could draw
to it by a line, even as late as the commence themselves to the harpooned whale whenever
ment of the Sperm Whale fishery. It is quoted they wished to destroy it with the lance.” We
that the Hon. Paul Dudley stated: “Our peo are of the opinion, however, that the colonial
ple formerly used to kill the whale near the whalers did not follow the Indian mode of
shore, but now they go off to sea in sloops and whale-fishing; for it is well known that the
whale-boats. Sometimes the whale is killed by British whalers, as early as 1670, used the line
a single stroke, and yet at other times she will attached to the boat, and, so far as the drags
hold the whalemen in play near half a day to or “droges” are concerned, they are used at
gether, with their lances; and sometimes they the present day in cases of emergency.
will get away after they have been lanced and I Hunt's Merchants Magazine, vol. iii, p. 356.
。

Plate XXIII
Britton & Rey.lith.
1763
JR
From Wall.
A WHALING SCENE OF 1763.
irii
nik
2.2.1
!
poliis fit ;
Villers,
--
VOY 1.!!
w..cl: evt.
Huthm wire
71, le siir !!
ܚܬܐ ܀
i u T
..? this
f 1?
...
tiin
led C pe 11 22
Willou i thi
"el il very la:
commercial enti
wih has she
the years 1771 an.
itine-fis... y. psp huus:
C. luulit'! ali twen y 1:
in remote list!
of fourteen
u tijeli
pliyini annuils
tigastus 1:1
**
!! place
* The i'lita C..
whn, -30 i 1703, 4
!!! pale
9
tie
T 10:
17 18 worh, ini !!!
liron che mi
fie o of th Filt
on 1:
Sion
1
1
19
ed up
w
lala ruitive in
By the side o to,
wie Police 100 view
an older pensel, walls with
gran ili mping ! via the man
16] Aules: tretrue, w
er: 131
fire alone
:
ing Rin, 1...2 lan in the slis
now
urmariti an 1 war-benas
LR* "I ar, ee'l exterdir",
edge, 1. the iure fro.' ;*
.: will be ti !',
the early in'!
OVO
to
1
Inlevai fume
!! vandens
'n bis 1:30.
her to inder und
4. fisur.
---
i

! Vini
po
THE AMERICAN
205
WHALE-FISHERY.
the reeking fat from the vessel to the "try-houses.' This was the custom with
all the whalers of those times. **
About 1770, other vessels of larger tonnage were added to the whaling squad-
ron,t which extended their voyages, like the Nantucket-men, across the Atlantic.
Among them were the New Bedford brigs Patience and No Duty on Tea. In September,
1791, the ship Rebecca, owned by those veteran merchants, Joseph Russell & Sons and
Cornelius Howland, was among the first, if not the first, of American whalers which
doubled Cape Horn and obtained a full cargo in the Pacific. The chronicler states:
“Although the Rebecca was only one hundred and seventy-five tons, she was consid-
ered a very large vessel, and was visited as an object of wonder.” Thus began the
commercial enterprise at New Bedford-or, as the town was first named, Bedford -
which has since become, and still is, the whaling metropolis of the world. Between
the years 1771 and 1775, Massachusetts alone employed annually, in the northern
whale-fishery, one hundred and eighty-three vessels, tonnaging thirteen thousand
eight hundred and twenty tons; and one hundred and twenty-one vessels, with an
aggregate burden of fourteen thousand and twenty tons, were engaged in the south-
ern fishery, f and many places along the sea - board of New England, as well as towns
* The plate facing this page, representing a
whaling-scene of 1763, was copied by permission
from the celebrated painting by William H. Wall.
The author of the History of New Bedford de-
scribes it in his work, from which we extract
the following: “Upon the shore lies keeled over
on her side one of the small vessels then em-
ployed for whaling; the model of the craft, a
sloop, indicates a primitive idea of naval archi-
tecture. By the side of this sloop, but other-
wise concealed from view, is seen the sail of
another vessel, with the union-jack of old En-
gland drooping from the mast-head. The river
lies peacefully outstretched, with a view of Palm-
er's Island and the shore along by the Smok-
ing Rocks,' and Naushon in the distance. Where
now stand our wharves and warehouses, the pri-
meval forest trees are seen extending their roots
to the water's edge. In the foreground of the
picture, and that which will be to most its chief
interest, is seen a group of the early inhabitants
of New Bedford, busily employed. Under an
old shed is seen the try-pot, with its attend-
ants; and also the jaw of a whale thrown upon
the roof;” and between the shed and the sloop
may be seen the ox-teams, hitched to a sort of
sled (in lieu of the ordinary wheeled cart), on
which the whale-fat is transported in casks to
the try-works. “More conspicuous, and nearer
the beholder, stands one man in a red shirt
with a patch on the breast, pouring oil from a
long-handled dipper into a wooden-hooped bar-
rel; another handling over the blubber; and
still more prominent, a fine-looking fellow is
coopering a barrel, in conference with an In-
dian, who, with his baskets and moccasins for
sale or barter, is seated upon a broken mast.
Farther on, seated upon the frame of a grind-
stone, and giving directions to a colored man,
who is holding his master's horse by the bridle,
is seen, in his broad - brimmed hat and Friendly
coat, the founder of New Bedford and father of
her whale-fishery, Joseph Russell."
† History of New Bedford, p. 59.
See Hunt's Merchants' Magazine, vol.- iii, p.
366.
206
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
--
farther north and south, became whaling - ports. The subjoined table gives the
number of American vessels annually engaged in the enterprise, with the amount
and value of oil taken each year from 1762 to 1770, inclusive:
Year.
No. Vessels.
No. of Barrels.
Value of Imports.
1762.
78
1763. *
60
1764.
72
1765.
101
1766.
118
9,440
9,238
11,983
11,512
11,969
16,561
15,439
19,140
14,331
$102,518 40
100,324 68
131,135 38
125,020 32
129,983 24
179,852 46
167,667 54
462,996 60
346,666 89
1767.
108
1768.
125
1769.
119
1770.
125
906
119,613
$1,746,165 51
About 1774,7 the fleet was augmented by still larger vessels,f some of which
crossed the equator, and obtained full cargoes upon that noted ground called the
“Brazil Banks,” while others cruised around Cape Verde Islands or the West Indies,
as
* Scoresby, in his account of the Whale- Fish-
ery of the British Colonies in America, states that
there were eighty vessels employed in the Amer-
ican fisheries during the year 1763.
| History of Nantucket, p. 233.
| St. John, in his Letters, published in 1793,
which have previously been referred to, thus de-
scribes the mode of whale-fishing at that time:
“The first proprietors of Nantucket, or rath-
er the first founders of this town, began their
career of industry with a single whale-boat, with
which they went to fish for cod; the small dis-
tance from their shores at which they caught it,
enabled them soon to increase their business,
and those early successes first led them to con-
ceive that they might likewise catch the whales,
which hitherto sporled undisturbed upon their
banks. After many trials and several miscar-
riages, they succeeded : thus they proceeded,
step by step; the profits of one successful en-
terprise helped them to purchase and prepare
better materials for a more extensive one :
these were attended with little costs, their prof-
its grew greater.
"The south sides of the island, from east to
west, were divided into four equal parts; and
each part was assigned to a company of six,
which, though thus separated, still carried on
their business in common. In the middle of
this distance they erected & mast, provided with
a sufficient number of rounds, and near it they
built a temporary hut, where five of the asso-
ciates lived, whilst the sixth, from his high sta-
tion, carefully looked toward the sea, in order
to observe the spouting of the whales. As soon
as any were discovered, the sentinel descended,
the whale-boat was launched, and the company
went forth in quest of their game.
“It may appear strange to you that a vessel
so slender as an American whale-boat, containing
THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
207
in the Gulf of Mexico, Caribbean Sea, or upon the coast of the Spanish Main.
Soon after, they extended their voyages to the South Atlantic, around the Falkland
Islands, and to the coast of Patagonia, where Fur Seal skins and Sea Elephant oil
were sometimes obtained. In such instances these whaling and sealing expeditions
were called “mixed voyages." “Between the years 1770 and 1775," according to
*
*
six diminutive beings, should dare to pursue and
to attack, in its native element, the largest and
strongest fish that Nature has created. Yet by
the exertion of an admirable dexterity, improved
by a long practice, in which these people are
become superior to any other whalemen; by
knowing the temper of the whale after her first
movement, and by many other useful observa-
tions, they seldom fail to harpoon it, and to
bring the huge leviathan on the shores. Thus
they went on, until the profits they made ena-
bled them to purchase larger vessels, and to pur-
sue them farther, when the whales quitted their
coasts.
By degrees they went a-whaling
to Newfoundland, to the Gulph of St. Lau-
rence, to the Straits of Belleisle, the coast of
Labrador, Davis's Straits, even to Cape Desola-
tion, in 700 of latitude ; where the Danes carry
on some fisheries, in spite of the perpetual sever-
ities of that inhospitable climate. Would
you believe that they have already gone to the
Falkland Islands, and that I have heard several
of them talk of going to the South Sea! Their
confidence is so great, and their knowledge of
this branch of business so superior to that of
any other people, that they have acquired a
monopoly of this commodity.
“Such were their feeble beginnings, such the
infancy and progress of their maritime schemes ;
such is now the degree of boldness and activity
to which they are arrived in their manhood.
After their examples several companies have
been formed in many of our capitals, where
every necessary article of provisions, implements,
and timber, are to be found. But the industry
exerted by the people of Nantucket hath hither-
to enabled them to rival all their competitors;
consequently this is the greatest mart for oil,
whalebone, and spermaceti on the continent.
“The vessels most proper for whale-fishing
are brigs of about one hundred and fifty tons
burden, particularly when they are intended for
distant latitudes; they always man them with
thirteen hands, in order that they may row two
whale-boats; the crews of which must necessa-
rily consist of six, four at the oars, one stand-
ing on the bows with the harpoon, and the
other at the helm. It is also necessary that
there should be two of these boats, that if one
should be destroyed in attacking the whale, the
other, which is never engaged at the same time,
may be ready to save the hands. Five of the
thirteen are always Indians; the last of the
complement remains on board to steer the ves-
sel during the action.
“As
as they arrive in those latitudes
where they expect to meet with whales, a man
is sent up to the mast-head; if he sees one,
he immediately cries out, ‘Awaite pawana' (here
is a whale); they all remain still and silent
until he repeats Pawana' (a whale), when in
less than six minutes the two boats are launched,
filled with every implement necessary for the
attack. They row toward the whale with aston-
ishing velocity; and as the Indians early became
their fellow-laborers in this new warfare, you
can easily conceive how the Nattick expressions
became familiar on board the whale-boats. For-
merly it often happened that whale-vessels were
manned with none but Indians and the master;
recollect also that the Nantucket people under-
stand the Nattick, and that there are always
five of these people on board.
“There are various ways of approaching the
soon
208
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Macy's History of Nantucket, "the whaling business increased to an extent hitherto
unparalleled. In 1770 there were a little more than one hundred vessels engaged,
and in 1775 the number exceeded one hundred and fifty, some of them large
brigs.” The following table briefly exhibits the state of the fishery from 1771 to
1775 (showing the annual average), which at that period was prosecuted chiefly
from Massachusetts, although Sag Harbor had three sloops cruising for whales in
high northern latitudes as early as 1760 :*
Ports from which the equipprents
were made.
Northern
Fishery,
vessels.
Tonnage.
Southern
Fishery,
vessels.
Tonnage.
Seamen
employed.
Barrels of
Sperm Oil
taken.
Barrels of
Whale Oil
taken.
65
85
Nantucket..
Wellfleet.
Dartmouth
20
10
4,875
1,600
4,500
75
10,200
1,000
2,000
120
2,025
420
1,040
26,000
2,250
7,200
200
4,000
2,250
1,400
100
60
20
1
1
28
12
720
156
900
300
2
150
26
240
Lynn......
Martha's Vineyard
Barnstable...
Boston...
Falmouth, Barnstable Co.
Swanzey...
15
5
700
260
600
1,300
300
1,800
400
4
52
4
300
52
400
Total
183
13,820
121
14,020
4,059
39,390
8,650
The first voyage made across the equinoctial line into the South Atlantic was
by the brig Amazon, of Nantucket, under the command of Uriah Bunker, who
returned with a "full ship" April 19th, 1775.7
whales, according to their peculiar species; and end of a cord of due strength, coiled up with
this previous knowledge is of the utmost conse the utmost care in the middle of the boat, is
quence.
When these boats are arrived at a firmly tied; the other end is fastened to the
reasonable distance, one of them rests on its bottom of the boat. Thus prepared, they row
oars, and stands off, as a witness of the ap in profound silence, leaving the whole conduct
proaching engagement; near the bows of the of the enterprise to the harpooner and to the
other the harpooner stands up, and on him steersman, attentively following their directions.
principally depends the success of the enter When the former judges himself to be near
prise. He wears a jacket closely buttoned, and enough to the whale, that is, at the distance
round his head a handkerchief tightly bound; of about fifteen feet, he bids them stop; per-
in his hands he holds the dreadful weapon, haps she has a calf, whose safety attracts all
made of the best steel, marked sometimes with the attention of the dam, which is a favorable
the name of their town, and sometimes with circumstance; perhaps she is of a dangerous
that of their vessel; to the shaft of which the species, and it is safest to retire, though their
* Thompson's History of Long Island, vol. i, p. 349.
† Sanford's Letters.
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
209
The breaking-out of the Revolutionary War paralyzed the whaling commerce,
which nearly proved ruinous to all those who were embarked in it. Nantucket, at
that time, had one hundred and fifty vessels. But on the return of peace it was
resumed, and but few years elapsed before it was again pursued with great vigor.
The first whale-ship that ventured into the Pacific was sent by the Nantucket
colony of whaling-men from England, in 1787,* and the first officer of the vessel,
Archelus Hammond, struck the first Sperm Whale known to have been captured in
that ocean.
In the year 1789, a gentleman from Cape Cod, who had returned from service
in the East India Company, having seen Sperm Whales near Madagascar, communi-
cated the fact to some of the Nantucket whalemen, who, profiting by the knowl-
edge, in due time dispatched ships to that coast, which proved to be a rich whaling-
ground. From 1787 to 1789, inclusive, the American Whale-fishery was prosecuted
from the ports, and to the extent set forth in the following statement :
Ports from which the equipments
were made,
Northern
Fishery,
vessels.
Tonnage.
Southern
Fishery,
vessels.
Toonage.
Seamen
employed.
Barrels of
Sperm Oil
taken.
Barrels of
Whale Oil
taken.
18
1,350
18
2,700
487
3,800
8,260
12
720
4
400
212
45
2,700
5
750
650
2,700
Nantucket..
Wellfeet, and other ports
at Cape Cod.......
Dartmouth and N. Bedford
Cape Ann...
Plymouth...
Martba's Vineyard ..
Boston...
Dorchester and Wareham..
1,920
1,750
1,200
2
350
28
1
60
13
100
2
120
1
100
39
220
6
450
78
360
7
420
1
90
104
800
Total
91
5,820
31
4,390
1,611
7,980
13,130
In 1791, I six whale-ships were fitted out at Nantucket for the Pacific— the
first that ever sailed from the United States for those distant grounds. Their
ardor will seldom permit them; perhaps she is
asleep; in that case he balances high the har-
poon, trying in this important moment to collect
all the energy of which he is capable. He
launches it forth — she is struck: from her first
movement, they judge of her temper, as well as
of their future success. Sometimes, in the im-
mediate impulse of rage, she will attack the
boat, and demolish it with one stroke of her
tail; in an instant the frail vehicle disappears,
* Proceedings American Antiquarian Society,
No. 57, p. 28–29.
| Hunt's Merchants' Magazine, vol. iii, p. 370.
I Proc. American Antiquarian Society, p. 29.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 27.
210
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
names were the Beaver, Washington, Hector, Warren, Rebecca, and Favorite, and the
names of their captains were those characteristic ones among the settlers of the
islands, as follows: Worth, Bunker, Brock, Barnard, Meader, and Folger. These
ships were only two hundred and fifty tons burden, dull sailers, having no copper
on their bottoms, and but scantily fitted with whaling appliances or provisions.
The scene of their first exploits was upon the coast of Chile. These pioneer voy-
ages, through the persistent daring of the hardy men who led them, were eminently
successful, which induced the people of the neighboring settlements of other New
England ports to extend their whaling commerce, and but few years passed before
a numerous fleet were plying over those rough waters. Gradually, however, they
extended their cruises toward the more distant but smiling regions of the tropics.
As early as 1800,* American whalers were plowing the sparkling waters along the
coast of Peru, and their keels cut the equatorial line, north and south, in the
Pacific. A favorite cruising-ground was from the Spanish Main, westward, around
the Galapagos Islands. There a rich harvest rewarded them, where they labored in
a genial climate, with an almost uninterrupted succession of fine breezes and pleas-
ant weather. At certain seasons, north of the equator, the north-east trades blew
fresh, and at the south they would frequently increase to a brisk gale ; but these
periodical breezes, compared with the heavy gales of the Atlantic and the tedious
weather about Cape Horn, served only to enliven them into renewed activity under
the heated rays of a tropical sun, when in pursuit of the vast herds of Cachalots
which were met with, bounding over or through the crested waves. During these
long voyages, it became unavoidably necessary to occasionally go into port, in order
to "recruit ship.” When arrived at these places of supply, good store of fresh
meat, water, and vegetables was laid in, and the ship's company were allowed to
pass, in turn, a few days of liberty on shore. In due time those ports along the
coast of Chile and Peru, which were suited to the requirements of the adventurers,
became famous places of resort for American whale-ships. The principal ones were
and the assailants are immersed in the dreadful
element.
At other times she will dive
and disappear from human sight; and every-
thing must then give way to her velocity, or
else all is lost. Sometimes she will swim away,
as if untouched, and draw the cord with such
swiftness, that it will set the edge of the boat
on fire by the friction. If she rises, before she
has run out the whole length, she is looked
upon as a sure prey. The blood which she has
lost in her flight weakens her so much, that
if she sinks again, it is but for a short time;
the boat follows her course, with an almost
equal speed. She soon re-appears; and, tired
at last with convulsing the element, which she
tinges with her blood, she dies, and floats upon
the surface."
* Nantucket paper.
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
211
Talcahuano and Valparaiso, in Chile, and Payta, Callao, and Tumbez, in Peru. At
these places usually could be obtained any needed recruits, and thc picturesque
scenery, blended with those sunny climes, together with the charms of the beautiful
women, made their periodical visits to the coast peculiarly attractive, and wrought
an entire temporary change from the life on "blue water.” The abrupt and lofty
group of islands—the Galapagos — which extend into both latitudes from the equa-
tor, and the little island of Cocos, situated in the rainy region on the border of
Panama Bay, were frequently visited, and became more familiar to the whalemen,
in many instances, than their Atlantic homes. Every ragged mountain and verdant
valley of the former were traversed in hunting the galapago, or “elephant terrapin,"
which furnished them with ample supply of the most delicious meat, and the
latter was resorted to for fresh water, which was dipped from cascades flowing out
of their natural reservoir beyond the wooded bluffs. And upon the rocks about
the beach of Chatham Bay, rudely chiseled, are the records of those pioneer whale-
fishers, together with the dates of the visits of transient vessels, from the pigmy
shallops of Drake's time to the magnificent national ships of the present century.
The War of 1812 caused another cessation in American whaling, yet it was revived
simultaneously with the declaration of peace; and, as early as 1815, ships were in
pursuit of the balanas amid the icy regions of the north and south, and the Cacha-
lots in both hemispheres. Not unfrequently American whalemen were the discoverers
and pioneers to distant islands and coasts when engaged in their legitimate pursuits ;
and they were often the first to display our national flag in commercial marts
remote from their home havens. In this connection we will inention the fact that,
in 1792,* at the peak of the ship Washington, of Nantucket, under the command
of George Bunker, was hoisted the first American ensign ever spread to the breeze
in the port of Callao. Characteristic of the life they led, the love of adventure
tempted the whalers to turn their prows even from the sunny shores of Peru, and,
with flowing sheets, they coursed over the Pacific until, in latitude 50 to 10° south,
and longitude 105° to 125° west, the objects of pursuit were found in countless
numbers, whose huge forms blackened the waves, and whose spoutings clouded the
air as far as the eye could discern. This discovery was made by Captain George
W. Gardner, in the ship Globe, of Nantucket, in 1818.† The captain named it the
"Off-shore Ground,” and ere long this circumscribed spot in the ocean was whitened
by the sails of fifty ships.
Captain Winship, of Brighton, Massachusetts, reported to his friends at Nan-
tucket, that on a voyage from China to the Sandwich Islands, he had seen large
* Proceedings American Antiquarian Society, No. 57, p. 29.
+ Nantucket paper.
212
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
numbers of Sperm Whales on the coast of Japan. Upon this information, in 1820,
ships were dispatched to what is now known as the Japan Ground. The two first
to arrive were the Nantucket ship Maro, Captain Joseph Allen, and the English
ship Enderby, which was commanded by Frederick Coffin, of Nantucket. Here they
were successful in soon filling their vessels with sperm oil, and two years after
there were more than thirty ships upon that coast. About this period nearly the
whole coast of western North America, as far as the land known as New Albion,
was traversed by the sperm-whalemen, and it is said that more than a hundred
ships were literally spanning the North Pacific in their eager search between the
two continents for the coveted Cachalots. In 1828, four ships were sent from
Nantucket to cruise for Sperm Whales off the coast of Zanzibar, around the Chy-
chile Islands, and about the mouth of the Red Sea ; and one of the number, with
the very appropriate name of Columbus, through the skill and energy of the captain,
sailed up the Red Sea in quest of the objects of pursuit.
But while the explorations and the chase for both the Cachalot and the Right
Whale were being vigorously prosecuted in the North and South Atlantic, and
through the temperate and torrid zones, not only by American whalemen, but by
vessels wearing the flags of the principal maritime nations of Europe, those remote
and forbidding latitudes of the Indian Ocean and the South Pacific had received
due attention. As far back as 1803, ships were cruising around Kurguélen Land
for Right Whales, in the season, and sometimes a portion of their crews were
engaged in sealing along the surf - beaten shores of Desolation and the Crozet
islands, making up “mixed" but profitable voyages. Subsequently the coasts of
New Zealand and New Holland (now Australia), became prolific whaling-grounds.
Yet, with all the vast extent of both sea and ocean known to the whalemen for
prosecuting their vocation, there were adventurous spirits among them who were
ever in deep study and eager for a new field of pursuit, and plying their vessels to
the far north in the Pacific, an unparalleled success awaited them.
1835,** the American ship Ganges took the first Right Whale on the Kodiak Ground.
This was the beginning of the great whaling of the North - western Coast; and in
1839 the fleet of the United States engaged in whaling numbered five hundred and
fifty-seven vessels, which were distributed among the Northern Atlantic ports in
the proportions set forth in the subjoined table. In 1842 the number was six
hundred and fifty-two. At this time the foreign whaling - fleet amounted to two
hundred and thirty sail, and the combined fleet of the world, engaged in the enter-
prise, numbered eight hundred and eighty-two ships, barks, brigs, and schooners.
In the year
# Fide Nantucket paper.
THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
213
Amount
Places where owned.
ships
and
Barks.
Brigs
and
Schrs.
of
Places where owned.
Ships
and
Barks.
Brigs
and
Schrs.
Amount
of
Tonnage.
Tonnage.
8
1
348
1
56,118
13,274
874
9
2
5
1
4
18
3
1,443
904
2
3
10
30
9
4
7
3,152
1,782
6,075
1,086
11,447
2,912
1,797
10,605
1,414
274
5
5
3
1
31
3
Portsmouth ....
Newport..
Bristol..
Warren....
Providence....
New London...
Stonington...
Mystic..
Sag Harbor.....
Greenport.....
New Suffolk...
Jamesport ...
Bridgeport....
New York......
Hudson .....
Poughkeepsie.
Cold Spring....
Wilmington..
Newark..
New Bedford.... 169
Fairhaven.... 43
Dartmouth..... 3
Westport ... 5
Wareham ...
2
Rochester.....
5
Nantucket
77
Edgartown..... 8
Holmes' Hole.... 3
Fall River ..... 4
Lynn..
4
Newburyport.... 3
Plymouth... 3
Salem ....
14
Boston.....
Dorchester... 2
Falmouth..... 8
Provincetown....
Portland ......
1
Wiscasset...
1
4
2,615
27,364
2,659
1,180
1,604
1,269
1,099
910
4,265
125
1
1
..
1
236
3
913
3
710
1
8
2,902
2,043
581
6
2,490
2
629
1
172
5
1,578
366
388
1
380
In 1846, the American force engaged was six hundred and seventy-eight ships
and barks, thirty-five brigs, and twenty-two schooners, aggregating two hundred
and thirty-three thousand one hundred and eighty-nine tons, valued at $21,075,000.
At the same time, all the investments connected with the business are said to have
been at least $70,000,000, and seventy thousand persons derived their chief support
from the whaling interests. The first Bowhead Whales taken in the North Pacific,
or in Behring Sea, were by the American ships Hercules, Captain Ricketson, and
Janus, Captain Turner, which were on the coast of Kamschatka in 1843.
In 1847,
Bowheads were discovered in the Okhotsk Sea ; and in 1848, Captain Royce, in the
bark Superior, of Sag Harbor, was the first to pass through Behring Strait, and
capture the Balæna mysticetus of the Arctic Ocean. From 1846 to 1851, inclusive,
the whale-fishery of the United States may be regarded as having been in its most
flourishing condition, the average number of vessels annually employed for these
years being six hundred and thirty-eight, with an aggregate tonnage of two hun-
dred and two thousand two hundred and seventy-two tons. This immense fleet
214
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
was scattered around the world, plying upon the well-known cruising-grounds,
which were familiarly named as follow :
SPERM WHALE GROUNDS : Atlantic Ocean and contiguous waters. -- Around the Azores
or Western Islands; about the Cape de Verde Islands; the Charleston Grounds;
north of the Bahama Islands ; in the Gulf of Mexico ; in the Caribbean Sea ; about
the West India Islands; on the coast of Africa ; and the Carrol Ground, which is a
space of ocean situated between the island of St. Helena and the coast of Africa.
SPERM WHALE GROUNDS : Indian Ocean and neighboring waters. — To the south of
Madagascar, and between that island and Africa ; off the northern end of Mada-
gascar ; along the coast of Arabia, including the mouth of the Red Sea ; on the
coast of Java; Malacca Straits ; on the north-western coast of Australia ; on the
southern coast of Australia, and between it and Tasmania or Van Dieman's Land.
SPERM WHALE GROUNDS : Pacific Ocean and adjacent waters. — The On-shore Ground,
which includes the whole extent of ocean between the southern boundary of Chile
and the northern limits of Peru, and west to the island of Juan Fernandez and the
Gallapagos group; the Off-shore Ground, which extends to latitude 59 and 10°
south of the equator, and from longitude 90° to 120° west; off Cape Horn; around
the Sandwich Islands; in the vicinity of the Society Islands; in the vicinity of the
Fiji Islands ; in the vicinity of the Navigator Islands; about the King's Mill
group;
about and to the south of the equator, from the coast of Ecuador to the
King's Mill group ; across the South Pacific between the latitudes of 21° and 27°;
across the North Pacific between the latitudes of 27° and 35° ; off the Bashee
Islands ; off the east coast of New Zealand ; on the Middle Ground between Aus-
tralia and New Zealand; Sooloo Sea; China Sea ; on the coast of Japan, and
between it and the Bonin Islands; on the North-western Coast of America ; on the
coast of Upper and Lower California. Sperm Whales are also found in as high lati-
tudes as 60° south and 50° to 60° north. All these whaling-grounds, it will be
seen, were the resorting-places of the Sperm Whales, and consequently of their
captors, nearly all of them being in the temperate or tropical latitudes; but the
Right Whales' feeding-grounds are chiefly in the colder regions, although some of
their resorts were upon coasts or banks in common with their congeners. The
principal grounds, however, of the Right and Polar Whales were designated as fol-
lows:
NORTHERN RIGHT WHALE GROUNDS: Including those of the Bowhead or Polar Whale.
- On the Atlantic coast of North America, from Newfoundland south to the Bahama
Islands; on the North-western Coast of North America, which includes Behring Sea;
on the coast of Kamschatka ; the Okhotsk Sea ; the Japan Sea ; the Gulf of Tar-
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
215
Africa;
tary; through Behring Sea into the Arctic Ocean, and as far north as the icy bar-
rier, which, in some seasons, was found beyond Point Barrow; in Hudson's Bay ;
in Baffin's Bay; in Davis Straits ; on the coast of Greenland ; about Spitzbergen.
SOUTHERN Right WHALE GROUNDS. - On the Brazil Banks; on the coast of
on the coast of Patagonia ; around the Falkland Islands; the Tristan
Ground, which was around the island of Tristan d'Acunha in the South Atlantic;
around Gough’s Island ; around St. Paul's, the Crozet and Kerguélen islands; coast
of New Holland; south coast of Chile ; coast of New Zealand ; off the Cape of
Good Hope. Many of the whaling-grounds mentioned have long since been aban-
doned, as the animals pursued have been literally exterminated by the harpoon and
lance; and many of the names to the grounds are only given in the familiar appel-
lations of whalers, which embrace large tracts of ocean, sea, or gulf, within the
limits of which, in many cases, are found choice feeding - grounds where the animals
congregate. This is well-known to all careful observers, and is a fact that proves
the theories establishing the legitimate resorts of whales on purely scientific princi-
ples, in connection with the ocean currents, to be erroneous. These places can only
be known, or have been discovered, by practical observation ; and many a ship has
been filled with oil by cruising on a favorite spot, while others but a few leagues
distant, on the same general ground, may have met with indifferent success. Besides
the Cachalots and the Right Whales, two species of the rorquals were occasionally
pursued, which are known as the Humpback, and the California Gray or Devilfish ;
the former are found broadcast over the waters of the globe, but many have been
taken in some of the bays on the coasts of Africa, Chile and Peru, Central America
and California, about the Rosemary Islands, and at Tongataboo (one of the Friendly
group); and the latter were, and still are, taken on the coast of California, in the
Arctic Ocean, and Okhotsk Sea. With the Humpbacks and California Grays, may
be mentioned the Blackfish, which were sometimes taken on Sperm Whale grounds;
these, included with the Right Whales and Cachalots, were all the different species
of Cetaceans sought after by the whalers. *
* The great rorqual, commonly called the
Sulphurbottom, has been occasionally taken on
the coast of California of late years, but as yet
no really successful mode of capturing this, the
greatest of great whales, has been devised. The
manner of capturing those obtained on the coast,
is given with the description of the animal in
this work.
CHAPTER III.
SHIPS, OUTFITS, AND MANNER OF TAKING THE WHALE.
It is the general impression among those unacquainted, that a successful whal-
ing-voyage is inordinately remunerative; or rather, that a "full ship” insures great
profit. This, however, does not always follow, for the success of the American
Whale-fishery is due, first, to the economical but efficient manner in which the
ships were fitted out for their long and tedious voyages ; secondly, the perseverance
and good management of the captains and chief officers, and, when the voyage ter-
minated, the disposition of the "catch” to the best advantage.
There has been as great a revolution in the mode of killing whales during the
past twenty years, as there has been in the art of naval warfare ; were it not for
this, but few whalers would now be afloat; and the "well-'pointed” whale-ship of
the present day, in all her appliances, shows a corresponding improvement when
compared with the whaler of the seventeenth century. Relative to those olden-
time vessels, we quote the following from Macy's History of Nantucket :
“The ship
Beaver, of two hundred and forty tons, sailed from Nantucket on a whaling-voyage
to the Pacific Ocean, in the year 1791. The whole cost of said ship fitted for the
voyage, together with the cargo, amounted to $10,212. She carried seventeen men,
manning three boats of five men each, which left two, called ship-keepers, on board
the ship when the boats were out in pursuit of whales. The principal part of her
cargo, when fitted for sea, consisted of four hundred barrels iron - hooped casks (the
remainder, about fourteen hundred barrels, were wooden- hooped), forty barrels salt
provisions, three and a half tons of bread, thirty bushels of beans and peas, one
thousand pounds of rice, forty gallons of molasses, and twenty-four barrels of flour.
All the additional provisions during the voyage were two hundred pounds of bread.
The ship was seventeen months out, and was the first belonging to the island that
returned from the Pacific Ocean." The ships of the present time which engage in
whaling are from three hundred to five hundred tons, and when ready for a three
years' voyage, their estimated value may be set down as ranging from $30,000 to
$60,000. The variety and quantity of articles which go to make up the entire
( 216 )
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
217
outfit of a first-class whaler, would swell a list too lengthy to be mentioned here.*
But instead of the small boats, pulling four oars each, as did those of the Beaver,
the modern ship lowers four boats with five oars each to pull; and two or three
spare boats are taken on board as a reserve; and instead of the old style windlass,
which was "hove 'round" with handspikes, they now have the patent purchase.
The try-works, which in former times smoked the whole ship's company when
“boiling-out oil," are now so fitted with portable pipes, as to carry the smoke
clear of the decks ; in fact, there is hardly a fixture, or an implement, pertaining
to the "outfit," that has not been improved upon, which will be further described
in subsequent pages.
History is replete in portraying the toils and hazards of the whaleman; but
very little is said about the merchant who embarks his capital in this branch of
industry, which to no little extent is a game-pursuit of chance; and the irksome
detail of preparing a whale-ship for sea is only known to those who have had the
trial of it. The success of this particular branch of our national commerce may be
directly traced back to the persistent efforts of those sterling business gentlemen,
who have been, or still are, the leading merchants of the chief whaling-ports of the
United States. And first and pre-eminent among them were the Rotches of Nan-
tucket, † and the Russells and Rodmans of New Bedford. Yet there are scores of
* For a detailed list see Appendix.
† A reminiscence of Mr. William Rotch, who
was the great leader in the early days of Amer-
ican whaling commerce, may be interesting, as
relating to his business career both in England
and France. After the Revolution, Mr. Rotch,
found his losses to be very heavy on account of
the war, and the Nantucket-men experiencing
great difficulty in prosecuting whaling to any
profit, owing to the vexatious restrictions of En-
gland relative to the import of oil and whale-
bone, induced the distinguished pioneer whaling
merchant to visit England, hoping by direct per-
sonal communication with the British Government
that some arrangement might be brought about to
lessen the burdens of himself and his compeers.
Accordingly, he, with his son Benjamin, fitted
out the ship Maria- which was commanded by
one of the favorite captains, William Mooers;
and both father and son sailed from Nantucket,
for London, the 1st of July, 1785, where they
arrived on the 24th of the same month. Among
Mr. Rotch's influential friends in London was
Robert Barclay, and this gentleman introduced
him to Henry Beaufoy, a member of Parliament,
and that dignitary presented him to the Chancel-
lor of the Exchequer, the great imperial William
Pitt (then about twenty-seven years of age).
Mr. Pitt received him with great politeness, and
listened attentively to Mr. Rotch’s remarks, which
are reported to have been as follow :
"When the war commenced, we declared
against taking any part in it, and strenuously
adhered to this determination, thus placing our-
selves as
a neutral island. Nevertheless, you
have taken from us two hundred sail of vessels
-- valued at one million dollars-unjustly and
illegally! Had the war been founded on a gen-
eral declaration against America, we should have
been included, but it was predicated on a rebel-
MARINE MAMMALS.
28.
218
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
mercantile gentlemen, who followed in the same field, that have emulated them in
every point of thorough business transactions connected with the enterprise. Among
the most distinguished, we will mention the Howlands, Parkers, Robinsons, Bournes,
Swifts, Joneses, Allens, Woods, Wings, Knowleses, and Tuckers, of New Bedford ;
the Coffins, Starbucks, Sanfords, and Gardiners, of Nantucket; also, the names of
Williams, Barnes, Chapel, Havens, Perkins, and Smith, of New London; and the
leading men of Fairhaven - Church, Whitwell, Gibbs, Jenney. And Provincetown,
one of the oldest whaling-ports in New England, which is distinguished for its
numerous fleet of small vessels, has upon her record the Cooks and Nickersons.
Stonington speaks of her Williams and Trumbull; Edgartown of her Osborne and
Worth ; Greenport of her Ireland, Wells, and Carpenter; Warren of its Childs and
Johnson ; Westport of its Hicks and Wilcox. Sag Harbor had her Deerings,
Howells, Huntings, Sleights, and Browns; Mystic her Mallory, Randall, Smith, and
Ashley; and Mattapoisett her Barstow.
lion! consequently, none could have been in-
cluded in it but such as were in arms, or those
who were aiding such. We have done neither!
As a proof of our being without the reach of
your declaration, you sent commissioners to re-
store peace to America, in which, any province,
county, or town, that should make submission
and receive pardon, should be reinstated in its
former situation. As we had not offended, we
had no submission to make, nor pardon to ask,
and certainly it is very hard if we do not stand
on better ground than those who have offended;
consequently, we remained a part of your do-
minions until separated by the peace !' After a
long pause, Mr. Pitt replied : 'Undoubtedly you
are right, sir. Now, what can be done for you?,
'I answered him,' said Mr. Rotch, that in the
present situation of things, the principal part of
our inhabitants must leave the island. Some
would go into the country, and a part would
remain, and continue their legitimate business,
and I wish to continue the whale-fishery wher-
ever it can be pursued to advantage; therefore,
my chief business before this nation is, to as-
certain if the fishery is an object worth giving
such encouragement for a removal to England
as the subject deserves.' Thus our conversation
ended, and I withdrew with my friend Harry
Beaufoy.
"The subject was laid before the Privy Coun-
cil, as the secretary, Stephen Cotterel, sent me
a note, soon after this conversation, saying the
Council would sit at an early day, when they
would hear what I had to say. I waited for
that early day a month, and then I waited on
Secretary Cotterel to know what occasioned de-
lay? His answer was, that so much business
lay before the Council, that they had not time
or had not been able to attend to it, but would
soon. Thus I waited, not desiring to leave town
lest I should be called for. This state of things
continued for more than four months, during
which time I received several, what I called un-
meaning, court messages, such as “They were
sorry they were not able to send for me,' etc.,
etc. I then desired them to appoint some per-
son for me to confer with, that the matter might
be brought to a close. This was done, but un-
happily Lord Hawkesbury was the person.
A
greater enemy to America could not be found, I
believe, in that body, nor hardly in the nation.
I waited on him, and informed him what en-
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
219
We speak of the whaling merchants as being not of that class who anticipated
large profits and quick returns, but only a legitimate compensation for their labors,
and a fair interest upon the capital invested in the voyages, which required from
one to four years' time to accomplish; and often, though the expedition terminated
unsuccessfully, the ship was again sent out on another voyage, trusting that con-
tinued perseverance would bring about final success, which in many cases was fully
realized. There are over one thousand different articles required to complete the
outfit of a first-class whale - ship, many of them of trifling value to be sure, yet all
important to the success of the voyage. Then there are the officers and crew to
be shipped, “on a lay.” The latter may be without much difficulty obtained from
the shipping agents; but to select and engage a set of officers, of the highest char-
acter and undoubted skill in their profession, is not so easy a matter, and it is
but rarely accomplished. If half their number are really "crack whalemen,” the
voyage will usually be a successful one, if whales are found in sufficient numbers.
couragement I thought would induce a removal,
which I estimated at one hundred pounds ster-
ling transportation for a family of five persons,
and one hundred pounds sterling settlement,
say twenty thousand pounds sterling, for a hun-
dred families. Ah !' said he, that is a great
sum! and at this time, too, when we are all
endeavoring to encourage our own expeditions.'
I replied, “Thou mayst think it a great sum
for this nation to pay-I think two-thirds of it
a great sum for you to have taken from me as
an individual, unjustly and illegally!' We had
a long conversation, and I left him, to call again
in a few days, which I did. I then added to
my demand the liberty to bring thirty ships-
American ships for the fishery. 'O, no!' said
he, “that can not be; our carpenters must be
employed.' I mentioned that we had some ships
that were built before the war, those can sure-
ly be admitted?' 'No; they must be British-
built.' Will it be any advantage, if an emigra-
tion takes place, for the emigrants to bring
property with them?' I replied. Yes, certainly.'
'If they can invest their money in articles that
will be worth double here to what they are at
home, will that be any additional advantage to
this country?' 'Yes!' •Then why not bring
ships, when two of ours will not cost one of
yours?' 'O! we don't make mercantile calcu-
lations; 'tis seamen we want!' Then, surely,
two of our vessels will answer your purpose
better than one of yours, as they will make
double the number of seamen, which is the thing
aimed at?' He saw that he was in a dilemma,
out of which he could not reason himself, and
struggled through with some violence. He had
made his own nice calculations of eighty - seven
pounds ten shillings for transportation and set-
tlement of a family, and said he, 'I am about
a fishery bill, and want to come at something I
can insert !' My answer was, Thou canst go
on with thy fishery bill. Thy offer is no object
to me!' 'Well, Mr. Rotch, you will call on me
again in two or three days?' 'I see no neces-
sity for it. But I desire you would.' 'If thou
desirest it, perhaps I may call.' However, he
let me rest but one day, before he sent for me
again. He had the same story over again, but
I told him it was unnecessary to enter again
upon the subject. I then informed him that I
had heard a rumor that Nantucket merchants
had agreed to furnish France with a quantity of
220
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
;
When the ship is nearly in readiness for her voyage, she leaves the wharf, and is
anchored in the offing, to complete her necessary requirements. When the last
article is taken in, the crew and officers embark, the pilot goes on board, and the
managing agent informs the captain that the vessel is ready to sail ; he gives him
his general instructions for the voyage, shakes him by the hand, and wishes him a
“full ship” and a safe return; and he (the agent) feels relieved to get the expe-
dition temporarily off his hands; but not so the captain, for he keenly feels his
responsibility. A long, anxious, and tedious voyage is before him; if successful, he
may return to be amply rewarded for his toils ; if unfortunate, he meets with
reproach and an empty purse. But there is no time for dallying, and he acknowl-
edges the compliments of his employer, bids him a hurried good-by, steps into the
waiting boat, and repairs on board. The pilot gives his orders, the ship speeds
away under a press of canvas, and at length she is plunging and reeling on the
broad expanse of waters. The pilot is now the only connecting link between them
oil. He stepped to his bureau and took out a and made his remarks--accordingly. The propo-
file of papers, from which he pretended to read
sals were :
an entire contradiction of the report, though I "1st. A full and free enjoyment of religion
was satisfied there was not a line there on the according to the principles of the people called
subject. I said it was only a vague report that Quakers.'
I heard, and I can not vouch for the truth of “To which he annexed, 'Accordé l'
it, but we are like drowning men, catching at "2d. An entire exemption from military reg-
every straw that passes by. Therefore, I am ulations of every kind.'
determined to go to France and see what it is. “To this he annexed the following just re-
If there be any such contract, sufficient to retain marks : 'As they are all peaceable people and
us at Nantucket, neither you, nor any other na meddle not with the quarrels of princes, neither
tion can have us; and if it is insufficient, I shall internal nor external, this proposition may be
endeavor to enlarge it.' 'Ah!' said he, Quak- granted.'
ers go to France?' 'Yes, but with regret!' I “The other proposition related to the regula-
then parted with Lord Hawkesbury for the last tion of the whale-fishery.
time.
“We next proceeded to the several ministers,
“I immediately embarked with my son Ben five in number, at Versailles. First, to Calonne,
jamin, for Dunkirk, where I drew up my pro Comptroller of Finance. We gave our reasons
posals and sent them to Paris, not wishing to for not taking off our hats on being introduced
proceed farther until I found the disposition of to them all. Calonne replied: 'I care nothing
the French Court. They sent for us to come for your hats, if your hearts are right.' Next,
immediately. We lost no time in answering the we went to the aged Vergennes, Minister of For-
summons, and proceeded at once to Paris. The eign Affairs; then to the Marshal de Castro,
Master of Requests, who was the proper minis Minister of Marine; then to the Prince of Rubec,
ter to receive our proposals and make his re Generalissimo of Flanders ; at last, to the In-
marks on the several articles, had examined them tendant of Flanders - who all agreed to my pro-
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
221
and the shore. He gives the word to "haul aback," bids a hasty farewell, jumps
into his boat, and returns to his secure and quiet haven. Quickly the order is
given on board to "fill away,” and before the fresh, fair wind the floating fragment
speeds with swelling sails, and soon the receding land, teeming with blissful life
and plenty, sinks from view beneath the undulating waves.
Sea life is such a change from that on shore, one fully realizes the transition ;
and the monotony, as well as the thrilling incidents associated with a sailor's
career, have been so often and so vividly portrayed, it would be useless to attempt
here to add any new features; hence, we shall only give a somewhat terse account
of the present manner of conducting a whaling voyage. The company of a four-
boat whale-ship number at least thirty-five persons, viz.: a captain, four mates, a
cooper, a carpenter, four boat-steerers, a cook, and a steward, with twenty-two
men and boys. When the vessel is making a passage, the officers and crew are
divided into two watches, with the exception of the captain, and in some instances
gone there?'
posals. We then returned to Paris, and were
to visit Versailles to take leave according to the
etiquette of the Court.
“Before we set out, one of the ministers ask-
ed us if we did not wish to visit the palace.
We excused ourselves, as we did not think curi-
osity would justify us, if our plain way would
give offense. While we remained in Paris, we
received a note from the minister, saying he had
spoken to the King, 'who gave full liberty to
the Nantucket Friends (they avoided the name
of Quaker !' when they found it was given in
reproach) to visit the palace, both its public and
private apartments, when he was out—which
happened almost every day.' To view the pri-
vate apartments was a great privilege not often
granted, except to persons of note. But unfa-
vorably for us, the King did not happen to be
out on the day we went to take our leave, which
was a disappointment; but we went through the
public apartments and into the Chapel! When
we hesitated at the latter, the officer insisted on
our entering in our own way, showing us ev-
erything remarkable, and pointing out the place
occupied by the royal family in time of mass, etc.
“We now took leave, and returned to Lon-
don. After I was gone to France, Lord Hawkes-
bury became alarmed, and inquired of Harry
Beaufoy, and asked him if I had gone to France.
He replied in the affirmative. Why has he
'For what you or any other man
would have gone; you would not make him an
offer worthy his acceptance. He will now try
what can be done in France !'
“Alexander Champion wrote to me (I sup-
pose at Lord Hawkesbury's request) to inform
me that he had made provision for us in his
fishery bill, and inserted liberty for us to bring
in forty ships instead of thirty! which I had
demanded, he having forgotten the number; but
it was too late. This letter was brought to our
apartments, and we understood the bearer to
inquire if a Dutch gentleman resided there. He
was answered in the negative, and my letter
was lodged in a small letter-office, always an
appendage to a large hotel. The very evening
it was brought to me, we left Paris.
“We now returned to London. I was soon
sent for by George Rose, who was one of Pitt's
secretaries. He inquired if I had contracted
with France ? I told him, “No! I did not
come to make any contract! Propositions were
222
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
the chief mate, who stand no watch, but are up at any time of night, if occasion
require, and throughout the day. The two watches are designated as the starboard
and port, the second mate being officer of the starboard, and the third mate of the
port watch. There being four boats, there are as many mates, or “boat-headers,”
one of which has charge, or, as it is termed, heads each boat, except when the
captain chooses to go in his own boat, which is the starboard one; at such time,
the fourth mate acts as boat-steerer. The chief mate's is the port boat, the second
mate's the waist boat, and the third mate's the bow boat. All the boats are sus-
pended from tall, stout wooden davits, with two cranes under each for the keel to
rest upon ; the last mentioned three usually hoist on the port side of the ship, and
the captain's on the opposite quarter. Besides the boat-header, there is a boat-
steerer and four men, who complete the crew. The boat-steerers are shipped as
such;
but the men for each boat are selected from the hands, having due regard
to their physical strength, activity, and intelligence, and the remainder of the
the extent of my business.' 'You then are at
liberty to agree with us, and I am authorized
by Mr. Pitt to tell you, that you may make
your own terms !' I told him it was too late!
'I made very moderate proposals to you, but
could not obtain anything worth my notice. I
went to France, and sent forward my proposals,
which were doubly advantageous to us, com-
pared with what I offered your government.
They considered them a very short time, and
on my arrival in Paris, were ready to act. I
had separate interviews with all the Ministers
of State necessary to the subject, who all agreed
to, and granted my demands.' He still insisted
that I was not bound to France, and I should
make my own terms. But all in vain; the time
had passed over! Lord Litchfield also sent for
me on the same subject, but was soon convinced
that it was too late. The minority came to me
for materials to attack Lord Hawkesbury, but I
refused to supply them.”
It was at one of these interviews that Mr.
Pitt, or his majesty George III, asked Mr. Rotch
what equivalent would be given in return for all
these favors now sought from his government.
“I am going to give England and his majesty
the services of our young men from my native
place--the island of Nantucket.” And fully was
this assertion verified in subsequent years. Nan-
tucket-men went to England, and her great su-
premacy in whaling was carried forward by these
promised whalers; and for years she held sway
through all difficulties in this branch of commerce
in Europe. The island was well represented in
London by more than five hundred ship-masters,
the last of whom (Wm. Swain, Esq.) died in 1868,
upwards of ninety-two years of age.
Mr. Rotch's son Benjamin was left in Dunkirk
as a partner of his son-in-law, Samuel Rodman,
who resided at Nantucket. Ships were soon aft-
er fitted out from Nantucket, on distant whaling
voyages, manned and officered by Nantucket-men,
who, after filling their vessels, repaired to Dun-
kirk, where their oil and whalebone found a
ready market for France and Holland. The busi-
ness was pursued with great energy by Mr. Rotch
and his associates. All their ships came from
America with the necessary outfits for their voy.
ages, as they could not be easily obtained in
France. Many artisans immediately connected
with the business left Nantucket with their fami.
lies to take up their residence in Dunkirk.
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
223
company are termed "ship-keepers.” Due care is taken, as far as practicable,
that two boats' crews shall be in the same watch, so that in the event of meeting
with whales on the passage to the cruising-grounds, they may be immediately
lowered in pursuit. But usually a few days pass, after getting to sea, before a
perfect organization of all hands can be obtained; for a portion of them being
green, are generally so debilitated or entirely prostrated by sea-sickness, and a
majority of the old sailors so demoralized by their last excessive potations of “part-
ing drinks,” that little can be accomplished under such circumstances. But it is
not long before Jack gets a sufficiency of substantial food, instead of being soaked
with the vile stimulants of a sailor boarding-house, and the work of "fitting ship”
for whaling begins in good earnest. The hold is “broken out," and casks contain-
ing lines, cutting-gear, harpoons, lances, etc., are unheaded, and their contents laid
under contribution as may be required. The cutting-gear, which consists of heavy
tackles, pendants, etc., is to be overhauled or fitted anew, and the implements
belonging to the try-works must be looked after ; but the first and most important
duty is the proper fitting of the boats. It may be a matter of surprise, even to
an old whaleman, when he sees before him the number of things required to fit
out a modern whale- boat, which is only twenty-eight or thirty feet in length, and
Mr. Rotch with his wife and children remained
in France through all the troublesome times of the
Revolution of 1792, and suffered much in his busi-
ness, which had become extensive in the fishery
and in the importation of other oils into France.
Mr. Rotch had seen that a war between England
and France was inevitable. With these views, he
began early in 1793 to make arrangements for
leaving France and returning to Nantucket. Go-
ing over to London on his way home, he found
that two of his ships had already been captured
full of oil, and condemned by the British Govern-
ment as French prizes; but being present with the
authorities, he was able to recover them again
through his English friends. “My going to
France," said he, “to pursue the whale-fishery,
so disappointed Lord Hawkesbury that he under-
took to be avenged upon me for his own follies;
and, I have no doubt, gave directions to his cruis-
ers to take any of my ships that they might meet
going to France. For, when the ship Ospray
was captured by the king's ship, the officer sent
on board to examine her papers, said to the cap-
tain: You will take this vessel in, sir; she be-
longs to Mr. Rotch.'”
Mr. Rotch, with many other Americans, em-
barked secretly from Dunkirk in a ship bound for
America, but he and his family were landed in
England, where, he remarked, "I had the comfort
of receiving these ships of mine four months after
I left France.”
On the 24th of July, 1794, Mr. Rotch, with his
family, embarked in the ship Barklay, and after
& passage of sixty-one days, arrived at Boston.
They soon proceeded to Nantucket, where they
remained one year, after which they removed to
New Bedford. Here he died May 28th, 1828.
Through a long and eventful life of usefulness,
he was greatly beloved and respected, and was
deeply lamented when he departed for the spir-
itual world, at the advanced age of ninety-four
years.
224
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
..
six feet wide. It is sharp at both ends, with flaring sides, and is of a model that
insures great swiftness, as well as the qualities of an excellent sea - boat. At the
bow (or "head,” as whalers usually term it) is a groove, in which is placed a
metal sheave, over which the line runs; near the end and upper edges of the
groove, a slender pin, of tough wood or whalebone, passes across through holes
above the line, to prevent it from flying out when running. This groove is called
the “chocks." About three feet from the stern is the " “clumsy-cleet," a stout
thwart with a rounded notch on the after side, in which the officer or boat-steerer
braces himself by one leg against the violent motion of the boat, caused by a
rough sea, or the efforts of the whale while being “worked upon.” The space
between the clumsy-cleet and the chocks is covered with a sort of deck, six inches
below the gunwales, and is called the “box,” or “box of the boat." Five thwarts,
or seats, for the accommodation of the rowers, are placed at proper distances apart,
between the clumsy-cleet and stern sheets; and opposite each rowlock, near the
bottom of the boat, is a well- fastened cleet, to receive the end or handle of the
oar, which is called a "peak-cleet;” and when fast to a whale, or when the crew
are resting, the end of the oar is placed in the hole of this cleet, while the
heavy portion still rests in the rowlock, thereby elevating the blade far above the
water. About four feet of the stern is decked over, through the forward part of
which, a little to one side, is placed the loggerhead, shaped like a post with a
large head, which projects six or eight inches above the gunwales, and by this log-
gerhead the line is controlled when the boat is fast to the object of pursuit. The
equipment belonging to a modern whale- boat consists of one mast and yard, or
sprit, one to three sails (but usually a jib and mainsail), five pulling-oars, one
steering-oar, five paddles, five rowlocks, five harpoons, one or two line- tubs (into
which the line is coiled), three hand - lances, three short-warps, one boat- spade,
three lance-warps, one boat - warp, one boat- hatchet, two boat-knives, one boat - waif,
one boat - compass, one boat-hook, one drag, one grapnel, one boat-anchor,* one
sweeping-line, lead, buoy, etc., one boat - keg, one boat - bucket, one piggin, one
lantern-keg (containing flint, steel, box of tinder, lantern, candles, bread, tobacco,
and pipes), one boat-crotch, one tub-oar crotch, half a dozen chock - pins, a roll
* The full equipment as here enumerated, is
modified to suit the particular branch of whaling
pursued, as for instance, in deep-sea whaling
there is no use for the anchor, and in sperm
whaling the sweeping-line, buoy, etc., are not
required; while in California Gray whaling in
the bays or lagoons, the anchor is indispensable,
and the grapnel, sweeping-line, lead, and buoy,
are of much service. But many other articles
are left out or supplied to a limited extent, so
that the boat may be as light as possible, and
work easily and quickly in shallow water.
Plate XXIV

3
5
0
TOMINE
27.
35
34
36
33
1. O ar. 2. Boat-waif. 3. Boat-hook. 4. Paddle, 5. Boat-sails. 6, Sweeping-line-
buoy. 7. Lead to Sweeping-line. 8. Chock-pin. 9. Short-warp. 10. Boat -piggin,
11. Boat-keg. 12. Lantern-key. 13. Sweeping-line. 14. Boat-hatchet, 15. Lance-warp. 31
16. Boat-grapnel, 17 Boat-knife.18. Fog-horn. 19. Line-tub. 20. Boat-bucket, 21. Drag.
22. Nipper. 23. Boat-crotch, 24. Boat-compass, 25.Boat-anchor, 26, Row-lock, 27. Tu b-
oar-crotch, 28. Hand-lance. 29. One-flued-harpoon, 30.Toggle-harpoon. 31, Buat-spade.
32,2 33 Greeners-Gun-harpoon, 34. Greener's Harpoon-gun, 35,Bomb-lance
36. Bombiarice Guru
28
60
29
C.M.Scammon.del.
Lith. Britron & Rey.S.F.
IMPLEMENTS BELONGING TO A WHALE BOAT.
i, ,'
ܗ ܀
.ܐ
'1 ; ܝ' ܙܨܢ܂ |.
ܝ
;]] ܂ *
] ',
=
;\ I
6
ܘܗ
. 'I.. ;'
ܩ
ܣܗ
: 7 ܐ ;I' ;
܂ ܝ : ܐܢܐ ;
: . ' ,f .).' ܢ ; ? t܆ ܂ ܃ [) ܐ : ;
܂
;-Ii«'
ܐ ، ܀ ܨܶܐܢ ,: '
܃ ܃ ܃
1 : ;
ܬ: :܃ ܊ ܃ ܂
1: 'r .. . ,11{ ;,
ܣܕ
ܕ
'( .ܐ
܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ ܃ ܃
ܙ
} . .Iܝܢ ܕ
ܢܟܬ ܗܝ
ܕ
ܘ ܘܗ
ܐܢ ܕܝܢܐ
ܙ
ܒܗ
܀
ܢ
{ { { {
;. ; !, ܐ ܢ ܀
ܬܐ
܂܂ ' ܙ ?; ; ;; ;; .tu
°?
ܕܦܚܗ
RP
-1
1 ܢ . .|
ܕܨjlik?" . ;) ' ' 1.:
3
k'
܀ ܝܚ
f :
3 ;"; : I
ii ،،،،
܂܂ ܐ ܐ܂
ܗ ܗܗܙ
܀ ܗ
fr) ,
ܐ;
ܕ | | '». .
li :i ,
i tobie
܀ 3
ܙ
ܗ
، ܃ '_ܢ $. ;
' ° ,
;)' ;;?" _; ܂
ܙܕ
ܐ ܝ ܐܨܐ
ܗܡܤ
܀
ܪ
܃ ܂ ܃ ;: :inf
ܙ
ܗ
1
, T"ܢ
for
-- -
.*
ܪ
ܕܣ
ܬ
. ܗ
y
ܢܚܐ
ܗ ܗܗ
ܗܗܗ
ܘܬܐ
ܘܬܐ
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
225
of canvas, a paper of tacks, two nippers, to which may be added a bomb-gun and
four bomb- lances; in all, forty-eight articles, and at least eighty-two pieces. The
oars, sails, and paddles, of course, are to propel the boat, yet we may say that the
two last mentioned are of much more importance now than formerly, by reason of
the objects of pursuit becoming more wary. The rowlocks confine and support the
oars in their proper places when rowing; the harpoons with the line are the instru-
ments used to fasten the boat to the whale; the line-tub holds the line; the hand-
lances are used in killing the whale after being harpooned ; the lance - warp, when
connected to the lance - pole, is hitched to the clumsy-cleet to prevent its loss when
darted at the whale; the boat-warp is the painter to the boat; the short - warps
are to connect the second harpoon to the main line when a second iron is thrown
into the animal; the boat-spade is for cutting the cords about the "small" of the
victim, or that portion of the body which connects with the flukes, crippling it,
thereby retarding its progress through the water ; the boat-hatchet and knives are
to cut the line should it get foul and endanger the boat, when fast; the boat-
waif is a small flag, used as a signal, or placed in a dead whale to indicate its
whereabouts. The boat-hook is one of those indispensable implements, which is
put to a variety of uses, but especially to hook up a whale's fin or stray lines, or
to hold the boat in position ; and the boat-compass is used to find the true course
to any object not visible from the boat. The "drag" is for “bending on" to the
line to assist in impeding the whale when running, or is fastened to the line when
compelled to let it go from the boat. With the grapnel, the dead animal's flukes,
or its head, are hauled up, in order to cut a hole and reeve the tow-rope, or to
hook
up lines which can not be reached with the boat-hook ; and the
sweeping-
line, lead, and buoy, are used for getting the fin and fluke chains on to the whale
when alongside the ship, or otherwise. The boat-keg is for carrying a supply
of fresh water. The boat- bucket and piggin are for bailing the boat. The lantern-
keg is for holding in reserve a small supply of bread, a lantern, and fire-works,
in case the boat should be caught out at night, that the crew may be able to set
a light to indicate to the ship their whereabouts, and in extreme necessity to have
a small supply of food, with the luxury of a quid of tobacco or a smoke of a pipe.
The boat-crotch is to rest the end of the iron or lance - pole on; it ships in a hole
through or on the side of the gunwale. The tub-oar crotch is to receive the tub-
oar and raise it above the line - tub, when the boat is fast to a whale; the chock-
pins are to keep the whale-line in the chock. The canvas and tacks are to cover
holes which may be staved in the boat; the nippers are several layers of canvas
stitched together, and are used for holding on to the line when it is swiftly run-
MARINE MAMMALS. - 29.
226
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
swivel-gun.
ning out. The bomb-gun and lances are for killing the whale at a greater distance
than could be done with the hand - lance; it does good execution within a range
of twenty-five yards. Greener's harpoon-gun is also used by whalers to some
extent, and quite successfully when the sea is smooth. It is similar to a small
The barrel is three feet long, with a bore of one inch and a half;
when stocked and complete, it weighs seventy-five pounds. The harpoon, four and
a half feet long, is projected with considerable accuracy to any distance under
eighty-four yards. It is mounted on the bow of the boat, and was formerly fired
by the boat-steerer, who pulls the “harpooner oar.” This was the old Scotch
plan, the gun being first used by the Scotch whalers; but at the present time it
is more successfully managed by the officer in charge of the boat, who takes the
boat-steerer's place for the time being.
The whale- boat being properly equipped, the crew take their places as follows:
the officer in charge (or boat- header) in the stern, who steers the boat with the
steering-oar, which is usually twenty-two feet long; the boat-steerer, who pulls the
oar farthest forward, which is called the harpooner - oar, its length being usually
seventeen feet, and who also darts the harpoon, and after the boat is fast changes
ends with the boat - header and steers the boat, while the latter attends to killing
the whale. The next man is called the "bowman,” with an oar seventeen and a
half feet in length, and besides his general duties he attends to the line when
“ bowing-on.” The next man is the "midship - oarsman," whose oar is eighteen
feet in length; then comes the "tub- oarsman," with an oar the same length as
that of the bowman, whose special duty is to see that the line runs clear from the
tub. The last is the “after- oarsman,” who is the lightest of the crew, and pulls
a correspondingly light oar; his particular duties are to attend the line as it is
hauled in and coiled in the stern-sheets, or when it is "paid out,” and to bail the
boat. The whole outfit of the boat has two general and rather indefinite names,
“boat-gear" and "craft;" but the word "craft” applies particularly to the weapons
immediately used in the capture.
When the boat is lowered for the chase, the line (which is nicely coiled in
the tub or tubs, as the case may be) is placed between the two after thwarts.
The men being seated in their proper places, the line from the tub is taken aft
around the loggerhead, then forward over the oars, and a few fathoms of it are
coiled in the box of the boat; it is then termed a “box - warp.” Two harpoons
are placed at the head of the boat, the staves or poles of which rest in the “boat-
crotch.” The end of the box - warp is made fast to the "first iron ;" the “second
iron” is connected with the main line by a bowline in the end of a short-warp
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
227
which is bent on to the second iron. The lances
are in their places at the head of the boat, on the
starboard side ; the boat-spade on the side opposite;
the boat-hatchet and a knife in their proper places
in the head of the boat, and the other knife ready
at the stern.
When pursuit is made, the whale is approached
in the most cautious manner, to avoid "gallying”
it. If necessary, the oars are used; but in calm
weather the paddles are resorted to, as pulling with
the oars is adopted only when sails or paddles can
not be made available. When nearly within dart-
ing distance, which is about three fathoms, the
order is given to the boat-steerer to “stand up."
At this command he instantly springs to his feet,
and seizing the harpoon, darts it into the whale ;
if opportunity offers, the second iron is also thrown
before the animal gets out of reach. When the
harpoons are dartedword is given to "stern all,"
and the oarsmen make every effort to force the
boat astern, in order to be well clear of the animal
in its painful convulsions from the first wounds re-
ceived. Notwithstanding every precaution is taken,
it is by no means an unusual occurrence to have
the boat staved by the whale when harpooned.
Should the boat be much injured, the line is cut,
or a drag or buoy is bent on to the end of it, and
The boat nearest the whale usually
continues the pursuit; the next boat pulls for the
one that has become disabled, and rescues the
crew.
When struck, the whale may attempt to escape
by running; if so, every exertion is made by the
boats' crew to haul up to the animal so as to shoot
a bomb into it, or work upon it with a hand-lance;
or if the creature descends to the depths below,
which is called "sounding,” every effort is made to
DIAGRAM B, SHOWING INSIDE OF BOMB-LANCE.
BOMB-LANCE.
PIERCE'S HARPOON-BOMB-LANCE-GUN.
all is let go.
228
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
check the movement by holding on to the line, or by slowly slacking it. In this
maneuvre the boat is occasionally hauled bow under water. Sometimes all the line
is taken out almost instantly, when it is cut to prevent the boat from being taken
down, and the whale escapes. At other times the animal will “bring to;" that is,
it will stop and roll from side to side, or thrash the water with its ponderous
flukes and fins, when the boat may be pulled within bomb-shot, and the creature
dispatched by one or more of these missiles.
Hand - lancing for the purpose of killing a whale is now going rapidly out
of practice, and the same may be said relative to boat-spades, and “loose irons"
to stop a whale from running. By the use of “Pierce's bomb-lance,'
"* the Bow-
head or Polar Whale is now frequently captured in the Arctic Ocean, close to the
* It is a matter of surprise that so ingenious at B, as seen in diagram B, at the end of the
an invention for killing whales has no appropri- cylinder (which is connected with the point of
ate name, the whole apparatus being only known the lance by a screw); this nipple (at B) unites
as “Pierce's bomb-lance;" hence, to facilitate with a time-fuse that leads to the powder with
description, we will give it the provisional des which the bomb is charged. One end of a small
ignation of Pierce's Harpoon-bomb-lance Gun. line is “seized” to the socket of the gun, then
The weapon, which is of brass, is fourteen inches
“stopped” along the iron-pole with twine — the
long in the barrel, and the square portion in other end being fast to the boat, in order that
closing the lock, together with the socket which the instrument may be recovered after being
receives the iron-pole or harpoon-staff, increases thrown and discharged. The whale-line is also
its linear dimensions to about one and a half stopped along the pole, or it is secured by
feet.
On one side, and near the muzzle of the beckets. The manner of using the gun, is to
gun, are two lugs with holes, which receive the dart it by hand from the boat, and when the
end of a harpoon, to which the whale- line is harpoon penetrates the whale beyond the line
attached. On the other side is a steel rod bent K, the steel rod (which holds the trigger to the
in the form of a staple, at the socket end of lock) comes in contact, and is pushed back,
the gun, which passes through tubes attached thereby springing the hammer against a percus-
to the socket and lock-case, as represented at sion-cap which rests upon a nipple in the breech
G and H (in the illustration upon the preceding of the gun, by means of which it is fired off,
page), then, passing through a hole in the
sending the bomb-lance into the whale; and at
lug at I, it extends past the muzzle about ten the same time the concussion brings a plunger
inches. Upon the upper part of the rod, at J, (which is held temporarily by a wooden pin
rests the trigger to the lock.
The whole appa-
within the head of the lance, as seen at A)
ratus, exclusive of the lines and iron - pole, upon the cap at B, the flash of which, commu-
weighs about ten pounds. This weapon is load nicating with the time - fuse imbedded in the
ed with a light charge of powder, and projects, powder contained in the cylinder, causes the
when discharged, a bomb-lance sixteen inches bomb to explode, usually killing the whale in-
long, and seven -eighths of an inch in diameter. stantly; and the harpoon being already fastened
The lance is loaded with powder, which is ig in the body of the animal, it may be easily
nited by a percussion-cap placed upon a nipple secured.
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
229
icy barrier, as that weapon shoots an explosive missile into the animal at the same
time the harpoon is fastened.
Mention has been made in the preceding pages of the manner of standing
watches, and the general routine of duty on board the ship when making a passage ;
but it is only when they arrive on the cruising-ground that systematic whaling
really begins. The ship's company, or that portion of it who “stand a watch," is
divided into what are called "boat's-crew watches,” each watch remaining on deck
its allotted time between dark and daylight, and during the day one-half of the
ship’s company alternate (which is called “watch and watch”), unless whaling
is going on, when all hands are engaged. A day's routine of a whale-ship’s duty,
when on whaling-ground, begins at a very early hour. All hands are called in
time to get breakfast by sunrise, after which all required sail is set, the decks are
washed off, and the lookouts are stationed at the mast - heads. If a four-boat ship,
an officer and a boat-steerer stand at the main - topgallant cross- trees, two men at
the fore- topgallant mast - head, and one at the mizzen-topgallant mast - head, who are
relieved every two hours, as also are the men at the wheel, who steer the ship.
Should no whales be seen through the day, at sunset all hands are called to shorten
sail, when the light sails are furled, the mainsail taken in, the topsails reefed, and
the watch is set for the night. But should whales be "raised,” the hours of rest
are governed entirely by the amount of necessary work to be performed. From
sun to sun the boats may be engaged in the exciting chase; and the few ship-
keepers left on board strain every muscle to work the vessel and make the required
signals. This is no easy matter when the wind is fresh and the vessel is being
continually maneuvered, as the pursuing boats change their positions. An endless
variety of signals are used in the whaling - fleet in connection with the capture of a
whale, more especially when there is a large fleet cruising on the same ground, for
then the signals from each ship are kept private, in order to gain advantage in the
pursuit.
The ship-keeper in charge of the vessel may be the captain. At present few
whaling-masters make a practice of going in their boats; while formerly it was the
custom for the captain to be first in the water when lowering for whales. In
such cases, the person left in charge of the ship was either chosen from among the
crew, or he was shipped for that particular duty. In any event, his services are
important, for the safety of the boats or the capture of the whale may depend
upon his vigilance and good management. The boats being down, the object of
pursuit can be seen but a comparatively short distance, while from the ship's
mast-head an extensive view is obtained; hence, when the boats are away, the
230
MALS
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
person in charge of the vessel takes his station at the main - topgallant cross-trees,
where a sharp watch is kept, both on the whales and boats. When the whales are
upon the surface of the water, a flag is usually hoisted at the main - topgallant
mast - head; and when they go down, the flag is lowered ; and to indicate their
bearing from the ship, the following signals are made with the sails: “Whales on
the weather bow," weather clew of the fore- topsail or fore- topgallantsail is hauled
up; "Whales on the lee bow," lee clews of the same sails are taken up;
"Whales
on the weather beam,” weather clew of main - topsail or topgallantsail up, and gen-
erally with a waif* pointed to windward ; “Whales on the lee beam,” lee clew of
MAST-HEAD WAIF.
the same sails up; “Whales ahead," jib down; “Whales between the boats," flags
at the fore and main mast- heads ; “Come on board,” flag at the peak ; “Boat
stove," flag at the fore and mizzen mast - heads. In sperm - whaling during light
weather, the crews sometimes go a long distance from the vessel, at least ten or
twelve miles ; but this is not the regular practice. In right-whaling, however, it
is expected that the ship and boats will keep near enough together to communicate
by signals, unless enveloped in fog, rain, or snow, which occurs in high latitudes,
where this species of balæna are chiefly sought; and the moment a bank of fog
obscures the vessel, the rule is to “haul aback," if practicable, or in other words,
to keep the ship as near the same position as possible where she was last seen by
the people in the boats; who, having previously taken the bearings, find their way
back by the aid of the compass, and the sounding of horns, or the firing of guns
from the vessel ; or, if the boats are caught out at night, lights are set, and some-
times a fire is made on the “back arches” of the try-works, by which means the
whole ship is illuminated, when every spar glistens in relief upon a dark, misty
background, with the sails flapping against the masts as the ship rolls and tumbles
over the sea, or the swelling canvas yields to the dank blasts that are sweeping
by in fitful moaning sounds, as if to render the scene more ghastly. From the
time a whale is discovered until the capture is made, and the animal cut in, the
scene is one of laborious excitement. If the whale is first seen spouting, the man
* The mast-head waif is a light pole six or covered with canvas; it is sometimes calleci a
eight feet long, with a hoop fastened at the end “yonder" by English whalers.
THE
AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
231
-
D
1
DIAGRAM SHOWING THE MANNER OF CUTTING - IN THE BOWHEAD AND Right W HAL
HALE,
232
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
on the lookout calls out, “There she blows;" if breaching, he calls out, "There she
breaches;” if turning flukes, he reports, “There goes flukes." Instantly the officer
of the deck, or the captain, inquires, "Where away?” when he is immediately
answered, “Right ahead,” or “On the beam,” or “Two points on the beam," or
quarter, as the case may be. The next question is, “How far off ?” which is quickly
answered. If near by, should it be calm weather, all hands are called, the ship is
hauled aback, if necessary, and the boats are immediately dropped into the water
for the chase; if a long distance off, and a good breeze is blowing, all sail is set
to reach the locality of the object of pursuit before lowering. The capture being
made (should there be a commanding breeze), the ship is run alongside the whale ;
or if it be calm, the animal is towed to the vessel. Then the fluke-chain or fluke-
rope is fastened (as at A, in the diagram showing the manner of cutting-in the
C
BLUBBER - HOOK AND FIN-CHAIN.
Bowhead and Right Whale), and is then hauled in through the fluke-chain chock,
which is at the bow, and well secured to the sampson- post, the head of the animal
being toward the stern. The cutting - tackles, which comprise two heavy purchases,
are then sent aloft, and shackled to chain or rope pendants at the mainmast-
head, where they are placed in position by rope guys from the foremast-head, and
the falls of the cutting - tackles are then taken forward to the windlass. The cut-
ting-stage, which is so constructed as to admit of the officers standing upon it
immediately over the carcass when using the cutting-spades, is put over the side
and lowered into position ; meanwhile, the rest of the cutting-gear is being got in
readiness, which consists of toggles, spades, boarding and leaning knives, gaffs,
pikes, blubber - hooks, head-straps, fin-chain, throat-toggle, head-axes, etc. If the
prize be a Right Whale, or Bowhead, the fin-chain is put on the fin, as at B (in
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
233
Plate XXV.
HEAD SPADE
CUTTING SPADE
BONE SPADE
GAFF
BLUBBER PIKE
BOARDING KNIFE
MARINE MAMMALS. - 30.
SHEATH
C.M.SCAMMON DEL
ZINCO! X.KOC. SA.
IMPLEMENTS USED IN CUTTING IN A WHALE.
234
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
diagram of Bowhead); one of the cutting-tackles is then hooked or shackled into
the ring at H; the fall to the tackle is then taken to the windlass and hove taut,
which brings the whale fairly on its side; then, with a cutting - spade, a hole is
cut in the root of the lip at F, and a scarf is cut along the lower jaw - bone from
E to D. A blubber - hook being shackled to the second cutting-tackle, it is over-
coceed
OOOOOO
200
HEAD-STRAP.
hauled down, and hooked into the hole in the lip, and the tackle is then hauled
taut by means of the windlass, and a man with a cutting-spade cuts the lip from
the jaw-bone as it is being hoisted up; and when coming to the end of the jaw,
near D. it is cut off and hove in on deck. A scarf is then cut through the blub-
TOGGLE.
THROAT-CHAIN TOGGLE.
ber, across one side of the head forward of the eye,
around under the fin, and across the body; and the
fin is then raised by the first cutting-tackle, which
is the starting-point of the first blanket-piece; the
“knuckle-joint” being disconnected from the shoulder-
blade with the "piece" from the body by cutting the
tendons, which connect between the flesh and the blubber. This is called "leaning
up;" and when the piece is hove up, so as to bring the whale's back up, the
“head-strap” is rove through the spout-holes between the skull-bone and the
blubber, as seen in the diagram at GG; then with an axe the skull is cut through
to the spout-holes, on one side. This being done, the blanket-piece is raised still
higher, and the other cutting-tackle is hooked to the head-strap and hove taut;
when the skull-bone is cut on the other side, and the head with the baleen
attached is hove up and lowered on deck. As soon as the piece comes high
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
235
enough to fasten the tackle under the fin, the order is given to “board,” which is
done in the following manner: The second tackle, which took in the head, now
being free and again ready for use, a boat-steerer or officer cuts a hole in the
blanket-piece well down to the plank-sheer, and through this hole the strap of the
tackle is thrust, and a heavy wooden glut, called a toggle, is passed through the
thimble of the block-strap (as seen in the accompanying figure), which secures it
firmly to the blanket-piece and completes the “board.” Then the order is given to
"take to and heave away," when the fall of the tackle is
taken around the windlass and hauled taut, the men at
the windlass - brakes heave upon the tackle until the sec-
ond blanket- piece is raised two feet or more above the
plank-sheer, and the first is cut off and lowered down
the main - hatch into the blubber - room. The second
blanket-piece is then hove up, until the whale again lies
on its side, when the other lip is taken in by the same
process. The carcass is now turned back down, by heav-
ing up on the piece, and in doing this, the throat-blub-
ber is cut clear from that of the trunk; and with a
spade, a hole is made through both the throat and
tongue, when the throat-chain toggle is inserted
at C, as seen in the diagram. The tackle being
hooked to the ring of the chain, the throat is cut
from the flesh that adheres to it as it is drawn up,
and when hoisted high enough, it is lowered on
deck, or into the blubber-room. Then the body.
blubber is cut in spiral folds-as represented in
the diagram by diagonal lines—and rolled off
down to the dotted lines behind the vent, where
CUTTING - TACKLE TOGGLED TO THE the whole flesh of the carcass is cut through; and
the backbone being unjointed, the main portion
of the mutilated remains of the animal floats clear of the ship, or it sinks to the
depths beneath. The residue of the fatty covering of that portion of the creature
known as the small, is soon stripped. The flukes are cut off close to the fluke.
chain, and the chain hauled in, which completes the modus operandi of cutting-in a
whalebone whale. The animal having been cut in, the head, being on deck, is
next cleared away. This is done by stripping the blubber from the skull-bone;
then, with spades and axes, the baleen or bone is cut, with the gum, from the
BLANKET - PIECE.
236
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
jaw, in sections of several layers, and stowed below, where it remains until an
opportunity occurs, in fine weather, to again take it on deck, when the slabs are
separated and the gum scraped off; after which they are washed and dried, and
when packed in bundles, are ready for market.
But the cutting -in of a Sperm Whale differs materially from that of the
whalebone whale, although it would appear that the latter was forced into nearly
every conceivable posture, during the systematic process of mutilation in order to
obtain its covering; yet, in addition, the lifeless form of the Sperm Whale is
made to assume a nearly vertical attitude during the course of flensing, as it
was wont to do when filled with animation. The first procedure after the animal
is fastened to the ship by the fluke-chain and head - rope, is to cut a hole through
the blubber, between the eye and fin, at A, as seen in the accompanying outline
sketch; then, after cutting the scarfs on each side and around the end of the first
blanket-piece, a blubber - hook, attached to one of the cutting-tackles, is inserted
into the hole at A, and the piece raised by means of the tackle until the whale is
rolled on its side; then the line of separation between the upper jaw and junk is
cut, as from L to C, and if a large whale, the line of separation is cut between
the junk and case, as from B to E, and a cut is made across the root of the case
from E to F; a scarf is also made around the root of the lower jaw, from near
the corner of the mouth to G. A chain-strap is then put on the jaw near H, and
hooked or shackled to the second cutting - tackle, and raised by that purchase ;
while the other tackle, attached to the piece, is slackened off if need be, so as to
let the whale roll upon its back; when, by means of the tackle attached, and by
cutting away the tongue and the adhering flesh, the jaw is wrenched from its
socket, and placed on deck. This being accomplished, the first tackle, which is
attached to the piece, is hove up by means of the windlass until the whale is
rolled over to its opposite side, when the lines of separation are cut to correspond
to those made opposite ; holes are then morticed through the head close to the
upper jaw-bone near I, at the end of the junk near J, and at the root of the case
near K, and through these holes straps are rove, and lines are made fast to those
of the junk and case. The second cutting-tackle is then hooked in the strap which
is around the upper jaw at I; the Auke-chain is slackened off, and the first tackle
fastened to the piece is lowered, when all hands heave on the head - tackle, forcing
the whale down again, and thus bringing the creature's head up, and the body
nearly to a vertical position. The officers upon the cutting-stage, with their keen
spades, cut' away between the bones and junk from L to C; and the enormous
weight of the whole fatty mass of the head hanging down, opens the gash between
-
THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
237
n
CASE
B
C
JUNK
WHITEHORSE
putline OF A Sperm Whale,
HALE, SHOWING THE MANNER OF Cutting - in.
238
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
one mass.
it and the skull-bone; then, cutting across the end of the junk and root of the
case, from E to F, completes the process of cutting off the head, which is tempo-
farily made fast to the ship's quarter. The fluke-chain is then hauled in again,
and the blubber is rolled from the body in the same manner as that of a baleen
whale, until coming to the region of the small, when it is unjointed just behind
the vent, and the remaining posterior portion of the animal is hoisted on board in
The head, as it is termed, is then hauled to the gangway, and one of
the tackles is hooked into the junk-strap at J, and by means of this cutting-
tackle purchase, the head is taken in whole, if the whale is under forty barrels;
but if over that size, it is raised sufficiently out of the water to cut the junk from
the case, when it is hoisted on deck. The case is then secured by one or both
tackles, hove
up to the plank - sheer, and an opening is made at its root, of a
suitable size to admit the case - bucket, when the oil is bailed out, or the whole
case is hove in on deck before being opened, which finishes the cutting-in of a
Sperm Whale.
The entire blubber being now on board, preparations are immediately made for
trying-out the oil. The blanket - pieces are cut into horse - pieces, which are about
fifteen or eighteen inches long, and six or eight inches in breadth and thickness.
Any flesh termed "lean," or "fat-lean," that may adhere to the horse-pieces, is cut
off with leaning-knives; and being thus prepared, the blubber is transported in
strap- tubs to the mincing - horse — where the
ordinary two-handled knife is used -- or else
is taken to the mincing machine, where it is
cut crosswise into slices a quarter of an inch
to a half inch in thickness; then it goes into a large mincing-tub, which completes
its preparation for boiling. From the mincing-tub it is pitched into the try-pots
with the blubber- fork, where the oil is extracted by boiling. During this process,
the minced blubber is frequently stirred, to prevent it from burning and settling
to the bottom of the pots; and when the scraps are sufficiently browned to show
that the oil is well tried out, they are skimmed off with the skimmer into a recep-
tacle called the scrap-hopper, and, after the oil drains from them, they furnish an
abundant supply of fuel for the fires.
From the pots, the oil is bailed with the bailer into a large copper tank
called a cooler ; from the cooler, it passes through a cock into the deck - pot; and
from the deck-pot the casks are filled. When a cask is full, it is rolled off and
headed up, and in rough weather it is lashed to the ship's rail for greater secu-
rity. The oil, after passing through the cooler and deck-pot, is still very hot, if
MINCING KNIFE.
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
239
the blubber is being tried out rapidly; and for this reason, the casks, when first
filled, require the constant attention of the cooper, as the hoops have to be fre-
quently driven, to prevent leakage. The oil taken from the case of the Sperm
Whale is sometimes put into casks without boiling; but, usually, it is carefully
scalded with the junk and a portion of the hump, and when put into casks, it
is known as head, or head - matter. After the oil becomes cool, it is run through
a hose into empty casks, which have been prepared with great care, and securely
stowed in the hold, or they are lowered and stowed after being filled on deck.
The whole "fare” having been stowed down, the decks are cleaned up, and
with lye (which is leeched from cinders and ashes taken from the furnaces of the
try-works), the ship is thoroughly washed, as well as the soiled clothing of the
1
3
5
1. BLUBBER - FORK.
2. STIRRING - POLE.
3. SKIMMER.
4. BAILER.
5. FIRE-PIKE.
crew, when everything fore and aft again wears an aspect of order and cleanliness.
Notwithstanding the great labor involved in obtaining the oil from a whale after
its capture, ships have often been filled in a very short space of time. Informer
years, it was no unusual occurrence for both sperm and right whalers to get
“blubber-logged,” which is the expression used when as many whales are caught
at one time as can possibly be cut in and tried out; and at the present day, in
the Arctic Ocean, whales are so scarce, that, in order to secure a good catch, if
opportunity presents, as it may the last of the season, the whole between- decks of
the ship is frequently filled with blubber before much boiling is done. At such
times, it is necessary to drive the work, and often eighty or one hundred barrels
of oil have been tried out and stowed down in twenty-four hours, and in a few
weeks many an empty ship has been filled, or has secured a good catch.
CHAPTER IV.
AMERICAN WHALING COMMERCE.
It has ever been a subject of interest to us to contemplate the advancement
of commerce by sea, from the time of the barbarian sailors up to the present cent-
ury, when every ocean is teeming with magnificent models of naval architecture,
which are the pride of maritime nations. Yet, is there any sea-faring pursuit
recorded in history which has displayed a more legitimate, energetic, and intelligent
character than the whale- fishery ? To be cast
upon
the
ocean, far from land, in
an open boat, is considered a perilous situation ; but what may it be regarded,
when, in a slight, frail hoy, like the whale - boat, we find the primitive whale-
men in the same situation, attacking, with rude weapons, these monsters of the deep
upon their own feeding and breeding grounds ? Moreover, these adventurous men
were successful in making their captures, and, after patient toil by day and night,
brought their colossal prizes over the water to their village shores. With such
impetuous daring did they pursue their precarious calling, that but few years elapsed
before the whales of value were driven from the borders into mid-ocean, where
they were pursued in mere shallops of thirty to fifty tons, into which the crews
were crowded ; and when a sufficient number of captures had been made to
supply a full fare of blubber, the pigmy vessels returned to the home shores,
apparently transformed into a mass of slimy whale-fat, above which peered the
weather-worn sails. And, as years passed on, in still larger ships, they pressed
forward, contending with every danger incident to the life of a sailor, upon
unknown waters and in unhealthy climes, until a voyage around the world became
as legitimate in the course of their professional lives, as was the launching of boats
through the surf to pursue the game near shore, over a hundred years before.
As the fishery increased, several of the larger whaling-ports became distin-
guished for pursuing some particular branch of this commerce. Nantucket was
noted for its sperm whalers, who performed long voyages, maintained excellent
discipline, and their ships, being generally confined to the temperate or tropical
latitudes during their cruises, were examples of cleanliness and good management.
( 240 ]
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
241
Provincetown has ever been foremost with her numerous fleet of plum-puddingers,
or,
in whaling phrase, "plum-pu-dn-rs,” which are small vessels, employed on
short voyages in the Atlantic Ocean. New Londoners have been, and still
are, renowned for
prosecuting the Right Whale fishery, in the rough waters
of high latitudes, and pursuing the Sea Elephant about the forbidding shores of
Kerguelen's Land, the Crozets, and Hurd's Islands, situated far south in the Indian
Ocean ; and also in contending with the northern ice and snow of Davis Strait
and Hudson's Bay, in search of the Bowhead and the White Whale. Sag Harbor
and Stonington likewise employed many of their ships in the northern and south-
ern Right Whale fishery; and New Bedford, in the course of her absorption of the
greater portion of the whaling commerce of the United States, prosecuted the
enterprise in its various branches all over the ocean world, by availing herself of
the services of many of the best whaling - masters and officers from other quarters,
thus combining the highest energy and skill for the successful prosecution of the
fishery. But, with all the judicious management of the merchants, and the unpar-
alleled vigor and tact put forth by the seamen, our whale-fishery, as previously
stated, has been for years on the decline; and the first famous whaling-port of
America - Nantucket - which once boasted of her hundred fine ships, has now
disposed of her last whaler— the R. L. Barstow—at that port of recruit, Payta,
which is as familiar to all sperm - whalemen as that of Tumbez, where they went
for supplies of sweet potatoes, after obtaining their onions at the former place.
Sag Harbor, which in 1850 had twenty-three whalers, the majority of which were
of large class, now has only two small brigs, which are employed on the Atlantic.
Stonington, Mystic, Greenport, Warren, Cold Spring, Seppican, Wareham, Fall
River, Falmouth, Holmes' Hole, Providence, Newport, Lynn, Quincy, Mattapoisett,
Yarmouth, and Somerset, altogether mustered, in 1850, a fleet of ninety-two sails;
but, according to the Whalemen's Shipping List, published at New Bedford, February
4th, 1873, there is not a single vessel engaged in whaling from any one of those
ports. Of the forty-eight vessels comprising the New London fleet of 1850, there
are left on the list of February 4th, 1873, only twenty. Fairhaven, in 1850, had
forty-six whaling-vessels, of which only five are retained in the business. Prov-
incetown's squadron of Atlantic cruisers, in 1850, numbered sixteen vessels, which
tonnaged in the aggregate 1,871 tons; it had in February, 1873, nineteen vessels,
whose capacity amounted to 1,561 tons. Edgartown, in 1850, had five large
whalers in the Pacific, and one brig in the Atlantic; in 1873, only three remained,
two of which were in port; and Westport, which had a squadron of fifteen vessels
in 1850, now (1873.) has only eight. The great fleet of New Bedford, in 1850, num-
.
MARINE MAMMALS. - 31.
242
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-IV ESTERN COAST.
bered two hundred and thirty - seven, which were principally whalers of the larger
class. It now has (1873) one hundred and twenty-nine. San Francisco, in 1853,
had ten vessels in the business, but the present year there is but one legitimate
whaling-craft sailing from that port. It may be regarded as a singular coinci-
dence, that Boston and New York, which repeatedly, in former years, attempted,
but failed, to successfully establish the whaling business at either port, have
now (February 4th, 1873) six small vessels in the Atlantic and one in the Pacific
whale- fishery. Marion has three small schooners, Beverly one brig, Dartmouth
two ships, San Francisco one bark, which make up the whole American whaling-
fleet of the present day, consisting of twenty-six ships, one hundred and twenty-
five barks, twelve brigs, and thirty-eight schooners—in all, 47,378 tons.
The following prices have been taken from the Merchants' Magazine, and the
Whalemen's Shipping List of November, 1840; also from J. Ross Browne's work:
AVERAGE PRICES or OIL (PER GALLON) AND BONE (PER POUND), FROM 1835 to 1872, INCLUSIVE.
Year.
Sperm Oil.
Whale Oil.
Bone.
Year.
Sperm Oil. Whale Oil.
Bone.
1835..
$0 84
$0 36
$0 24
1854...
88
44
25
1855..
1836...
1837..
1838...
82
33
22
1856..
85
32
19
1857.
1839.
1 00
35
19
1858.
1859..,
1840..
1 02
30
18
$1 487 $0 585 $0 397
1 77 71 457
1 62 791 58
1 283 737 963
1 21 54 921
1 367
483 85
1 413 493 807
1 317
441
66
1 42 59} 82
1 61 954
1 53
1 78 1 28 1 80
1 00
19
1841..
1842..
1843...
94
193
73
23
1860..
1861...
1862....
1863..
1864.
1844..
30.1
314
334
341
361
323
331
36
63
1845.
903
88
353
40
335
1846..
1865...
2 25
1 45
1 71
1847...
34
1866...
2 55
1 21
1 37
31
1867...
2 331
1 92
734
82
40
1868...
877
1 003
1 09
1 20
1 277
1 233
1 243
1 171
1 021
124
49
1869...
1848..
1849...
1850..
1851...
1852...
1853.
1 78
314
343
34!
502
341
1 018
677
1870...
454
683
583
85
1 351
1 35
1 457
60
1871....
1872.
70
652
1 281
Following, we give a tabular statement of the condition of the fishery for
thirty - eight years, beginning in 1835 and ending in 1872, inclusive :
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
243
Years,
Number of
Ships and
Barks.
Number No. Schrs.
of
and
Brigs. Sloops.
Aggregate
Tonnage.
Barrels
of
Sperm 01).
Barrels
of
Whale Oil.
Pounds
of
Bone,
Value of Imports.
1835.
483
8
9
488
9
10
1836.
1837.
490
9
10
1838.
495
25
30
1839.
498
100
78
Not Rendered.
1840.
510
40
9
1841.
535
41
9
1842.
542
43
9
1843.
578
40
9
1844.
595
41
11
1845.
643
35
18
23
1846.
678
35
1847.
670
31
22
1848.
621
22
16
1849.
581
21
12
1850.
510
20
13
1851.
502
24
27
1852.
558
27
35
1853.
599
30
32
145,120
150,269
150,969
159,723
169,983
171,196
191,767
195,833
198,754
200,147
218,655
233,189
230,218
210,663
196,110
171,484
171,971
193,990
206,286
208,399
199,842
199,141
204,209
203,148
195,115
176,842
158,746
125,465
103,888
88,754
80,053
71,869
80,383
82,304
82,768
80,885
76,712
52,701
172,683
132,130
181,724
131,856
150,000
157,791
159,304
165,637
166,985
139,594
157,917
95,217
120,753
107,976
100,944
92,892
99,591
78,872
103,077
73,696
72,649
80,941
78,440
81,941
91,408
73,708
68,932
55,641
65,055
64,372
33,242
36,663
43,433
47,174
47,936
55,183
41,534
44,881
120,649
131,176
219,138
227,016
230,000
207,908
207,348
161,041
206,727
262,047
272,730
207,493
313,150
280,656
248,492
200,608
328,483
84,211
260,114
319,837
184,015
197,890
230,941
182,223
190,411
140,005
133,737
100,478
62,974
71,863
76,238
74,302
89,289
65,575
85,011
72,691
75,152
31,395
965,192 $ 6,168,997 92
1,028,773 5,733,536 21
1,753,104 7,357,553 31
1,783,848 6,157,037 52
7,544,250 00
2,000,000 9,775,062 60
2,000,000 7,684,087 70
1,600,000 6,829,788 90
2,000,000 6,497,587 64
2,532,445 6,523,384 61
3,167,142 9,128,235 67
2,276,939 5,553,817 52
3,341,680 7,807,865 20
2,003,600 8,905,621 04
2,281,100 7,321,160 69
2,869,200 7,743,880 98
3,966,500 10,042,536 94
1,259,900 5,720,455 23
5,652,300 10,730,637 94
3,445,200 10,710,748 80
2,707,500 9,391,182 98
2,592,700 10,589,844 74
2,058,900 10,491,597 28
1,540,600 7,643,997 07
1,923,850 8,467,393 41
1,337,650 6,555,700 65
1,038,450 3,233,393 15
763,500 5,001,688 49
488,750 5,936,507 17
760,450 7,875,662 56
619,350
6,897,285 15
920,375 7,037,88% 68
1,001,397 6,294,663 82
900,850 5,470,256 61
603,603 6,196,947 54
708,335 4,497,300 10
600,655 3,807,071 65
193,742 2,950,288 80
1854.
602
28
38
1855.
584
20
34
1856.
585
21
29
1857.
593
22
40
49
1858.
587
18
1859.
561
19
45
1860.
508
19
42
1861.
459
14
41
1862.
372
10
41
1863.
301
10
42
1864.
258
os
43
1865.
226
7
43
1866.
199
8
56
1867.
222
10
80
1868.
223
17
89
1869.
223
25
88
1870,
218
22
81
1871.
216
18
54
1872.
172
12
34
38
17,685
907
1,351 6,037,551 3,671,772 6,553,014 66,687,580 $272,274,916 27
244
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
The average number of vessels employed annually for these years was five
hundred and twenty-four, aggregating 158,883 tons, and the amount of oil taken
yearly was a fraction over 96,625 barrels of sperm, and 172,448 barrels of whale ;
The number of Sperm Whales required to produce this amount of sperm oil (allow-
ing them to average twenty-five barrels each) would be 3,865; add to this ten
per cent. for whales mortally wounded, lost after capture, etc., brings the number
up to 4,253, or thereabouts. The black whales annually destroyed, which includes
Right Whales, Bowheads, California Grays, and Humpbacks, allowing them to average
sixty barrels each, would make the number 2,875 ; add to this twenty per cent.
for whales lost, increases it to 3,450 ; so that the number of Sperm and black
whales annually destroyed was 7,703.
destroyed was 7,703. According to this estimate, during the
thirty-eight years, there were no less than 292,714 whales captured or destroyed
by the American whaler's lance.
The history of many of the old whale-ships is of peculiar commercial inter-
est, large numbers of them having performed scores of voyages in the merchant
service, or served as vessels of war, before being transformed into cruisers for oil
and bone. Among them was the ship Maria. This vessel was built at Pembroke
(now called Hanson), Mass., during the year 1782, for a privateer, but was pur-
chased by the celebrated whaling merchant, William Rotch. It was one of the
first vessels to display the American flag in the Thames after the War of Indepen-
dence,* being at that period employed as a freighter. The Maria concluded
her first whaling-voyage September 26th, 1775, and from that time continued in
the business for seventy years, during which service she performed twenty-seven
voyages. She sailed from New Bedford upon her last whaling-voyage under our
flag on the 29th of September, 1859; the oil taken in all these expeditions, includ-
ing eight hundred barrels on her final voyage, being 24,419 barrels of sperm, and
one hundred and thirty-four barrels of whale oil. The vessel was commanded and
officered by Nantucket-men while owned by Mr. Rotch ; and after his decease, in
1828,+ she passed into the hands of his descendants. On her last, unfinished
voyage mentioned above, she was sold at Talcahuano, Chile, February, 1863, being
then eighty-one years old. At this epoch in her history, the venerable craft
changed her name and nationality, being christened the Maria Pacheco, and, instead
* Preble, in his History of the American Flag
(page 215), states that “The honor of dis-
playing our flag in England for the first time
does not, however, rest with any vessel, if a
printed representation of it can be considered.
In that case, to John Singleton Copley, of
Boston, the American painter, and the father
of the late Lord Lyndhurst, must be assigned
the honor."
† Vide Sanford's Letters.
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
245
;
of the “stars and stripes,” the banner of Chile-red, white and blue, with its star,
emblems of republican power and prowess — was raised at her peak, when she
again resumed the work of a common carrier. But, in 1866, she was fitted for a
whaling-voyage ; and it is asserted by one authority, that the Maria Pacheco found-
ered at sea in 1870 ; and another record maintains that she sunk at her anchors,
the same year, in the roadstead of Payta, at the advanced age of eighty-eight.
This memorable old vessel was one of those models which combined great capacity
with fast sailing, for her time: her length being "eighty-six feet; breadth, twenty-
three feet and one inch; depth, eleven feet six and a half inches; and measure-
ment, two hundred and two and twenty-eight ninety-fifths tons."
In 1820, a whale-ship was built at Plymouth, Mass., named the Mayflower.
This vessel made several voyages from that port, after which she was sold to a
firm in New Bedford ; and in April, 1849, she was among the gold-fleet which
sailed for California, making a passage of one hundred and sixty-five days, enter-
ing the Golden Gate September 13th, and soon after rested on the mud-flat in front
of the then tented city of San Francisco. Here she was dismantled, mutilated, and
turned into a store-ship, and her cabin was transformed into convenient quarters
for a gentleman and his wife, where they made it a pleasant sub-aquatic residence.
The vessel was of that ancient build which presented a swelled stern and drooping
bow, with her masts standing plumb or pitching forward ; and the question was
frequently asked by passing gold-miners, on their way to the "diggings,” if she
was really the ship that brought over the Pilgrims? It is said, too, by good
authority, that pieces of timber were taken from her sides, as souvenirs, by several
California adventurers, who believed her to be the old Pilgrim ship of 1620.
After being battered as a receptacle of merchandise for several years, the capacious
port which had been cut in her side was closed up, and she was again refitted for
a whaling-cruise ; but the expedition proved to be unsuccessful, and she again
returned through the Golden Gate, with a broken voyage and in a leaky condition.
Soon after, however, she was turned into a lumber-carrier, and literally pumped
her
way
back and forth between Puget Sound and San Francisco; until, becoming
80 shattered that she could no longer efficiently perform sea voyages, was made to
transport lumber across the Strait of Juan de Fuca, to Victoria, in the time of the
Frazer River gold fever; and, after a changing career of forty years, returned to
San Francisco, where she was dismantled for the last time, and her hull broken up.
The question is frequently asked, What has become of the large number of
whale-ships which were but a few years ago engaged in the fishery? In answer,
we will state, that the scattered wrecks of many are found in every quarter of the
246
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
globe; while others have been sold into the merchant service, or broken up at
home. San Francisco Bay and Sacramento River were the last ports many of the
old ships made. The Charleston Bar swallowed
up the stone fleet, which was
chiefly made up of old whalers; and the cruisers, during the Rebellion, destroyed
many valuable vessels while at sea ; and, last of all, the ice of the Arctic made a
fell swoop upon the northern fleet, in the fall of 1871.
CHAPTER V.
CALIFORNIA SHORE-WHALING.
Although brief mention has been made in the Natural History department of
this work, relative to the shore-whaling along the coasts of Upper and Lower
California, yet it may be well to devote a chapter especially to this fishery.
California shore - whaling was commenced at Monterey, in the year 1851, by
Captain Davenport, formerly a whaling- master of much experience and enterprise.
The whales were pursued in boats from the shore, and when captured were towed
to the beach and flensed, much in the same manner, doubtless, as it had been
done by our New England whalers more than one hundred and fifty years ago.
At the point where the enormous carcass was stripped of its fat, arose the
"whaling station," where try-pots were set in rude furnaces, formed of rocks and
clay, and capacious vats were made of planks, to receive the blubber. Large
mincing-tubs, with mincing - horses and mincing-knives, cutting-spades, ladles,
bailers, skimmers, pikes, and gaffs, with other whaling implements, surrounded the
try-works; and near by, a low structure, covered with brush - wood, constituted
the store-house for the oil. A light shanty, with four apartments, served the
purpose of wash-room, drying-room, store-room, and cooper's shop; and a sort of
capstans, termed "crabs,” were used in lieu of the ship’s windlass, whereby the
falls to the heavy cutting- tackles were hove-in, when fastened to the blanket-
piece, which served to roll the massive forms of the captured animals on the beach
during the process of flensing.
From this experiment of local whaling sprung up a system of shore or coast
whaling, which has been prosecuted for over twenty years, and which now extends
from Half Moon Bay (latitude 37° 30'), on the north, to Point Abanda (lati-
tude 32° 20'), in Lower California. Àt the present time, there are eleven
whaling parties scattered along this belt of coast, located at Half Moon Bay,
Pigeon Point, Monterey Bay (two), Carmel Bay, San Simeon, San Luis Obispo,
Goleta, Portuguese Bend (near San Pedro), San Diego, and Point Abanda. The
organization of each party is nearly on the same plan as that of the whale-ship's
( 247 )
248
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
officers and crew—all being paid a certain share, or "lay,” which corresponds to
the position or individual services rendered by each member. A "whaling com-
pany," as it is termed, consists of one captain, one mate, a cooper, two boat-
steerers, and eleven men ; from these, two whale- boats are provided with crews
of six men each, leaving four hands on shore, who take their turn at the lookout
station, to watch for whales, and attend to boiling out the blubber when a whale
is caught. The stock of the company consists of boats, whaling implements, and
wbaling-gear, which is divided into sixteen equal shares, and the "lay” of each
member is the same. The captain and mate, however, are paid a bonus of two or
three hundred dollars for the term of engagement, which is one year, and they
are also exempt from all expenses of the company.
The whaling year begins on the first of April, this being about the time that
the California Gray Whales have all passed toward the Arctic Ocean, and the
Humpback Whales begin their northern passage. The cruising limits of the local
whalers extend from near the shore - line to ten miles at sea. At dawn of day,
the boats may be seen, careening under a press of sail, or propelled over the
undulating ground-swell by the long, measured strokes of oars, until they reach
the usual whaling-ground, where the day is passed plying to and fro, unless the
objects of pursuit are met with. Each boat is furnished with Greener's
harpoon-gun, mounted at the bow, besides the bomb-gun in general use, which
imparts to them more of a military appearance than the usual aspect of a whaling-
craft. Generally, whales are first seen from the boats; but occasionally they are
discovered by the man on watch at the station, who signals to the boats by means
of a flag elevated upon a pole, with which he runs toward the quarter where the
whales are seen; or a series of signals are made from a tall flag-staff.
The cetaceous animals frequenting the coast, having been so long and con-
stantly pursued, are exceedingly wild and difficult to approach ; and were it not
for the utility of Greener's gun, the coast fishery would be abandoned, it being
now next to impossible to "strike" with the hand - harpoon. At the present time,
if the whale can be approached within thirty yards, it is considered to be in reach
of the gun-harpoon. When the gunner fires, if he hits his game, the next effort
made is to haul up near enough to shoot a bomb - lance into a vital part, which,
if it explodes, completes the capture; but, if the first bomb fails, the second or
third one does the fatal work. The prize is then towed to the station ; and if it
be night, it is secured to one of the buoys placed for the purpose, a little way
from the surf, where it remains until daylight, or until such time as it is wanted, to
be stripped of its blubber. The whales generally taken by the shore parties are
THE
249
AMERICAN
IVH ALE - FISHERY.

ZINCOX VAN DE CASTEELE.S.F
Why
GE
WHALE BOAT WITH GREENER'S GUN MOUNTED.
C.M. SCAMMON.DEL.
MARINE MAMMALS.-32.
250
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
Humpbacks, and California Grays; but occasionally a Right Whale, a Finback, or a
Sulphurbottom is captured.
The localities of several of the stations are quite picturesque. Some of them
are nearly concealed from seaward view, being inside some rocky reef, or behind a
jagged point, with its outlying rocks, upon which each successive wave dashes its
foam, as if forbidding the approach of ship or boat. The one which most inter-
ested us is half- hidden in a little nook, on the southern border of the Bay of
Carmel, just south of Point Pinos. Scattered around the foot-hills, which come to
the water's edge, are the neatly whitewashed cabins of the whalers, nearly all of
whom are Portuguese, from the Azores or Western Islands of the Atlantic. They
have their families with them, and keep a pig, sheep, goat, or cow, prowling
around the premises; these, with a small garden - patch, yielding principally corn
and pumpkins, make up the general picture of the hamlet, which is a paradise to
the thrifty clan in comparison with the homes of their childhood. It is a pleasant
retreat from the rough voyages experienced on board the whale-ship. The sur-
rounding natural scenery is broken into majestic spurs and peaks, like their own
native isles, with the valley of the Rio Carmel a little beyond, expanded into
landscape loveliness.
Under a precipitous bluff, close to the water's edge, is the station; where,
upon a stone- laid quay, is erected the whole establishment for cutting-in and
trying-out the blubber of the whales. Instead of rolling them upon the
beach, as is usually done, the cutting- tackles are suspended from an elevated beam,
whereby the carcass is rolled over in the water—when undergoing the process of
flensing—in a manner similar to that alongside a ship. Near by are the try-
works, sending forth volumes of thick, black smoke from the scrap-fire under the
steaming cauldrons of boiling oil. A little to one side is the primitive store-
house, covered with cypress boughs. Boats are hanging from davits, some resting on
the quay, while others, fully equipped, swing at their moorings in the bay. Sea-
ward, on the crest of a cone-shaped hill, stands the signal-pole of the lookout
station, Add to this the cutting at the shapeless and half-putrid mass of a muti-
lated whale, together with the men shouting and heaving on the capstans, the
screaming of gulls and other sea - fowl, mingled with the noise of the surf about
the shores, and we have a picture of the general life at a California coast-whaling
station.
The aggregate amount of oil taken by the several shore parties, since their
first establishment, may be estimated at not less than 95,600 barrels ; of this
amount, 75,600 barrels have been obtained from the California Gray Whales, and
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
251
20,000 barrels from the Humpbacks, Finbacks, and Sulphurbottoms. The value of
the oil may be placed at about thirteen dollars a barrel, which would give a gross
amount of $1,242,800, or an annual product for twenty-two years of $56,490. To
obtain this oil, not less than 2,160 California Grays, and eight hundred Humpbacks
and other whalebone whales, were robbed of their fatty coverings. If we add to this
one-fifth for the number of whales that escaped their pursuers, although mortally
wounded, or were lost after being killed either by sinking in deep water or
through stress of weather, we shall swell the catalogue to 3,552. To this add one-
eighth for unborn young, and the whole number of animals destroyed would be
3,996, or about one hundred and eighty-one annually. This may be regarded as
a low estimate ; doubtless the number of these creatures destroyed every year
by the enterprising California whalemen far exceeds the above estimate. But
this peculiar branch of whaling is rapidly dying out, owing to the scarcity of
the animals which now visit the coast; and even these have become exceedingly
difficult to approach.
CHAPTER VI.
LIFE AND CHARACTERISTICS OF AMERICAN WIIALEMEN.
In taking a general view of whaling life, we find it replete with incidents of
daring adventure, hardship, and deprivation. The vessels first employed in deep-
sea whaling were so contracted, that no degree of comfort could be afforded to
their crews, who, by sheer, ambitious hardihood, maintained existence on board
during their short voyages. As the pursuit became extended, requiring larger
vessels, the barks and brigs of the fishers were much improved, while the
absence from their native shores was more prolonged. At this period a system
for fitting out vessels for long voyages was inaugurated, as well as the establish-
ment of effective discipline on board, for which well - regulated whale-ships have
always been noted; and the whale-fishery steadily advanced under the judicious
management of those able and systematic business gentlemen, whose names have
long since become as familiar in the remotest parts of the ocean world, as the
ships named in their honor. The broad expanse of the Atlantic soon became too
limited a field for the vast enterprise, and in
consequence of this, the fourth
epoch in the fishery was inaugurated, when still larger vessels were sent out to
search the nearly unknown waters of the Pacific and Indian Oceans. These vessels
doubled Capes Horn and Good Hope, in their wanderings, which were so pro-
tracted, under the most favorable auspices, that the green hands," many of
whom never had snuffed the ocean's breezes until afloat on board a whaler,
returned to their New England or Western homes, transformed into seamen and
whalemen.
The Cape Horn and Indian Ocean voyages were at first of comparatively short
duration ;, but as the pursuit was followed to more distant seas, three years or
more passed away before the return of these cruisers.* During this long absence,
* The sperm - whaling voyages were the most
protracted and tedious. Some forty years ago,
an incident transpired on board a sperm whale-
ship, while cruising about the equator, in the
Pacific, which was amusingly illustrative of the
tact and energy of her master in managing
affairs, after wearing away nearly a whole sea-
son with indifferent success. Near the close of
( 252 )
-
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
253
an occasional vessel would bring them news from home. Really, the only legiti-
mate means of communication, in early times, was by the outward - bound and
homeward - bound ships ;* and as a natural result, a system of transmitting letters
was faithfully carried out. Speaking and visiting between whale-ships was a uni-
versal practice; and a custom of signaling and “gamming” was established, to pre-
vent, as far as possible, any detriment to the voyage. A ship desiring to speak
with another, out of ordinary signal distance, would haul up her mainsail ; and the
vessel with the wind free would bear up and run down to the new - comer on the
ground, who, being hauled aback, awaited the approach of the visitor.
There is,
usually, considerable formality observed in these casual communications, especially
if between strangers. The captain of the ship making the signal to speak, hails
first, and asks whatever questions he may desire ; after which, the master of the
other vessel does likewise, and mutual invitations are exchanged to visit. If either
accept, the rule is for the chief mate of the ship visited by a captain, to
return, in the same boat, on a visit to his executive officer. If whales are raised
during the time of gamming, the vessels generally “mate,” in order that all
shall have a motive in working together effectively; and, if there has been no
previous agreement to meet the exigency, a flag is hoisted at the peak of the
the cruise, the supply of fresh water had be “It was wonderful to observe what a 'per-
come alarmingly short for the allotted time suader' against too much drinking was the
before returning to port. This was a source of exercise of ‘shinning' to the royal truck twice,
regret, with both officers and men, as it was for a pot of water.” And, by this means, the
hoped they could fill the ship before the season supply held out; and before the end of the
terminated; and the captain would not have cruise, they improved the timely opportunity of
listened for a moment to the proposition to put filling every empty cask with oil, and trimmed
the crew on a short allowance, had it been sug their sails for the homeward passage.
gested. He, however, ordered a drinking-cup * Post Office Bay, upon the north - western
made, so as to be easily secured to, or detached side of Charles Island, took its name from the
from, the royal-mast head. Having placed it custom established by the whalers (before it
in its exalted position, all hands were mustered, was inhabited), of depositing letters in a box,
and given to understand that they would have placed upon a post for the purpose; "and
their regular allowance of tea and coffee served homeward - bound ships,” says Findlay, in his
night and morning; but when anyone (includ South Pacific Directory, "examined the directions,
ing himself) desired to quench his thirst during taking with them all which they might have the
the day, he must go aloft, get the drinking means of forwarding." A similar place of de-
cup, bring it on deck, obtain and drink the
posit for letters was established on the island
water (without spilling & drop), then take it of Juan Fernandez. We have heard, too, that
back and place it at the mast-head again. The a letter-box was at one time posted on the
narrator of this episode jocosely remarked that, island of New Zealand.
254
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
captain's ship, which familiar sign (especially on Sperm Whale ground) is readily
understood ; and when the boats are lowered for the chase, the visiting captain
takes charge of the mate's boat of the ship he is on board, and the executive officer
visiting heads the captain's boat. If successful in capturing whales, the oil they
obtain is divided. It was rarely, however, that a distant signal was made for the
sole purpose of gamming; but the desire for letters from mothers, fathers, wives,
children and other relatives, and friends, was sometimes irresistible. During these
occasional meetings, not only is there an exchange of news verbally, but also an
exchange of books and other reading matter that either ship can supply. It is a
spirited sight, on a rough sea (or, as is sometimes said, “when too rugged to
whale, but just right for a gam”), to watch these fragments of the commercial
world, with swelling sails, surging over the breaking waves, until brought into
close communion ; and to observe the formal salutes between their commanders,
while "speaking ship;” or, if they are old acquaintances, to witness the boisterous
and hearty mutual greetings, heralded through trumpets, together with the
general desire of everyone to associate, even for an hour, with some person
besides his comrades, who are confined with him on his own reeling deck. Next to
the joy of being on the return passage, with everything full, is the meeting of the
old-time, voyage - worn whaleman, with a ship just out from home.
Letters are
received, and perhaps books and stores of other reading material, fresh to them,
after having been borne half-way round the globe, for the space of six months
(perhaps a year), are ravenously devoured ; and a hundred and one inquiries are
made about " Ilow were things when you left home?” “What was the price of oil
and bone?" "Were any new ships fitting out?" "Was there any danger of a war ?"
etc. A whole day was often spent under such gladsome circumstances; and the
officers and men, passing and repassing to each other's vessels, always observed
the same rules with regard to changing boats' crews as did their superiors. In
these pleasant meetings, no effort was spared on the part of the hosts to enter-
tain their guests most hospitably. The cabin table was spread with the best the
ship could afford; many a plump porker of Oceanica, or a choice terrapin from
the Galapagos, was sacrificed, and a general feast enjoyed fore and aft.*
In the course of these prolonged voyages, there was hardly a ship's company
* It may be noted that some etiquette was
observed at the table, peculiar to the whaling
service, where all
all appeared the board
in their shirt-sleeves ! This is said to have
originated from the nature of the work when
taking oil, their outer garments necessarily be-
coming soiled. Hence, when coming to the table
at meal time, the jacket or coat was thrown aside.
THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
255
which did not experience many changes; men were lost through casualties, died of
disease, deserted, or were exchanged, sometimes discharged, and frequently a smart
youth would be promoted to an advanced position before his first voyage termi-
nated. Anyone who gave promise of the requisites for a good whaleman had but
little difficulty in shipping as a boat-steerer on the second voyage. At first, as
has been previously stated, the colonial whaling-craft were manned almost exclu-
ely by the colonists and Indians; but at length the fleet became so numerous,
that, in a majority of cases, it was only practicable to obtain Americans for the
principal officers, the rest of the ship's company being made up, as one might say,
of all nations; and not unfrequently, in the forecastle, would be found runaway
American youths of the best blood, ambitious farmers' sons from the interior, who
were intent on becoming sea - captains, together with criminals in disguise, and
hapless emigrants from the old country-Portuguese from the Azores, and negroes
from the Cape de Verdes* -altogether making up a motley crew, which could only
be controlled by strict discipline. Much has been written about the duplicity and
sharp dealing of the owners of whaling - vessels, and the heartless severity of
whaling-captains; but it is found that the authors of these glaring complaints
were usually impracticable or discontented characters, who went drifting about
the world with no fixed purpose of action, being generally dissatisfied with them-
selves and everyone with whom they came in contact-more especially if subjected
to their control ; or they were of that class who imagined they could make a con-
venience of the vessel to sail around the world ---their chief object being to gratify
their curiosity in sight-seeing, regardless of the faithful discharge of their duties--
or, to say the least, they took no interest in the success of the voyage ; hence
their view of everything pertaining to whaling presented no pleasing features.
Unfeeling and unprincipled men are sometimes found holding the responsible posi-
tions of mates and masters of whaling-vessels, as may be found in all other
branches of the marine service; but that the majority of whaling- masters are
unjust and tyrannical to those under their command, is a libel on their humane
characters. It is not surprising that the discontented adventurer regards the prac-
tical discipline on shipboard as severe, and the commanding bearing of the officers
as unnecessary. On the other hand, the officers, who have learned by their pro-
tracted schooling in a hardy and perilous profession that the success of the voyage
* It has been a general custom for outward-
bound whalers to call at the Azores, or at the
Cape de Verdes, if the season of the year was
favorable, for the purpose of obtaining supplies
of vegetables and fresh provisions; and at such
times they made up their complement of men,
if full crews had not been shipped at home
ports.
256
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
depends upon the prompt performance of all duties, and they hold in utter
contempt those malcontents, who, as faithful Jack terms it, "are in everybody's
mess and in nobody's watch.” It is to the interest of the commander of a
whaler, to keep his crew in good heart and spirit; to this end they must be well
fed, and otherwise made as comfortable as circumstances will permit. If these
sanitary measures are not carried out, sickness and discontent ensue, which defeat
the object of the expedition. On an average, the whale-ship's company is not
actually on duty more than eight hours out of the twenty-four, and they are pro-
vided with an abundance of wholesome and substantial food, and as good quarters
as the vessel will afford. If duty permits, during the hours from four to eight
o'clock in the evening, all hands, except those immediately engaged in sailing the
vessel, are allowed to amuse themselves in any way they please, so long as the
ship is not disgraced.
When cruising for whales, the day's work begins and ends as regularly as the
sun rises and sets; and a vessel engaged in sperm - whaling may remain on one
cruising - ground for months (sometimes nearly half the year) without “breaking
black-skin”—a whaler's term for not having an opportunity to harpoon a whale--
and with nothing to change the monotony of the surrounding sea and sky view,
except a transient sail, or some consort, who may have been more fortunate than
herself, sending forth the signal of good luck in wreaths of blackened smoke from
the try-works. During these discouraging times, if there is any
insubordinate
element in human nature, it is very sure to manifest itself in no mild form ; and
he is no ordinary man, although he may be a good disciplinarian, who can
command and maintain implicit obedience. From the moment the captain steps
upon the quarter-deck, until the voyage terminates, he leads a life of constant care
and anxiety, for the expedition is fraught with uncertainty as to its results ;
moreover, his compensation for years of watchful toil, as well as of those under
his command, depends entirely upon the amount of cargo gathered from the ocean.
And, in these times of adversity, the indefatigable qualifications of the Ameri-
can whaling- master are promptly brought out; for, with the co-operation of the
owner at home, who has well “fitted” his ship, the finale of the voyage is crowned
with success. A landsman can not imagine the disheartening situation of the
whalers, after months of watchfulness, from "sun to sun," when not even the
shadow of a whale is seen ; but when the spout of the long-sought prey is discov-
ered in the distance, and the welcome cry of the men on the lookout is heard, the
ship, fore and aft, becomes the scene of hopeful excitement. All hands are called
- or they are already on deck without calling; orders are vehemently given and

Plate XXVII
Lith Britton á Rey.S.F.
CM. Scammon, del.
WHALING STATION AT CARMEL BAY
-
TH.
SE]
1
in igrindin;" du
The lionts i ini.
!!n one ſ ,
--
1
lowiny
111.11
.
prael
.? sity, and in
Born: . .':... ils (1."litt?
VSD ; les
al air
10.1:
--
1.
iii
Tie 15
shed esta
rundars
.. lelos
fatal :
.
til te
11.3, 1. dere salie
1719 Sv pon; auli'e puitlit ia lual-
Hill, ai last,
vita!
Il Priser
var with its rezi DR.
it
timeil sich
ciin '
of
ny
in
vilile ::
1: the is dieron
d. 11:51
*
>
the buting - singin lew
16 away." This is at the
Siro and til 22:1! is ..
... the try-, i "Sie
3.14;:-!'"W. the dir:
is
Dobri illum incik")
Oui cxplois...
We live said
die
pahli titigl; the feeli.
Ele ny best fruitleri
and, like tie bufalo lilii.
0; à .tanrine ain: 1
Fitinha e. ILC, when in
timpiing, the
July
a valus!
rife of 1 1. *- header, in l.
wiferiutare state of affairs can harvinais!!!
is

THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
257
i
responded to. The boats are in readiness; they are "hoisted and swung;" and
when the time comes for "lowering," they are dropped into the water with every
man in his place. Springing to the oars, the boats bound over the waves; and in
approaching the whale, the officer of the boat in advance carefully “cons” his little
craft, and orders the " harpooniersman” by word or motion, to stand ready, with his
weapon poised, as a rattling, rippling sound is heard, and a huge black form breaks
the water, with the harsh, ringing noise of its first respiration. Instantly the deadly
spear flies from ready hands, and plunges into the mammoth creature. The water
is lashed into a pyramid of bloody foam, the boat is "fast," and the whale in
vain endeavors to escape by running over the surface of the sea, then diving to
the depths below; but its human pursuers still cling to the line attached to the
fatal harpoon. The whale rises again to the surface, in some degree exhausted.
Another boat approaches, and darts its murderous weapons, and the pursuit is con-
tinued with renewed vigor. When, at last, a vital part is pierced, the animal
deeply crimsons its pathway with its remaining life - blood, and lashes the sea into
clouds of spray in its dying contortions. Then follow wild cheers by the crews in
the boats; while the ship bears down under reduced sail, and the whale is secured
by the ponderous fluke-chain. The boats are again hoisted, and all hands are on
board. Everyone is cheerful, and works with a will; up goes the cutting-gear,
and the implements are in readiness for cutting-in the whale. The officers being
on the cutting-stage, a few strokes with their spades, and the order is given to
“heave away." The men at the windlass heave around cheerily, to the tune of a
boisterous song, and the animal is soon stripped of its rich covering; the decks
are cleaned up, the try-works are "started,” and under the smoke of the torching
scrap-fire, amid the din of the cooper's hammer preparing the oil-casks, and the
general hum - drum incident to boiling out and stowing down, Jack spins his yarns
of past exploits, savoring of good luck and thrilling adventures.
We have said that ill success brings its accompanying evils, which the captain
is obliged to contend with; for, sometimes, when the whales are found in
plenty, through the selfish maneuvering of some officer with his boat's crew, the
chase may be a fruitless one. Good whalemen are full of the sportsman's spirit;
and, like the buffalo hunters of the plains, they have no passion to pursue small
game; and any marine animals inferior to the whale fail to lure them into the ex-
citing chase. Hence, when in hot pursuit, the impulse to become the captors is so
tempting, that many a valuable whale has been "gallied,” through the reckless
strife of some boat-header, in his efforts to be first to strike the animal.
A more
unfortunate state of affairs can hardly exist than "opposition whaling" by officers
MARINE MAMMALS.-33.
258
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
seas,
of the same ship; and in some cases it has been found indispensably necessary to
keep a willful and refractory officer's boat “on the cranes,” in order that the other
boats may engage in the chase harmoniously. This measure generally brings the
guilty party to his senses, for a more summary punishment could not be adminis-
tered to a game whaleman than to be kept on board as an idle spectator of the
exciting pursuit and capture.
Sperm whaling is chiefly prosecuted within the temperate latitudes, and often
in the heated atmosphere of the torrid zone; but the Right and Polar Whales are
hunted almost exclusively about the frozen oceans of the world, both north and
south. In former years, however, these great animals were found in vast numbers
within the temperate zones ;
but the work of the harpoon and lance, by the com-
bined whaling-fleets of Europe and America, has long ago nearly annihilated those
species inhabiting the middle water - belts of the northern and southern oceans, and
at the present day the animals are driven to their remotest haunts in ice-bound
The principal field of pursuit for the whalebone whales, exclusive of the
rorquals, is along the icy barrier of the Arctic Ocean. Here the ships cruise from
the time the field-ice opens, until the October snows and gales drive them from
that gloomy coast, which is strewn with wrecks and records of disaster. The
positions of the officers of an Arctic whale-ship, as well as those of the crew, are
no sinecure. "Standing mast - heads” in the biting cold, which is raried by storms
of sleet and dismal fogs— constantly on the watch, not only for whales, but for
the treacherous movements of the ice - fields or bergs—is a tedious duty, of inordi-
nate exposure ; yet, of the whole company, the captain's work is the most arduous,
for on him rests the greatest responsibility, and he must be on the alert both niglit
and day, being aloft on the lookout more hours than any of his officers. On
leaving the frozen regions, the whaler wends his way southward through adverse
gales ; if favored with leading winds, he seeks the most desirable port, where the
needful supplies of fresh provisions can be obtained, and a few weeks of relaxation
and amusement for the crew may be enjoyed on shore. By far the most noted
resort for supplies in the northern hemisphere was Honolulu, Sandwich Islands; yet
Hilo and Maui, of the same group, were frequently resorted to. Here, the genial
climate and fruitful soil, which yielded abundantly the needful "recruits,” and the
open, easy life of the natives, caused it to become a favorite place for the whalers
to congregate. The brief time of "giving liberty” and “recruiting ship” being over,
a short winter cruise called the “line season” may be made about the equator, for
Sperm Whales; or the vessel may go to the coast of California, to engage in
“bay-whaling," or "kelp-whaling." In either case, the ships usually touch again
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
259
at some port to obtain fresh supplies; and sometimes the season's catch of oil is
discharged or reshipped before she returns to the Arctic cruising-grounds. Cali-
fornia bay and kelp whaling has been a peculiar feature of the fishery. The whales
there pursued are a distinct species of the baleen tribe, whose natural history is
given in this work, under the head of “The California Gray Whale.” They are the
most dangerous of all whales to attack, and, compared with the number of ships
which formerly engaged
engaged in their capture, more casualties have occurred than in
any other branch of whaling, many men having lost their lives, while others have
been irrecoverably crippled. But we have never yet learned of any place of resort
for whales which can possibly be approached, either by ship or boat, that has not
been the scene of slaughter by their human captors. Many whaling-masters-after
buffeting the gales and ice of the Arctic regions— have hurriedly fled to this
inland whaling-ground on the California coast, and in order to reach the most
advantageous localities, far up the shallow estuaries, lightened and careened their
vessels, and by means of their heavy ground - tackle forced them across shoals
which were nearly bare at low tide. The difficulty and danger connected with
this fishery seems to have lured on many a reckless and venturesome spirit to the
encounter, which has been appropriately named "devil - fishing,” and the successful
whaler is christened a good "devil-fisherman.” While engaged for six years in
whaling, sealing, and Sea Elephant expeditions upon the coast of California and
Mexico, we passed the winter seasons in lagoon or bay whaling, and our experience
in the capture of the California Grays may serve as an outline picture of whaling-
life in those inland waters.
LAGOON-WHALING.
When arrived in the lagoons, a suitable anchorage is selected, and the ship is
moored for the season; the heavy sails are unbent, and much of the running
rigging unrove, landed and housed under canvas, together with shooks, spare
lumber, etc., so as to clear the ship of cumbersome materials not required until
the vessel is nearly filled with oil or the season is over. The "tender" is fitted
for cutting in the whales, the cutting-gear of the ship is sent aloft, and with the
cutting-stage placed over the side, preparations for the slaughter are completed.
When sufficient numbers have assembled at the head - waters of the estuaries, the
boats are lowered in pursuit. A cow with a young calf is usually selected, so
that the parent animal may be easily struck; yet the race is sometimes so pro-
longed as to nearly exhaust the boats' crews; and when at last the creature lags,
260
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
so that her tired offspring may keep near, thereby presenting the opportunity to
the “harpooniersman” to thrust effectively with his weapon, the murderous blow
often causes the animal to recoil in its anguish, and give a swoop of its ponderous
flukes, or a toss of its head, which, coming in contact with the boat, produces a
general wreck, and more or less injury to the men. In the winter of 1856, we
were whaling about the esteros of Magdalena Bay, where, in attacking sixteen
whales, two boats were entirely destroyed, while the others were staved fifteen
times; and out of eighteen men who officered and manned them, six were badly
jarred, one had both legs broken, another three ribs fractured, and still another
was so much injured internally that he was unable to perform duty during the
rest of the voyage. All these serious casualties happened before a single whale
was captured. However, after a few days' rest, while the boats were being
repaired and new ones fitted to take the place of those destroyed, the contest with
the “Devil-fish” was again renewed, and with successful results. Several whales
were taken without accident, and no serious casualty occurred during the rest of
the season.
During the spring and summer months of 1857, we were engaged with the
brig Boston in whaling, sealing, and Sea Elephant hunting, but with ill success.
The crew was shipped for eight months only; hence we would have been obliged
to return to port with nearly an empty vessel, had not nearly all the men volun-
teered to engage for the winter season, rather than leave the vessel, penniless.
Only three men desired to leave the brig, who were landed at Santa Barbara.
Having previously ascertained that a large lagoon branched from the Bay of San
Sebastian Viscaino (heretofore unknown to whalers), where the California Grays, in
the season, probably resorted, a small schooner as a tender, with men to increase
our deficient ship's company, was dispatched from San Francisco, and joined the
brig at the appointed place of rendezvous, in the snug harbor of Catalina Island.
All being in readiness, both vessels sailed, the last of November, 1857, for the new
whaling-ground. Nothing of special interest transpired until we arrived off our
first landmark —now known as Lagoon or Safety Head. Under this land both
vessels anchored for the night. On the following day,
three boats and the
tender were dispatched to explore the coast to the southward, and “sound out” the
channel into the lagoon. Two days passed, when a messenger returned with the
report that the tender had entered the estuary without difficulty, and that there
was sufficient depth of water on the bar for the brig to pass over.
It was after-
noon before we got under way. A brisk breeze was blowing, and would have car-
ried us to a land - locked harbor before evening, had it not failed us when nearly
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
261
on the shoalest part of the entrance, obliging both vessels to anchor—the tender
having previously joined us. Night came on, dark and misty ; and as the tedious
hours wore away, an increasing heavy swell rolled in, breaking fitfully around both
brig and schooner. Nothing could relieve us from our perilous situation but a
strong land - breeze, to take the vessels back to the first anchorage or to sea. Not
a soul on board slept during that night. A light puff of wind, at long intervals,
came through the mouth of the lagoon, each time giving us hope for the desired
land - breeze ; but it only increased the dismal sound of the angry surf as it beat
upon the sandy shores. At daylight, a gentle air came in from seaward, when
signal was made for both vessels to get under way; but before the anchors were
lifted, it fell calm again, and near noon the wind came from the northward,
when we
were quickly under all sail, and soon passed through the turbulent
passage, and cast anchor behind a sheltered point of the lagoon. It was too early
to commence whaling; and being short of wood to last through the season, the
time and opportunity were improved to obtain a supply from the wreck of a ship
which lay strewn about the contiguous ocean shore. To reach the "wooding"
place, it was necessary to land inside the passage and go some distance along the
beach, as no boat could approach from the outer coast. One day having been
spent in preparing the fuel, another was expected to be ample time to put it on
board. All the boats engaged in transporting it were moored near the shore in
the lagoon, and left in charge of a boat-keeper, it being impracticable to haul
them up at high tide on account of the broad, flat beach exposed at low water.
All the wooding party being out of sight when at the wreck, the boat-keeper con-
cluded to refresh himself by a bath, and conceived the idea of converting one of
the boats into a bath-tub, by pulling out the plug in the bottom. The boat soon
became water - logged, and the fellow, carelessly enjoying his ablutions, got too far
to one side of the craft, which instantly capsized, turning him into the lagoon.
The current running swiftly, dragged the anchor, and the man, in his fright, swam
to the shore, abandoning his boat, to which three others were fast, and all four
went drifting out of the passage. The alarm was given to the party on shore, and
it was a disheartening sight to behold the four boats drifting through the breakers,
for everyone knew that without them our voyage would be fruitless.
There were
several Kanakas among the crew, who immediately saw the necessity of saving the
boats; and selecting pieces of plank, to be used as "surf-boards,” put off through
the rollers to rescue them. Our carpenter was an expert swimmer; and as soon
as he saw the boats drifting along the shore `into the breakers, he threw off his
clothes, plunged into the surf, and had nearly reached them, when the anchor,
262
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
which had been dragging all the while, brought up, and the current swept both
the carpenter and Kanakas out of reach. They then made for the shore, which all
of them regained in an exhausted condition, except the carpenter, who was never
seen again. The officers present, with a portion of the crew, were so much dis-
couraged that they gave up all hopes of regaining the boats, and openly avowed
that our anticipated successful voyage must be abandoned. Permission was asked
to go in search of the tender, which was engaged in sounding out the channel
of the lagoon, that those on board might be advised of the disaster and come to
our relief, as we could not return to the brig for the want of a boat-the tender
having the only one left between the two vessels. Their request was granted,
while the rest of the crew remained with me at the site of the ill-fated wreck;
they were immediately directed to take stations along the beach, and watch for the
carpenter's remains and for the re-appearance of the boats. It was nearly low tide
when the catastrophe occurred, and we had a faint hope that the change of the
flood would bring some of the boats, even in a wrecked condition, back or near
to the passage of the lagoon. It was but a short time after the lookouts were
stationed, before a hawk-eyed youngster, who had climbed a sand - hill, reported
that a boat was in sight; when the preconcerted signal was given, and in a
moment a dozen men, at the risk of their lives, grappled it in the surf, and
dragged it far beyond high-water mark. They had hardly accomplished the feat,
before another appeared, which, in a few moments, drifted within reach, and was
soon placed beside the first one; a third appeared, was seized, and quickly trans-
ported beyond the other two, with a spontaneous cheer from the men, for all now
knew that our means of rescue, and for pursuing the whales — which had already
appeared in large numbers — were restored to us. Toward evening, the party that
went in search of the tender returned ; but it was late in the night before all the
men were embarked, when we returned to the brig, tired and dejected over the
day's disasters, involving the loss of a favorite shipmate.
At an early hour on the following day, all hands that could be spared from
the vessel were busily employed in transporting the boats along the beach to a
place where they could be launched into the lagoon; but it required three days to
complete the transportation of boats and fuel. Meanwhile, a vigilant search was
made for the body of the carpenter ; but no traces of it could be found. As the
last of the wood came alongside, a norther broke upon us in all its fury, and both
vessels struck adrift, but were brought up by their anchors. On the third day
the gale abated, when the brig and her consort made the best of their way up to
the head of the hitherto unexplored waters. Here the whales were found in great
-
THE AMERICAN WHALE - FISHERY.
263
numbers. On the next day the boats were sent in pursuit, and two large cows
were captured without difficulty, which gave all hands confidence in our ultimate
success. Early the next morning, the boats were again in eager pursuit; but
before the animal was struck, it gave a dash with its flukes, staving the boat into
fragments, and sending the crew in all directions. One man had his leg broken,
another had an arm fractured, and three others were more or less injured—the
officer of the boat being the only one who escaped unharmed. The relief boat,
while rescuing the wounded men, was also staved by a passing whale, leaving only
one boat afloat. The tender being near at hand, however, a boat from that vessel
rendered assistance, and all returned to the brig. When the first boat arrived
with her freight of crippled passengers, it could only be compared to a floating
ambulance crowded with men—the uninjured supporting the helpless. As soon as
they reached the vessel, those who were maimed were placed on mattresses upon
the quarter-deck, while others hobbled to their quarters in the forecastle. The
next boat brought with it the remains of the two others, which were complete
wrecks. Every attention was given to the wounded men, their broken limbs were
set, cuts and bruises were carefully dressed, and all the injured were made as
comfortable as our situation would permit; but the vessel, for several days, was
a contracted and crowded hospital. During this time no whaling was attempted,
as nearly half of the crew were unfit for duty, and a large portion of the rest
were demoralized by fright. After several days of rest, however, two boat's crews
were selected, and the pursuit was renewed. The men, on leaving the vessel, took
to the oars apparently with as much spirit as ever ; but on nearing a whale to be
harpooned, they all jumped overboard, leaving no the boat, except the
boat-header and the boat-steerer. On one occasion, a bulky deserter from the
U. S. Army, who had boasted of his daring exploits in the Florida War, made a
headlong plunge, as he supposed, into the water ; but he landed on the flukes of
the whale, fortunately receiving no injury, as the animal settled gently under
water, thereby ridding itself of the human parasite.
It was useless to attempt whaling with men who were so completely panic-
stricken ; and the officers and boat-steerers combined could not muster the com-
plement to man two boats. Our situation was both singular and trying. The
vessel lay in perfect security in smooth water; and the objects of pursuit, which
had been so anxiously sought, were now in countless numbers about us.
readily to be seen that it was impossible to capture the whales in the usual manner
with our present company, and no others could be obtained before the season
would be over. Among the officers there were two who had been considered good
one in
It was
264
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
shots with the bomb-lance gun, one of whom we personally knew to be unequaled
as a marksman. There seemed to be but one way to successfully capture these
sprightly animals, and that was by using the bomb - lance. The officers were called
together, and the matter plainly set before them; the best marksmen were
selected, and informed that if they could kill a whale without expending more
than three bomb - lances, our supply was ample to insure a "full ship.” They
were then directed to place their boats on the side of the narrowest channel in
the lagoon, near where the whales passed, but in shallow water, so that they
could not possibly reach the boat, and there wait until one would come within
gunshot. The idea was a novel one, and to old whalemen it seemed impracticable.
Three boats were at once dispatched—two prepared for shooting, and the third as
a relief boat in case of emergency. They took their positions as ordered, and it
was not long before three whales had been “bombed"—the third one was killed
instantly and secured. On returning to the vessel, the officers reported their good
luck; and on the following day they were again dispatched, but with instructions
to first board the tender, and take a look from her mast - head for the whales that
had been bombed the day previous, as we confidently expected that either one, or
both, would be found dead not far from where they were shot. It was a pleasant
surprise to the chief officer, when, on going half-way up the tender's rigging, both
whales were seen floating dead near the head of the lagoon ; and no time was
lost in securing them.
From that time, whaling was prosecuted without serious interruption. When-
ever a whale was wanted, one or two boats were sent off, and it was not long
before the reports of the guns would be heard, which heralded a capture, without
the staving of boats or injury to the men. The try-works were incessantly kept
going — with the exception of a day, now and then, when it became necessary to
"cool down," in order to stow away the oil and clear the decks-until the last
cask was filled. Nor did we stop then ; for one side of the after - cabin was
turned into a bread - locker, and the empty bread - casks filled with oil; and the
mincing-tubs were fitted with heads, and filled, as well as the coolers and deck-
pots; and, last of all, the try-pots were cooled, and filled as full of oil as it was
thought they could hold without slopping over in a rough sea. Both vessels
having been literally crammed with oil, a few days were spent in cleaning and
washing ship, and getting ready for sea. Our supply of fresh water was becoming
reduced; but as it was only about fifty miles from the lagoon to the watering-
place on Cerros Island, and having in former voyages obtained fresh water at
Magdalena Bay, by digging wells in the sand-beaches, a few yards from high-water
-
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
265
mark, we gave ourselves little anxiety about the needed supply, should we be
unavoidably detained in the lagoon.
All being in readiness, we took advantage of a light morning air to work
down toward the bar ; but the fresh sea- breeze soon after setting in, compelled us
to anchor; and a tedious week was passed before we reached the sandy heads of
the estuary. The change of the moon brought with it adverse gales from the
north-west, and an accompanying heavy sea, which broke "feather-white" seaward,
as far as the eye could discern from the mast- head, precluded all attempts, during
such weather, to pass the bar and work the vessels across the open bay of San
Sebastian Viscaino, to Cerros Island. Day after day we anxiously watched for a
favorable change ; but two weeks passed away before the wind moderated. Mean-
while, our supply of water had become so reduced, as to compel us to put all
hands on an allowance of one pint a day. As soon as the gale had settled into
a strong breeze, we at once made every effort to get to sea, even under shortened
sail. The brig and tender, having laid at anchor for months, became very foul,
and for this reason made their way at a snail's pace through the breakers that
still surrounded us, and while the vessels were passing over the shallow water,
their keels stirred the sandy bottom, so that their wakes were whitened for a long
distance astern. At last we passed the bar, and felt that we were once more at
sea, or, at least, clear of the shoals, which presented a forbidding barrier to the
ingress or egress of those inland waters ; but, as night approached, the wind again
increased to a gale, and a heavy, breaking sea continually washed over the vessels,
from stem to taffrail. Early the following morning: we were
well
up
to the
watering-place at Cerros; but nearly the whole day was spent before we gained
the anchorage, and we had barely time to make all snug before the gale burst
upon us with increased fury, and continued for two days. As soon as it abated, a
boat was dispatched for an immediate supply of water. Here we remained for
several days, employed in recleaning ship and in obtaining wood and water, after
which we set sail for San Francisco, where we arrived in due time, with the
vessel so deeply laden that her scuppers were washed by the rippling tide. Thus
ended a voyage which in no small degree was a novel one.
LAGOON-WHALING INCIDENTS.
The following season found us again in the lagoon, with a little squadron of
vessels, consisting of one bark and two small schooners. Although this newly
discovered whaling-ground was difficult of approach, and but very little known
MARINE MAMMALS,-34.
266
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
abroad—and especially the channel which led to it-yet, soon after our arrival,
a large fleet of ships hovered for weeks off the entrance, or along the adjacent
coast, and six of the number succeeded in finding their way in. The whole force
pursuing the whales that season numbered nine vessels, which lowered thirty boats.
Of this number, at least twenty-five were daily engaged in whaling. The different
branches of the lagoon where the whales congregated were known as the “Fish-
pond,” “Cooper's Lagoon," "Fort Lagoon," and the .“Main Lagoon.” The chief
place of resort, however, was at the head - waters of the Main Lagoon, which may
be compared to an estero, two or three miles in extent, and nearly surrounded by
dunes, or sand-flats, which were exposed at neap tides. Here the objects of pur-
suit were found in large numbers, and here the scene of slaughter was exceedingly
picturesque and unusually exciting, especially on a calm morning, when the mirage
would transform not only the boats and their crews into fantastic imagery, but the
whales, as they sent forth their towering spouts of aqueous vapor, frequently tinted
with blood, would appear greatly distorted. At one time, the upper sections of
the boats, with their crews, would be seen gliding over the molten - looking surface
of the water, with a portion of the colossal form of the whale appearing for an
instant, like a spectre, in the advance; or both boats and whales would assume
ever-changing forms, while the report of the bomb-guns would sound like the
sudden discharge of musketry; but one can not fully realize, unless he be an eye-
witness, the intense and boisterous excitement of the reckless pursuit, by a large
fleet of boats from different ships, engaged in a morning's whaling foray. Numbers
of them will be fast to whales at the same time, and the stricken animals, in their
efforts to escape, can be seen darting in every direction through the water, or
breaching headlong clear of its surface, coming down with a splash that sends
columns of foam in every direction, and with a rattling report that can be heard
beyond the surrounding shores. The men in the boats shout and yell, or con-
verse in vehement strains, using a variety of lingo, from the Portuguese of the
Western Islands to the Kanaka of Oceanica. In fact, the whole spectacle is
beyond description, for it is one continually changing aquatic battle-scene.
It was no unusual occurrence for the whales, after being struck, to 'run in
different directions, thereby endangering collisions with the boats, or crossing lines;
and it was frequently only by the most dexterous management of the crews that
serious disasters were avoided. Sometimes a line was cut, or let go, and again
recovered, or the whale escaped with the harpoon. Our tenders being anchored at
the scene of action, afforded an excellent opportunity to observe, from their mast-
heads, all that was transpiring. One dull, quiet morning, with a light fog-cloud
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
267
above us, the voices of the men in the pursuing flotilla could be distinctly heard
for miles distant. At least twenty boats were quickly changing their positions, as
the “fast” fish might take them; or perhaps some unlucky craft would suddenly
stop, and the next moment, boat, oars, whaling implements, and men, would be
seen flying through the air, or scattered upon the water around some Devil-fish,
which, in whaling parlance, was "the devil among cedar.” The boats of two differ-
ent ships, which were fast to whales, passed quite near us; and while the officers
of each party had no relish for keeping close company, the two whales exhibited
no disposition to separate ; and as the group swiftly approached, we heard loud
voices and saw violent gesticulations. Very soon we distinctly heard a burly
fellow, who stood at least six feet in his stockings, bare- headed, with his long
locks streaming behind, shouting to his opponent: “That won't do! that won't do !
cut your line! I struck my whale first ! Cut that line, or you'll be into us! Cut
that line, or I'll put a bomb through you !” But the officer of the opposing boat
very coolly replied : Shoot, and be d d, you old lime-juicer! I won't let go
this line till we git 'tother side of Jordan!” Then, turning to his crew, he said :
"Haul line, boys! haul ahead! and I'll give old Rip-sack a dose he can't git to
the 'pothecary's! Haul ahead, and I'll tap his claret - bottle!" By this time the
two whales had separated, and the boats were beyond hearing; but both whales
were seen spouting blood, and soon after pyramids of foam showed that they were
in their "flurry.”
The whale being dead, and floating, the grapnel is brought into requisition,
and the animal's head is hooked and hauled up, when holes are cut through the
lips, and a short warp is rove through, by which means its mouth is closed, and
the tow - rope is made fast; then the prize is taken in tow to the vessel.
Usually the whales are killed during the morning hours, or in the fore part of
the day; and before noon, trains of boats would be seen towing them, with sails
spread to a leading breeze, or they wended their way slowly down the lagoon by
the long, steady strokes of oars, and not unfrequently a boat song, with a lively
chorus, cheered the men at their laborious work. Sometimes a casualty prevented
some whaling - gang from making their capture after a hard chase, or working
upon” some cunning Devil- fish which baffled their skill to destroy; or, if the
capture were made, it might be when the day was far advanced, or perhaps the
shades of evening would compel them to “cut line," thereby giving up the chase,
and returning to the ship with everyone jaded by a long and unsuccessful battle.
Notwithstanding the danger in lagoon - whaling, we have known of the California
Gray being killed during the darkest hours of night. An instance of this kind
268
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
came to our notice. When the whale had been bombed repeatedly, lanced, and
spouted thin blood, its tenacity of life was truly surprising. Long after dark, the
crippled creature, with the pursuing boats clinging to it by the lines and harpoons,
was heard coming toward the vessel, and, on closer approach, we could see the
“white water,” as the animal writhed in its agony. The boat-header, lance in
hand, worked with might and main, hoping at every dart to give it a fatal thrust.
We could hear the usual orders of “Pull ahead !” “Hold the boat !” “Stern all !"
"Lay the boat off!" etc., with now and then the encouraging words to the crew
that the whale was "spouting blood as thick as tar.” When the party passed
their ship, the captain hailed them, and advised the officer in charge to cut his
line and give up the whale. He replied: "Aye, aye, sir ; I've killed the bloody
Greek seven times, but he won't turn up-he's got more lives than a Kilkenny
cat; but I'll quiet him in less than five minutes—he can't last much longer."
And, a few moments after, the exhausted creature made its last gasping struggle,
and “turned up.” A wild cheer from the boats' crews told that the fatal work
was finished, and all returned to the ship, fatigued by the long combat, but in
good spirits, for their prize was secured.
The use of the bomb - lance has greatly diminished the danger of capturing the
California Gray; and it has been mentioned, in preceding pages of this work, that
this whaling was first prosecuted in the bay and lagoons of Magdalena, in the year
1846. In the winter of 1848, fifty ships anchored there to pass the “between
seasons in bay-whaling, which began with flattering prospects; but it was a new
whale - ground, in shallow water, and the animal a strange one to the fishers, whose
actions, when pursued, they knew nothing about; hence, there was hardly a ship
that did not have one or more of her boats staved whenever they made an attack.
Again, although the bay and lagoons were of great extent, and the whales plenti-
ful, the fleet was large, and it was a time when all the ships “broke out and
coopered their oil.”
Every ship's cooper and his gang were busily at work with
their heavy hammers, driving the hoops on the casks, and the whole combined
produced a deafening noise upon the water, which echoed from cliff to crag along
the mountain island of Margarita. This, with the chase and capture of the
animals, the staving of boats, and the smoke and blaze from try-works by night,
soon drove the whales to the outside shores. The ardent hopes of the most san-
guine were sadly dampened. A parley was held by the captains, and the matter
was fully discussed, what course to take in order to secure a good season's catch.
Rules and regulations were drawn up and agreed to by all that decided to remain
and try their luck through the season; but many ships, after the first few days'
;
THE AMERICAN WHALE- FISHERY.
269
whaling, left to cruise in the open sea for Sperm Whales, until the northern season
should come round again. Disappointed in their new whaling enterprise, they
usually left with many maledictions on Margarita Bay (as it was usually called),
and on the whales especially, which had already been given a multitude of signifi-
cant names. After suspending whaling for a few days, and a number of ships
leaving meanwhile, the whales again returned to their favorite haunt, and, the
whalemen soon learning how to "work around them,” the ships that remained
generally made a fair season's catch.
The dangers incident to whaling in Magdalena Bay and lagoons gave rise to
many a marvelous tale, some of which were literally true, while others, though
amusing, partook strongly of that flavor which sailors term “fishy.” After the first
few
years of "gray”- whaling, the pursuit came to be
to be regarded as somewhat
impracticable; and the oil obtained being of an inferior quality, without the
accompanying yield of bone, as in the Right Whale and Bowhead, this branch of
the fishery was for a time nearly abandoned. A few ships, however, passed a
portion of the winter months in pursuing the Devil- fish of Magdalena ; and one
captain in particular made periodical visits to a favorite estuary, where the animals
were found in great abundance, and were captured with less than the usual diffi-
culty ; but a season never passed without casualties occurring—sometimes serious
ones. This indefatigable master (whom we will call Captain L.), in order to
play a little game of bluff with his boon companions, would, on his return to the
Sandwich Islands to recruit ship for the north, bring with him one of his boats
which had been staved beyond repair, that those interested might have convincing
proof of the terrors of “ripsack-whaling.” Added to this, his spicy yarns when
dilating upon the dangerous chase, created in those unacquainted an aversion to
engage in so precarious a pursuit. At length, however, the northern whales
becoming scattered and difficult to capture, caused some of the most enterprising
captains to try their hand with the Grays. At the time we are writing about,
a large fleet had concentrated at Honolulu, after the accustomed summer cruise to
the north ; and at these periodical gatherings, the whalers, from the steerage- boy
to the captain, enjoyed a season of relaxation from the restraint of strict disci-
pline, as well as from the duties on board ship, and a good deal of familiarity was
tolerated on shore during their brief stay, which at sea would have been promptly
suppressed. Everyone seemed to follow his own inclinations in seeking pleasure
wherever, or in whatever way, it could be found. And one of Captain L.'s
felicitous amusements was in dilating upon the terrors of "devil-fishing” (he famil-
iarly termed it) "over to Margarita.” At one time, when in the midst of a
270
JARINE MAMUALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
romance, one of his brother captains ironically remarked that, as he “told the
truth so often, he hardly knew when to believe him.” "You don't, eh?" retorted
Captain L.; "well, you have a heap of good manners, I think, to interrupt a
gentleman when he's talking ? Now, look here, old Doubtful, I'll tell you what
happened to me in my own boat, up in the 'mud - hole,' season afore last. We
was chasing a cow and calf, and I charged my boat - steerer to be careful and not
touch the young sucker, for if he did, the old whale would knock us into chop-
sticks; but no sooner said than done-slam went two irons into the critter, chock
to the hitches, and that calf was 'pow-mucky' in less than no time; and the
boat-steerer sung out: Cap'n, I've killed the calf, and the old cow is after us.'
Well, just about this time, I sung out to the men to pull for the shore as they
loved their lives; and when that boat struck the beach, we scattered. I'll admit
I never stopped to look round; but the boat-steerer yelled out: "Cap'n, the old
whale is after us still,' when I told all hands to climb trees !” This graphic
picture of “ripsacking” was received with a shout of laughter by the knot of
listeners who had circled about the loquacious captain, and all admitted that he
was the king of skippers in Devil- fish lore.
But with all the warnings and direful tales, Magdalena Bay whaling was
resumed with ardor about the years 1855 and 1856, and was continued and
extended along the whole coast of both Upper and Lower California. Every
navigable lagoon of the region was discovered and explored, and the animals were
hunted in every winding and intricate estuary which were their resorting or breed-
ing places. In the seasons of 1858 and 1859, not only the bays and lagoons were
teeming with all the varied incidents of the fishery, but the outside coast was
lined with ships, from San Diego southward to Cape St. Lucas. A few vessels of
this fleet cruised near the shore by day, standing a little way off at night; but by
far the largest number anchored about the islands, points, and capes, wherever the
animals could be most successfully pursued. It was a novel sight to view a single
ship, or a small squadron, anchored off some exposed headland or island, rolling
and surging at their cables in the ugly ground-swell, and the fleet of boats lying
along the line of kelp just without the surf-bound shore, or, with their sails spread
to the breeze, skimming over the waves in the various directions the gigantic game
led them. At such times, a feature was observed in this fishery which is not
often witnessed, namely: the peculiar marks or devices pictured upon the sails of
the boats belonging to the different vessels. Some had a large cross covering the
mainsail, while others would have the whole sail of blue, with a white jib or gaff-
topsail. On another boat's canvas would be figured one, two, or three balls; or
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
271
stars, or crescents; or a large letter or number designated the ship to which they
belonged. The diversity of colors, and the different tastes displayed in painting
the boats, added another pleasing feature: some were pure white, others black,
still others of a lead color ; or fancifully striped with tri-colors, or with the bow
red, blue, or green, while the rest of the craft would be of a contrasting shade.
Sometimes a huge eye on either side of the stem, or a large circle, would be the
designating mark; all these combined making up an extended group of dashing
water-craft, especially pertaining to the California coast and fishery.
As the success of a whaling - voyage depends chiefly (when whales are plenti-
ful) upon the officers being good whalemen, there is frequently more or less con-
tention among captains and agents to obtain those of unquestionable skill; so that
the "crack” men of the harpoon and lance have often dictated their own terms as
to their lay and bonus; and in former years the advance wages and extra pay
received by officers of great reputation as right-whalemen and devil- fishermen,
might be considered enormous. But it was not always that these "bonus men”
proved to be equal to the reputation which they perhaps had obtained. either by
accident or purely good fortune. Ill luck sometimes robbed a good whaleman of
his prestige, and many a game man for a Right Whale of the North - western Coast
found himself quite unequal to the task of “turning up” a California Gray. We
recollect an instance which occurred on board a New London ship, where the mate
returned on board after a hard chase and combat with an old cow and her calf in
one of the shallow estuaries. As this officer approached his captain, to give an
account of his mishaps, he became greatly excited; but at last he said: “I didn't
know, sir, that the whale. was within fifty fathoms of me, when up we went—and
there ain't enough left of the boat to kindle the cook's fire.” On another occasion,
a famous New Bedford captain flew into a fit of passion at his “bonus mate," for
coming on board with a staved boat, instead of bringing alongside a dead whale.
Words ran high with the "old man ;" but his chief officer seemed to take things
philosophically. He remained silent until his commander had vented his spleen,
when he replied as follows: "Look a-here, Cap'n Simmons, I don't ask no odds
of any living man that can pull an oar or dart an iron.
I can catch as many
whales as the next one, ef ye'll give me a fair show. I don't say as I cud do any
more; but did'nt I bring as many whales to the ship, down to the Rosemerry
Islands, as all the rest of your boat-headers that was counted as bein' great on a
Humpback ? And what kind uv whales did they git, anyhow ?- calves, and old
cows that had been sucked down till they was too poor to skin — why, the
blubber on 'em wouldn't make coal-tar ef you biled it a week; and the most of
272
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-IV ESTERN COAST.
the whales I had the luck to captivate was them old white-bellied fellers that
had a fin on 'em like a seventy-four's breast- hook, and would turn up sixty
barrels apiece, without skimmin'- slicks; and didn't I catch my share of whales on
the Nor’-west ?" "Yes,” replied the captain ; “I had no fault to find until we
came in here to Devil-fish it.” “Yes, well,” replied the mate ; "I hain't no
growlin' to do, only one thing: I shipped to this ship to go a - whalin'; I'd no
idea of bein' required to go into a duck-pond to whale after spotted hyenas.
Why, Cap’n, these here critters in this bay ain't whales !” “Well, if they ain't
whales, what are they?" asked the captain, in a husky voice. “Well," replied
the mate, “I don't know rightly what they be; but I hev a strong notion they
are a cross 'tween a sea-serpent and an alligator. Why, these Mussel - diggers
will turn round in their tracks, Cap'n ; and it's no use—you can't git these here
Ripsacks without a good deal of boat-staving; but I'll bring my whale, or split
the cedar, else my name ain't Cooper.”
These incidents are only given as illustrative of whaling life in the lagoons of
California ; yet, with all the hazard pertaining to the fishery, such extremely
daring efforts have been put forth by many whaling - masters to capture the Cali-
fornia Gray, that we will, in justice to them, further mention that, where ships
were of too heavy draught to pass the bars of several of the lagoons, they
anchored near the breakers at the confluence of those inland waters, where they
were exposed to the sweep of the wind and waves from seaward, remaining there
the whole season, the boats passing and repassing the bars during fine weather, in
order to reach the prey in their coverts, or were employed in attacking them
around the shoals of the harbor's mouth, when the sea was comparatively smooth ;
but even there an occasional breaker would roll up its foaming crest, when the
“fast” fish would run through it, as if by instinct, to rid itself of its relentless
enemies; yet, in many cases, this endeavor to escape proved abortive, as the
whalemen would "fleet aft” in their boats, in order to elevate their bows to meet
the when with one bound the danger was passed, without shipping much
water, or what might be taken in was quickly bailed out, and, being then in the
open sea, the work of capture would be renewed effectively.
sea,
AGAIN TO THE NORTH, AND HOME.
It is time to leave the coast of California, as the bay-whaling season is over ;
and the ship having been thoroughly cleaned, and a supply of wood taken on
board, with perhaps a recruit of green turtles for a sea-stock of fresh meat, the
THE AMERICAN WHALE-FISHERY.
273
anchor is weighed, and her prow is turned once more to frozen seas.
The temper-
ate latitudes are passed, and she emerges into a region of gloom, where fog, mist,
and storm follow in quick succession, varied at long intervals with clear weather,
which reveals a nearly ice- fettered ocean on one hand, and a snow-clad mountain
coast on the other. A treacherous channel may be open between the shore and
the main body of the ice, but it is thickly beset with floes; and among these the
whale-ship threads her way along the Kamschatka shore, if bound to the Arctic,
through Behring Sea and Strait, unless she is delayed by captures en route. At
length, about mid-summer, having arrived at the icy barrier of the Arctic Ocean,
the vessels cruise "off and on," along its margins, in quest of the Bowhead.
Following the belt of open water, in their persistent search, ships sometimes pass
far beyond Point Barrow; but it is not long before the autumnal gales drive them
from this haunt, when they again return to warmer latitudes, and a port of recruit
is sought, where all hands are refreshed; when, if the ship is not full, perhaps a
cruise is made in the southern hemisphere, upon the coast of New Zealand, or
Australia, and the Indian Ocean, before being fairly on their homeward passage.
Many a ship, which would have otherwise returned with a broken voyage, has
been filled by taking her last season on the New Zealand, or New Holland (as
Australia was formerly called) ground. And, as has been mentioned in that por-
tion of this work devoted to the chronological history of the American whale-fish-
ery, the New London and Sag Harbor whalemen were noted for pursuing their prey
in stormy latitudes; and when referring to the former, we have frequently heard
the remark made, “O, they are under- water fellows !” Some thirty years ago, an
incident transpired which vividly portrays the perseverance with which the fishery
was then prosecuted. A New London ship, and another from Sag Harbor, having
been unfortunate in their efforts to obtain a full fare of oil and bone upon the
North-western Coast, resorted, as a last effort, to the coast of Australia, where the
two captains met during a “gam” off Geographe Bay. This place being an open
roadstead, exposed to the heaviest prevailing gales of that region, was considered
an unsafe anchorage ; but the two captains, with their officers, concluded if the
ships could possibly ride them out, that during the intervals of moderate weather
enough whales could be taken to fill both vessels. They all agreed that they
had but little choice between going home with empty ships, and dragging ashore
in a gale of wind. Accordingly, by agreement, both vessels anchored in the best
positions, and, as a forlorn hope, began the battle—not only with the whales, but
with the boisterous elements of the Indian Seas. All the ground - tackle of both
vessels was laid down to the best advantage ; and when a gale came on, heavy
MARINE MAMMALS.-35.
274
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-WESTERN COAST.
tackles were hooked to the cables, then led aft, and secured to the mainmast, to
relieve the strain that would otherwise come on the windlass.
In this way'a
succession of severe blows were ridden out in safety; and during the intervals of
good weather, whaling was carried on with such vigor, that, before the season was
over, both ships departed for home with full cargoes.
Right-whaling in the Indian Ocean, and the taking of Sea Elephants upon the
shores of Kerguélen's Land, was a special branch of the oil commerce, which, to a
great extent, was prosecuted by the New Londoners, their main dependence being
the catch of Sea Elephants; consequently there was but little attention paid to
whaling while making the passage from home, and on their return, the vessels
being full, precluded the usual routine of standing mast - heads, and the casual
“lowering for whales.” When outward bound, however, a spirited chase, attack,
and capture, would sometimes be made upon a shoal of Cachalots, although
the boats were in no wise well prepared. An episode of the kind occurred many
years ago with a large ship on her way to Desolation. When off the island of St.
Helena, a school of Sperm Whales was descried; but none of the boats were
properly fitted, and some had not a line coiled. Among the officers was one (a
favorite, both among men and after - guard, as well as the owners at home) who was
by his messmates familiarly dubbed “Jube." Jube was a fine type of a mariner-
muscular (or, as Jack expressed it, “well put up”), ready for an adventure of any
kind, made the best of everything, could hold on to a Right Whale when running
to windward around the Crozets (and the ship under double-reefs), and counted
it a laughable joke if all hands in the boats were drenched to the skin “afore he
could git the critter mauger."
At this time his boat had no line
prepared ;
but
jumping below, he seized a new coil, tumbled it into his boat, and, with a single
harpoon and lance, lowered away with the other boats in quick pursuit. The
whales were down ; but when they came up, his boat had “the chance." "Pull
ahead, my hearties !” he shouted; "a fool for luck, and a poor man for babies!"
and in a moment more they were fast. The whale sounded ; and away went the
line, tearing and smoking through the “chocks,” till it became kinked and tangled,
when, in his efforts to clear it, he was taken overboard, and disappeared beneath
the waves; but a moment after the harpoon loosened from the whale. Slowly
the crew hauled in the fouled line, bemoaning the loss of their officer ; but as
they drew it in, they found him clinging to it, where it wound around his body.
He was quickly released, and laid in the boat for dead, when they hastened to the
ship, where the captain at once made every effort to restore him to life; and, to
the great joy of all, he was soon resuscitated. He was well cared for, and, with a
-
THE AMERICAN WII ALE- FISHERY.
275
little rest, was all right again. On awaking from a refreshing sleep, a chum, in
his expressions of joy at his recovery, said: "Well, Jube, how did you like it
down there ?” “O!” replied he, “it is a lonesome road to travel.
neither mile-stones nor guide - boards that I could see !" Such was the reckless
hardihood and bearing of those men whose lives were passed upon the ocean, or
about the forbidding shores of the Antarctic regions.
In former days, when whaling was in its highest state of prosperity, much of
the leisure time during those long voyages, and especially while on the homeward
passage, was occupied in "scrimshawing,” by those of a mechanical turn of mind,
who manufactured useful or fancy articles from whalebone, or rare woods obtained
from the tropical coasts. Canes, swifts, knitting - needles, stamps, bodkins, etc.,
were made from the jaws or teeth of the Sperm Whale; and the shells of the
cocoa- nut were fashioned into unique drinking-cups. Sometimes a large plate of
baleen would be finely polished, and the history of the prominent incidents of the
voyage engraved upon it in hieroglyphical figures. A variety of articles were
wrought out of wood, ivory, or shell, which were carefully put by for presents to
relatives and friends at home. Many of these articles were fine specimens of
workmanship. The smaller blocks, and the belaying-pins, of some of the first-
class sperm whale-ships, were made of white whalebone; and sometimes the decks
were, with infinite pains, inlaid with diamond-shaped pieces of ivory. Many of
the junior officers and boat-steerers kept regular journals, similar to the ship's
log - book, some of which were examples of good penmanship, giving a brief but
clear account of what transpired on board every consecutive day during three or
four years; while others were embellished with sketches of ships spoken, headlands
and islands seen ; and whenever a whale was taken, his full figure was stamped on
the margin of the page recording the event; or if a whale was struck, and lost,
his head only was represented; while for one that was chased, but not harpooned,
the flukes and a portion of the small were figured.
But under the most propitious circumstances, the vast extent of ocean to be
traversed rendered the homeward passage tedious; for buffeting the gales off Cape
Horn, running down the trades, and contending with the equatorial squalls, with a
deluge of rain, made up the general weather record ; and when approaching the
American coast in the Atlantic, one of those heavy blows which are often experi-
enced would sometimes drive them far off to sea again, after having seen the land
they had left years before. At last, however, the welcome cry of “Land ho!" is again
heard from aloft; and soon a trim craft, with a number in her sail, and the Union
jack flying at the main, gives the cheering and welcome news that the pilot is on
276
MARINE MAMMALS OF THE NORTH-IVESTERN COAST.
If a
the lookout. The ship is hove to, and he is soon alongside. He clambers up the
vessel's side, vociferates his orders to trim sail, and assumes full command on board.
All now becomes hurry and bustle, and a scene of joyful excitement ensucs.
full ship, the old iron cannon, which has been used as a signal-gun at night and
in foggy weather on the whaling-grounds, is brought out to send forth a salute, at
intervals, as the ship glides along the inland waters, until anchored in her destined
port, and the voyage of years' duration is completed. Then comes the greeting of
friends on board, or a restless desire to meet them on shore, there to pass a time
of rest and recreation before again launching upon the deep for another expedition
involving peril and uncertainty.
APPENDIX.
CATALOGUE
OF THE
CETACEA OF THE NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN,
WITH
OSTEOLOGICAL NOTES, AND DESCRIPTIONS OF SOME NEW FORMS;
WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO
THE FORMS DESCRIBED AND FIGURED IN THE FOREGOING MONOGRAPH OF PACIFIC
CETACEA, BY CAPTAIN C. M. SCAMMON, U. S. R. M.
By W. H. DALL,
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION.
The object in the following Catalogue— besides bringing together condensed
descriptions of the species of Cetaceans reported from the Pacific, and such of
unknown habitat as might have come from that ocean, with references to such
figures and fuller descriptions as may be readily consulted by the student-has
been especially to determine, as exactly as possible, the genera and species described
by the author in the preceding pages of this work, in order that his figures and
contributions to our knowledge of the habits and natural history of those animals
may have their fullest value for the scientific student of the group in question.
I have adopted in full the general groups eliminated by Professor Theodore
Gill, of the Smithsonian Institution, in the Catalogue of the Families of Mammals
published by the Institution; a course warranted not less by the scientific standing
of the author in question, than by the paucity of works of reference on this coast,
and the confusion which has hitherto existed among the best naturalists in regard
MARINE MAMMALS.-36.
( 281 )
282
APPENDIX.
;
to the classification of the Cetacea. For convenience in reference I have also, for
the most part, adopted the minor divisions used by Dr. J. E. Gray in his Supple-
mentary Catalogue of Seals and Whales in the British Museum, 1871; though many
of them appear to have a more subordinate value than that ascribed to them by
that eminent naturalist. In quoting his works, for greater brevity, I have simply
referred to them by their dates, namely: the British Museum Catalogues of 1850 and
1866; the Synopsis of Whales and Dolphins, 1868 (containing, with others, the plates
of the Zoology of the Erebus and Terror, partially published in 1846); and the Sup-
plementary Catalogue of 1871.
I have to thank Captain C. M. Scammon for placing all the material and infor-
mation in his possession at my disposal, for examination ; also, Professor S. F.
Baird and Doctor Theodore Gill, of the Smithsonian Institution, for assistance ren-
dered in many ways, without which I should hardly have been able to complete
this Catalogue.
I have also incorporated extremely brief notices of the material from which
each species has been described, and the museum in which the specimens are pre-
served; "S. I.” referring to the National Museum, in charge of the Smithsonian
Institution at Washington. I have also endeavored to refer to all the remains of
Cetacea preserved in the collections on the west coast.
Completeness is not claimed for this list; in fact, it can hardly hope to be
attained for a considerable period, when the difficulties and expense connected with
these researches are appreciated. Still, it is to be hoped that, in bringing together
this material, something has been accomplished in rendering the path easier for
subsequent students.
The references to plates opposite the specific name adopted, are to the plates
and figures in the preceding portion of this volume.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
283
Order CETE.
Suborder Denticete.
Superfamily DELPHINOIDEA.
Family DELPHINIDÆ.
Subfamily DELPHINAPTERINÆ.
Genus Delphinapterus, Lac.
Delphinapterus, Lacépède, Lilljeborg, Gill, 95.
Beluga, Gray, 1871, p. 94. Auctorum.
Delphinapterus catodon. Pl. xviii, fig. 1.
Beluga, of Scammon, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 57.
Beluga calodon, Gray, 1866, p. 307, fig. 61; 1871, p. 94.
Physeter catodon, Linn., S. N. 107.
Delphinus leucas, Gmelin, S. N. 1232.
Delphinapterus beluga, Lacépède, Cét. 243, 1804.
Arctic Seas, Bering Sea, Ochotsk, Japan?
Pure white. Twelve to sixteen feet long. Skulls in B. M. Three skulls from Norton Sound,
Dall, Coll. S. I. Doctor Gray, having examined skulls collected by Captain Kellett, R. N., from
Bering Strait, unites the beluga of the western seas with that of the north of Europe. The teeth
in specimens (80 or 90 in number) examined by me, in Norton Sound, Bering Sea, varied from
& to H; often being unequal in number on opposite sides.
Genus Monodon, Linn.
Monodon monoceros.
Monodon monoceros, Linn. Faun. Suec. 2, 16; S. N. i, 105.
Narwhal.
Arctic Seas.
Specimens are sometimes brought overland, across eastern Siberia, by the natives, and sold to
traders in the Ochotsk Sea.
Subfamily DELPHININÆ, Gill, p. 95.
Genus Delphinus, Gray.
Delphinus, Gray, 1871, p. 67.
Delphinus Bairdii. Pl. xix, fig. 1.
D. Bairdii, Dal. Prel. Descr. Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. V, Jan. 1873.
Back, posterior sides, fins and flukes, black. Anterior sides gray, with two narrow lateral
white stripes. A white, lanceolate, belly- patch. Full descriptions of the colors and measurements
284
APPENDIX.
of two female specimens taken by Captain Scammon, off Point Arguello, California, will be found
in his monograph. Length, six feet and seven to nine inches. Dorsal falcate, immediately over
the navel. Front of head prominently bulbous or convex beyond the even curve of the back of
the head; a slight convexity below, behind the vent. Beak slender, elongated. The following are
the dimensions of the cranium, in inches and decimals :
Length of skull in straight line....
18 .76
Internal length of brain cavity..
4.40
Length of beak anterior to maxillary notches.
11 .90
Length from tip of beak to anterior margin of superior nares.
13 .40
Length from tip of beak to posterior notch of palate in the median line ...... 13.90
Length from tip of beak to posterior tooth....
10.50
Height of skull at vertex...
6.00
Greatest breadth at zygomatic process of squamosals.
6.95
Breadth at supra-orbital ridge.....
6.10
Breadth between maxillary notches
3.40
Breadth at middle of beak....
2.00
Breadth of the two premaxillaries at middle of beak...,
0.90
Width of condyles...
3.70
Closest approximation of condyles below the foramen..
0.90
Height of foramen magnum.
1.40
Width of foramen magnum..
1.60
Entire length of ramus of lower jaw.
15.90
Tip to posterior edge of last tooth.
9.80
Length of symphysis ...,
2 .10
Height of ramus at coronoid process ..
2.75
Width between outsides of articular surfaces.
6.10
Width between posterior teeth ......
2.10
Length from tip to anterior notch of dental foramen
11 .40
Length of largest teeth, sharply conical...
0.56
Greatest diameter of same.....
0.13
Length from tip of beak to superior transverse ridge behind the frontals. ...... 15.60
Teeth in the specimen before me, 1 by 14. The anterior six on each side above are barely
indicated, and do not project above the gums; the next four on each side, though projecting, are
very small. Below, 47 teeth on each side are plainly visible, and there is room for four or five
more between the most anterior tooth and the end of the symphysis. The teeth are very sharply
conical, rather wider transversely than in the direction of the ramus, and slightly incurved at the
tips. The number in the other specimen is reported to have been on each side.
The principal features of the cranium, as compared with the other species of the genus Del-
phinus as restricted by Gray (1871), are the great length of the beak as compared with the brain-
case, and the remarkably deep channels in the maxillary bones on each side of the palatal ridge,
which actually overlaps on each side to the extent of 0.2 of an inch. Six and a half inches
behind the end of the beak, a groove commences in the median line of the palate, which widens
anteriorly, exposing the premaxillaries near the end of the beak. Behind the point mentioned,
the palate rapidly rises as a narrow ridge (from 0.7 of an inch to one inch in width), evenly
rounded on the edges and slightly convex in the middle, contracting a little in width after passing
the posterior end of the tooth line; its edges overlapping the lateral channels, and its inferior
face extending at its junction with the palatines to the distance of 1.2 inch below the superior
arch of the maxillaries. A groove extends posteriorly between the palatines and pterygoids, ter-
minating in a slight notch between the latter, which notch is a little posterior to the posterior
termination of the narial septum. The pterygoid and tympanic bones are wanting in this specimen,
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
285
with the exception of those portions of the former which form the deeply-notched lateral walls of
the posterior nares, and which are continuous with the very broad lateral expansions of the basi-
occipital. The occipital condyles are nearly an inch apart at their closest approximation below;
the foramen magnum is large, rounded below, and angular, rather than notched, above. There is
a sharp vertical lamina on the inner side of the supra-occipital, extending forward in the median
line, nearly an inch from the inner surface of the supra-occipital, and terminating below about
half an inch above the foramen in a small triangular tentorium, from which slight laterally
extending ridges indicate the boundary of the cerebellar fossa.
The superior aspect of the cranium presents no very distinctive features. Compared with
Clymenia microps, Gray, as figured in the Zoology of the Erebus and Terror, pl. 25 (also, in Synopsis
of Whales and Dolphins, 4to., Gray, 1868, pl. 25), the following differences are noted : The pre-
maxillæ are narrower, more elevated above the maxillæ; the nasal triangle extends half an inch
beyond the posterior end of the tooth line instead of falling about as far behind it, and is much
more acute in front in D. Bairdii. The posterior angle of the supra-orbital process in D. Bairdii
is much less prominent, when viewed from above, than in microps, and the extension of the max-
illaries over the jugals is less elevated, being evenly rounded off at the sides and in front. The
supra-occipital is pressed in above the condyles, and the superior portion of it is more roundly
convex than in microps. The proportion of the beak to the brain-case is greater than in Clymenia
stenorhynchus, Gray, and the beak is wider, both at the notches and anteriorly. The laterally
channeled palate would in any case distinguish it from the species of Clymenia and Steno, to which
it bears a superficial resemblance. In the anterior third of the beak, the premaxillæ evenly slope
off toward the maxillæ in the same plane, and are separated by the mesethmoid cartilage.
this, however, the premaxillæ are solidly united, and much more elevated above the maxillæ,
forming a ridge with nearly parallel and vertical sides, rounded off above, and attaining a maximum
height above the maxillæ of 0.43 of an inch. The nasal triangle is evenly excavated, divided by
an open suture terminating in a notch above the narial septum. The mesethmoid plate is provided
with a submedian ridge, and terminates above in three points. The nasals are knob-like and
rounded transverse, forming the vertex of the skull.
CERVICAL VERTEBRÆ. — These are coössified into three groups, as hereafter mentioned; but it is
probable that individuals vary in this respect to some extent. The first mass has a total diameter,
from point to point of the transverse processes, of 5.35 inches; and from the middle lower anterior
edge of the atlas to the bifurcation of the spinous process of 3.65 inches. The neural arch is 1.10
inch high and 1.53 inch wide; the extreme width across the condylar facets is 3.3 inches. The
centrum of the third cervical is 1.3 inch wide by 1.0 inch high. The neural arch (incomplete at
the top), 0.92 inch high by 1.0 inch wide; the extreme width from point to point of the vertebra
is 1.65 inch. The fifth cervical has a total width between the points of the lower transverse
processes of 1.57 inch. The height of the centrum is 1.1 inch; of the neural arch, 0.8 inch; the
width of the centrum is 1.15 inch ; of the neural arch, 0.89 inch. The length of that part of the
vertebral column composed of third, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh cervicals is 1.2 inch, and that
part composed of the atlas and axis, 1.0 inch more. The neural spine of the seventh cervical is
0.8 inch long, and the width from point to point of the transverse processes, 3.65 inches; of the
second thoracic, the spine is 1.6 inch, and the width 3.55 inches.
The first mass consists of the atlas and axis solidly coössified both by their spines and bodies,
so that the only vestige of separation is an ovate and somewhat oblique opening between the
pedicels of the arches. The inferior portion of the atlas is much produced forward, giving an
oblique appearance to the whole bone, which is of an approximately triangular shape. Its arch is
transversely ovate, with a broad triangular space between the condylar facets. The first spinal
nerve enters by a shallow groove over the latter. The transverse processes appertaining to the
atlas are rather long and obliquely flattened above and below, with a slight knob, indicating a
superior transverse process, just above them. These two processes are separated by a narrow
groove from two nodular projections which indicate the corresponding parts in the axis. A slight
ridge exists on the inferior surface of the centrum. The neural spine is very broad, stout, and
286
APPENDIX.
moderately long; it tapers from before backward, and has a stout, blunt, bifid, posterior termina-
tion. The anterior face is broadly triangular, the base of the triangle (forming the superior portion
of the neural arch) being straight. The spine is concave below and grooved throughout its extent;
the triangular portion of it overshadowing the arches of the third and fourth vertebra. The
pedicels of the axis are very slender.
The centra of the third and fourth vertebræ are coössified, but not the arches. The summit of
the arch in the third is incomplete in this specimen, and the pedicels in this and the succeeding
cervicals are slender and compressed. In the third and fourth, the superior transverse processes
are only slightly indicated, and the inferior are absent; the centra are slightly pointed below and
flattened above, though generally rotundate.
The fifth and sixth cervicals are ankylosed by their centra and inferior transverse processes,
and the sixth by its centrum to the seventh cervical, forming the third mass previously mentioned.
In the fifth and sixth, short inferior transverse processes are developed, though the superior
ones are insignificant. The centra are more squarely shaped than in the preceding. There are
no spinous processes, but the superior portion of the arches is rather pointed. The planes of the
zygapophyses are nearly horizontal, and the arches are not coössified. The pedicels of the seventh
cervical are much broader, and long recurved superior transverse and spinous processes are devel-
oped, though the inferior transverse processes are barely indicated. Two rounded knobs, which
are nearer the summit of the centrum than the processes of the preceding cervicals, serve as points
of articulation for the head of the first rib. In the first thoracic, this tubercle appears to be
missing, though it re-appears on the second. Both the first and second thoracic have strong,
stout, superior transverse processes, with large and prominent facets for the tubercular articulations
of the ribs. The vertebræ rapidly increase in size and the spinous processes in length, and the
centra assume a more rounded outline.
Two specimens of this species were obtained October 29th, 1872, by Captain C, M. Scammon.
The entire skeleton of one specimen, and the skull and cervical vertebræ of the other, above
described, were preserved. The former is now in the Mus. S. I. Of the species included under
the genus Delphinus, as restricted by Gray (Supl. Cat. 1871, pp. 68-9), D. lungirostris is entirely
black, of different proportions, with the posterior part of the palate keeled instead of grooved, and
the triangle extending only to the tooth line instead of beyond it. (Reported from Japan.) D.
major has the grooves on each side of the palate, “very wide and rather shallow, scarcely extend-
ing behind the hinder half of the beak.” (Habitat unknown.)
(Habitat unknown.) D. Forsteri is differently colored
and proportioned. (Norfolk Island.) D. obliquidens, Gill, belongs to another genus. The remain-
der are all Atlantic species.
Of other species of unknown or Pacific habitats, which have been described from drawings, or
of which the skull is unknown, and to some of which this species might be suspected to belong,
D. Nova Zelandic is differently colored (though the distribution of the color is somewhat similar),
and has a short beak; the pectorals are white and the Aukes slate color; D, obscurus, Gray, to
which Peale’s Phocæna australis and D’Orbigny's D. bivittatus have been referred by Cassin and
Gray, belongs to an entirely different group. None of Peale's other species resemble this one at
all, and after long and careful consideration, I am forced to the conclusion that the species is
undescribed ; and it is with great pleasure that I have followed the request of Captain Scammon,
and dedicated it to Professor S. F. Baird, of the Smithsonian Institution, to whose never-tiring
courtesy and unfailing liberality nearly every American naturalist is more or less indebted.
Delphinus longirostris.
D. longirostris, Gray, 1866, p. 241; 1868, p. 5; 1871, p. 68. Schlegel, F. Jap., pl. 24.
Japan ?
Eighty-one inches long. Black, with large high dorsal. Skull, 22 inches; beak, 13% inches;
teeth, H. Stuffed specimen, Cape of Good Hope; B. M. Skull, Malabar; Mus. Paris. Drawing,
Japan; Schlegel.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
287
Delphinus major.
D. major, Gray, 1866, p. 397; 1868, p. 5; 1871, p. 68.
Habitat ?
Skull, 21 inches; beak, 124 inches; width at notch, 44 inches. Teeth, 44, five in an inch.
Palate grooves very wide and rather shallow. Skull only, B. M.
Genus Clymenia, Gray.
Clymenia, Gray, 1868, p. 6; 1871, p. 69.
Clymene, Gray, 1866, p. 249.
Type D. clymene, Gray, 1866, p. 249.
Clymenia alope.
C. alope, Gray, 1866, p. 252; 1868, p. 6, pl. 32; 1871, p. 70.
Cape Horn.
Cranium, 164 inches; beak, 104 inches; width at notch, 31 inches. Teeth, t. Skull only,
Mus. Warwick.
Clymenia stenorhynchus.
Delphinus stenorhynchus, Gray, 1866, pp. 240, 396.
C. stenorhynchus, Gray, 1868, p. 6; 1871, p. 69.
Habitat?
Cranium, 18 inches; beak, 12 inches; width at notch, 3 inches. Teeth, . Like C. microps,
but larger, with proportionally longer beak. Skull only, B. M.
Clymenia dorides.
Tursio dorcides, Gray, 1866, p. 400.
C. dorides, Gray, 1868, p. 6; 1871, p. 71.
Habitat?
Skull thick and heavy; beak once and one-third the length of the brain -case; twice and one-
third the width at the notch. Palate flat. Teeth, 4, slender, five in an inch. Skull only, B. M.
Clymenia obscura.
Delphinus Fitzroyi, Waterhouse.
D. bivittatus, D’Orbigny.
Phocæna australis, Peale, Zoöl. U. S. Ex. Exp., pl. 6, fig. 2, 1848.
Tursio obscurus, Gray, 1866, pp. 264, 400.
C. obscura, Gray, 1868, p. 6, pl. 16; 1871, p. 71, fig. 3.
Cape of Good Hope, South Pacific.
Black, with oblique diverging streaks at the sides; beneath, whitish. Length, 15 feet. Skull,
14 inches. Teeth, # to it. Full material, B. M.
Clymenia æsthenops.
Delphinus æsthenops, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1865, p. 201.
C. æsthenops, Gray, 1871, p. 72.
Habitat?
Cranium, 15 inches; beak, 9 inches; width at notch, 3.3 inches.
only, Mus. Peabody Academy of Science, Salem, Mass.
Teeth, 44, to . Skull
288
APPENDIX.
Clymenia crotaphisca.
Delphinus crotaphiscus, Cope, 1. c., 1865, p. 203.
C. crotaphiscus, Gray, 1871, p. 72.
Habitat?
Cranium, 16 inches; beak, 10 inches, flat; width at notch, 34 inches. Teeth, 13. Temporal
fossa small; a keel in front of superior nares. Skull only, Mus. Peabody Academy.
Clymenia longidens.
Delphinus longidens, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1866, p. 295.
Habitat?
Teeth, f. Skull, 15.25 inches.
Skull, 15.25 inches. Beak, to maxillary notches, 8.25 inches. Breadth at notch,
3.55 inches. Skull only, S. I.
Professor Cope, in criticising Doctor Gray's arrangement, suggests that Steno, Delphinus, Lageno-
rhynchus, and Tursio can form but one genus if further characters can not be brought forward.
While this criticism might be somewhat justified by the confused arrangement of the Catalogue of
1866, yet it would seem as if that of 1871 to some extent remedied the difficulty, and that the
groups there indicated are natural ones, and recognizable, though perhaps some of them are of
less value than supposed by Doctor Gray. In this new light Professor Cope's view would hardly
seem tenable.
Clymenia plagiodon.
Delphinus (Tursio) plagiodon, Cope, 1. c., p. 296.
Habitat ?
Skull, 17 inches. Beak to notch, 9.8 inches. Width at notch, 3.55 inches. Greatest width
of skull, 7.25 inches. Teeth, 31. Triangle advancing a little before the last tooth. Resembles
Gray's figure of C. doris. Skull only, S. I.
Genus Tursiops, Gervais.
Tursiops, Gervais, Mammif., p. 323.
Tursio, Gray, 1866, p. 254.
Type D. tursio, Linn.
Tursiops Gilli. Outline, p. 102.
T. Gillii, Dall, Prel. Descr. Proc. Cal. Acad. v, January, 1873.
Cowfish, Scammon, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 45.
Monterey, California.
Dull black, lighter on the belly. Dorsal low, falcate. Teeth, to f?
A lower jaw of the present species, which is the only portion of the animal yet collected by
Captain Scammon, has twenty-two teeth on each side.
teeth on each side. The rami are solid and strong, especially
their anterior halves. The symphysis is short, extending backward as far as the fifth tooth. The
gonys is more produced downward than in any of the species figured by Gray, and is evenly
rounded upward in front. The ramus has the least height about the middle of the tooth line,
which rises before and behind. The anterior six teeth are smaller than the others, and much more
incurved. The teeth are solid and conical, with the tips attenuated and sharply pointed, which
accounts for the ease with which they may become truncated. The outer margins of the alveoli
are remarkably rough, being produced in arborescent points resembling the septa of some ammon-
ites. The gonys is somewhat keeled. The condyles are broad, of a rounded triangular shape,
-
-
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
289
The measurements, in
with the inner edges obliquely inclined to the vertical plane of the ramus.
inches and decimals, are as follow :
Length from end of beak to condyles..
Length from end of beak to end of coronoid process..
Length from end of beak to end of tooth line....
Length from end of beak to inner notch of dental foramen..
Length of symphysis.....
Width between outer edges of condyles...
Width between inner corners of condyles .
Width between two posterior teeth
Width between teeth at posterior end of symphysis
Width between anterior teeth.....
Height of ramus at coronoid process..
Height of ramus at posterior tooth
Height of ramus at twelfth pair of teeth ...,
Height of ramus at middle of symphysis...
Thickness of ramus at twelfth pair of teeth..
Height of largest tooth above alveolus....
Height of smallest tooth above alveolus..
Transverse diameter of larger teeth...
Diameter in the plane of the ramus
16.80
15.80
9.30
11 .00
2 .00
9.75
6.50
3.50
1.40
0.75
4.40
2.25
1.50
1.70
0.85
0.80
0.42
0.38
0.33
The angle at which the rami meet behind the symphysis is quite acute. The anterior end of
the symphysis from above appears bluntly rounded, and has a narrow median groove.
This species does not appear to have been described, and though the material at hand is
unfortunately very slender, I have applied to it the name of Tursiops Gillii. The specimen was
obtained at Monterey, California, in 1871. The hardly-worn appearance of the teeth suggests that
it was a young animal, though the bones are thoroughly solidified. The only other species which
may be found in the books, from the Pacific or its vicinity, is the T. catalania, Gray, N. W.
Australia, and it is described as being lead - colored.
Genus Cephalorhynchus, F. Cuvier.
Cephalorhynchus, F. Cuvier, Cétac., p. 158.
Eutropia, Gray, P. Z. S. 1862, p. 145 ; 1866, p. 262 ; 1871, p. 75.
Cephalorhynchus Eutropia.
Delphinus Eutropia, Gray, P. Z. S. 1849, p. 1.
Eutropia Dickiei, Gray, P. Z. S. 1866, p. 215; 1868, p. 7, pl. 34; 1871, p. 75.
Tursio Eutropia, Gray, 1866, p. 262.
Coast of Chile, South Pacific Ocean.
Skull, 15 inches; beak, 8 inches; width at notch, 3.5 inches. Sides of skull bent down
behind the notch. Teeth, ft, five or six in an inch. Skull only, Coll. Dickie.
Some one of the species described from drawings, and of which the skull is unknown, may be
identical with this.
MARINE MAMMALS.-37.
290
APPENDIX.
Genus Lagenorhynchus, Gray.
Lagenorhynchus, Gray, Zoöl. E. and T., 1846, p. 34; 1850, p. 97.
Section Electra, Gray.
Electra, Gray, 1866, p. 268; 1871, p. 76.
Lagenorhynchus electra.
L. electra, Gray (1846), 1866, p. 268.
Electra obtusa, Gray, 1868, p. 7, pl. 13; 1871, p. 76.
Habitat ?
Skull, 17.5 inches; beak, 9.75 inches; width at notch, 5.5 inches. Teeth, 4, four in an inch.
Skull only, B. M.
Lagenorhynchus asia.
L. asia, Gray, 1866, p. 269.
Electra asia, Gray, 1868, p. 7, pl. 14; 1871, p. 76.
Habitat?
Skull, 16.75 inches; beak, 9 inches; width at notch, 4.75 inches.
B. M.
Teeth, H. Skull only,
Lagenorhynchus clanculus.
L. clanculus, Gray, 1866, p. 271.
Electra clancula, Gray, 1868, p. 7, pl. 35; 1871, p. 77.
South Pacific, New Zealand.
Skull, 14.5 inches; beak, 7.25 inches; width at notch, 4.75 inches. Teeth, i. Skeleton and
skulls, B. M.
Lagenorhynchus thicolea.
L. thicolea, Gray, 1866, p. 271.
Electra thicolea, Gray, 1868, p. 7, pl. 36; 1871, p. 77.
West coast of North America.
Skull, 14.5 inches; beak, 8.33 inches; width at notch, 3.9 inches. Teeth, tô? Skull only,
B. M.
Compare Clymenia crolaphisca, Cope. This is very likely to be one of the species described
from drawings by Peale.
Section Leucopleurus, Gray.
Leucopleurus, Gray, P. Z. S. 1866, p. 216; 1868, p. 7; 1871, p. 78.
Lagenorhynchus obliquidens. Plate xix, fig. 2.
L. obliquidens, Gill, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1865, p. 177.
Delphinus obliquidens, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 21; Gray, 1871, p. 69.
Striped or Common Porpoise of Scammon.
California.
Not the "Bottle-nosed Grampus” of Scammon, as supposed by Cope, loc. cit.
I have been able to identify this species by means of photographs of Professor Gill's typical
specimen, which were kindly sent me by Professor Baird. It differs, however, in some particulars,
from those I have examined. The skull is a little larger and longer, the pterygoids are less
pointed, the temporal fossa smaller, and the edges of the triangle are higher and more extended
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
291
No. 2.
?
laterally, than in the specimens which I have seen. The teeth are more numerous (It), and the
occipital condyles less rounded and prominent, but larger. It is quite possible that this skull may
be that of a male. Those which I have examined were both of females. I consider the differences
as at most no more than sexual, and probably only individual peculiarities; and I have no doubt
whatever of the identity of Captain Scammon's species with that described by Professor Gill.
It is evidently the most abundant species on the coast of California, and varies considerably in
size with age.
It is very close to L. leucopleurus of the Atlantic.
The following are the measurements of two crania, in inches and decimals :
No. 1.
Length of skull in a straight line....
16.00 15 .50
Internal length of brain cavity...
5.00 5.00
Length of beak before the maxillary notches.
8.00 8.20
Tip of beak to anterior margin of superior nares.
10 .25 10.00
Tip of beak to posterior notch of palate...
9.75
Tip of beak to posterior tooth
7.40 7.75
Height of skull at vertex .....
6.75 5.50
Greatest breadth at zygomatic process of squamosals.
8.20 7.50
Breadth at supra-orbital ridge.....
7.20 6.30
Breadth between maxillary notches.
4.60 4.00
Breadth at middle of beak...
3.40 2.80
Width of condyles...
4.00 3.25
Closest approximation of condyles below the foramen magnum.. 0.12 0.18
Height of foramen magnum..
1.35 1.30
Width of foramen magnum
1.35 1.50
Entire length of ramus of lower jaw.
13.00 12.00?
Tip to posterior edge of last tooth in lower jaw
7.50 6.75
Length of symphysis ...
1.30 1.00
Height of ramus at coronoid process...
3.00 2.60
Height of ramus at four inches from tip of anterior end.
1.00 0.95
Width between outsides of articular surfaces.
7.25 6.40
Width between posterior teeth....
3.50 3.50
Length from tip of beak to superior transverse ridge behind frontals.. 13.00 12 .00
Length from tip of ramus to anterior notch of inferior dental foramen, 9.00 7.75
Greatest width of premaxillaries..
3.75
?
Width of premaxillaries at middle of beak..
2.10 1.60
The surface of the beak in No. 1 is moderately and quite regularly arched from side to side,
no grooves separating the maxillæ and fremaxillæ. The nasal triangle is nearly plane, but elevated,
and its surface rough; behind, it gradually ascends; before, it is gradually incurved, and is con-
tinued as a narrow internal margin to the premaxillæ, to the anterior fourth of the beak; its
greatest width is less than half the width of the cranium. The mesethmoid groove is wide, and
scarcely contracted in the middle. The supra-occipital projects forward, nearly or quite touching
the nasals. The temporal fosse project far backward.
The teeth are ff in number, elongated and boldly curved, about four in an inch. The occiput
is deeply impressed above the condyles. The mesethmoid plate is sharply pointed above, and
divided into three lobes behind the narial openings, by perpendicular sutures, which are evident
for an inch and a half vertically. The mesethmoid is evident for nearly an inch between the
premaxillæ in front of the superior nares. The pterygoids are obtusely keeled below, but not at
the sides, and deeply roundly notched laterally. The palate is flat, constricted slightly at the
palatines, and somewhat concave in the anterior half of the jaw. The periotics are wanting. A
very peculiar feature of the cranium is the enormous development of the tentorium.
The septum
above it projects into the brain-case nearly two inches. From the base of this septum, half an
292
APPENDIX.
inch above the foramen magnum, the broad arch of the tentorium, as long in its axial diameter as
the septum, extends on each side a little farther than the upper exterior angles of the condyles,
thence giving out a triangular wing on each side, which, attenuating as it descends, reaches the
floor of the brain cavity in advance of the opening between the alisphenoid and ex-occipital, and
is ankylosed with the former. The cerebellar fossa is thus almost completely inclosed, communi-
cating with the cerebral fossa only by an opening in the front of the arch but little larger than
the foramen magnum, and by the narrow openings between the outer edges of the wings of the
tentorium, bounded below by the alisphenoid, and laterally by the ex-occipital wall.
The septum
ceases abruptly in front, below the frontal and supra-occipital suture. ridge from the front of
the tentorial wings is coössified with the orbito-sphenoid, above the sphenoidal fissure; the latter
in this species being posterior to and distinct from the foramen rotundum, which opens into the
cerebral cavity.
In No. 2, the dimensions were constantly smaller, the skull belonging to a younger, though
fully adult individual. The teeth were fr, the tip of the lower jaws being mutilated. The ten-
torium presented the same features as in No. 1, and the skull offered no special peculiarities not
common to the other.
The scapula and cervical vertebræ of a third specimen, of which the entire skeleton was
preserved, offered the following peculiarities : The external face of the scapula is flattened, slightly
excavated in the middle, and with a slight ridge behind. The prescapular fossa is inconspicuous,
but has a width of three-quarters of an inch on the outer face of the scapula, above the acromion.
The latter is shaped, notched above behind, with a projecting process below in front. The
upper anterior corner is connected with the anterior angle of the prescapular fossa by a strong
ligament; the anterior termination of the acromion is incurved, and externally convex.
The cora-
coid is triangular, with the distal edge thickened, anteriorly excavated, and knobbed at the corners.
The external surface is concave. The glenoid cavity is sub-rotundate; the post- scapular edge is
evenly rounded in a sigmoid curve. Beyond the upper posterior corner a triangular mass of
cartilage extends beyond the bone, an inch in its greatest width. The inner face of the scapula
is flattened, with three or four narrow low ridges radiating from the glenoid border. The inner
surface of the coracoid is convex, and of the acromion concave. The measurements are as follow,
in inches and decimals :
Greatest length of scapula....
9.50
Greatest length of acromion..
3.00
Greatest length of coracoid
2.25
Greatest diameter of glenoid cavity
1.30
Glenoid cavity to anterior angle...
6.25
Glenoid cavity to superior border
6.00
Glenoid cavity to posterior angle...
6.00
Glenoid cavity to anterior angle of acromion
4.50
Glenoid cavity to anterior angle of coracoid..
3.00
Glenoid cavity to posterior angle of coracoid....
2.00
The cervical vertebræ offer some differences from those of Delphinus Bairdii. The atlas and
axis are solidly coössified by both body and spines; the others are all free, though whether in
aged individuals this condition continues, is a matter of doubt. It is probable, from the generally
abnormal condition of the cervical vertebræ in the Cetacea, that comparatively wide variations in
the amount of ankylosis may obtain in different individuals of the same species, and also in the
same individual at different ages. The bones in this individual are larger and stronger than in
D. Bairdii, but the spinal canal is proportionately smaller. The canal of the first spinal nerve,
which in D. Bairdii is a shallow groove behind the upper edge of the condylar facets, is here (by
a slender process extending upward and backward from that edge, and coalescing with the anterior
base of the spinous process) converted into a foramen. The spine is keeled and convex below,
instead of excavated, and flat, with a very narrow median keel, above. The spine is broader, and
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
293
not distinctly bifurcated. The lower transverse processes in the axis, instead of being obsolete, as
in D. Bairdii, are here produced into sharp points. A median triangular area on the lower surface
of the centrum (wanting in D. Bairdii) is here very prominent, and continued backward by a
strong, deep keel. In the posterior vertebræ, all except the third are provided with a more or
less evident spinous process, while in D. Bairdii none except the seventh shows any spine. In
the present species the cervicals behind the axis are more nearly equal in size than in the former,
and the upper and lower transverse processes are more strongly developed. In the third, fourth,
and fifth cervicals in the median line, below and in front of the base of the neural spine, projects
a small triangular prolongation of the bone, connected with the axis in the third, and with the
preceding vertebræ in the fourth and fifth, by a small but unmistakable articular surface or facet.
The pedicels of the neural canal are more arched laterally than in D. Bairdii, giving the passage
a more flattened appearance than in that species. The following measurements will facilitate a
comparison :
Coössified atlas and axis, extreme width, 6.0 inches; from the middle of the lower anterior
edge to the posterior point of the spine, 4.1 inches. Height of neural arch, 1.0 inch; width, 1.5
inch. Extreme width of condylar facets, 3.6 inches. Third vertebra : width of centrum, 1.58 inch;
of neural arch, 1.15 inch; height of centrum, 1.42 inch; of arch, 0.8 inch. Extreme width of
vertebra between the points of the transverse processes, 2.25 inches. Length of that part of the
vertebral column consisting of the five posterior cervicals, 1.6 inch. Atlas and axis, 1.35 inch
more. The neural spine of the seventh cervical is 0.93 inch, and the extreme width between the
points of the transverse processes is 3.75 inches. The spinous processes of the fourth, fifth, and
sixth cervicals average about 0.3 inch in length. The bead of the first rib articulates with the
body of the seventh cervical, as in D. Bairdii.
The animal is rather thick in proportion to its length ; black above, with a strongly falcate
dorsal. Below, white, to the edge of the patch passing from the lower lip below the pectorals
and terminating a short distance behind the vent. A broad gray smouch on each side above the
line of the black color, and interrupted about the middle of the animal on each side; the edges
of the gray are ill defined. The posterior edges of the pectorals and dorsal are also grayish.
Length of animal, 7 feet and 3 inches; breadth of flukes, 2 feet; tip of snout to anterior edge of
dorsal, 3 feet.
Full descriptions of the colors and full measurements are given by Captain Scammon in the
preceding monograph. A complete skeleton and the additional skull above described were obtained
from two female specimens taken at Monterey, November 20th, 1872; besides which, one other
skull is in Captain Scammon's possession, and one in the collection of the California Academy of
Sciences.
Lagenorhynchus albirostratus?
Delphinus albirostratus? Peale, U. S. Ex. Exp. 1848; pl. 6, fig. 2.
D. ceruleo-albus (Mayen ) Cassin, 1. C., p. 31, pl. vi, fig. 2.
Pacific Ocean, latitude 2° south, longitude 174° west. Peale.
Blue gray, with small vermicular white spots. End of snout white; dorsal nearest the head.
Six feet and seven inches long; teeth, 18r. No specimens; described from drawing (Peale).
This species is referred by Cassin (as I think, erroneously) to D. ceruleo-albus, Mayen, a south
Atlantic species; and to D. Chamissonis, Wiegm., by Gray.
Captain Marston, of the schooner Maggie Johnstone, on a voyage from Tahiti to San Francisco,
obtained a specimen of a porpoise which is not improbably the species described by Peale. He
informed me that the animal was gray, lighter below and darker above; that some of the same
“school" had white noses, but in others the snout was light gray. The dorsal is rather small.
The specimen was obtained in latitude 13° north. The skull presents intermediate characters
between several of Gray's sections, and agrees with none of the skulls described or figured in the
works accessible to me. It is in the collection of the California Academy of Sciences.
294
APPENDIX.
The following are its dimensions, in inches and decimals :
Length of skull in straight line....
14 .00
Internal length of brain cavity...
4.25
Length of beak anterior to maxillary notches ....
8.00
Length from tip of beak to anterior margin of superior nares.
6.30
Length from tip of beak to posterior notch of palate.
9.20
Length from tip of beak to posterior tooth..
6.75
Height of skull at vertex.....
5.40
Greatest breadth at zygomatic process of squamosals..
6.50
Breadth at supra-orbital ridge...
5.50
Breadth between maxillary notches
3.25
Breadth at middle of beak..
1.75
Width of condyles....
3.20
Closest approximation of condyles below the foramen magnum
0.22
Height of foramen magnum.
1.40
Width of foramen magnum..
1.50
Entire length of ramus of lower jaw.....
11.90
Tip to posterior edge of last tooth in lower jaw...
7.00
Length of symphysis......
1.50
Height of ramus at coronoid process. .
2.20
Height of ramus 3.5 inches from tip of anterior end...
0.60
Width between outsides of articular surfaces....
5.20
Width between posterior teeth......
1.70
Length from tip of beak to superior transverse ridge behind frontals..
11 .25
Length from tip to anterior notch of inferior dental foramen...
7.70
Greatest width of premaxillaries...
2.50
Width of premaxillaries at middle of beak..
0.90
Teeth, il, six in an inch, subcylindrical, conical, recurved at tip, sharply pointed. Coronoid
process, slender, inconspicuous; jaws thin and light. Anterior three teeth minute. Premaxilla
separated widely by the mesethmoid cartilage, approximating more nearly at the middle of the
beak, hard, rather flat in front. Beak rather flat, evenly shelving at the sides. Nasal triangle
passing an inch before the hinder tooth, rough anteriorly, subcarinate in the middle behind, on
the left side not reaching the nasals. Maxillæ sharply turned up before the notch, evenly rounded
off behind it. All the bones of the left side a little shorter bebind, and the left nasal smaller
and in advance of the right. Brain cavity larger on the left side. Septum and tentorium small
and inconspicuous. Lateral keels of the pterygoids flattened. Vomer extended back as far as the
posterior edge of the zygomatic process of the squamosals. Posterior ridge of the temporal fossa
obsolete. Mesethmoid appearing between the maxillæ for 14 inch in the middle of the beak, and
succeeded by the premaxillæ, to the end of the beak. Palatines separated by a slight groove.
Lateral notches of the pterygoids, narrow, small. The portion of the basi - occipital gutter formed
by the vomer and pterygoids, narrower than the inferior nares. Palate flattened above, impressed
before the palatines, with a tendency toward lateral grooves at the outer edges. Skull evidently of
a young animal.
Genus? Feresa, Gray.
Feresa, Gray, P. Z. S. 1870, p. 77; 1871, p. 78.
Feresa intermedia.
Feresa intermedia, Gray, 1871, p. 78.
Orca intermedia, Gray, 1866, p. 283; 1868, p. 8, pl. 8.
Habitat ?
Skull resembling Orca, but only 14 inches long; beak, 7 inches; width at notch, 44 inches.
Teeth, 11. Skull only, B. M.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
295
Species incertæ sedis.
The following species are known only from drawings, or very insufficient materials; most of
them (unless we except those of Mr. Peale, whose delineations have proved in at least one case
to be remarkably accurate) can hardly hope for identification, and it is very probable that many
of them are identical with species described from skulls only. It is of course impossible to
determine the genus of any of them; and it would be a relief, if they, together with the species
erected on aboriginal pottery and carvings, and drawings of Chinese and Japanese artists (!), could
be wiped away from our books altogether.
DELPHINUS ALBIMANUS, Peale, Zoöl. U. S. Ex. Exp., ed. i, p. 33, 1848; Cassin, Mamm. ditto, p. 29,
pl. vi, fig. 1.
Coast of Chile.
Head, back, and flukes, black;. sides, tawny; belly, white; top of pectorals, white. Length,
6 feet 6 inches. Snout to eye, 12 inches. Teeth, 1.
No specimens known. Referred to D. Novce - Zelandice by Cassin, but not by Gray.
DELPHINUS FORSTERI, Gray, 1868, p. 6, pl. 24.
New Caledonia.
Rust colored above; beneath, white; a small white spot on the disk of the dorsal and pectoral
fins. Six feet long. Teeth, 41 No specimens known. Described from Forster's drawing. Per-
haps the same as C. microps, Gray.
DELPHINUS LATERALIS, Peale, 1. c., p. 35, pl. 8, fig. 1, 1848; Cassin, Mamm. ditto, p. 32, pl. vii,
fig. 1.
Pacific Ocean, latitude 13° north, longitude 161° west.
Dark above, purplish gray below, with a dark lateral line with light spots above and below it.
Fins and snout, black. Length, 90 inches. Teeth, 41 No specimens; described from drawings.
Referred to Lagenorhynchus, by Cassin.
2
DELPHINUS PECTORALIS, Peale, 1. c.; Cassin, p. 28, pl. v, fig. 2.
Near the Sandwich Islands.
Black above; belly, reddish white; a frontal band of slate color extending behind the eyes; a
white spot on each side before the fins. Length, 8 feet 8 inches. Teeth, H. No specimens.
DELPHINUS CHINENSIS, Desmoul., Gray, 1850, p. 132.
China Seas.
“Shining white;" no specimens; perhaps a beluga.
DELPHINUS LUNATUS, Lesson, Voy. Coq., pl. ix, fig. 4.
Coast of Chile.
“Tunenas” of the Chilenos. No specimens. From sketch of animal swimming !
DELPHINUS NIGER, Lacépède, Mém. Mus. iv, p. 475.
China ?
Black, with white edges to lips and fins. No specimens. From Chinese drawing !
DELPHINUS LORIGER, Schreb. Saugeth., pl. 362.
Habitat ?
Lead colored ; middle of sides, chest, and belly, white. No specimens.
296
APPENDIX.
Delphinus styx, Gray, has been referred with doubt to Scammon's "Common Porpoise,” and the
North Pacific habitat thus indicated has been credited to D. styx by Gray in his last supple-
mentary catalogue, but there are no good grounds for considering it a West American species,
and the type is known to come from West Africa.
Genus Leucorhamphus, Lilljeborg.
Leucorhamphus, Lilljeborg, Gill.
Delphinapterus, Gray (not Lacépède), Zoöl. E. and T., 1846, p. 35; 1871, p. 72.
Leucorhamphus Peronii.
Delphinus Peronii, Lacépède, Cét., p. 517, 1804.
D. leucorhamphus, Brooks, Cat. Mus., p. 39, 1828.
Delphinapterus Peroni, Gray (Lesson), 1866, p. 276; 1868, p. 6, pl. 15; 1871, p. 72.
West coast of South America, latitude 50° south (Pickering).
Black above, white below; the dividing line passing from the middle of the forehead below
the eye, above the pectorals, and stopping at the flukes, which are black. Skull, 18.25 inches ;
beak, 10 inches. Teeth, 44, six in an inch.
Teeth, #, six in an inch. Skulls, Mus. Paris, and drawings of animal.
Leucorhamphus borealis. Pl. xix, fig. 3.
Delphinapterus borealis, Peale, Zoöl. U. S. Ex. Exp., p. 38, 1848; Gray, 1866, p. 277.
Delphinus borealis, Cassin, Mamm. U. S. Ex. Exp., p. 30, pl. vii, fig. 2.
Right Whale Porpoise, of Scammon.
West coast of North America.
Form elongate; black, with a lanceolate white spot beneath, extended in a narrow line nearly
to the tail Length, 4 to 6 feet. Teeth (?). Skull, Mus. S. I. Notes and measurements from
life.
A specimen of this species was obtained by me off Cape Mendocino, October, 1868. Careful
notes, a sketch, and measurements were secured, together with the cranium, now in the National
Museum. On comparison with Mr. Peale's original drawing, they agreed exactly, except that my
specimen was considerably larger, measuring about six feet. Unfortunately, these notes are not
now accessible. Cassin and Gray refer to it as being probably the young of a species of beluga;
but why they should do so, I can not imagine, as there are no grounds apparent for such a belief.
It is unquestionably a dolphin.
Genus Orca, Gray.
Orca, Gray, Zoöl. E. and T.,
33; 1866, p. 278.
Ophysia, Gray, P. Z. S. 1870, p. 76; 1871, p. 93.
1846, p.
Orca magellanica.
0. magellanica, Burmeister, An. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 3, xviii, p. 101, pl. 9, fig. 5; Annals
Mus. Buenos Ayres, i, p. 373, pl. 22.
Patagonia.
Skeleton, Mus. Buenos Ayres.
Orca destructor.
0. destructor, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1866, p. 293.
Payta, Peru.
Teeth, f. Skull only, S. I.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
297
Orca rectipinna. Pl. xvii, fig. 1.
0. rectipinna, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 25; Scammon, l. c., p. 56, fig. 15, 16.
North Pacific, coast of California, Bering Sea.
Black, with high, erect dorsal. Skull ? coll. Scammon. Skull, coll. Cal. Acad. Sci. Estab-
lished on Scammon's figures and descriptions,
The first skull referred to is supposed to be that of 0. rectipinna, but this is not absolutely
certain. The most notable peculiarities are the turning up and in of the posterior ends of the
maxillaries, by the side of the nasals, and to some extent over the posterior ends of the premaxil-
laries. The transverse frontal ridge is very high and thin, the back of the skull behind it quite
flat; in the temporal fossa, in the line of union of the squamosals and parietals, and extending
some distance each side of the suture, is a ridge, or blunt carina, nearly as long as the fossa.
The measurements of the cranium are as follow, in inches and decimals. The individual was
doubtless rather aged :
Length of skull in a straight line ....
Length of brain cavity, internally.
Length of beak before the maxillary notches..
Length from tip of beak to anterior margin of superior nares.
Length from tip of beak to posterior notch of palate..
Length from tip of beak to posterior edge of last tooth..
Length from tip of beak to frontal ridge...
Height of skull at vertex......
Greatest breadth (at zygomatic process of squamosals).
Breadth of supra-orbital ridge....
Breadth between maxillary notches
Breadth at middle of beak....
Breadth of the two premaxillæ at middle of beak ...
Breadth of the fissure between them..
Breadth of condyles ..
Closest approximation of condyles beneath the foramen magnum.
Height of foramen magnum (notched above)....
Width of foramen magnum..
Teeth in upper jaw, 12 or 13 (lost.)
39.00
11 .00
21.00
24 .50
25 .00
17 .00
32.50
16 .50
25 .00
23 .00
11 .50
10.50
4.60
0.75
7.50
0.40
3.25
2.75
Orca ater. Pl. xvii, fig. 2.
0. ater, Cope, 1. c., p. 23 ; Scammon, 1. c., p. 58, fig. 17.
0. atra, Gray, 1871, p. 92.
Coast of California and Oregon.
Smaller, with a white spot before the pectorals; white below, with a maroon colored, crescentic
spot behind the dorsal. Established on Scammon's descriptions and figures.
A jaw, supposed, with some probability, to belong to this species, is in Captain Scammon's
possession. It is of an adult individual, but retains all the teeth, and measures as follows, in
inches and decimals :
Length of ramus.....
Tip to posterior edge of last tooth
Length of symphysis......
Height of ramus at coronoid process...
Width between outsides of articular surfaces...
Width behind posterior teeth..
Length from tip to anterior notch of dental foramen
Height of largest teeth above alveoli...
28 .00
13.00
6.25
8.50
21 .00
10.00
17.00?
1.30
MARINE MAMMALS.-38.
298
APPENDIX.
Greatest diameter of the same (transverse).
Antero - posterior diameter of same..
Height of jaw at gonys..
Height of jaw at posterior tooth...
Length to coronoid process from tip...
Width at posterior end of symphysis .
Thickness of ramus at seventh pair of teeth from tip .....
Number of teeth on each side, 12.
1.00
0.70
3.00
4.00
25.50
7.50
2.50
Orca ater, var. fusca. Pl. xvii, fig. 3.
A variety (?) of the above, with a lower falcate dorsal, with the belly, spots, and crescent of
a yellowish cream color, instead of white and maroon, reported by Scammon from similar localities,
may take the above varietal name until more material in regard to it is obtained. An Orca, under
the name of Delphinus orca, is reported by Chamisso from the North Pacific and Kamchatka; very
likely one of the above mentioned forms.
Orca pacifica.
0. capensis, Gray, 1868, p. 8, pl. 9.
Ophysia pacifica, Gray, P. Z. S. 1870, p. 76; 1871, p. 93.
Skull only, B. M. Reported by Gray to be probably from the South Pacific or Chile, but
originally stated to be from the North Pacific. I can see no grounds for separating this from
Orca, even subgenerically.
Genus Phocæna, Gray.
Phocæna, Gray, 1866, p. 301 ; 1871, p. 81.
Phocæna vomerina. Pl. xviii, fig. 2-4.
P. vomerina, Gill, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1865, p. 178; Cope, 1. c., 1869, p. 24; Scammon,
1. c., p. 54.
Bay Porpoise, of Scammon.
San Francisco, California.
Full material, skulls and skeleton, Mus. S. I. Figures and photographs from nature, and
measurements. Eight blunt spines were noticed by me on the dorsal of a specimen of this species
obtained in the harbor of San Francisco, February 8th, 1873. A dark line extended from the
corner of the mouth to the pectorals. The belly was white, shading gradually into dark slate
color on the back. The teeth in this species vary considerably in their shape, in some specimens
being spade shaped, in others nearly tricuspid, and in still others truncated squarely.
Genus Sagmatias, Cope.
Sagmatias, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1866, p. 294.
Sagmatias amblodon.
S. amblodon, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1866, p. 294.
South Pacific ? U. S. Ex. Exp.
No triangle. Teeth “numerous,” rounded, obtuse, stout. Skull, 15.25 inches. End of beak
to notch, 7.6 inches. Width at notch, 3.79 inches. Allied to Phocæna. Skull only, S. I.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
299
Genus Neomeris, Gray.
Neomeris, Gray, 1866, p. 306; 1871, p. 81.
Neomeris phocænoides.
N. phocænoides, Gray, 1866, p. 306; 1868, p. 6; 1871, p. 82.
Delphinapterus molagan, Owen.
Japan. Reported also from the Indian Ocean.
Black; no dorsal fin. Teeth, 18. Full material, Japan, figured in Fauna Japonica. Skull,
Mus. Leyden.
Subfamily GLOBIOCEPHALINÆ, Gill, p. 96.
Genus Globiocephalus, Gray.
Globiocephalus, Gray, 1850, p. 86. (Lesson.)
Globiocephalus Sieboldii.
G. Sieboldii, Gray, 1866, p. 323 ; 1871, p. 85.
G. sibo ? Gray, 1871, p. 85. (From Japanese account !)
G. chinensis ? Gray, 1866, p. 323 ; 1871, p. 85. (From anonymous description in Chinese
Repository.)
Japan.
Black, with a paler streak beneath. Figure of animal and skull in Fauna Japonica. Skeleton
(ubi?). The synonyms above quoted appear to have been established on very insufficient evidence,
and without specimens.
Globiocephalus Scammoni.
Pl. xv, fig. 1-3.
G. Scammoni, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 22; Scammon, 1. c., p. 59, fig. 15, 16.
Blackfish, of Scammon.
Lower California.
Entirely black. Teeth, 10 to 14. Fifteen feet long. Skull, etc., in Mus. S. I.
Genus Grampus, Gray.
Grampus, Gray, 1868, p. 9; 1871, p. 82.
Grampus? sakamata,
G. sakamata, Gray, 1866, p. 301.
Japan.
Genus uncertain. The species, whatever it may be, is said to be black, with white spots on
the belly, back, and sides. Described from a Japanese account, and figure published by Schlegel,
Fauna Japonica, p. 25. No specimens or reliable figures.
Grampus Stearnsii. Outline figure, p. 102.
G. Stearnsii, Dall, Prel. Descr. Proc. Cal. Acad. v, January, 1873.
Whiteheaded or Mottled Grampus, of Scammon.
Two lower jaws, evidently belonging to an animal of this genus, are in my hands for examin-
ation. As no Grampus appears to have been described from the Pacific, I feel warranted, though
300
APPENDIX.
with some hesitation, in applying a specific name to the animal described by Captain Scammon.
The following are the measurements, in inches and decimals :
From end of beak to condyles...
From end of beak to posterior end of coronoid process..
From end of beak to posterior end of alveoli..
From end of beak to anterior end of dental foramen.
Height at coronoid process of ramus...
Height at inferior dental foramen
Height at posterior end of symphysis..
Height of gonys....
Length of symphysis ..
Width behind posterior teeth.
Width at inferior dental foramen.
Width at coronoid process...
Width at inner corners of condyles...
Width at outer corners of condyles. .
Thickness of ramus behind posterior tooth.
No. 1.
17 .50
16.40
9.00
9.75
5.00
3.50
1.45
2.00
2.00
3.00
7.00
10.30
11 .20
14 .00
0.90
No. 2.
17 .50
16.20
9.50
10.00
4.60
3.00
1.30
1.90?
2.75
2.90
7.20
10.00
11.00
14 .00?
1.00
The ramus is quite thin and light behind; the inferior dental foramen is large; the coronoid
process almost evanescent. The alveoli are entirely filled with spongy bone behind the posterior
end of the symphysis. The posterior angle formed by the junction of the rami at the symphysis
is rather broadly rounded. The end of the beak is moderately pointed. The gonys is very short,
and produced in a rather sharp point below. No. 1 has three teeth on each side; No. 2, four.
They are inclined forward and outward; most of them are broken off or truncated. The teeth are
much the shape of an orange-seed : solid, and without any cavity in their proximal ends. The
crown, or portion covered with enamel (which, from the discoloration, seems to be the only portion
projecting above the gums), is slightly, but distinctly, differentiated from the rest of the tooth, of
which less than one-half is inclosed in the alveolus. The crown is attenuated, slightly recurved,
and sharply pointed, which may account for the ease with which it becomes truncated. The
remainder of the tooth is irregularly subcylindrical, transversely compressed, and pinched off at
the bottom. The dimensions are as follow : Length of crown, 0.52 inch ; of whole tooth, 1.43
inch. Diameter at base of crown, 0.37 inch; transverse diameter of root, 0.5 inch; greatest
diameter of ditto, 0.6 inch. Length of the tooth line in No. 1, 2.25 inches; in No. 2, 2.5 inches.
Animal, 12 to 15 feet. The specimens were obtained at Monterey, California, by Captain Scam-
mon.
Superfamily PHYSETEROIDEA, Gill, p. 96.
Family PHYSETERIDÆ, Gill, p. 96.
Subfamily PHYSETERINÆ, Gill, p. 96.
Genus Physeter, Linn.
Physeter, Linn., S. N. i, p. 106 ; Gill, p. 96.
Catodon, Gray, 1866, p. 196; 1871, p. 58.
---
--
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
301
Physeter macrocephalus. Pl. xiv, xv.
P. macrocephalus, Linn., S. N. i, 107.
Catodon macrocephalus, Gray, 1871, p. 58.
Catodon Colneti, Gray, 1866, p. 209.
Sperm Whale, of authors.
Ubiquitous in the warmer seas.
A lower jaw, probably of a young animal, Mus. Cal. Acad., has 22 teeth on each side, for the
most part sharply pointed.
Subfamily KogiinÆ, Gill, p. 96.
Genus Kogia, Gray.
Kogia, Gray, Zoöl. E. and T., p. 22, 1846.
Euphysetes, Wall, Hist. New Sperm Whale, pp. 50, 53, 1851.
Kogia Floweri.
K. Floweri, Gill, Am. Nat. iv, p. 738, fig. 167, 172, 1871.
Mazatlan.
Black above, yellowish white below, including the end of the snout. Nine feet long. Teeth
long, slender, recurved, it Dorsal very low. Snout pointed and projecting beyond and above
the mouth. Jaw and drawing from nature in Mus. S. I.
Suborder Mysticete.
Family BALÆNOPTERIDÆ, Gill, p. 97.
Subfamily AGAPHELINÆ, Gill, p. 97.
Genus Rhachianectes, Cope.
Rhachianectes, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, pp. 14, 15.
Rhachianectes glaucus. Pl. ii, fig. 1; pl. iii, fig. 1, 2; pl. v; baleen, p. 55.
R. glaucus, Cope, 1. c., p. 17; Scammon, 1. c., p. 40, fig. 8.
Agaphelus glaucus, Cope, 1. C., 1868, p. 225.
California Gray Whale, of Scammon.
Arctic Seas to Lower California.
This species was originally described from specimens and notes obtained by me at Monterey,
California, in January, 1866, and now in the Mus. S. I. A peculiar barnacle, Cryptolepas rhachi-
anecti, Dall (pl. x, fig. 6), and the Cyamus Scammoni, Dall, (pl. x, fig. 1), appear to be restricted
to this species. They are described in the Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. 1872, vol. iv, pp. 281, 300.
skull collected by me at Monterey, California, is now in the collection of the Cal. Acad. Sci., and
another in Mus. S. I.
Subfamily MEGAPTERINÆ, Gill, p. 97.
Genus Megaptera, Gray.
Megaptera, Gray, An. Mag. N. H. 1864, pp. 207, 350; 1866, p. 117.
302
APPENDIX.
Megaptera versabilis. Pl. vii, fig. 1; pl. viii, ix; outline figure, pp. 47, 48; baleen, p. 55.
M. versabilis, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 17; Scammon, do., p. 50, fig. 5, 6; Gray,
1871, p. 51.
North Pacific Humpback, of Scammon.
Arctic Seas to Lower California.
Established on Scammon's measurements and descriptions. Vertebræ, ribs, and humerus in
Mus. Cal. Academy. Baleen, Mus. S. I. Parasitic on this species are the Coronula diadema and
balænaris, Lam., Otion Stimpsoni, Dall, and Cyamus suffusus, Dall (pl. x, fig. 3, 5), described in
Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. 1872, vol. iv, pp. 282, 301.
Megaptera kuzira?
M. kuzira, Gray, 1866, p. 130; 1871, p. 50.
Japan.
Ten gular folds. Belly, gray or white; back, black. Described from Japanese accounts and
drawings. No specimens. A skull from Java, reported to be of this species, is said to be in the
Leyden Museum ; but, from the habitat, the identity seems doubtful.
Subfamily BALÆNOPTERINÆ, Gill, 97.
Genus Sibbaldius, Gray.
Sibbaldus, Gray, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 223.
Sibbaldius, Flower, P. Z. S. 1864, p. 392; Gray, 1866, p. 169.
Flowerius, Lilljeborg, Nov. Act. Upsala, vi, 1867.
Sibbaldius sulfureus. Pl. xii, fig. 1; baleen, p. 55.
S. sulfureus, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 20; Scammon, 1. c., p. 51, fig. 11; Cope,
Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. 1870, p. 108.
Sulphurbottom, of Scammon.
Coast of California.
Brown above, sulphur yellow beneath. Described from baleen (Mus. S. I.), and Scammons
descriptions and figures.
Sibbaldius tectirostris, Cope, is an Atlantic species, but is erroneously credited to the Pacific by
Gray, 1871, p. 56.
Genus Physalus, Gray.
Physalus, Lacépède, Gray, P. Z. S. 1847, p. 88; 1866, p. 139 ; 1871, p. 52.
Physalus? Tschudii.
Balænoptera Tschudi, Reich, Cet., p. 33.
P. fasciatus, Gray, 1850, p. 42; 1866, p. 162.
Coast of Peru.
“ Head and back, brown; belly, whitish; tips of fins, and a streak from the eye to the middle
of the body, white. Length, 38 feet.” Described from the preceding notes of Tschudi! No
specimens.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
303
Physalus? Iwasi.
P. Iwasi, Gray, 1850, p. 42; 1866, p. 163.
Balænoptera arctica, Schlegel, Faun. Jap. Mamm. 26, pl. 30.
Japan.
Black; sides, white spotted ; belly, white. Length, 25 feet. Described from Japanese accounts
and drawings. No specimens.
To the above senseless additions to the catalogues may be added the following names, applied
to Chinese drawings, Japanese clay models, Aleutian wooden carvings, and similar trash, by authors
of scientific reputation:
Balaenoptera punctulata, B. nigra, B. coerulescens, B. maculata, Balæna lunulata, and B. Japonica,
Lacépède, Mém. du Mus., iv, p. 473; from Chinese drawings.
Balæna agamachschik (!), B. kuliomok, Aleutian Islands, and B. tschiekagluk, Kamchatka, Cham.
Nov. Act. Curs. 259, Pallas, Zoöl. Ross, Asiat. i, 289. These are from Aleutian models in wood.
They should be entirely expunged; but the B, kuliomok, or cullamach, has obtained to some extent
an entrance into scientific literature, vide Balena Sieboldii.
Balæna australis, Temm. Faun. Jap., pl. 28–29. Japan.
Japan. Described from clay model. No
specimens.
Genus Balænoptera, Gray.
Balcenoptera, Gray, 1866, pp. 114, 186 ; 1868, p. 3; 1871, p. 56.
Balænoptera velifera. Pl. ii, fig. 2.
B. velifera, Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 18; Scammon, I. c., p. 53, fig. 9, 10.
Finback, of Scammon; Oregon Finner.
Oregon and California.
Brownish black; belly, white. Described from baleen and Scammon's descriptions. Baleen,
Mus. S. I.
Balænoptera velifera, var. borealis. Outline figure, p. 37.
Northern Seas and Aleutian Islands.
The form found in the more northern waters is distinguished, according to Captain Scammon,
by a larger and higher dorsal fin. I observed many of them, during the summer of 1872, in the
Shumagin Islands. In some individuals the flukes were black; in others, white below; and in a
few the white extended above over the external points of the flukes. Those of Oregon appear to
have a dorsal intermediate in size between the northern and the small-finned southern forms.
Balænoptera Davidsoni. Pl. vii, fig. 2.
B. Davidsoni, Scammon, Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci. iv., p. 269. (Printed in advance, October
4th, 1872.)
Admiralty Inlet and Straits of Fuca.
Small, closely resembling the B. rostrata of the North Atlantic. Described from measurements
and drawings taken from the animal by Captain Scammon. Skull in Mus. S. I.
A skull and jaws of a small Balænoptera of unknown locality, presented by Mr. Merrill, are in
the Mus. Cal. Acad. It evidently was an adolescent individual, but a number of facts tend to
confirm the opinion that it is of this species. The ex-occipitals are wanting, having been removed,
probably to clean out the brain cavity. The supra-occipital is quadrate. The two anterior sides
measure along the suture ten and a half inches; the posterior sides, six and a half inches; the
anterior angle is bluntly rounded. Above, in front, the bone is very slightly impressed; behind,
slightly convex; but, on the whole, is flattened. There is no median ridge or groove.
The prin-
cipal feature of the upper aspect of the skull is the wide narial opening; the very narrow premaxillæ
304
APPENDIX.
are rounded and elevated above the flattened maxillaries, bend boldly out from the nasals, approx-
imating only in the anterior third of the beak, then continuing parallel, become flatter and wider,
and extend slightly beyond the maxillæ.
The posterior angles of the maxillæ are spatulate, the vomer is hidden by the mesethmoid
cartilage. Below, the vomer appears as a thin flat plate an inch wide, extending to the anterior
fourth of the beak. The palatines are broad, with the anterior lateral angles obliquely truncate;
they have, on the whole, an abbreviated “dice - box” shape. Their greatest length is 9.5 inches;
width at the anterior and posterior ends across the two, 10 inches. Their least width in the
middle, 8 inches.
The length from the tip of the beak to the median notch of the inferior nares is thirty-eight
inches; from the bottom of the notch to the posterior recurved process of the alisphenoid, four
inches; to anterior basi - occipital suture, five inches - the middle of the otic bullæ being in the
same transverse line. The anterior ends of the bullæ are an inch from the recurved process of
the alisphenoid.
The bullæ are very regularly ovoid, and smooth below; the lateral external edges have two
deep grooves separating three bulbous prominences. They were so attached by dried membranes
to the cranium that a fuller examination was impracticable. The width of the inferior surface of
the maxillæ, in the middle of the beak, is 6.5 inches. The height of the narial septum, behind,
is 1.5 inch. Depth of brain cavity, 8 inches; height of orbit, 4.5 inches. The condyles of the
lower jaw are large and thick; the rami are stout in proportion to their length. There is no
angular process; the coronoid process is sharp and high; the dental foramen large, just before
the condyle. The inferior groove between the occipital condyles is almost evanescent.
Dimensions of cranium, in inches and decimals :
Length of skull in a straight line.....
48.00
Breadth of condyles ....
4.50 ?
Breadth of ex-occipitals (to outer edge of suture).
17 .00
Breadth of squamosals..
27 .00
Height of foramen magnum.
2.00
Length of supra-occipital.
13.00
Length of articular process of squamosal antero-posterior..
8.00
Length of orbital process of frontal, right to left. ...
10.00
Breadth of orbital from curved border of maxillary to hinder edge of orbital
process of frontal...
9.00
Breadth of orbital at upper surface of outer end.
6.50
Nasals, length.....
4.50
Nasals, breadth of the two at posterior end..
1.00
Nasals, breadth of the two at anterior end. ...
2.50
Length from curved border of maxillary to tip of beak.
30.00
Length of maxillary .....
33 .00
Projection of premaxillary beyond maxillary
1.50
Breadth of maxillaries at hinder end....
6.00
Breadth of maxillaries across orbital processes..
12.50
Breadth of beak at base *
16.50
Breadth of beak at one-quarter its length from base....
12.00
Breadth of maxillary at one-quarter its length from base...
2.50
Breadth of premaxillary at same point..
1.00
Breadth of beak at middle...
9.00
Breadth of maxillary at middle..
2.50
Breadth of premaxillary at middle...
1.50
• All measurements across beak include the curve of the superior surface.
CATALOGUE OF
305
THE CETACEA.
Breadth of beak at three-quarters its length from base...
Breadth of maxillary at three-quarters its length from base...
Breadth of premaxillary at three-quarters its length from base
Length of lower jaw in a straight line....
Height at coronoid process.
Length from posterior end of condyle to coronoid process..
Height of ramus at middle.
Amount of curve.....
Length of otic bullæ....
6.00
1.50
1.25
47 .00
6.00
7.50
4.00
6.50
3.50
The thinner edges being covered with dry membranes, have been somewhat gnawed by vermin.
Family BALÆNIDÆ, Gill, p. 98.
Genus Balæna, Gray.
Balcna, Gray, 1866, p. 78.
Eubalona, Gray, 1866, p. 78.
Balæna Sieboldii. Pl. xii, fig. 1. Baleen, p. 55.
Eubalaena Sieboldii, var. Japonica, Gray, 1866, p. 97; 1871, p. 43.
Balæna cullamach? Cham., Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 15; Scammon, l. c., p. 38,
fig. 4.
Pacific Right Whale, of Scammon.
Arctic, Bering, and Ochotsk Seas. Lower California. Japan?
The Eubalaena Sieboldii was founded on a drawing of a Japanese clay model, named B. australis
in the Fauna Japonica; and the supposed variety Japonica, from baleen from the North-West Coast.
The description properly rests upon this baleen, as the former basis is utterly insufficient for the
introduction of a specific name into a scientific system. The figure of the baleen agrees with the
baleen of the Right Whale of Scammon, and I have little doubt that they belong to the same
species. The name Japonica had previously been used by Lacépède, and is, to some extent, a
misnomer, so I have preferred to retain the original name of Gray. This species is doubtfully
referred to the B. cullamach of Chamisso, by Cope; but it does not, as he observes, possess the
recurved rictus attributed to that species, which itself rests upon no scientific foundation, and
hence I have preferred to use a name for which there is some slight basis in the shape of speci-
mens by which the species may be hereafter satisfactorily identified. It reaches the length of sixty
feet, is dark colored above and lighter below. Baleen in B. M. and Mus. S. I.
Cyamus tentator, Dall, and C. gracilis, Dall, are parasitic upon this species.
Balæna mysticetus.* Pl. xi, fig. 1; baleen, p. 55.
B. mysticetus, Linn., S. N. i, 105; Gray, 1866, p. 81; 1868, p. 1, pl. 1, f. 4 (baleen);
1871, p. 38; Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1869, p. 15; Scammon, 1. c., p. 33.
Bowhead, of Scammon.
Bering, Ochotsk, and Arctic Seas.
The Cyamus mysticeti, Dall, pl. x, fig. 2, is parasitic on this species.
? Variety Roysii. Page 56, outline figure.
Roys' Bunchback, of Scammon, 1. c., p. 35.
Ochotsk Sea.
No special differences appear to separate the Bowheads of these regions from those of the
See illustration of skeleton at the conclusion of this Catalogue.-C. M. S.
MARINE MAMMALS.-39.
306
APPENDIX.
North Seas of Europe. The differences which distinguish the variety from the common form,
according to Captain Scammon, are as follow: The spout-holes are said to be higher, and a
bunch, or hump, rises from the “small” of the back, about six feet forward of the flukes, extend-
ing along the back two or three feet, and rising above it about six inches. They are also said to
yield a larger proportion of baleen to the oil than the others. They have been frequently taken
in the north-east gulf of the Ochotsk Sea. Before the variety can be confirmed, a more thorough
knowledge of it is, of course, indispensable. Baleen of the normal form in B. M. and Mus. S. I.
Summary
Out of forty-four species which appear to be more or less thoroughly characterized, ten are of
unknown habitat. Leaving these out (with all species based on insufficient material), we have as
the approximate distribution of the known Pacific Cetacea : Japan, five species; northern seas, six
species, including two or three which visit California; warm seas and South Pacific, eleven species;
coast of western North America, from the Aleutian Islands to Central America, eighteen species,
including several visitors from the Arctic Seas. The species are as follow:
JAPAN.
Delphinus longirostris ?
Neomeris phocænoides.
Globiocephalus Sieboldii.
Megaptera kuzira.
Balæna Sieboldii ?
NORTHERN SEAS.
Delphinapterus catodon.
Orca rectipinna.
Rhachianectes glaucus.
Megaptera versabilis.
Balænoptera velifera ?
Balæna mysticetus.
WARM SEAS AND SOUTH PACIFIC.
Clymenia alope.
Lagenorhynchus albirostratus.
C. obscura.
Leucorhamphus Peronii.
Tursiops catalania.
Orca magellanica.
Cephalorhynchus eutropia.
0. destructor.
Lagenorhynchus clanculus.
0. pacifica.
Physeter macrocephalus.
The absence of Phocæna, and of well-defined species of the Mysticeti, from the warm seas, is
very marked, as is the paucity of Denticeti in the northern seas, while in the north European seas
the latter are well represented.
WEST COAST OF NORTH AMERICA.
Delphinus Bairdii.
Grampus Stearnsii.
Tursiops Gillii.
Kogia Floweri.
Lagenorhynchus thicolea.
Physeter macrocephalus.
L. obliquidens.
Rhachianectes glaucus.
Leucorhamphus borealis.
Megaptera versabilis.
Orca rectipinna.
Balænoptera velifera.
O. ater.
B. Davidsoni.
Phocæna vomerina.
Sibbaldius sulfureus.
Globiocephalus Scammoni.
Balæna Sieboldii.
It is highly probable that to this list may be added two or three species of grampuses and
dolphins, of which sufficient material has not yet been obtained for secure identification.
CATALOGUE OF THE CETACEA.
307
The only fossil remains of whales found up to this time on this coast, are a portion of a
ramus of a lower jaw (described by Cope, Proc. Phil. Acad. 1872, as Eschrichtius Davidsoni),
obtained in digging a well at San Diego, California, and presumed to be of miocene age; a caudal
vertebra obtained by me in the miocene sandstones of the Shumagin Islands, Alaska; and some
remains of cervical vertebræ and the adjacent portions of the skull, very much injured, obtained
from the Tertiary sandstones, near Point Conception, California, by Mr. George Sceva; these, as
far as their characters are apparent, resemble Megaptera.
The following Cetacea, mentioned by Captain Scammon, are not at the date of this paper
represented by material sufficient to indicate their zoological position :
Grampus, Panama.
Grampus, Puget Sound.
Grampus, Bottlenosed.
Grampus, San Diego Bay.
Scrag Right Whale, northern seas.
The other marine mammals mentioned, are the Walrus (Rosmarus obesus, Illiger); the Leopard
Seal, pl. xxii, fig. 1 (Phoca Pealii ? Gill); the Banded Seal, pl. xxi, fig. 2 (Histriophoca equestris,
Gill); the Fur Seal, pl. xxi, fig. 1 (Callorhinus ursinus, Gray); the Sea Lion, pl. xx, fig. 2 (Eume-
topias Stelleri, Gill); the Sea Elephant, pl. xx, fig. 1 (Macrorhinus angustirostris, Gill); and the
Sea Otter, pl. xxii, fig. 2 (Enhydra marina, Fleming). It is, however, quite probable that under
the common name of Leopard Seal, several species of similar aspect are included by non-scientific
observers.
SAN FRANCISCO, CALIFORNIA, March, 1873.
NOTE. — To Mr. Dall's Catalogue may be added the Squareheaded Grampus and Brownsided Dolphin of Santa Barbara Channel. - C. M. 8.
308
APPENDIX.

NAVA
Skeleton Of A BALÆNA MysticEtus.
As the first part of the preceding work is devoted almost exclusively to the natural history of whales, without reference to
their osteology, and the Catalogue also, which is embodied in the Appendix, supplying but little information in that department
relative to the baleen whales, we have thought it well to add to the Catalogue the representation of the skeleton of a Balæna
mysticetus, it being a reduced copy of the original excellent figure which embellishes the elaborate work of Professors Eschricht
and Reinhardt upon the Greenland Right Whale, published by the Ray Society in 1866.
This faithful delineation of the animal's bone-frame gives also a general idea of the relative osteological construction of all the
baleen whales.
“In the cranium of this skeleton, the letters have the following significations :
b. The left parietal.
m. The superior maxillary.
f. The frontal.
0. The squamous portion of the occipital.
i. The intermaxillary.
t. The left temporal.
k. The right condyle of the occipital.
The zygomatic temporal.
1. The left lachrymal.
a. The pelvic bones.
“The caudal vertebræ have been brought somewhat nearer to one another than in their fresh state by the drying up of the
intervertebral cartilages; the tail is, therefore, on the whole somewhat too short."
2.
GLOSSARY
OF
WORDS AND PHRASES USED BY WHALEMEN.
Blubber-hook.-A stout iron hook of seventy-
five to a hundred pounds weight, which is
used in flensing a whale. See illustration,
p. 232.
Boarding - knife.- A sharp two-edged instru-
ment, principally used in cutting the toggle-
hole in the blubber of & whale, for the
purpose of inserting the strap to the cut-
ting-tackle, so as to hoist up the mass of
fat called the blanket- piece. For illustra-
tion, see pl. xxv.
Bolting.- Signifies the action of a whale when
it leaps out diagonally to the surface of the
water.
Bone - spade. - A cutting - spade, with a thin,
long shank to it. See cutting-spade, pl.
XXV.
Bailer. - A copper or iron vessel used in dip-
ping up oil. Two of these utensils are used
on board of a whaler: one with a short,
upright handle, called the hand-bailer; the
other, with a staff to it six feet long, used
at the try-works for bailing the oil from
the pots, is called a long-handled bailer.
For illustration, see fig. 4, p. 239.
Becket. — A thing used in ships to confine loose
ropes, tackles, or spars.
Black-skin.— The rete-mucosum and the cuti-
cle, the principal seat of color in whales.
Black - whale, or black - whale oil.— Is that
produced from all the baleen whales, in-
cluding the rorquals. All these varieties of
whales are sometimes termed black whales,
in contradistinction to the Sperm Whale.
Blanket-piece. — A strip or section of blubber
cut from a whale in a spiral direction, and
raised by means of the cutting-tackle.
varies from two to four feet or more in
width, and is in length from ten to twenty-
five feet.
Blasted.- A term used to signify that a whale
is much swollen, or far advanced in decom-
position after death.
Blink, or ice-blink. - A stratum of lucid white-
ness which appears in the lower part of the
atmosphere over ice and land covered with
snow.
Blow.-Blow signifies the action of the whale
in making one respiration.
Blubber-fork.-A utensil used in pitching the
minced blubber from the tubs into the try-
pots. For illustration, see fig. 1, p. 239.
[ 309
It
Bonnet.— Cheever defines the bonnet of a Right
Whale "as being the crest or comb where
there burrow legions of barnacles and crabs,
like rabbits in a warren, or insects in the
shaggy bark of an old tree.” [Note.- This
description applies especially to the south-
ern Right Whales; in the northern Right
Whale's bonnet, but very few barnacles are
present, and comparatively few parasites of
any description.
Bomb-shot. — The distance a bomb-lance can
be fired into a whale effectively, which is
about twenty yards.
Breaching.- Signifies the movement of a whale
when leaping out of the water, in nearly a
perpendicular direction or otherwise.
Breaking black - skin. - The act of darting a
harpoon into a whale.
310
APPENDIX.
Bring-to.— The act of a whale when it ceases
its progressive motion,
Eroken voyage. — An unprofitable voyage, or a
losing voyage.
Case. — The sack or cavity which lies on the
right side and upper portion of the head
of a Sperm Whale, and which contains oil
and spermaceti. These combined constitute
what is called “head - matter.”
Cooler.- A copper or iron tank into which the
oil from the try-pots is first bailed.
Cutting-spade. — A sharp, flat implement, like
a thin chisel, which is fixed to a pole ten
or more feet in length, and is used in cut-
ting the blubber from a whale. A “bone-
spade” is merely a cutting-spade, with a
long, thin shank to it. It is employed in
cutting out the throat-bone of a baleen
whale. The “head-spade” is thicker and
heavier than the ordinary cutting - spade,
and is used in cutting the skull - bone,
which separates the whale's head from the
body. See illustration, pl. xxv.
Darting distance.— The distance the harpoon
is usually thrown effectively by hand, which
is about eighteen feet.
Deck-pot. -- An iron pot of similar shape and
size with the try-pots, but having legs to it.
Fast.-A term used when the harpoon pene-
trates the whale, “as the boat is fast,”
signifying that the boat is fastened to the
whale by means of the harpoon attached to
the line.
Fins. — The pectorals or side fins of a whale
are called fins, in contradistinction to the
flukes, or caudal fin.
Finning. The action of a whale when lying
partly on its side, raising one fin out of
the water, and striking it upon the surface,
causing a splash.
Fire-pike.-An instrument used in feeding and
stirring the fires when trying out oil. See
illustration, fig. 5, p. 239.
Flukes. — The posterior extremities, or caudal
fin of a whale.
Flukes, to cut flukes out, or the whale cuts
its flukes out. — Is a whaler's phrase to
describe the action of the animal when it
throws its caudal fin sidewise and upward,
upon or above the surface of the water,
which is an indication that the creature has
taken fright, and suddenly endeavors to
escape. “He attempted to cut his flukes
out,” is a slang expression in whaling par-
lance, when any members of a ship's com-
pany become refractory, or attempt in any
manner to create disturbance on board.
Gaff, or gaff-hook.- A sharp, strong iron hook
attached to a short or long wooden handle,
and used in handling blubber. See pl. xxv.
Galley.-Frightened; as, “The whale is gal-
lied," or "The boat-steerer got so gallied
he could not strike the whale." The state
of being frightened.
Gam.- Signifies two or more ships meeting, and
their companies exchanging visits. Gam also
signifies a large collection or herd of whale-
bone whales.
Gamming. - To visit from one whaling-vessel
to another.
Gurry.- Is the term by which the combination
of water, oil, and dirt is known when col-
lected upon the ship's deck and below, dur-
ing the time of cutting in and boiling out
a whale.
Head - spade.- A thick, heavy cutting - spade
used in cutting the head - bones of a whale.
See head-spade, pl. xxv.
Hopper, or scrap-hopper.-A flaring wooden
box used as a receptacle for the scraps when
taken from the try-pots,
Hose-cock.-A large brass cock attached to the
end of the oil-hose.
Hose - scuttle.—A small opening in a whaling-
vessel's deck through which the oil from a
cask runs into the hose-tub.
Hose - tub.- A large wooden tub, or copper
tank, with a strainer in the bottom to
which the oil - hose is attached. The tub is
lashed close beneath the deck, immediately
under the hose-scuttle.
Hump.- A protuberance or elevation upon the
top of a whale's body, and generally near-
est to the posterior extremity. In some
species it appears somewhat like a dorsal
fin.
Junk.- A wedge-shaped mass of cellular mem-
branous substance, filled with oil and sperm-
aceti, which lies between the case and the
white-horse of a Sperm Whale's head.
Knuckle-joint. — The joint of the fin, or pec-
torals, which connects with the shoulder-
blade of a whale.
Lay on, or lay the boat on.— Is to turn the
GLOSSARY OF WORDS AND PHRASES.
311
head of the boat toward any object by
means of the steering -oar.
Lay off, or lay the boat off. - Is to turn the
head of the boat from any object, by means
of the steering-oar.
Leaning blubber.– To cut the flesh, or lean
meat, etc., from it.
Leaning-knife.- A large knife used in cutting
the flesh, or other tissue destitute of oil,
from the blubber, preparatory to trying it
out.
Lipper.- A piece of thin blubber cut into an
oblong square, and punctured, so as to
admit a man's fingers to hold it, when
used in wiping up the gurry from the
decks, etc.
Lipper off the decks. - Is to wipe the gurry
off with lippers.
Lobtailing, or loptailing. — The action of a
whale when it raises its flukes high out of
water, and strikes them down with great
force upon the surface. 2d. A whale beat-
ing the surface of the water with its caudal
fin.
Loose irons.—Harpoons which are darted into
a whale with no line attached.
Mate. This word is used by whalers to signify
a partnership between two vessels in pur-
suing whales.
Mill. — To turn in an opposite direction, or
nearly so; as, “The whale was running to
windward, but ‘milled,' and ran to lee-
ward.”
Mincing-knife.-A thin, broad steel implement,
sharp on one edge, with a handle on each
end, which is used in cutting the blubber
into thin slices, preparatory to being boiled
or tried out. For illustration, see page 238.
Mux, or muxing. - To perform work in an
awkward or improper manner; as, “He
made a mux of it, and missed the whale,”
i. e., by improper management a whale was
not struck, which otherwise might have been
secured.
Noddle-end.— The anterior and upper portion
of a Sperm Whale's head.
Nib-end. - The anterior and upper portion of
a whalebone whale's head.
Nisket. - The anus of a whale.
Oil-hose.-A stout hose made of grained leather,
for the purpose of conducting the oil from
a vessel's deck into empty casks in the hold.
Piece. - This word is frequently used for brief-
ness, instead of the word blanket - piece.
Pike. -A pointed iron or steel implement fixed
to the end of a pole, and used in pitching
or handling the pieces of blubber, etc. For
illustration, see plate xxv.
Raising whales. - When first seeing a whale
from the mast - head, or other place, it is
termed “raising a whale.” It is also used
to express the fact of seeing any object, as,
“We raised the land, sixty miles distant."
Recruits.- Fresh provisions and supplies for a
whale - ship. 2d. Various articles put on
board the ship to purchase recruits with
(at remote islands or coasts), such as cloth-
ing, calicoes, tobacco, and a variety of other
domestic articles.
Ridge.— The upper portion of a whale's "small.”
Ripple. — The agitation of the surface of the
water by a whale when swimming near it,
but still not visible, as, “I can not see the
whale, but can see its ripple.”
Rounding, or rounding out. - The attitude of
a whale when curving its small in order to
descend below the surface of the water.
Rugged. - The state of the sea when agitated.
A rough sea, accompanied with blowing
weather, is termed by whalers “rugged
weather.”
Sampson - post.-A heavy upright timber, firmly
secured in the deck (and extending about
two feet above it), to which the fluke-chain,
or fluke - rope, is made fast.
Scooping. - This term is applied to the action
of whalebone whales when feeding.
Scrap-hopper.- A flaring wooden box which is
placed beside the try-works to receive the
scraps when skimmed from the try-pots.
It has holes in the bottom through which
the oil that drips from the scraps runs into
a tub called “strainer-cooler."
Scraps. — The residue of the blubber after the
oil is extracted by boiling.
Scrimshawing, or to scrimshaw, or skim-
shander, as sometimes termed. - Is to ex-
ecute any piece of ingenious mechanical
work. It is applied particularly to polishing
and engraving upon whalebone or whale's
teeth, or manufacturing fancy articles from
the same materials.
Skimmer.-A broad scoop composed of copper,
iron, and wood. The utensil is about seven
312
APPENDIX.
feet long, and is used in removing scraps
from the try-pots. For illustration, see
fig. 3, p. 239.
Skimming -slicks.-A phrase used by whale-
men when employed in saving any small
amount of fat from the entrails or from the
exterior of the carcass after the blubber has
been stripped off.
Slumgullion. — The offal from the blubber of a
whale.
Small. - The posterior portion of a whale, be-
tween the vent and caudal fin.
Sounding. - Is the term signifying the descent
of the whale after being fastened to.
Stern, or stern all. — Is the invariable order
given to the whaleboat's crew, when it be-
comes necessary to propel the boat stern
foremost.
Stirring - pole. — A wooden pole six or
feet long, used to stir the blubber in the
try-pots. See illustration, fig. 2, p. 239.
Stopped. - To confine a rope, or ropes, usually
by a smaller line, as, “Stop the line to the
'iron-pole'” (or harpoon staff), i. e., con-
fine the line to the pole by passing one or
more turns of twine, or rope-yarn, around
both line and pole, and confining the ends
by knotting them together.
Suds. — The foam on the surface of the water
caused by the violent actions of a whale in
the course of its capture, as, “In order to
get a good chance to kill the whale, you
must keep close to the suds."
Sweeping. The action of a whale when wield-
ing its flukes from side to side in an offen-
sive or defensive manner, causing a great
commotion on the water.
Toggle.- A large wooden pin, about three feet
long, and six or eight inches in diameter,
with a swell or shoulder near the middle.
It has a hole near one end, through which
à rope is attached, which is termed the
toggle-lanyard. This lanyard is used in
handling or confining the toggle. See il-
lustration, p. 234.
Turning flukes. —— The last action of a whale
upon the surface of the water when making
its descent beneath, which is to elevate its
caudal fin in the air as the body assumes
nearly a perpendicular attitude.
Trying out. — To extract the oil from the blub-
ber by boiling.
White - horse. — An extremely tough and sin- ,
ewy substance resembling blubber, but des-
titute of oil, which lies between the upper
jaw and junk of a Sperm Whale.
White-water.— The foam or spray caused by
the violent actions of a whale.
seven
LIST OF
OF STORES
AND OUTFITS
FOR
A
FIRST-CLASS WHALE - SHIP, FOR A
A CAPE HORN VOYAGE,
EXCLUSIVE OF
THE INVENTORY OF A MERCHANT - SHIP, WHICH, ALTHOUGH INCLUDED IN A
WHALE - SHIP'S OUTFIT, IS NOT HERE ENUMERATED.
PROVISIONS, ETC.
350 barrels of bread.
100 barrels of flour.
180 barrels of mess beef.
90 barrels of extra prime pork.
1,000 barrels of fresh water.
1,600 pounds of codfish.
2 barrels of mackerel.
1,200 gallons of molasses.
1,200 pounds of sugar.
2,000 pounds of butter.
6 barrels of Indian meal.
300 pounds of rice.
33 bushels of corn.
20 bushels of beans.
400 pounds of dried apples.
300 pounds of cheese.
2 barrels of cucumber pickles.
15 bushels of onions.
50 pounds of raisins.
200 pounds of tea.
12 bushels of coarse salt.
1,200 pounds of coffee.
300 gallons of vinegar.
50 pounds of chocolate.
6 dozen 2-ib cans roast beef.
2 pounds of hops.
4 dozen 2-ib cans roast mutton.
6 bottles of essence of spruce.
6 dozen 2 - Ib cans soup and
12 bottles of pepper- sauce.
bouillon.
8 pounds of ginger.
6 dozen 2-Ib cans clams.
25 pounds of pepper.
4 dozen 1-fb tins canned lob-
6 pounds of allspice.
ster.
1 mat of cassia.
4 dozen 2-1tins canned oys-
6 bottles of ground mustard.
ters.
1 quart of mustard - seed.
4 dozen 2-Ib tins canned tur-
1 pound of nutmegs.
key.
60 pounds of saleratus.
1,800 pounds soap.
1 pound of cloves.
1 barrel oil-soap.
bushel of fine salt.
50 pounds sperm candles.
6 bottles of lemon syrup. 12 gallons whale oil for burn-
3 pounds of sage.
ing.
3 pounds of summer savory. 2 gallons sperm oil for burning.
MEDICAL DEPARTMENT.
1 large medicine chest, full.
5 gallons New England rum.
2 gallons brandy.
2 gallons port wine.
6 dozen pain - killer.
3 dozen rat exterminator,
MARINE MAMMALS.-40.
(313)
314
APPENDIX.
BLACKSMITH'S DEPARTMENT.
20 bushels charcoal.
14 bushels Cumberland coal.
100 pounds assorted iron.
1 bar steel.
1 soldering iron.
1 vice.
2 sledges.
1 hand hammer.
1 wrench.
1 lot of old bolts.
1 anvil.
pound borax.
pound spelter solder.
2 pounds soft solder.
1 tuer-iron.
1 bellows.
2 pairs tongs.
1 set taps and dies.
1 screw-plate.
1 dozen assorted files.
3 punches.
1 cold -chisel.
1 swedge.
COOPER'S DEPARTMENT.
3,500 barrels of oil - casks.
21 tons hoop iron.
100 pounds 5d. rivets.
100 pounds 4d. rivets.
5 pounds 3d. rivets.
5 pounds 2d. rivets.
16 barrels sand.
800 pounds flags.
50 new staves,
300 feet yellow pine heading.
1 piece red cedar for worm
pecks.
50 pounds chalk.
1 double iron jointer.
1 large croze.
1 small croze.
1 patent croze-iron.
1 pair compasses.
5 vices.
1 bit-stock.
1 dozen bits.
2 spokesbaves.
1 saw.
1 bilge-plane.
3 marking irons.
2 anvils.
1 inshave.
1 heading saw.
2 bung-borers.
2 tap-borers.
1 stock howeling knife.
1 leveling plane.
8 cast-steel hammers.
18 cast-steel drivers.
8 cast-steel punches.
8 cast-steel cold-chisels.
2 rivet sets.
2 worm - punches.
3 flagging-dogs.
1 round plane.
1 cooper's horse.
1 harness-cask.
1 water-butt.
1 grindstone-tub.
6 line-tubs.
1 cooper's bellows.
500 bungs, assorted sizes.
1 axe.
1 adze.
2 chamfering knives.
2 drawing knives.
CARPENTER'S DEPARTMENT.
700 feet white pine lumber.
12 pine and spruce planks, as-
sorted lengths.
100 feet oak plank.
900 feet cedar boat boards.
24 boat timbers.
12 boat knees.
2 boat stems.
1 boat keel.
1 oak plank for gunwales.
40 white-oak butts.
3 grindstones with cranks.
1 calking mallet.
4 calking irons.
1 panel-saw.
1 wood - saw and 1 extra plate.
2 handsaws.
1 splitting-saw.
1 back - saw.
1 compass - saw.
1 dozen augers, assorted sizes.
1 broad -axe.
2 jointers.
2 fore-planes.
2 smooth-planes.
1 hollow-plane.
3 round-planes.
1 adze.
1 iron square.
1 carpenter's rule.
1 bevel.
2 board gauges.
2 compasses.
1 scarfing chisel.
3 socket chisels.
7 firmer chisels, assorted.
1 try-square.
4 socket gouges, assorted.
6 firmer gouges, assorted.
2 chalk lines.
2 spike gimlets.
2 deck-nail gimlets.
12 nail gimlets.
2 rough gimlets.
3 claw - hammers.
1 boat hammer.
1 pump hammer.
5 whetstones.
2 sandstones.
6 wood files.
1 pair large boat nippers.
1 pair small boat nippers.
4 narrow axes.
6 broad hatchets.
2 deck hatchets.
1 hold hatchet.
2 large half-round wood rasps.
-
-
-
---
LIST OF STORES AND OUTFITS.
315
5 flat files, assorted.
3 half-round files.
12 hand -saw files.
4 small saw files.
3 round files.
1 saw-set.
1 screw-driver.
1 bit-stock.
5 gimlet bits.
11 assorted bits.
1 spoke-shave.
1 drawing-knife.
20 pounds clinch nails.
12 pounds timber nails.
5 pounds wood-end nails.
2 pounds lap nails.
4 pounds foot nails.
10 pounds ceiling nails.
6 pounds 6d. wrought nails.
6 pounds 8d. wrought nails.
12 pounds 10d. wrought pails.
15 pounds 8d. cut nails.
25 pounds 10d. cut nails.
10 pounds 12d. cut nails.
5 dozen iron and brass screws,
assorted.
50 pounds old lead.
20 pounds sheet lead.
10 pounds coppering nails.
5 pounds sheathing nails.
50 pounds wrought iron spikes.
12 sheets yellow metal.
1 pound clinch
copper nails.
2 pairs steelyards.
18 roughs and clinches.
CABIN AND COOKING FURNITURE,
ETC.
1 caboose, complete.
2 sets grates for same.
2 sets linings for same.
1 spare tea-kettle for same.
1 spare steamer for same.
1 spare boiler for same.
4 stew-pans.
2 frying-pans.
1 cook's ladle.
1 cook's fork.
1 cook's skimmer.
1 cook's bellows.
1 tinder-box (flint, steel, etc.)
1 chopping-knife.
1 chopping-tray.
1 sieve.
1 coffee-mill.
1 mortar and pestle.
1 table-bell.
1 cabin - bell.
2 stoves and pipes.
2 tables.
2 table-covers.
2 dozen table-cloths.
2 dozen birch brooms.
2 dozen corn brooms.
2 dust - pans.
2 dust-brushes.
2 chairs.
4 stools.
2 looking -glasses.
1 molasses gate.
1 carving knife and fork.
1 set of table knives and forks.
16 spare knives and forks.
1 dozen spoons (table).
1 dozen spoons (tea).
1 britannia soup ladle.
1 table steel.
1 tumbler basket.
1 hand basket.
2 bushel baskets.
1
gross
of matches.
2 dozen flints.
2 scrubbing brushes.
dozen Bristol brick.
1 tinned iron wash - basin.
2 cook's shovels.
1 corkscrew.
1 pair scissors.
4 large platters.
1 dozen assorted bowls.
4 nappies.
3 bakers.
11 dozen soup plates.
2 dozen dinner plates.
1 dozen dessert plates.
1) dozen mugs.
11 dozen saucers.
2 butter dishes.
2
sugar bowls.
3 pitchers.
1 large stone pitcher.
1 chamber.
2
soup
tureens.
1 large covered dish.
1 castor, complete.
3
spare
bottles for same.
1 dozen tuinblers.
2 salt-cellars.
1 large oval dish.
1 gravy dish.
2 spittoons.
1 cabin clock.
NAUTICAL INSTRUMENTS, STATIONERY, ETC.
1 sextant, provided by the cap-
tain.
Quadrants and octants, provid-
ed by the officers.
2 chronometers.
1 barometer.
1 thermometer.
1 spy-glass.
2 binocular glasses.
2 fourteen-second glasses.
1 transparent compass.
4 brass boat compasses and 2
wooden ones.
2 brass binnacle compasses.
1 mast-head compass.
1 binnacle lantern.
1 log - book.
2 log-slates.
4 nautical almanacs for succes-
sive years.
2 account books.
4 memorandum books.
3 sticks sealing-wax.
dozen lead pencils.
316
APPENDIX.
1 dozen slate pencils.
6 dozen steel pens.
& dozen pen-holders.
2 bottles of ink.
2 inkstands.
100 envelopes.
31 quires letter and note paper.
quire bill paper.
4 inward manifests.
1 Gunter's scale and dividers.
1 set charts around the world.
1 set harbor charts (foreign.)
1 parallel rule.
WHALING CRAFT.
4 whaling bomb-guns.
150 bomb-lances.
5 powder-flasks.
5 chargers.
15 two-flued harpoons.
150 toggle harpoons.
35 cast-steel lances.
4 Pierce's harpoon bomb-lance
guns.
50 Pierce's bomb-lances.
10 pounds bomb-gun powder.
BLOCKS, CORDAGE, CANVAS, ETC.
1 set cutting blocks.
1 set cutting-guy blocks.
2 3-sheave purchase blocks.
1 4-sheave purchase blocks.
2 2-sheave purchase blocks.
1 set of burton blocks.
1) dozen spare sheaves.
11 dozen spare sheave-pins.
1} dozen spare jib-hanks.
1 dozen spare hoops (stay and
gaff).
4 mast- hoops.
1 lot belaying -pins.
2 sets pump gear.
1 pump hook.
6 handspikes.
4 watch - tackle blocks.
2 dozen assorted blocks.
30 coils of whale-line.
1coils of 4-inch tarred rope.
2 coils of 15 - thread ratline. 1 coil 6 - thread worm-line.
2 coils of 12-thread ratline, 1 coil seizing stuff.
1 coil 2-inch tarred rope.
1 coil 3 - yarn spunyarn.
1 coil 27-inch tarred rope.
1 coil 31-inch Manila rope.
1 coil 24-inch tarred rope.
1 coil 31-inch Manila rope.
coil 3.) -inch tarred rope.
1 coil 23 - inch Manila rope.
coil 31-inch tarred rope.
1 coil 41 - inch Manila rope (cut-
504 pounds old tarred rope, as-
ting-guys).
sorted.
1 spare cutting-fall.
4 coils 2-inch Manila rope.
1
spare lance line.
3 coils 21 - inch Manila rope. 2,000 pounds old junk.
2 coils 18-inch Manila rope. 1 ship's ensign.
1 coil 11 - inch Manila rope. 1 agent's signal.
1 coil 51 - inch Manila rope (for 1 set private signals.
cutting-falls).
2 spare log - lines.
2 coils 18 - thread ratline.
2 spare
hand - lead lines.
1 coil 2-yarn spunyarn.
2 dozen fish lines.
1 coil 3 - inch Manila rope. 1 deep - sea lead line.
3 coils 27-inch Manila rope. 1 deep-sea lead.
1 coil 9 - thread worm - line.
1 hand lead.
PAINTS, OILS, ETC.
400 pounds white lead.
250 pounds black lead.
60 gallons linseed oil.
2 gallons Japan varnish.
2 gallons spirits turpentine.
10 pounds verdigris.
12 papers lampblack.
10 gallons bright varnish.
1 gallon copal varnish.
10 pounds whiting.
50 pounds putty.
50 pounds chrome green.
50 pounds yellow ochre.
10 pounds Venetian red.
3 pounds Prussian blue.
10 pounds red lead.
12 large size paint-brushes.
6 sash tools.
3 seam brushes.
25 panes window glass.
4 pounds chrome yellow.
10 pounds burnt umber.
2 barrel coal tar.
SPARE SPARS AND SAILS.
1 spare lower yard.
1 spare topsail yard.
3 rough spars.
1 spare topmast.
1 spare jibboom.
1 foresail.
1 fore-topsail.
1 main-topsail.
2 topgallant-sails.
LIST OF STORES AND OUTFITS.
317
1 fore spencer.
1 fore-topmast staysail.
1 jib.
1 flying jib.
1 mainsail.
2 royals.
1 main spencer.
1 mizzen- topsail.
2 mizzen-topgallant-sails.
1 spanker.
15 bolts assorted canvas.
CLOTHING, ETC.
4 dozen pairs of blankets.
4 dozen suspenders.
4 dozen comforters.
6 dozen Scotch caps.
10 dozen woolen drawers.
10 dozen cotton drawers.
8 dozen Guernsey frocks.
6 dozen duck frocks.
6 dozen handkerchiefs.
hats.
4 dozen pea- jackets.
2 dozen monkey jackets. 7 dozen striped cotton shirts.
4 dozen short jackets.
20 pieces of calico.
6 dozen sheath-knives.
6 dozen sheaths and belts.
6 dozen jack-knives.
6 dozen blue woolen trowsers.
6 dozen mittens.
6 dozen drab woolen trowsers.
20 dozen stockings.
6 dozen duck trowsers.
10 dozen shoes.
25 pounds of thread.
4 dozen red twilled kersey
twilled kersey 10 pounds linen thread.
shirts.
1 gross assorted needles.
4 dozen drab twilled kersey 4 zen thimble
shirts.
6 gross of pipes.
RECRUITS, OR TRADE.
5 bales bleached cotton cloth.
10 dozen of pumps.
7 bales brown cotton cloth. 20 dozen of boots.
7 bales blue cotton cloth.
50 boxes of soap.
40 pieces of prints.
10 boxes of sperm candles
6 dozen of shoes.
1,000 pounds of tobacco.
3 dozen axes.
3 dozen hatchets.
6 reams writing paper.
6 reams letter paper, etc.
MISCELLANEOUS.
20 cutting-spades.
2 wide spades.
2 throat- spades.
2 head-spades.
8 boat -spades.
3 blubber-hooks.
1 large boat -hook.
8 small boat-hooks.
2 steel blubber - forks.
1 long-handled pike.
6 short-handled pikes.
6 gaffs.
3 boarding-knives.
6 leaning; knives.
1 mincing-machine.
2 mincing-knives.
2 line-hooks.
6 shackles for topsail sheets.
3 sets can-hooks.
1 single can-hook for cooper.
10 marline-spikes.
250 iron poles.
6 boat masts.
40 spruce poles for spare masts,
sprits, etc.
24 lance-poles.
40 cords oak wood.
6 cords pine wood.
40 barrels saw - dust.
7 new whale-boats.
1 old whale-boat.
9 sets of oars (45 oars).
9 steering oars.
7 sets rowlocks (35 rowlocks).
1 pair lifters.
1 cradle.
18 scrapers.
3 shovels.
1 hoe.
8 dozen fish-hooks, assorted.
1
copper
cooler and cock.
1 hose - cock and joints.
1 scuttle-butt cock,
3 copper hand-pumps.
2 skimmers.
3 long handled bailers.
2 hand bailers.
1 copper vent-pipe (large).
1 copper vent-pipe (small).
1 copper tunnel.
2 copper tunnel noses.
1 branding iron (ship's name).
1 binnacle bell.
1 ship's bell.
1 tin bailer.
1 tin oil-tunnel.
3 tin assorted tunnels.
2 deck scoops.
1 large signal lantern.
bowsprit lantern.
side lantern.
2 side lights.
1 globe lantern.
1 cabin lantern.
6 boat lanterns.
cook's lantern.
318
APPENDIX.
1 binnacle lamp.
12 chimneys for ditto.
2 blubber-room lamps.
2 candlesticks.
2 britannia lamps.
6 Japan stand - lamps.
8 jacket lamps.
6 bake-pans for oven.
6 pie plates.
5 large tin pans.
5 small tin pans.
4 dozen sailor pans.
3 coffee-pots.
3 tea - pots.
1 britannia tureen.
1 one-pint measure.
1 one-quart measure.
1 two-quart measure.
1 three-quart measure.
1 gallon measure.
1 molasses cup.
6 tinder boxes, complete.
1 brass speaking-trumpet.
1 tin speaking-trumpet.
1 pepper-box.
1 nutmeg grater.
3 lamp feeders.
2 cullenders.
1 tea canister.
1 coffee canister.
3 pudding - bags.
1 flour-box.
2 flour-scoops.
1 bread -tray.
2 cook's dippers.
3 tin wash - basins.
3 spare frying-pans.
1 match safe.
4 dozen tin pots.
1 crowbar.
1 stowing bar.
12 chain - hooks.
1 set marking irons for craft.
4 grapnels.
3 fluke-chains.
1 fin-chain.
1 oil hose and cock.
3 head-straps.
1 hose-tub.
1 chain stopper.
1 draw-bucket.
1 fish hook.
2 sets chest hinges.
4 chain punches.
8 grate bars for try-works.
1 pair of grains.
4 iron knees for try-works.
1 rope-jack
4 smoke pipes for try-works.
28 hooks and thimbles.
2 iron doors for try-works.
18 thimbles.
1 caboose stove (large) and ap-
4 boat anchors.
paratus.
1 set chain pendants.
1 Horsburgh's East India Di-
1 fire pike.
rectory.
dozen oil - scoops.
2 trowels.
3 shackles.
1 blubber-room steel.
3 cutting-toggles.
2 rigging screws.
1 masthead waif.
12 pairs handcuffs.
dozen large marline needles. 1 screw cutting-plate and dies.
3 dozen small marline needles. 20 boat paddles.
3 dozen roping needles.
6 boat anchors.
5 dozen assorted sail needles. 4 boat grapnels.
11 dozen sewing palms.
6 boat kegs.
4 balls shoe thread.
4 lantern kegs.
20 pounds whipping twine. 4 drags.
50 pounds sail twine.
6 line-tubs.
2 pounds lamp-wick.
4 fog - horns.
2 dozen corks.
1 dozen boat knives.
4 pounds brimstone.
1 dozen boat hatchets.
6 Bath brick.
4 boat crotches.
1 side pump leather.
4 tub-oar crotches.
2 sides rigging leather.
4 boat buckets.
50 pounds cannon powder. 1 dozen nippers.
25 pounds musket powder.
4 dozen chock-pins.
2,000 percussion caps.
1 case bucket.
1 signal-gun.
1 turning - lathe.
1 dozen muskets.
1 set turning gouges.
2 barrels clay.
1 set turning chisels.
1 barrel lime.
3 dozen floats, or coarse files,
3 barrels tar.
for working whalebone.
barrel rosin.
12 brad - awls.
3 try-pots (two sets in the 3 saddler's awls.
try - works).
3 sewing awls.
1 deck-pot and 1 spare deck- 4,000 copper tacks.
pot.
4,000 iron tacks.
4 tons hard coal.
1,000 pounds of tobacco.
200 bricks.
Books for ship's library.
Note. – Many of the articles herein enumerated are made on board ship from materials sup-
plied for the purpose, while there are many others of but trivial importance which are not men-
tioned. Relative to the quantity of clothing and recruits—the last named being also called “trade"
- they vary materially with different owners of ships and the nature of the voyage undertaken.
Hence, the lists referred to can only be regarded as approximative. A Cape Horn voyage, as
-
LIST OF STORES AND OUTFITS.
319
termed, ordinarily involves the time of three years or more. A ship that takes three seasons north,
after arriving in the Pacific, generally prolongs her absence from home to three years and a half.
Sperm whalers are not so much confined to the regular annual seasons for pursuing their prey as
are the Right or Polar whalemen, as they change from one ground to another through the year,
and their voyages are frequently extended from three and a half to four years. Vessels fitted out
for the North Pacific, Arctic Ocean, Okhotsk Sea, or Japan Sea, generally sail from home in the
fall of the year, in order to make the passage of Cape Horn or Cape of Good Hope during the
summer season of that region; and all whalers, as far as practicable, return to the home coast in
the spring months; yet we may say they are continually coming and going. But the old routine
of whaling-voyages is now much changed, especially with the larger class of vessels which ply their
vocation in the Pacific and contiguous waters. Many of the ships are now ordered by their owners
to San Francisco, California, at the termination of each northern season, where an agent meets the
vessels, and transacts the business of transshipping oil and bone, refitting ship, and changing officers
and crews, which now often occurs.
INDE X.
PAGE
age of...
Aleuts, mode of capturing the Sea Lion by. 136
American Whale-fishery, The...... .185-275
whaling commerce.. .185, 209, 240, 241
Anderson on early whaling commerce 186
Arctic, Bowheads of the....
58
ice fields, whales in...
31
Baidarka (skin-boat)..
46
Baidarra (large open skin-boat).
32
Baird's Dolphin...
99
Balæna mysticetus, anatomy of
308
55
Banded Seal ....
140
Barnacle, species of...
21
Bay Porpoise...
95
Bay-whaling, commencement of .
23
Beale on ambergris...
82
on nature of Sperm Whale food .
80
Behring Sea, whale first taken in.
213
Strait, when ships can pass through.. 59
Belon's description of Right Whale.
187
Blackfish .....
description of
85
how captured..
87
measurements of..
oil product of...
87
where formerly found and favorite resort. 87
Boat, peculiar form of, used in capture of
the Sea Otter..
170
Bomb-gun...
26
Bottlenosed Grampus.....
104
Bowhead, or Great Polar Whale..... .52-65
Bowheads of the Arctic, classification of.... 58
of Okhotsk Sea.....
60
Browne, J. Ross, chronological account of
whaling commerce by...
185
Brownsided Dolphin ....
106
Bryant, Captain, account of the Fur Seal
by..
.156–163
PAGE
“Bunchbacks”
61
Butler, Ben.....
130
Cachalot (French for Sperm Whale). ......
74
California Academy of Sciences, Proceedings
of
21, 38
California Gray Whale.
20-33
California shore-whaling.
247
lagoons, whaling in the.
259
Carmel Bay, whaling station at..
250
Cetacea of the North Pacific, Catalogue of.. 281
.17-19
18
descending movements of..
19
propulsion of...
19
sexual habits of.
18
species of...
17
time of gestation of.
18
Cuttle-fishes
79
Cowfish .....
101
description of
101
habits of.....
101
where observed.
101
Coxe, notice of Sea Otter.
169
Dall, W. H., Catalogue of Cetacea of North
Pacific...
281
description of parasites by. ..21, 38, 57
Desolation Island, hunting the Sea Elephant
.122–123
Dolphin, Baird's....
99
description of..
99
habitat of....
99
measurements of..
100
Brownsided, of Santa Barbara Channel,
description of
106
Dolphins..
.85-109
rapacity of......
18
varieties of.
85
Dutch and English, whaling - voyages of the. 188
85
86
on.....
MARINE MAMMALS.-41.
[i]
ii
INDEX.
PAGE
88
PAGE
Eschricht on the nature of Orca food...... 90
Esquimaux whaling-boat, description of .... 31
Finback Whale.
34-36
Northern..
36
Fur Seals....
141-163
Glossary of Words and Phrases used by
whalemen ...
309
Godman, notice of Narwhal....
107
Grampus, Bottlenosed, description of 104
oil product of..
104
Panama, description of...
104
Puget Sound, description of..
105
San Diego Bay, description of..
105
Squareheaded, description of
106
Whiteheaded or Mottled, description of.. 103
Gray, notice of Humpback Whale. .
43
Greener's Harpoon-gun, how used..
27
Gun, utility of .....
248
Herd's Island, hunting Sea Elephant on. 120-122
Holböll on rapacity of Orca..
92
Humpback Whale....
.38–48
Hunting Sea Otter from the shore.
172
Indian mode of hunting Sea Otter.
173
Indians, method of capturing Fur Seal by.. 154
of the North - western Coast, whaling
among the....
..29, 30
Japan Coast, Sperm Whale, where first dis-
covered on the..
212
Karayinski Island, whales taken off.
59
Lagoon - whaling, disasters of.
260
incidents....
265
voyage, success of.
264
Leopard Seal......
.164-167
Life and characteristics of American whale-
252
Lindeman, Dr., notice of early whale-fishery. 189
List of Stores and Outfits...
313
Macy's notice of the Beaver's outfit.. 216
Magdalena Bay, whaling in.....
270
Marten, Frederic, notice of a whaling - voyage
in 1671.....
190
M’Culloch on early whaling commerce.. 187
Monterey, whaling in the Bay of....
44
Nantucket, early whaling commerce of.. 208
whaling, early manner of...
206
Narwhal ....
107
description of...
107
food of..
108
habitat of...
107
Northern Finback Whale.
36
Right Whale grounds.
214
Oil and Bone, price of, from 1835 to 1872. 242
Oil, manner of trying-out..
238
taken in California shore-whaling.. 250
whale, statistics from 1762 to 1770.. 206
Okhotsk Sea, Bowhead Whales of .... 60
first capture of Bowhead Whales in.. 60
Orca, or Killer...
description of ...
88
ferocity of...
89
food of...
90
habitat of...
89
high and low-finned..
89
mating season of....
92
rapacity of...
92
Origin and ancient mode of whale- fishing.. 185
Otter, Sea....
.168–174
distribution of
169
food of ..
169
form of...
168
mode of capture
170
number captured...
174
whether numbers decreasing
174
Pacific, first whaling in the......
205
Sperm Whale, when first captured in.. 209
Panama Grampus.
104
Parasitical crustaceans
21
Peru, whaling-voyages to the coast of ..... 210
Pierce's Bomb-lance Gun, description of.... 228
Pinnipedia ..
.113-181
food of ..
113
introduction to description of.
113
mode of locomotion of...
113
Poole, Captain, measurement of Bowhead
Whale by...
53
Porpoise, Bay..
95
description of
95
habits of....
97
measurements of.
96
Right-whale..
101
description of
101
habitat of...
101
Striped or Common..
98
description of...
98
habitat of..
98
habits of.
98
Post-offices, whaleship.
253
Pottfisch (German for Sperm Whale).. 74
Puget Sound Grampus..
105
Right Whale of the North-western Coast..66-69
Right Whale Porpoise ..
101
Rotch, William, visit to England and France. 217
men....
INDEX
iii
PAGE
PAGE
St. Paul's Island, Sea Lions on...
Seal,
Roys, Captain, measurement of Sulphurbot-
tom by.
70
notice of “Bunchbacks” and Bowheads. 60-61
San Diego Bay Grampus...
105
Santa Barbara Island, hunting Sea Lions on. 132
Scammon's Lagoon, California Grays in.... 24
“Scrimshawing”
275
Scoresby, notice of Narwhal.
108
on number of whales killed..
186
Sea Elephant
.115-123
color of..
116
fishery, extent of at present day
123
form of..
116
geographical distribution of
115
habits of....
117
measurements of....
.115-116
method of hunting at Herd's Island. 120-122
mode of capturing ..
118
names of animals of different ages... 117
their present places of resort.
119
time of gestation of....
118
Banded...
140
Fur......
141-163
external form of..
144
fishery of...
148
habits of..
146
haunts of.
146
manner of killing..
160
measurements of...
142
method of capturing.
153
method of capturing by Indians... 154
mode of curing skins of..
161
names for at different ages.. 141
principal resorts of at present. 155
season of......
151
time of gestation...
144
use of flesh of.....
163
value of as an article of commerce. 144
value of skins.....
162
whether producing more than one
young at one time..
144
Sea Lion...
124-139
combats of for females.
131
commercial value of....
135
dimensions usually exaggerated.
130
form of.....
128
genera and species of..
124
geographical distribution of...
124
habits of....
130-135
measurements of..
128-129
pupping season of..
131
Sea Lion, skill of in leaping down rock.... 133
their mode of capture on the Asiatic
shores of the Pacific..
137
Seal, Leopard..
164-167
habits of.
166
how captured.
167
size of...
164
Sea Otter, Indian mode of hunting.
173
“Sea squid"..
80
Sharpheaded Finner Whale..
.49-51
Ships, outfits, and manner of taking the
whale, ...
216
Shore - hunting of Sea Otter
172
Smith, Captain, measurement of Bowhead
Whale by ....
54
South America, capture of the Sea Lion on
its shores.
138
Southern Right Whale grounds.
215
Stillman, Dr. J. D. B., notice of a Sulphur-
bottom Whale...
71
136
number of Fur Seals frequenting. 161
Striped or Common Porpoise...
98
Sperm Whale..
74-84
grounds..
214
Squareheaded Grampus...
106
Sulphurbottom Whale..
..70-73
Swift, Captain J. H., notice of first capture
of Bowheads..
60
Tchantar Bay, whaling in
62
Umbrella, cotton, used in capturing Sea
Lions.
136
Walrus..
176-181
capture of..
179
contests of with Polar Bear..
180
decrease in numbers of....
181
distribution of..
178
form of .....
.176-177
Whale, Arctic Bowhead, parasites of.
57
Bowhead, baleen of.
55
description of..
52
first taken in Behring Sea.
213
habitat of....
habits of...
58
herding-places of...
59
length of time under water.
57
manner of feeding..
54
measurements of..
53
oil and bone yield of.
52
when first taken in the Okhotsk Sea. 60
breeding-places of..
64
57
iv
INDEX.
PAGE
61
in a...
young of.....
Whale, Bowhead, how they breed....
Bowhead and Right, manner of cutting-
232
California Gray, baleen of...
55
description of..
20
embryos of...
23
fears of extinction of..
33
food of ....
24
habitat of..
22
habits of.....
24, 32
in Arctic ice - fields......
31
manner of pursuing and capturing.
measurements of a male..
20
number captured.
23
number migrating.
23
season of bringing forth young.
25
time of gestation of.....
23
yield of oil of...
21
22
Finback, description of..
34
measurements of....
34
respiration and movements of.. 35
Northern ...
36
Humpback, anatomy of..
41
baleen of.....
55
description of
38
habitat of....
46
how captured..
46
manner of suckling young.
45
measurements of.
39
migration of...
42
sexual habits of
45
yield of oil and bone.
40
Right, baleen of ..
.55, 66
54
first taken on the North-western
212
habits of.
68
resort to bring forth young..
67
size of.....
66
where and how captured. .66–68
yield of oil of....
66
Sharpheaded Finner, description of... 49
habitat and habits of....
51
measurements of.....
50
movements and fætus of ..
49
Sperm, description and size of.
74
ferocity of..
78
habitat of..
77
habits of....
75
manner of cutting-in a.
236
PAGE
Whale, Sperm, manner of feeding.
79
manner of suckling young..
74
nature of food of.....
80
vessels destroyed by
78
when first captured in the Pacific.. 209
when first discovered on the Japan
coast..
212
yield of oil....
76
Sulphurbottom, baleen of..
55
following a vessel......
71
size and mode of capture of..70, 72, 73
where found...
71
Whale, how approached.
227
how captured ....
256
manner of capture and trying-out in
early days.....
191
ships, outfits, and manner of taking the. 216
Whale-boat, how manned....
226
description of an Esquimaux
31
Whale-fishery, American, early history of.. 202
statistics of for 38 years.....
243
Whale-fishing, origin and ancient mode of. 185
Whale-grounds, Northern Right....
214
Southern Right.....
215
Sperm....
214
Whalemen, Life and Characteristics of Amer-
ican...
252
Whales, by whom first pursued...
185
in lagoons, manner of taking.
266
manner of signaling direction of....... 230
number captured...
251
passing from Atlantic Arctic to Pacific
Arctic..
59
taken off Karaginski Island..
59
Whale-ship, again to the frozen seas .. 273
distribution of officers and crew of.. 222
equipment of.....
224
how made up, crew of a
255
homeward bound....
275
outfit of a first-class.
313
outward bound...
220
post-offices..
253
routine of duty on a.
229
requisites for...
221
stores and outfits of a.
313
Whale-ships, communication between. 253
etiquette of...
254
history of old ..
244
where recruited...
258
Whaling among the Indians of the North-
western Coast...
29
feed of...
Coast...
1
INDEX.
V
Whaling, Bowhead..
California shore..
California shore, how prosecuted..
casualties of coast...
Commerce, American
beginning of...
decline of
PAGE
61
247
248
28
240
185
241
209
212
30
30
30
in 1789 ....
Whaling, in Tchantar Bay
in the Pacific, first ...
merchants, early American.
scene of 1763, description of.
station at Carmel Bay....
voyages of the Dutch and English
voyage, preparations for a....
voyages to the coast of Peru..
where prosecuted..
Whitefish, or White Whale.
capture of...
description of...
measurements of.
where observed.
Whiteheaded, or Mottled Grampus.
PAGE
62
205
217
205
250
188
219
210
258
93
94
93
94
93
103
fleet of the world in 1842.
grounds of Indians..
implements of Indians
Indian manner of....
in the Bay of Monterey.
in the California lagoons.
in Magdalena Bay...
44
259
270

THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
DATE DUE
MAY o 2 1979
APR 24 2004
innen
ma
n
-7pm
<
rrug
yaan man
prys
a
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
3 9015 01748 3317
wy, WALS